MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric ...

MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

PREFACE

This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the MELDAS60/60S Series. This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MELDAS60/60S Series functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer. * The "MELDAS60 Series" includes the M64A, M64, M65, M66 and M65V. * The "MELDAS60S Series" includes the M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S. Notes on Reading This Manual (1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC.

For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine manufacturer. If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturer's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.

(2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations.

The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible. (3) The "M64D system" explained in this manual includes the M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S. (4) The "special display unit" explained in this manual is the display unit incorporated by the machine

manufacturer, and is not the MELDAS standard display unit.

Caution

If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturer's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.

The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.

This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer.

In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚ the machine operates in a different way or some function is not activated.

Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

DANGER

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

WARNING

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION

When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER

Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING

Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION

1. Items related to product and manual

If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturer's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.

The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.

This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer.

In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚ the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated.

2. Items related to faults and abnormalities

If the BATTERY LOW alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an input/output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each data item.

[Continued on next page]

CAUTION [Continued]

3. Items related to maintenance

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.

Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.

4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters

With the MDS-C1 Series, only the serial encoder is compatible as the motor end detector. The OHE/OHA type detector cannot be used as the motor end detector.

Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable.

In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

- i -

CONTENTS I EXPLANATION OF ALARMS 1. LIST OF ALARMS ................................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 OPERATION ALARMS............................................................................................................... 1 1.2 STOP CODES ............................................................................................................................ 9 1.3 SERVO • SPINDLE ALARMS................................................................................................... 14 1.4 MCP ALARM ............................................................................................................................ 24 1.5 SYSTEM ALARMS ................................................................................................................... 27 1.6 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS....................................................... 32 1.7 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP ........................................................................... 35 1.8 AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS ...................................................................................................... 37 1.9 COMPUTER LINK ERRORS.................................................................................................... 44

1.10 USER PLC ALARMS ................................................................................................................ 45 1.11 NETWORK SERVICE ERRORS .............................................................................................. 46

2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT ....................................................... 47

2.1 OPERATION ERRORS ............................................................................................................ 47 2.2 OPERATOR MESSAGES......................................................................................................... 57

2.2.1 SEARCH AND OPERATION RELATED .................................................................... 57 2.2.2 MDI/EDITING RELATED ............................................................................................ 58 2.2.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT RELATED ............................................................................. 59 2.2.4 S-ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT RELATED ....................................................... 60 2.2.5 AUXILIARY AXIS ......................................................................................................... 60 2.2.6 PARAMETER BACKUP RELATED ............................................................................. 60 2.2.7 OTHERS ...................................................................................................................... 61

3. PROGRAM ERROR ........................................................................................................................... 62

- ii -

II EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS 1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS .............................................................................................. 1

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................... 3

2.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS......................................................................................................... 3 2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................... 10 2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................ 12 2.4 BARRIER DATA ....................................................................................................................... 14 2.5 TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETES.................................................................................... 16

3. I/O PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................. 17

3.1 BASE PARAMETERS............................................................................................................... 17 3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS..................................................................................................... 18 3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS .......................................................................................... 20

4. SETUP PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................................... 22 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS......................................................................................... 23 6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS .......................................................................................... 92

6.1 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS................................................................................. 92 6.2 ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS.................................................................................. 99 6.3 ABUSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS.............................................................................. 102 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2............................................................................ 104

7. SERVO PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................... 112

7.1 MDS-B-SV12 .......................................................................................................................... 114 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx HIGH-GAIN (MDS-B-Vx4 COMPATIBLE).......................................................... 140 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx STANDARD SPECIFICATION (MDS-B-Vx COMPATIBLE) .............................. 168 7.4 SUPPLEMENT........................................................................................................................ 198

7.4.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 198 7.4.2 ELECTRONIC GEARS .............................................................................................. 204 7.4.3 LOST MOTION COMPENSATION............................................................................ 206

- iii -

8. MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE PARAMETERS ........................................................................... 207

8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS........................ 207 8.2 MDS-B-SP12 .......................................................................................................................... 215 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH,MDS-C1-SP/SPH......................................................................................... 235 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM ......................................................................................................................... 268 8.5 SUPPLEMENT........................................................................................................................ 300

8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 300

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION............................................................................................. 303

9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE............................................................................................................. 303 9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA ....................................................................................... 307 9.3 EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS ................................................. 309 9.4 EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS............................................ 313

10. PLC CONSTANTS............................................................................................................................ 314

10.1 PLC TIMER............................................................................................................................. 314 10.2 PLC COUNTER ...................................................................................................................... 314 10.3 PLC CONSTANTS.................................................................................................................. 315 10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT..................................................................................................... 315

11. MACRO LIST.................................................................................................................................... 318

12. POSITION SWITCH.......................................................................................................................... 320

12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION....................................................................................................... 320 12.2 CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH ................................................................................. 322

13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER...................................................................................................... 323

- iv -

III PLC DEVICES

1. PLC INTERFACE INPUT X...................................................................................................................... 1 2. PLC INTERFACE INPUT R.................................................................................................................... 25 3. PLC INTERFACE OUTPUT Y................................................................................................................ 33 4. PLC INTERFACE OUTPUT R................................................................................................................ 61 5. OTHER PLC INTERFACES ................................................................................................................... 67

I EXPLANATION OF ALARMS

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.1 OPERATION ALARMS

I - 1

1. LIST OF ALARMS

1.1 OPERATION ALARMS

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

M01 OPERATION ERROR Alarms occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and those by machine trouble are displayed.

Error No. Details Remedy

0001 DOG OVERRUN (Dog overrun) When returning to the reference point‚ the near-point detection limit switch did not stop over the dog‚ but overran the dog.

• Increase the length of the near-point dog.

• Reduce the reference point return speed.

0002 Z-AX NO CRSS One of the axes did not pass the Z-phase during the initial reference point return after the power was turned ON.

• Move the detector one rotation or more in the opposite direction of the reference point‚ and repeat reference point return.

0003 INVALID RET (Invalid return) When manually returning to the reference point‚ the return direction differs from the axis movement direction selected with the AXIS SELECTION key.

• The selection of the AXIS SELECTION key's +/- direction is incorrect. The error is canceled by feeding the axis in the correct direction.

0004 EXT INTRLK (External interlock) The external interlock function has activated (the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes has entered the interlock state.

• As the interlock function has activated‚ release it before resuming operation.

• Check the sequence on the machine side.

• Check for broken wires in the interlock signal line.

0005 INTRL INTRLK (Internal interlock) The internal interlock state has been entered. The absolute position detector axis has been removed. A command for the manual/automatic simultaneous valid axis was issued from the automatic mode.

• The servo OFF function is valid‚ so release it first.

• An axis that can be removed has been issued‚ so perform the correct operations.

• The command is issued in the same direction as the direction where manual skip turned ON‚ so perform the correct operations.

• During the manual/automatic simultaneous mode‚ the axis commanded in the automatic mode became the manual operation axis. Turn OFF the manual/ automatic valid signal for the commanded axis.

• Turn ON the power again‚ and perform absolute position initialization.


I - 2


0006 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end) The stroke end function has activated (the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes is in the stroke end status.

• Move the machine manually. • Check for broken wires in the stroke

end signal wire. • Check for trouble in the limit switch.

0007 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end) The stored stroke limit I‚ II‚ IIB or IB function has activated.

• Move it manually. • If the stored stroke limit in the

parameter is incorrectly set‚ correct it.

0008 Chuck/tail-stock barrier stroke end axis found

The chuck/tail-stock barrier function turned ON‚ and an axis entered the stroke end state.

• Reset the alarm with reset‚ and move the machine in the reverse direction.

0009 Reference point return number illegal Return to the No. 2 reference point was performed before return to the No. 1 reference point was completed.

• Execute No. 1 reference point return.

0019 Sensor signal illegal ON The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.

The sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement after the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.

The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100µm from the final entry start position.

• Turn the tool measurement mode signal input OFF, and move the axis in a safe direction.

• The operation alarm will turn OFF even when the sensor signal is turned OFF.

(Note) When the tool measurement mode signal input is turned OFF, the axis can be moved in either direction. Pay attention to the movement direction.

0020 Reference point return illegal Return to the reference point was performed before the coordinates had not been established.

• Execute reference point return

0024 Zero point return disabled during absolute position detection alarm

A zero point return signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm.

• Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚ and then perform zero point return.

0025 Zero point return disabled during zero point initialization

A zero point return signal was input during zero point initialization of the absolute position detection system.

• Complete zero point initialization‚ and then perform zero point return.


I - 3


0050 Chopping axis zero point return incomplete

The chopping axis has not completed zero point return before entering the chopping mode. All axes interlock will be applied.

• Reset or turn the chopping signal OFF, and then carry out zero point return.

0051 Synchronization error too large The synchronization error of the master and slave axes exceeded the allowable value under synchronous control.

A deviation exceeding the synchroni-zation error limit value was found with the synchronization deviation detection.

• Select the correction mode and move one of the axes in the direction in which the errors are reduced.

• Increase the allowable value or reset it to 0 (check disabled).

• When using simple C-axis synchronous control, set the contents of the R435 register to 0.

• Check the parameter (#2024 synerr).

0101 NOT OP MODE (Not operation mode) • Check for a broken wire in the input mode signal wire.

• Check for trouble in the mode selector switch.

• Check the sequence program.

0102 OVERRIDE ZERO (Override zero) "The cutting feed override" switch on the machine operation panel is set to zero.

• Set "the cutting feed override" switch to a value other than zero to release the error.

• If "the cutting feed override" switch is set to a value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit in the signal wire.


0103 EX F SPD ZRO (External feed speed zero)

"The manual feed speed" switch on the machine operation panel is set to zero when the machine is in the jog mode or automatic dry run mode.

The "Manual feedrate B speed" is set to zero during the jog mode when manual feedrate B is valid.

The "each axis manual feedrate B speed" is set to zero during the jog mode when each axis manual feedrate B is valid.

• Set "the manual feed speed" switch to a value other than zero to release the error.

• If "the manual feed speed" switch is set to a value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit in the signal wire.


0104 F1 SPD ZRO (F1-digit speed zero) The F1-digit feedrate is set to zero when the F1-digit feed command is being executed.

• Set the F1-digit feedrate on the setup parameter screen.


I - 4


0105 SPINDLE STP (Spindle stop) The spindle stopped during the synchronous feed command.

• Rotate the spindle. • If the workpiece is not being cut‚ start

dry run. • Check for a broken wire in the

spindle encoder cable. • Check the connections for the

spindle encoder connectors. • Check the spindle encoder pulse.

0106 HNDL FD NOW (Handle feed axis No. illegal)

An axis not found in the specifications was designated for handle feed or the handle feed axis was not selected.

• Check for broken wires in the handle feed axis selection signal wire.

• Check the sequence program. • Check the No. of axes listed in the

specifications.

0107 SPDL RPM EXS (Spindle rotation speed excessive)

The spindle rotation speed exceeded the axis clamp speed during the thread cutting command.

• Lower the commanded spindle rotation speed.

0108 Fixed point mode feed axis No. illegal:An axis not found in the specifications was designated for the fixed point mode feed or the fixed point mode feedrate is illegal.

• Check for broken wires in the fixed mode feed axis selection signal wire and fixed point mode feedrate wire.

• Check the fixed point mode feed specifications.

0109 BLK ST INTLK (Block start interlock) An interlock signal that locks the start of the block has been input.


0110 CTBL ST INTLK (Cutting block start interlock)

An interlock signal that locks the start of the cutting block has been input.


0111 Restart switch ON The restart switch was turned ON before the restart search was completed, and the manual mode was selected.

• Search the block to be restarted. • Turn OFF the restart switch.

0112 Program Check Mode The automatic start button was pressed during program check or in program check mode.

• Press the reset button to cancel the program check mode.

0113 Automatic start during buffer correction

The automatic start button was pressed during buffer correction.

• Press the automatic start button after buffer correction is completed.


I - 5


0115 RESETTING The automatic start button was pressed during resetting or tape rewinding.

• When rewinding the tape‚ wait for the winding to end‚ or press the reset button to stop the winding‚ and then press the automatic start button.

• During resetting‚ wait for resetting to end‚ and then press the automatic start button.

0117 PLAYBACK NOT POSSIBLE The playback switch was turned ON during editing or full-character mode (9-inch).

• During editing‚ cancel the function by pressing the input or previous screen key‚ and then turn ON the playback switch.

• Set the edit screen (9-inch) to the half-character mode‚ and then turn ON the playback switch.

0118 Block joint turn stop during normal line control

The turning angle at the block joint exceeded the limit during normal line control.

Normal line control type I The normal line control axis turning speed (#1523 C_feed) has not been set.

Normal line control type II When turning in the inside of the arc, the parameter "#8041 C-rot. R" setting value is larger than the arc radius.

• Check the program. • Set the normal line control axis

turning speed. (Parameter "#1523 C_feed")

• Set the C axis turning diameter smaller than the arc radius, or check the setting value of the C axis turning diameter. (Parameter "#8041 C rot. R")

0120 Synchronization correction mode ON The synchronous correction mode switch was pressed in a non-handle mode.

• Select the handle or manual feed mode.

• Turn OFF the correction mode switch.

0121 No synchronous control option The synchronous control system (register R435) was set with no synchronous control option.

• Set 0 in register R435.

0123 Computer link B The cycle start was attempted before resetting was completed.

The operation of the computer link B was attempted in the 2nd part system of the 2-part system.

• Perform the cycle start after resetting is completed.

• Set 0 in #8109 HOST LINK, and then set 1 again before performing the cycle start.

• The operation of the computer link B cannot be performed in the 2nd part system of the 2-part system.

0124 Simultaneous axis movement prohibited during inclined axis control valid

The basic axis corresponding to the inclined axis was started simultaneously in the manual mode while the inclined axis control was valid.

• Turn the inclined axis and basic axis start OFF for both axes. (This also applied for manual/automatic simultaneous start.)

• Invalidate the basic axis compensation, or command one axis at a time.


I - 6


0126 Program restart machine lock Machine lock was applied on the return axis while manually returning to the restart position.

• Release the machine lock before resuming operations.

0150 Chopping override zero • Check the chopping override (R135). • Check the rapid traverse override

(R134).

0151 Command axis chopping axis A chopping axis movement command was issued from the program during the chopping mode. (This alarm will not occur when the movement amount is commanded as 0.) (All axes interlock state will be applied.)

• Reset, or turn OFF the chopping signal. When the chopping signal is turned OFF, the axis will return to the reference position, and then the program movement command will be executed.

0153 Bottom dead center position zero The bottom dead center position is set to the same position as the upper dead center position.

• Correctly set the bottom dead center position.

0154 Chopping axis handle selection axis Chopping was started when the chopping axis was selected as the handle axis.

• Select an axis other than the chopping axis as the handle axis, or start chopping after changing the mode to another mode.

0160 Axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft limit range

Returned from the outside of the soft limit range for the axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft limit range.

• Set the maximum speed for the outside of the soft limit range. (Parameter "#2021 out_f")

• Change the soft limit range. (Parameter "#2013 OT-" "#2014 OT+")

1005 An attempt was made to execute G114.* during execution of G114.*.

G51.2 was commanded when the G51.2 spindle-spindle polygon machining mode was already entered with a separate system.

• Issue G113 to cancel G114.*. • Issue the spindle synchronous cancel

signal (Y2E8: SPSYC) to cancel G114.*.

• Cancel with G50.2. • Cancel with the spindle-spindle

polygon cancel signal (Y359).

1007 The spindle is being used in synchronized tapping.

• Cancel synchronized tapping.

1026 Spindle C axis and other position control were commanded simultaneously.

C axis mode command was issued for polygon machining spindle.

C axis mode command was issued for synchronized tapping spindle.

Polygon command was issued for synchronized tapping spindle.

Spindle is being used as spindle/C axis.

• Cancel the C axis command. • Cancel the polygon machining

command. • Cancel the C axis with servo OFF.


I - 7


1030 Synchronization mismatch Different M codes were commanded in the two systems as the synchronization M codes.

Synchronization with the "!" code was commanded in another system during M code synchronization.

Synchronization with the M code was commanded in another system during synchronization with the "!" code.

• Correct the program so that the M codes match.

• Correct the program so that the same synchronization codes are commanded.

1031 The C axis selection signal was changed when multiple C axes could not be selected.

An axis that cannot be controlled as the multiple C axes selection was selected.

• Check and correct the parameters and program.

1032 Tap return spindle selection illegal during multi-spindle

Tap return was executed when a different spindle was selected. Cutting feed will wait until synchronization is completed.

• Select the spindle for which tap cycle was halted before the tap return signal was turned ON.

1033 Spindle-spindle polygon (G51.2) cutting interlock

Cutting feed will wait until synchronization is completed.

• Wait for synchronization to end.

1034 Cross machining command illegal Cross machining control exceeding the number of control axes was attempted.

Cross machining control with duplicated axis addresses was attempted.

• Check the parameter settings for cross machining control.

1035 Cross machining control disable modalCross machining control was commanded for a system in which cross machining control is disabled as shown below.

• During nose R compensation mode

• During pole coordinate interpolation mode

• During cylindrical interpolation mode

• During balance cut mode • During fixed cycle machining mode• During facing turret mirror image

• Check the program.


I - 8


Synchronous control designation disable

The synchronous control operation method selection (R435 register) was set when the mode was not the C axis mode.

The synchronous control operation method selection (R435 register) was set in the zero point not set state.

• Set the R435 register to 0. 1036

Mirror image disable state

The external mirror image or parameter mirror image was commanded during facing turret mirror image.

• Check the program and parameters.

1037 Synchronous control was started or canceled when synchronous control could not be started or canceled.

• Check the program and parameters.

1038 A movement command was issued to a synchronous axis in synchronous control.


1043 No spindle speed clamp

The constant surface speed command (G96) was issued to the spindle which is not selected for the spindle speed clamp command (G92/G50) under Multiple spindle control II.

Press the reset key and carry out the remedy below.

• Select the spindle before commandingG92/G50.

(Applicable only to M65V series and M64 C version series)

1106 Spindle synchronous phase calculation illegal

The spindle synchronization phase alignment command was issued while the spindle synchronization phase calculation request signal was ON.

• Check the program. • Check the sequence program.


M90 PARAM SET MODE M90 Messages output when the setup parameter lock function is enabled are displayed.


- Setup parameter lock released The setup parameter lock is released. Automatic start is disabled when setup parameters can be set.

• Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.2 STOP CODES

I - 9

1.2 STOP CODES

These codes indicate a status that caused the controller to stop for some reason. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST This indicates the state where automatic operation cannot be started when attempting to start it from the stop state.


0101 AX IN MOTION (axis in motion) Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is moving.

• Try automatic start again after all axes have stopped.

0102 READY OFF Automatic start is not possible as the NC is not ready.

• Another alarm has occurred. Check the details and remedy.

0103 RESET ON Automatic start is not possible as the reset signal has been input.

• Turn OFF the reset input signal. • Check that the reset switch is not ON

constantly due to trouble. • Check the sequence program.

0104 A-OP STP SGL (Automatic operation stop signal ON)

The FEED HOLD switch on the machine operation panel is ON (valid).

• Check the FEED HOLD switch. • The feed hold switch is the B

contact. • Check for broken wires in the feed

hold signal wire. • Check the sequence program.

0105 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis)Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stroke end.

• If one of the axis' ends is at the stroke end‚ move the axis manually.

• Check for broken wire in the stroke end signal wire.

• Check for trouble in the stroke end limit switch.

0106 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis)Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stored stroke limit.

• Move the axis manually. • If an axis is not at the end‚ check the

parameter details.

0107 NO OP MODE (NO operation mode) The operation mode has not been selected.

• Select the automatic operation mode.

• Check for broken wires in the automatic operation mode (memory‚ tape‚ MDl) signal wire.


I - 10


0108 OP MODE DUPL (Operation mode duplicated)

Two or more automatic operation modes are selected.

• Check for a short circuit in the mode selection signal wire (memory‚ tape‚ MDl).

• Check for trouble in the switch. • Check the sequence program.

0109 OP MODE SHFT (Operation mode shift)

The automatic operation mode changed to another automatic operation mode.

• Return to the original automatic operation mode‚ and start automatic start.

0110 Tape search execution Automatic start is not possible as tape search is being executed.

• Begin automatic start after the tape search is completed.

0112 Program restart position return incomplete

Automatic start is not possible as the axis has not been returned to the restart position.

• Manually return to the restart position.

• Turn the automatic restart valid parameter ON, and then execute automatic start.

0113 Thermal alarm Automatic start is not possible because a thermal alarm (Z53 TEMP. OVER) has occurred.

• The NC controller temperature has exceeded the specified temperature.

• Take appropriate measures to cool the unit.

0115 In host communication Automatic start cannot be executed as the NC is communicating with the host computer.

• Execute automatic start after the communication with the host computer is completed.

0138 Disabled start during absolute position detection alarm

A start signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm.

• Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚ and then input the start signal.

0139 Disabled start during zero point initialization

A start signal was input while initializing the absolute position detector's zero point.

• Complete zero point initialization before inputting the start signal.

0190 Automatic start disabled Automatic start is disabled because setup parameters can be set.

• Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer.

0191 Automatic start disabled Automatic start was caused during file deletion or writing.

• Cause automatic start after file deletion or writing is completed.


I - 11

T02 FEED HOLD The feed hold state been entered due to a condition in the automatic operation.


0201 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis)An axis is at the stroke end.

• Manually move the axis away from the stroke end limit switch.

• The machining program must be corrected.

0202 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis)An axis is at the stored stroke limit.

• Manually move the axis. • The machining program must be

corrected.

0203 RESET SIGNAL ON (Reset signal on)The reset signal has been input.

• The program execution position has returned to the start of the program. Execute automatic operation from the start of the machining program.

0204 AUTO OP STOP (Automatic operation stop)

The FEED HOLD switch is ON.

• Resume automatic operation by pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.

0205 AUTO MD CHING (Automatic mode change)

The operation mode changed to another mode during automatic operation.

• Return to the original automatic operation mode‚ and resume automatic operation by pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.

0206 Acceleration and deceleration time constants too large

The acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large. (This problem occurs at the same time as system alarm Z59.)

• Increase the set value of the parameter "#1206 G1bF".

• Decrease the set value of the parameter "#1207 G1btL".

• Lower the cutting speed.

0215 Absolute position detection alarm stopAn absolute position detection alarm occurred.

• Reset the absolute position detection alarm.


I - 12

T03 BLOCK STOP This indicates that automatic operation stopped after executing one block of the program.


0301 SNGL BLK ON (Single block on) The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine operation panel is ON.

The single block or machine lock switch changed.

• Automatic operation can be resumed by turning the CYCLE START switch ON.

0302 User macro stop The block stop command was issued in the user macro program.

• Automatic operation can be resumed by turning the CYCLE START switch ON.

0303 Mode change The automatic mode changed to another automatic mode.

• Return to the original automatic operation mode‚ and resume automatic operation by turning the CYCLE START switch ON.

0304 MDI completion The last block of MDI was completed.

• Set MDI again‚ and turn the CYCLE START switch ON to resume MDl operation.

0305 Block start interlock The interlock signal that locks the block start is entered.


0306 Block cutting start interlock The interlock signal that locks the block cutting start is entered.


0310 Offset change of inclined Z-axis during program operation

Whether to validate the offset of the inclined Z-axis switched during program operation.

• Automatic operation can be restarted by turning ON the cycle start switch.

T04 COLLATION STOP Collation stop was applied during automatic operation.


0401 Collation stop occurred. • Automatic operation can be restarted with automatic start.


I - 13

T10 FIN WAIT This indicates the operation state when an alarm did not occur during automatic operation‚ and nothing seems to have happened.

Error No. Details

0 The error number is displayed while each of the completion wait modes listed in the table below is ON. It disappears when the mode is canceled.

0

Alarm No.

Unclamp signal wait Note 2)

In dwell execution

Alarm No.

Door open Note 1)

Waiting for spindle position to be looped

Alarm No.

Waiting for spindle orienta-tion to complete

Waiting for cutting speed deceleration

Waiting for rapid traverse deceleration

Waiting for MSTB completion

0 0 0

1 × 1 × 1 ×

8 × 8 × 2 ×

9 × × 9 × × 3 × ×

4 ×

5 × ×

6 × ×

7 × × ×

8 ×

9 × ×

A × ×

B × × ×

C × ×

D × × ×

E × × ×

F × × × × Note 1: This mode is enabled by the door interlock function. Note 2: The system is waiting for the index table indexing unclamp signal to turn

ON or OFF

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.3 SERVO SPINDLE ALARMS

I - 14

1.3 SERVO ⋅ SPINDLE ALARMS

This section describes alarms occurred by the errors in the servo system such as the drive unit‚ motor and encoder, etc. The alarm message‚ alarm No. and axis name will display on the alarm message screen. The axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No. will also display on the servo monitor screen and the spindle monitor screen respectively. If several alarms have occurred‚ up to two errors per axis will display on the servo monitor screen and the spindle monitor screen respectively. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

S SERVO ALARM : ×× 0 0 ∆∆ Axis name

Alarm No.

Alarm reset class

Alarm class

Servo : Axis name

Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N"

(Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset class combinations are preset. (Refer to the separate table for S02, S51 and S52.)

Alarm class Alarm reset class Resetting methods S01 PR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset

the alarm by turning the NC power ON again.

S03 NR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by inputting the NC RESET key.

S04 AR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the drive unit power ON again.

(Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class. For example, even if "S03 SERVO ALARM: NR" is displayed, it may be necessary to

turn the NC power ON again. Alarm No. Name Meaning

10 Insufficient voltage Insufficient PN bus voltage was detected in main circuit. 11 Axis selection

error Setting of the axis No. selection switch is incorrect.

12 Memory error 1 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the power ON self-check.

13 Software processing error 1

Software processing has not finished within the specified time.

14 Software processing error 2

Software processing has not finished within the specified time.

15 Memory error 2 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the power ON self-check.

16 Magnetic pole position detection error

Initial magnetic pole for motor control has not been formed yet.

17 A/D converter error An error was detected in the A/D converter for detecting current FB.

18 Motor side detector: Initial communication error

Initial communication with the motor end detector failed.

19 Detector communication error in synchronous control

Initial communication with the motor end detector on master axis failed when setting closed-loop current synchronous control. Or the communication was interrupted.


I - 15

Alarm No. Name Meaning

1A Machine side detector: Initial communication error

Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw end detector failed.

1B Machine side detector: CPU error 1

CPU initial error was detected in the linear scale or in the ball screw end detector.

1C Machine side detector: EEPROM/LED error

An error was detected in the stored data of the linear scale memory. Or the LED deterioration was detected in the ball screw end detector.

1D Machine side detector: Data error

An error data was detected in the linear scale or in the ball screw end detector.

1E Machine side detector: Memory error

An internal memory error was detected in the linear scale.

1F Machine side detector: Communication error

An error was detected in communication data with the linear scale or the ball screw end detector. Or the communication was interrupted.

20 Motor side detector: No signal

No signals were detected in A,B,Z-phase or U,V,W-phase of the pulse motor end detector in a servo system, or in Z-phase of PLG in a spindle system.

21 Machine side detector: No signal

No signals were detected in A,B,Z-phase of the pulse linear scale or the ball screw end detector in a servo system. Or no encoder signals were detected in a spindle system.

22 LSI error LSI operation error was detected in the drive unit. 23 Excessive speed

error 1 A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was continuously exceeding 50 r/min for longer than the setting time.

24 Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).25 Absolute position

data lost The absolute position was lost, as the backup battery voltage dropped in the absolute position detector.

26 Unused axis error A power module error occurred in the axis whose axis No. selection switch was set to "F"(free axis).

27 Machine side detector: CPU error 2

A CPU error was detected in the linear scale.

28 Machine side detector: Overspeed

The specified max. speed was detected in the linear scale.

29 Machine side detector: Absolute position data error

An error was detected in the absolute position detection circuit of the linear scale.

2A Machine side detector: Relative position data error

An error was detected in the relative position detection circuit of the linear scale.

2B Motor side detector: CPU error 1

A CPU initial error was detected in the motor end detector or in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

2C Motor side detector: EEPROM/LED error

The LED deterioration was detected in the motor end detector. Or an error was detected in the stored data of the linear scale memory of a linear servo system.


I - 16


2D Motor side detector: Data error

A data error was detected in the motor end detector or in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

2E Motor side detector: Memory error

An internal memory error was detected in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

2F Motor side detector: Communication error

An error was detected in communication data with the motor end detector or with the linear scale of a linear servo system. Or the communication was interrupted.

30 Over regeneration Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded.

31 Overspeed The motor was detected to rotate at a speed exceeding the allowable speed.

32 Power module overcurrent

Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.

33 Overvoltage PN bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.34 NC-DRV

communication: CRC error

An error was detected in the data received from the CNC.

35 NC command error

The travel command data that was received from the CNC was excessive.

36 NC-DRV communication: Communication error

The communication with the CNC was interrupted.

37 Initial parameter error

An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received from the CNC at the power ON.

38 NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 1

An error was detected in the communication frames received from the CNC.

39 NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 2

An error was detected in the axis information data received from the CNC.

3A Overcurrent Excessive current was detected in the motor drive current. 3B Power module

overheat Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.

3C Regeneration circuit error

An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the regenerative resistor.

3D Spindle speed blocked

The spindle motor failed to rotate faster than 45 r/min, even when the max. torque command was given.

3E Spindle speed overrun

1. The spindle motor speed feedback was detected to be accelerated exceeding the commanded speed. 2. The spindle motor was detected to be rotated at a speed exceeding the parameter value, while the speed command was "0" (including the case of operation stoppage during the position control).

3F Excessive speed error 2

A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was detected to exceed the setting amount or setting time in a constant speed operation.


I - 17


40 Detector selection unit switching error

An error was detected in the motor switching signals that were received from the detector selection unit, while controlling one drive unit and two motors.

41 Detector selection unit communication error

An error was detected in the communication with the detector selection unit, while controlling one drive unit and two motors.

42 Feedback error 1 An error was detected in the feedback signals of the pulse motor end detector in a servo system, or in PLG's feedback signals in a spindle system.

43 Feedback error 2 Excessive difference was detected in position data between the motor end detector and the machine end detector in a servo system. In a spindle system, an error was detected in the encoder feedback signals.

44 Inappropriate coil selected for C axis

When using a coil changeover motor, C-axis was controlled while the high-speed coil was selected.

45 Fan stop A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads on the unit exceeded the specified value.

46 Motor overheat Thermal protection function of the motor or in the detector, has started its operation.

47 Regenerative resistor overheat

Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started its operation.

48 Motor side detector: CPU error 2

A CPU error was detected in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

49 Motor side detector: Overspeed

The specified max. speed was detected in the linear scale of the linear servo system.

4A Motor side detector: Absolute position data error

An error was detected in the absolute position detection circuit in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

4B Motor side detector: Relative position data error

An error was detected in the relative position detection circuit in the linear scale of a linear servo system.

4C Current error at magnetic pole detection

A current error was detected in the IPM spindle motor when the initial magnetic pole was being formed.

4E NC command mode error

The mode outside the specification was input in spindle control mode selection.

4F Instantaneous power interruption

The power was momentarily interrupted.

50 Overload 1 Overload detection level became over 100%. The motor or the drive unit is overloaded.

51 Overload 2 Current command of more than 95% of the unit's max. current was being continuously given for longer than 1 second in a servo system. In a spindle system, the load over the continuous rating was being applied for longer than 30 minutes.

52 Excessive error 1 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo ON exceeded the setting value in a servo system. In a spindle system, a difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the setting value.


I - 18


53 Excessive error 2 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo OFF exceeded the setting value.

54 Excessive error 3 When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current failed.

55 External emergency stop error

There is no contactor shutoff command, even after 30 seconds has passed since the external emergency stop was input.

57 Option error An invalid option function was selected. 58 Collision detection

1: G0 When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in rapid traverse (G0) exceeded the collision detection level.

59 Collision detection 1: G1

When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in cutting feed (G1) exceeded the collision detection level.

5A Collision detection 2

When collision detection function was valid, the command torque reached the max. motor torque.

5C Orientation feedback error

After orientation was achieved, a difference between the command and feedback exceeded the parameter setting.

5D Speed monitoring: Input mismatch

As for door state signal of speed monitoring control, a mismatch between the external input signal and the control signal received from the CNC was detected.

5E Speed monitoring: Feedback speed error

In speed monitoring control, the spindle speed was exceeding the setting speed with the door open.

5F External contactor error

A contact of the external contactor is welding. Or the contactor fails to be ON during ready ON.

61 Power module overcurrent

Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.

62 Frequency error The input power supply frequency increased above the specification range.

63 Supplementary regeneration error

The supplementary regenerative transistor is being ON.

65 Rush relay error A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be ON. 67 Phase interruption An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply

circuit. 68 Watchdog The system does not operate correctly. 69 Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).6A External contactor

welding A contact of the external contactor is welding.

6B Rush relay welding A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF. 6C Main circuit error An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit

capacitor. 6D Parameter error The capacity of the power supply unit and the regenerative

resistor type that was set in the parameter are mismatched. 6E Memory error An internal memory error was detected. 6F Power supply error A power supply unit is not connected. Or an error was

detected in A/D converter of the power supply unit. 71 Instantaneous

power interruption The power was momentarily interrupted.


I - 19


73 Over regeneration Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded.

74 Regenerative resistor overheat

Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started its operation.

75 Overvoltage PN bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.76 External

emergency stop setting error

As for the external emergency stop settings, the setting on the rotary switch and the parameter setting are mismatched.

77 Power module overheat

Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.

7F Drive unit power supply restart request

A mismatch of program mode selection was detected. Turn the drive unit power ON again.

80 Detector converting unit 1: Connection error

A connection error was detected between the analog output linear scale and the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

81 Detector converting unit 1: Communication error

A communication error was detected between the serial output linear scale and the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

83 Detector converting unit 1: Judgment error

Judgment of the linear scale analog frequency failed in the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

84 Detector converting unit 1: CPU error

A CPU error was detected in the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

85 Detector converting unit 1: Data error

A data error was detected in the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

86 Detector converting unit 1: Magnetic pole error

An error was detected in the magnetic pole of the unit MDS-B-HR that is used in a linear servo system.

88 Watchdog The system does not operate correctly. 89 Detector

converting unit 2: Connection error

A connection error was detected between the analog output linear scale and the unit MDS-B-HR in a servo system. In a spindle system, the initial communication with MDS-B-PJEX failed.


I - 20


8A Detector converting unit 2: Communication error

An error was detected in the communication with the serial output linear scale of the unit MDS-B-HR in a servo system. In a spindle system, an error was detected in the communication with MDS-B-PJEX.

8B Detector converting unit 2: Automatic tuning error

An abnormal signal was detected from PLG in automatic PLG tuning.

8C Detector converting unit 2: Judgment error

The detector type outside the specification was designated in MDS-B-PJEX.

8D Detector converting unit 2: CPU error

A CPU error was detected in the unit MDS-B-HR in a servo system, or in the unit MDS-B-PJEX in a spindle system.

8E Detector converting unit 2: Data error

A data error was detected in the unit MDS-B-HR.

S02 INIT PARAM ERR ∆∆∆∆

Axis name

Alarm No. (parameter No.)

Servo : Axis name

Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N"

An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the controller to the drive unit when the power was turned ON. Remove the cause of the alarm, and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once. Alarm No. Details Remedy

2201 - 2264 The servo parameter setting data is illegal. The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter where the error occurred.

Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo parameters and correct them.

2301 The number of constants to be used in the following functions is too large: • Electronic gears • Position loop gain • Speed feedback conversion

Check that all the related parameters are specified correctly. sv001:PC1, sv002:PC2, sv003:PGN1 sv018:PIT, sv019:RNG1, sv020:RNG2

2302 High-speed serial incremental detectorParameters for absolute position detection are set to ON during OSE104 and OSE105 connection. Set the parameters for absolute position detection to OFF. To detect an absolute position, replace the incremental specification detector with an absolute position detector.

Check that all the related parameters are specified correctly. sv017:SPEC, sv025:MTYP

2303 No servo option is found. The closed loop (including the ball screw- end detector) or dual feedback control is an optional function.

Check that all the related parameters are specified correctly. sv025:MTYP/pen sv017:SPEC/dfbx


I - 21

Alarm No. Details Remedy

2304 No servo option is found. The SHG control is an optional function.

Check that all the related parameters are specified correctly. sv057:SHGC sv058:SHGCsp

2305 No servo option is found. The adaptive filtering is an optional function.

Check that all the related parameters are specified correctly. sv027:SSF1/aflt

3201 - 3584 The spindle parameter setting data is illegal. The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle parameter where the error occurred.

Check the descriptions for the appropriate spindle parameters and correct them. Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual.


I - 22

S51 PARAMETER ERROR ∆∆∆∆

Axis name

Alarm No. (parameter No.)

Servo : Axis name

Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N"

A warning appears if a parameter set outside the tolerable range is set. Illegal settings will be ignored. This alarm will be reset when the correct value is set. Alarm No. Details Remedy

2201 - 2264 Servo parameter setting data is illegal.The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter where the warning occurred.

Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo parameters and correct them.

3201 - 3584 Spindle parameter setting data is illegal.The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle parameter where the warning occurred.

Check the descriptions for the appropriate spindle parameters and correct them. Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual.

S52 SERVO WARNING 0 0 ∆∆

Axis name

Alarm No. (Warning No.)

Servo : Axis name

Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N"

The drive unit warning is displayed. Alarm No. Name Meaning

90 Detector: Initial communication error

Initial communication with the absolute position linear scale failed.

91 Detector: Communication error

An error was detected in the communication with the detector in absolute position detection system.

92 Detector: Protocol error

A data error was detected in absolute position detection system.

93 Initial absolute position fluctuation

The position data have fluctuated during the absolute position initializing.

96 Scale feedback error

An excessive deviation was detected between the motor end detector and MP scale feedback data in a MP scale absolute position detection system.

97 Scale offset error An error was detected in the offset data received from the MP scale in a MP scale absolute position detection system.

9B Detector converting unit: Magnetic pole shift warning

An error was detected in the shift distance of the magnetic pole in a linear servo system.

9C Detector converting unit: Magnetic pole warning

A data error was detected in the magnetic pole of MDS-B-HR after passing Z-phase in a linear servo system.


I - 23


9E Absolute position detector: Revolution counter error

An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute position detector. The absolute position data cannot be compensated.

9F Battery voltage drop

The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector dropped. The absolute position data is retained.

A6 Fan stop warning A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped. A8 Turret indexing

warning The designated position shift amount of turret indexing is outside the setting range.

A9 Orientation feedback warning

As an orientation feedback error occurred, the retrial has been conducted.

E0 Over regeneration warning

Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.

E1 Overload warning Overload detection level exceeded 80%. E2 Continuous

high-speed revolution warning

The motor was continuously rotated at a speed exceeding the rated speed.

E3 Absolute position counter warning

Deviation between the absolute and relative position data was detected.

E4 Set parameter warning

A parameter setting was outside the setting range.

E6 Control axis detachment warning

Control axis detachment was commanded.

E7 In NC emergency stop state

Emergency stop was input from the CNC.

E8 Excessive supplementary regeneration frequency

Regeneration that are beyond the power supply limitation has frequently occurred.

E9 Instantaneous power interruption warning

The power was momentarily interrupted.

EA In external emergency stop state

External emergency stop signal was input.

EB Over regeneration warning

Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.4 MCP ALARM

I - 24

1.4 MCP ALARM

An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

Y02 SYSTEM ALARM

An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and drive unit after the power was turned ON.


0050 Background error The software or hardware may be damaged. Contact the service center.

0000 CRC error (10 times/910.2 ms)

0001 CRC error (2 continuous times)

0002 Reception timing error (2 continuous times)

××03 Data ID error (2 continuous times) ××: Axis No.

0051

××04 No. of reception frames error(2 continuous times) ××: Axis No.

A communication error has occurred between the controller and drive unit. • Take measures against noise. • Check that the communication cable

connector between the controller and drive unit and one between the drive units are tight.

• Check whether the communication cable between the controller and drive unit and one between the drive units are disconnected.

• A drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of the 7-segment LED contents of each drive unit and report to the Service Center.

Y03 AMP. UNEQUIPPED The drive unit is not correctly connected

Check the drive unit mounting state. • Check the end of the cable wiring. • Check the cable for broken wires. • Check the connector insertion. • The drive unit input power is not being input. • The drive unit axis No. switch is illegal.

Error No. Details Alphabet

(axis name) Servo axis drive unit not mounted

1 - 4 PLC axis drive unit not mounted S No.1 spindle axis drive unit not mounted T No.2 spindle axis drive unit not mounted

Y05 INIT PARAM ERR ↑

: Error parameter number

Details Remedy There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes or the number of systems.

Check the value set for the corresponding parameters. #1001 SYS_ON #1002 axisno #1039 spinno etc.


I - 25

Y06 mcp_no ERROR

There are differences in the MCP and axis parameters when the NC power is turned ON.

Error No. Details Remedy 0001 There is a skipped number in the

channels. 0002 The random layout setting is duplicated.

0003 The drive unit fixed setting "0000" and random layout setting "∗∗∗∗" are both set.

0004 The spindle/C axis "#3031 mcp_no" and "#3032 smcp_no" are set to the same values.

0005 A random layout is set for the "#1154 pdoor" =1 two-system.

0006 The channel No. parameter is not within the setting range.

Check the values set for the following parameters. #1021 mcp_no #3031 smcp_no #3032 mbmcp_no

Y51 PARAMETER ERROR An error occurred in a parameter that causes an alarm while the

control axis was operating. Error No. Details Remedy

1 LN FEED ABNL (Linear feed abnormal)The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range.

• Check "#2004 G0tL".

2 CT FEED ABNL (Cutting feed abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range.

• Check "#2007 G1tL".

3 DLY F-F ABNL (Delayed fast feed abnormal)

The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range.

• Check "#2005 G0t1".

4 DLY CUTG ABNL (Delayed cutting feed abnormal)


• Check "#2008 G1t1".

9 GRID SPACE ERROR • Check "#2029 grspc". 12 SYNCHRONOUS TAP CYCLE

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIME CONSTANT ERROR


• Check spindle parameters #3017 stapt1 to #3020 stapt4.

15 LN SKIP ABNL (Linear skip abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range.

• Check "#2102 skip_tL".

16 DLY SKIP ABNL (Delayed skip abnormal)


• Check "#2103 skip_t1".

17 "#1205 G0bdcc" for the 2nd system is set to acceleration/deceleration before G0 interpolation.

• Check "#1205 G0bdcc".


I - 26


101 ROTARY AXIS GEAR RATIO EXCESSIVE (ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION)

• Check "#2201 PC1" and "#2202 PC2".

Y90 SP. NON SIGNAL


0001 - 0007 There is an error in the spindle encoder signal. The data transmission to the drive unit is stopped when this error occurs.

• Check the spindle encoder's feedback cable and the encoder.

Alarm No. Z open phase

B open phase

A open phase

1 × 2 × 3 × × 4 × 5 × × 6 × × 7 × × ×

0 0

(Alarm No.)

No.2 spindle

No.1 spindle

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.5 SYSTEM ALARMS

I - 27

1.5 SYSTEM ALARMS

The following messages are displayed with the register at the time when the error occurred if the system stops due to a system error.

Message Details Remedy Parity error RAM error • Write down the displayed register‚ andBus error A non-existing memory was accessed. contact the service center. Zero divide The division with a 0 denominator was

attempted.

Watch dog error

The software process is not functioning correctly.

Illegal exception

The alarm was caused by an illegal software function not listed above.

Address error

An illegal memory was accessed.

Illegal instruction

The software process is not functioning correctly.

Stack overflow

Z30 ETHERNET ERROR ↑

Warning No. Warning No. Explanation

0001 Socket open error (socket) 0002 Socket bind error (bind) 0003 Connection wait queue error (listen) 0004 Connection request acceptance error (accept) 0005 Data receive error (socket error) 0006 Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection) 0007 Data receive error (socket error) 0008 Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection) 000A Socket close error (close)

Note: If warning No. 0001, 0002, 0003, or 000A is displayed, set the parameters, then turn power OFF

and turn it ON again.


I - 28

Z31 DATA SERVER ERROR ↑

Warning No. Warning No. Explanation

0001 Socket open error (socket) 0002 Socket bind error (bind) 0003 Connection wait queue error (listen) 0004 Connection request acceptance error (accept) 0005 Data receive error (socket error) 0006 Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection) 0007 Data receive error (socket error) 0008 Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection) 000A Socket close error (close)

Note: If warning No. 0001, 0002, 0003, or 000A is displayed, set the parameters, then turn power OFF

and turn it ON again.

Message Details Remedy Z40 FORMAT NOT MET

This appears when the parameter MemVal is formatted at 0, and MemVal is set to 1.

• Either return the MemVal setting, or format and restart.


I - 29

The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.

Message Details Remedy

Z51 EE ROM ERROR 000x

This occurs when the parameters were not correctly written into the EEROM. Formatting of the machine manufacturer macro program area did not end correctly. The machine manufacturer macro program was not written into the FROM correctly. <Type> Z51 ROM error 0001: Open error Z51 ROM error 0002: Erase error Z51 ROM error 0003: Write error Z51 ROM error 0004: Verify error

• If the same alarm is output by the same operation, the cause is an H/W fault. Contact the Service Center.

• Reformat the area. • Write to the FROM again.

Z52 BATTERY FAULT

The voltage of the battery inserted in the NC control unit has dropped. (The battery used to save the internal data)

• Replace the battery of the NC control unit.

• After treating the battery‚ check the machining program‚

Z53 TEMP. OVER

The controller or operation board temperature has risen above the designated value. (Note 1)

• Cooling measures are required. Turn OFF the controller power‚ or lower the temperature with a cooler‚ etc.

Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT

This occurs when an error occurs in the communication between the controller and remote l/O unit. • Cable breakage • Remote l/O unit fault • Power supply to remote l/O unit

fault (Note 2)

• Check and replace the cables. • Replace the remote I/O unit. • Check the power supply. (existence of

supply‚ voltage)

Z57 SYSTEM WARNING

The program memory capacity setting value cannot be formatted.The expansion cassette (HR437) is not mounted after formatting. An expansion cassette different from the expansion cassette (HR437) mounted during formatting is mounted.

(Note 3)

Check the state of the following items. • Program memory capacity • Status of expansion cassette (HR437)

mounting • APLC open option

Z58 ROM WR UNFIN

The machine manufacturer macro program was not written to the FROM after being registered, edited, copied, condensed, merged, the number changed, or deleted.

• Write the machine manufacturer macro program to the FROM.

* If the operations, such as editing, done while the NC power was OFF can be invalidated, the program does not need to be written to the FROM.


I - 30


Z59 TIME CONSTANT

Acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large. (This alarm is output at the same time as "T02 FEED HOLD 0206.")

• Increase the value specified as the #1206 G1bF parameter.

• Decrease the value specified as the #1207 G1btL parameter.

• Lower the feedrate.

CAUTION

If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.

Do not short circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose of the spent battery following local laws.

Note 1: Temperature warning If the alarm is displayed when an overheat alarm is detected‚ the overheat signal will be output simultaneously. If the machine is in automatic operation‚ the operation will be continued‚ but restarting will not be possible after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible after block stop or feed hold.) The alarm will be reset and the overheat signal will turn OFF when the temperature drops below the specified temperature.

Z53 TEMP. OVER 000x

↑

0001 : The temperature in the controller is high. 0002 : The temperature around the communication terminal (setting and display unit) is high. 0003 : The temperature in the controller and around the communication terminal (setting and display unit) is high.

The ambient temperature must be lowered immediately when a "Z53 TEMP.OVER" alarm occurs‚ but if machining must be continued‚ the alarm can be invalidated by turning the following parameter OFF.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC parameter bit selection #6449

Communication terminal (setting and display unit) 0: Detection invalid Controller 1: Detection valid


I - 31

Note 2: RIO communication interrupt If communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit fails, the alarm and remote I/O unit number are displayed.

Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT 0 0

(a) and (b) above indicate the following matters.

Alarm number

RIO (seventh station)

RIO (sixth station)

RIO (fifth station)

RIO (fourth station)

Alarm number

RIO (third station)

RIO (second station)

RIO (first station)

RIO (0th station)

0 0

1 × 1 ×

2 × 2 ×

3 × × 3 × ×

4 × 4 ×

5 × × 5 × ×

6 × × 6 × ×

7 × × × 7 × × ×

8 × 8 ×

9 × × 9 × ×

A × × A × ×

B × × × B × × ×

C × × C × ×

D × × × D × × ×

E × × × E × × ×

F × × × × F × × × ×

(a)(b) ↓ ↓

Board connection remote I/O communication interrupted station Remote I/O 1st system communication interrupted station Remote I/O 2nd system communication interrupted station

This applies for both the remote I/O 1st system communication interrupted station and board connection remote I/O communication interrupted station. Note 3: System warning

Z57 SYSTEM WARNING 00xx 0000 ↑ 001x : When the expansion cassette (HR437) is not mounted, a

program memory capacity exceeding 1280m was designated.

002x : When the APLC open option was validated, 5120m was designated for the program memory capacity.

00x1 : After formatting the program memory capacity to 1280m or more, the expansion cassette (HR437) was removed, or an expansion cassette (HR437) not used during formatting was mounted.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.6 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS

I - 32

1.6 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS

Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL (Error No.) (Axis name)

This error is displayed if the absolute position data is lost in the absolute position detection system.

Error No. Details Remedy Zero point

initialization

Alarm reset when

power is turned OFF

Servo alarm No.

0001 Zero point initialization is incomplete. Otherwise, the spindle was removed.

Complete zero point initialization.

Required - -

0002 The absolute position reference point data saved in the NC has been destroyed.

Input the parameters. If the reference point data cannot be restored‚ perform zero point initialization.

(Required) - -

0003 The parameters used to detect the absolute position have been changed. #1003 iunit #2201 PC1 #1016 iout #2202 PC2 #1017 rot #2218 PIT #1018 ccw #2219 RNG1 #1040 M_inch #2220 RNG2 #2049 type #2225 MTYP

Correctly set the parameters. Turn the power on again‚ and perform zero point initialization.

Required - -

0004 The zero point initialization point is not at the grid position.

Reperform zero point initialization.

Required - -

0005 Restoration was possible with parameter input in the above No.0002 state.

Turn the power on again‚ and operation will be possible.

Not required

- -

0080 The absolute value data was lost, because the multi-rotation counter data in the detector was incorrect, etc.

Replace the detector and complete zero point initialization.

Required - (9E) etc.

0101 The power was turned ON again after the servo alarm No. 25 displayed.


Required - (25)

0106 The power was turned ON again after the servo alarm No. E3 displayed.


Required - (E3)

Note: To release alarm "Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL", enter the parameter data output when

establishing the absolute position and turn ON the power again. For the rotation axis, however, the alarm cannot be released by entering the parameter data.


I - 33

Z71 DETECTOR ERROR (Error No.) (Axis name)

This alarm is displayed if an error is found in the detector for the absolute position detection system.

Error No. Details Remedy Zero point

initialization

Alarm reset when

power is turned OFF

Servo alarm No.

0001 The backup voltage in the absolute position detector dropped.

Replace the battery‚ check the cable connections‚ and check the detector. Turn the power ON again‚ and perform zero point initialization.

Required - (Z70-0101 displays after power is turned ON again.)

25

0003 Communication with the absolute position detector was not possible.

Check and replace the cables‚ card or detector. Turn the power ON again‚ and perform zero point initialization.

(Required) Only when detector is replaced.

Reset 91

0004 The absolute position data fluctuated when establishing the absolute position.



Reset 93

0005 An error was found in the serial data from the absolute position detector.



Reset 92

0006 Servo alarm E3 Absolute position counter warning

Operation is possible until the power is turned off.

(Required) When power is turned ON again.

Reset (Z70-0106 displays after power is turned ON again.)

E3

0007 Initial communication with the absolute position detector was not possible.



Reset 18


I - 34

Z72 COMPARE ERROR (Alarm No.) (Axis name)

This alarm is displayed if an error is detected when comparing the detector's absolute position and controller coordinate values in the absolute position system.


Z73 ABS. WARNING (Warning No.) (Axis name)

This displays a warning in the absolute position detection system.


0001 Servo alarm 9F Battery voltage drop

The battery voltage dropped or a cable is broken. Absolute position initialization is not required.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.7 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP

I - 35

1.7 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP

EMG EMERGENCY ∗∗∗∗ Error items Refer to the explanations for details.


PLC The user PLC has entered the emergency stop state during the sequence process.

• Investigate and remove the cause of the user PLC emergency stop.

EXIN The emergency stop input signal is significant (open).

• Cancel the emergency stop input signal.

• Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken.

SRV An alarm occurred in the servo system causing an emergency stop.

• Investigate and remove the cause of the servo alarm.

STOP The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not running.

• Check if the rotary switch CS2 on the top of the controller front panel is set to 1.

• Check if the PLC edit file save screen (onboard function) [4RUN/SP] (run/stop) switch is turned ON.

SPIN Spindle amplifier not mounted The spindle amplifier is not mounted.

• Cancel the causes of the other emergency stop.

• Check emergency stop signal input in the spindle amplifier.

PC_H High-speed PC processing abnormal • Check the sequence program. (To stop monitoring the high-speed PC processing temporarily, set 1 in #1219 aux03 bit1. Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure.)

PARA Setting of the door open II fixed device is illegal. The dog signal random assignment parameter setting is illegal.

• Specify the #1155 DOOR_m and #1156 DOOR_s parameters correctly. (When the door open II fixed device is not used, set #1155 DOOR_m and #1156 DOOR_s to 100.)

• Correctly set the #2073 zrn_dog, #2074 H/W_OT+, #2075 H/W_OT-and #1226 aux 10 bit 5 parameters.

LINK If the FROM/TO instruction is not executed within 500 ms, an emergency stop occurs.

• Try to execute the FROM or TO instruction one or more times every 500 ms.

* Measure the time in which no interrupt request is issued from MELSEC and store the result in the R register.

R1880: Current time-out counter R1881: Counter for maximum

time-out after power-on R1882: Counter for maximum

time-out after system start-up (backed up)

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.7 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP

I - 36


LINK MELSEC is held in error and reset states.

• Check the MELSEC states.

The contents of MELSEC-specific code area in buffer memory have been destroyed.

• Check the MELSEC states.

PLC serial link communication has stopped. Note: When WAIT is entered for the

PLC serial link, only the preparation sequence has been established before the communication stops. Therefore, it is supposed that the basic specification parameters or serial link parameters #1902 and #1903 are incorrect or the #1909 set-time "Tout (ini)" is too short.

• Check that HR571 card wiring and external sequencer transmission are normal.

• Check the diagnostic screen for link communication errors.

• Check whether the basic specification parameters or serial link parameters are specified correctly.

WAIT The preparation sequence is not sent from the master station. Otherwise, the contents of the received preparation sequence are inconsistent with those of the parameters, so that the usual sequence cannot be started. Note: When LINK is also entered for

the PLC serial link, refer to "Note" in the section, "LINK".

• Check that the HR571 card rotary switch and wiring and the external sequencer transmission are normal.

• Check the diagnostic screen for link communication errors.

XTEN The HR571 card operates abnormally or the rotary switch is set incorrectly.

• Check the HR571 card rotary switch and replace the HR571 card if required.

LAD The user PLC (ladder sequence) has an illegal code.

• Check the user PLC (ladder sequence) to see if it uses illegal device numbers or constants.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.8 AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS

I - 37

1.8 AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS

Display example

S01 AUX SERVO ALM

Axis No. 1 to 4

Alarm information (Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information)

(1) S01 AUX SERVO ALM

Alarm information Details Remedy

0011 PCB error 1 An error occurred in the amplifier's internal PCB.

• Replace servo amplifier.

0013 Software processing timeout, clock error

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal reference clock.


Motor type error • Use a correct amplifier and motor combination.

Motor type, detector type error

Detector initial communication error.

• Connect correctly. • Replace the motor. • Replace or repair cable.

0016

Detector CPU error • Replace the motor (detector).

0017 PCB error (A/D conversion initial error)

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal A/D converter.


Absolute position lost

An error occurred in the detector's internal absolute position data.

0025

• Turn the power ON for 2 to 3 minutes while the alarm is occurring, and then turn the power ON again.

• Replace the battery, and initialize the absolute position again.

0034 CRC error An error occurred in the communication with the NC.

• Take countermeasures against noise.

0036 Communication timeout, NC down

Communication with the NC was cut off.

• Connect correctly. • Turn the NC power ON. • Replace the amplifier or NC.

0037 Parameter error (Regenerative resistance error)

The parameter setting value is incorrect.

• Set the parameter correctly.

0038 Frame error An error occurred in the communication with the NC.


0039 INFO error Undefined data was transferred from the NC.

• Change the NC software version to a compatible version.


I - 38



0011 PCB error 1 (drive circuit error)

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal PCB.


0013 Software processing timeout, clock error

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal reference clock.


0015 EEROM error A write error occurred to the EEROM in the amplifier.


0017 PCB error (A/D conversion error)

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal A/D converter.


0018 PCB error (LSI error)

An error occurred in the amplifier's internal LSI.


0020 Detector error An error occurred in the communication between the servo amplifier and detector.

• Connect correctly. • Replace or repair cable.

0024 Ground fault detection

A ground fault of the output was detected when the power was turned ON.

• Repair the ground fault section.

• Replace the cable or motor.



0010 Undervoltage The power voltage is 160V or less.

• Review the power supply. • Replace the servo amplifier.

The tolerable regeneration power of the internal regenerative resistor or external regenerative option was exceeded.

• Set the parameter #002 correctly.

• Connect correctly. • Lower the positioning

frequency. • Change the regenerative

option to a larger capacity. • Lower the load. • Review the power supply.

0030 Regeneration error

Regenerative transistor error • Replace the servo amplifier.

0031 Overspeed The motor's rotation speed exceeded the tolerable momentary speed.

• Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time constant.

• Review the gear ratio. • Replace the detector.

0032 Overcurrent A current exceeding the servo amplifier's tolerable current flowed.

• Repair the wiring. • Replace the servo amplifier. • Take countermeasures

against noise.


I - 39


0033 Overvoltage The voltage of the converter in the servo amplifier was 400V or more.

• Wire correctly. • Replace the servo amplifier. • For the internal regenerative

resistor, replace the amplifier. • For the external regenerative

option, replace the regenerative option.

0046 Motor overheating

An operation state causing the motor to overheat continued.

• Reduce the motor load. • Review the operation pattern.

0050 Overload 1 The servo amplifier or servomotor overload protection function activated.

• Reduce the motor load. • Review the operation pattern.• Change to a motor or amplifier

with large output. • Change the setting of the

automatic tuning response characteristics.

• Correct the connection. • Replace the servomotor.

0051 Overload 2 The max. output current flowed for several seconds due to a machine collision or overload.

• Review the operation pattern.• Change the setting of the

automatic tuning response characteristics.

• Correct the connection. • Replace the servomotor.

0052 Excessive error A position deflection exceeding the excessive error detection setting value occurred.

• Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time constant.

• Increase the torque limit value.• Review the power facility

capacity. • Review the operation pattern.• Replace the servomotor. • Connect correctly. • Repair or replace the cable.


I - 40

(4) S52 AUX SERVO WRN

Alarm information

Details Remedy

0092 Battery voltage drop

The absolute position detection battery voltage dropped.

• Mount a battery. • Replace the battery and

initialize the absolute position.

00E0 Over-regeneration warning

The regeneration power may have exceeded the tolerable range of the built-in regenerative resistor or external regenerative option.

• Lower the positioning frequency.

• Change the regenerative option to a larger one.

• Lower the load.

00E1 Overload warning

The overload alarm 1 could occur.

• Refer to the items for S03 0050.

00E3 Absolute position counter warning

There is an error in the absolute position detector internal data.


• Replace the servomotor.

00E9 Main circuit OFF warning

The servo ON signal was input while the main circuit power was OFF. The contactor operation is faulty.

• Turn ON the main circuit power.

(5) Z70 AUX POS. ERR

Alarm information

Details Cause Remedy

0001 Zero point initialization incomplete

The zero point (reference point) has not been initialized in the absolute position system.

• Initialize the zero point (reference point).

0002 Absolute position data lost

The absolute position coordinate data in the amplifier has been lost.

• Initialize the zero point (reference point).

0003 Absolute position system related parameter error

The absolute position system related parameters have been changed or lost.

• Correctly set the parameters and then initialize the zero point (reference point).

(6) Z71 AUX DETEC. ERR

Alarm information


0001 Absolute position memory battery voltage drop

The data in the detector has been lost. Battery voltage drop. Detector cable wire breakage or looseness.

• Check the battery and detector cable and then initialize the zero point (reference point).


I - 41

(7) Z73 AUX SYSTEM WRN

Alarm information


0001 Absolute position memory battery voltage warning

Battery voltage drop. Detector cable wire breakage or looseness.

• Check the battery and detector cable. The zero point does not need to be initialized.

0003 Absolute position counter warning

An error occurred in the detector's absolute position counter.

• Replace the detector.

(8) M00 AUX OPER. ALM

Alarm information


0001 Near-point dog length insufficient

When executing dog-type reference point, the zero point return speed is too fast or the dog length is too short.

• Lower the zero point return speed or increase the dog length.

0003 Reference point return direction illegal

When executing reference point return, the axis was moved in the opposite of the designated direction.

• Move the axis in the correct direction.

0004 External interlock The axis interlock function is valid.

• Cancel the interlock signal

0005 Internal interlock An interlock was established by the servo OFF function.

• Cancel the servo OFF.

0007 Soft limit The soft limit was reached. • Check the soft limit setting and machine position

0024 In absolute position alarm. Reference point return not possible.

Reference point return was executed during an absolute position alarm.

• Initialize the absolute position reference point and then fix the absolute position coordinates.

0025 In initializing absolute position. Reference point return not possible.

Reference point return was executed while initializing the absolute position.



I - 42

(9) M01 AUX OPER. ALM

Alarm information


0101 No operation mode

The operation mode is not designated, or the operation mode was changed during axis movement.

• Correctly designate the operation mode.

0103 Feedrate 0 The operation parameter's feedrate setting is zero. The operation parameter feedrate setting is zero. Or, the override is valid, and the override value is zero.

• Set a value other than zero in the feedrate setting or override value.

0160 Station No. designation illegal. Starting not possible.

A station No. exceeding the No. of indexed divisions was designated.

• Correctly designate the station No.

0161 Reference point return incomplete. Starting not possible.

Automatic/manual operation was started before reference point return was executed with the incremental system.

• Execute the reference point return.

0162 In initializing reference point. Starting not possible.

The start signal was input while initializing the absolute position reference point.

• Complete the absolute position reference point initialization.

0163 In absolute position alarm. Starting not possible.

The start signal was input during an absolute position alarm.


0164 In random positioning mode. Manual operation not possible.

The manual operation mode was started during the random positioning mode.

• Turn the random positioning mode OFF before switching to the manual operation mode.

0165 Uneven indexing station No. illegal. Starting not possible.

The commanded station No. was higher than 9 or the number of indexing stations during uneven indexing.

• Check the commanded station No. and the parameter "#100 station" setting.


I - 43

AUXILIARY AXIS MCP ALARMS

Y02 AUX SYSTEM ALM An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and auxiliary axis amplifier after the power was turned ON.


0050 Background error The software or hardware may be damaged. Contact the service center.

0051 0000 CRC error (10 times/910.2ms)

0001 CRC error (2 continuous times)

0002 Reception timing error (2 continuous times)

××03 Data ID error (2 continuous times) ××: Axis No.

××04 No. of reception frames error (2 continuous times) ××: Axis No.

A communication error has occurred between the controller and amplifier. • Take measures against noise. • Check that the communication cable

connector between the controller and amplifier and one between the amplifiers are tight.

• Check whether the communication cable between the controller and amplifier and one between the amplifiers are disconnected.

• A driving amplifier may be faulty. Take a note of the 7-segment LED contents of each driving amplifier and report to the Service Center.

Y03 AUX AMP UNEQU. The amplifier is not correctly connected.

Check the auxiliary axis amplifier mounting state. • Check the end of the cable wiring. • Check the cable for broken wires. • Check the connector insertion. The auxiliary axis amplifier input power is not being input. The auxiliary axis amplifier axis No. switch is illegal.

Error No. Details

Axis No.1 to 4 bit correspondence (bit 0 : 1st axis, bit 1: 2nd axis, bit 2: 3rd axis, bit 3: 4th axis)

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.9 COMPUTER LINK ERRORS

I - 44

1.9 COMPUTER LINK ERRORS

Error Message

Error No.

Details Remedy

-4 Communication ends with timeout.

CNC has a 248-byte receive buffer.

The time during which CNC receives

248 bytes exceeds the "TIME-OUT"

value set in the I/O device parameter.

(1) Set a greater timeout value in the input/output device parameter.

(2) Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not the HOST transmits data in response to DC1 from CNC (data request).

(3) Check whether or not start code of computer link parameter is set to 0.

-10 HOST ER (CNC DR) signal is not turned ON.

(1) Check whether or not the cable is disconnected from the connector.

(2) Check whether or not the cable is broken.

(3) Check whether or not the HOST power is turned ON.

-15 Communication ends with parity H. (1) Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not the data to be transmitted to CNC is ISO code.

-16 Communication ends with parity V. (1) Recheck the data to be transmitted to CNC.

L01

DNC ERROR

-17 Although CNC transmits DC3 (request to stop data transfer) to the HOST, it receives data of 10 bytes or more from the HOST, thus terminates communication. When CNC is transmitting data to the HOST, it receives data of 10 bytes or more from the HOST.

(1) Recheck the software as to whether or not the HOST stops transmitting data within 10 bytes after receiving DC3.

(2) Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not the HOST transmits data such as a command or header to CNC during receiving a work program.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.10 USER PLC ALARMS

I - 45

1.10 USER PLC ALARMS

Sub-status Message

1 2 Details Remedy

U01 No PLC

- - The ladder is not a GPPW ladder or PLC4B ladder. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG)

will be applied.

Download the ladder of the format selected with the PLC environment selection parameters (bit selection #51/bit 4).

0x0010 - Scan time error The scan time is 1 second or longer.

Edit the ladder size to a smaller size.

0x0040 - Ladder operation mode illegal A ladder different from the designated mode was downloaded. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG)

will be applied.

Download the ladder having the same format as when the power was reset or turned ON.

0x0080 - GPPW ladder code error (Note) Emergency stop (EMG)

will be applied.

Download the correct GPPW format ladder.

0x008x - PLC4B ladder code error An illegal circuit was found in the PLC4B ladder. bit1: PC medium-speed circuit

illegal bit2: PC high-speed circuit illegal(Note) Emergency stop (EMG)

will be applied.

Download the correct PLC4B format ladder.

0x0400 Number of ladder steps

Software illegal interrupt The ladder process stopped abnormally due to an illegal software command code. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG)

will be applied.

Turn the power ON again. If the error is not reset, download the correct ladder.

Software exceptional interrupt The ladder process stopped abnormally due to a bus error, etc.

bit 0: BIN command operation error

bit 1: BCD command operation error

Refer to the methods for using the BCD and BIN function commands.

U10 Illegal PLC

0x800x Number of ladder steps

bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET command error

bit7: IRET command execution error

(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) is applied for bit 6/7.

Turn the power ON again. If the error is not reset, download the correct ladder.

U50 Stop PLC

The ladder is stopped. Start the ladder.

(Note) The number of ladder steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of error occurrence steps because of the ladder timing. Use this as a guideline of the occurrence place.

1. LIST OF ALARMS 1.11 NETWORK SERVICE ERRORS

I - 46

1.11 NETWORK SERVICE ERRORS


N001 Modem init err

• There is an error in the modem connection when the power is turned ON.

• Check the connection between the NC and modem, connection port and modem power.

N002 Redial over

• The dial transmission failed more than the designated No. of redial times.

• Wait a while, and then transmit again.

N003 TEL unconnect

• The phone line is not connected. • Check the modem's phone line connection.

N004 Net com. error

• An error other than the above errors occurred during communication.

• Note down the circumstances under which this error occurred, and contact the Service Center.

N005 Bad net com.

• The modem connection port is being used for another function such as input/output.

• The modem connection port settings are incorrect.

• Quit using the modem connection port with the other function, and then turn the power ON again.

• Check the modem connection port settings.

2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS

I - 47

2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

If a setting operation error occurs on any setting and display unit screen‚ the error No. EOO and a message describing the details of the error will display in the line above the data setting area or the menu display area.

2.1 OPERATION ERRORS

∆: Message requiring resetting and restarting ×: Message requiring restarting after canceling error conditions


Error No. Error message Details

E01 SETTING ERROR

∆ • The setting data is incorrect. An alphabetic character was set when only number can be set‚ etc.

• Data was input without setting number (#). (Word editing)

• Even though no retrieval data was set, menu key [ ↓ ] or [ ↑ ] was pressed.

• Even though no data is stored in edit buffers, menu key "Replace" was pressed.

• One of the following characters was entered as the first character of the retrieval data and edit buffers: 0 to 9, ". ", " " (space), "+", "-", "=", "*", "[ ] ", and ' " " '.

• When the incremental detection system was used, the parameter (#0 absolute position setting) was set on the absolute position setting screen.

• The data input for the standard parameter setting or during execution of formatting is not "Y" or "N".

• A value from 4 to 10 was specified for #1043 lang. • Even though no language data exists, its output and

comparison were attempted. Check the numbers (0253 and 0254) of the language data to be output.

• When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area is the SRAM area, the setup parameter #1060 SETUP was set to "20".

• When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area is the SRAM area, writing of the machine manufacturer macro program was attempted on PROGRAM COPY screen.


I - 48


E02 DATA OVER ∆ • The setting data exceeded the setting range. • The compensation data specification exceeded the range

when inputting the tool offset data on tape‚ so that block could not be input. Press the INPUT key again while the input screen is displayed‚ and the input will continue from the next block.

• When workpiece coordinate offsets are measured, the calculation results given by pressing the CALC key are exceeding the specified range. Correctly specify the tool length or the wear data of cutting edges used for the calculation.

• #1003 iunit was set to D when the least command increment 0.01µm option was not available.

• When there was no option, 2 or more was specified for #1043 lang. Otherwise, an option was added and 23 or more was specified for #1043 lang.

E03 No. NOT FOUND ∆ • The corresponding setting No. (#) was not found. This error occurs if a setting No. not found on the screen was set and input‚ or if a variable No. not found in the specifications was set and input for the common variables.

• When the tool length was measured manually, a nonexisting tool wear compensation number was specified and the sensor was turned ON. Specify the R register of the offset number correctly.

E04 DEV. NOT READY

× • The input/output unit power is not ON. • The cable is disconnected. • Setting of the transfer speed (baud rate) does not agree.


I - 49


E05 NOT ACCEPTABLE

× • The PLC timer cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 1 is set to 1.)

• The PLC counter cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 0 is set to 1.)

• The tool registration data setting is prohibited. (When special relay E71 is valid by the PLC.)

• Setting from the tool life management screen is prohibited. • Absolute position setting screen's #1 "ORIGIN" and #2

"ZERO" cannot be set when #0 "INIT SET" is invalid. • The total of axes set in #1001 SYS_ON‚ #1002 axisno is

illegal. Set so that the total No. of axes is within the specifications range for the target model.

• #1037 cmdtyp is not within the setting range. • The INPUT key was pressed to perform search for the

program that is in background edit status on the word edit screen.

• The menu keys (Replace and Insert) on the word edit screen were manipulated when a running program is displayed (PDISP signal: ON).

• An attempt was made to set MDI data in an MDI setting lock state (the MDI setting lock parameter is specified with 0 and a non-MDI mode is valid).

• Language data in display selection status was entered. Change the display selection status once before entering the data. (#1043 lang)

• When the manual value command protection (#1228 aux12/bit7) function is valid, the first monitor screen was manipulated by manual command operation (M, S, and T keys).

E06 NO SPEC × • The menu key for a function not in the specifications was pressed.

• A parameter not in the specifications was set. • A language that was not added as an option was selected.

(#1043 lang) • Set up parameter #1049 mmac_R was set to "1" when the

machine manufacturer macro option was not valid. • Set up parameter #1060 SETUP was set to "20" when the

machine manufacturer macro option was not valid. • Writing of the machine manufacturer macro program with

the PROGRAM COPY screen was attempted when the machine manufacturer macro option was not valid.


I - 50


E07 RESET END ∆ • The input/output operations were forcibly stopped by reset‚ etc. (including EMG).

E08 PHYSICAL ERR × • The input/output parameter setting or input/output unit side setting was incorrect.

E09 TIME OUT × • The input/output unit parameter "#9116 TIME-OUT SET" setting was too short.

• There is no EOB code in the machining program. E10 MEMORY OVER × • The program cannot be written because the memory

capacity is exceeded. • This error occurs when the MDI data setting on the MDI

screen exceeds 500 characters‚ or when saving MDl‚ editing or making a program on the edit screen‚ input on the data input/output screen‚ program copy‚ etc.

E11 PROG. No. DUPLI

∆ • When registering a machining program in the memory‚ a program with the same No. as the designated program No. was found in the memory. Refer to the program file to find a program No. not being used‚ and reset the program No.

• A program with the same No. as the machining program to be copied from the memory was found in the IC card.

• This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screen or during creation of a program in the edit screen.

E12 FILE ENTRY OVER

× • When registering a machining program in the memory‚ the No. of programs determined in the specifications is exceeded‚ preventing registration. This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screen‚ creation of a program in the edit screen‚ data input in the data input/output screen‚ and program copy.

E13 NB NOT FOUND ∆ • The block with the designated sequence No. or block No. does not exist in the designated program.

E14 PROG. NOT FOUND

∆ • The designated program is not found in the memory. • The corresponding program No. was not found with search

of tape memory during graphic check. E15 EDIT LOCK B × • An operation (edit‚ input/output‚ buffer correction‚ etc.)

inhibited for machining program B was attempted. E16 EDIT LOCK C × • An operation (edit‚ input/output‚ buffer correction‚ etc.)

inhibited for machining program C was attempted. E17 PARITY H ERR × • A parity H error was detected during data input‚ etc.

• Check the paper tape or input device. This error may occur if the paper tape is dirtied with oil‚ etc.

E18 PARITY V ERR × • A parity V error was detected during data input. • Check the paper tape to see whether the number of

characters in the significant information section of a block is odd.

• Also check the state (cable wiring‚ noise measures‚ etc.) of the connected equipment.


I - 51


E20 OVER RUN ERR × • The control method using the DC codes‚ etc.‚ for the input/output operation is incorrect.

• Check the settings of the input/output unit parameters‚ and the settings on the input/output unit side‚ and reset if necessary.

E21 PROGRAM RUNNING

× • Deletion of a machining program was attempted during operation.

• Search was attempted during operation. • Change of data such as parameters was attempted during

operation. • Start of graphic check was attempted during operation. • When using the two systems, the program being buffer

corrected was running with the other system. • Erasing or inputting (IC → NC) of a program in the IC card

being used was attempted. • Formatting of the IC card was attempted during automatic

start. • Accessing to the host computer was attempted during

automatic operation. E22 CODE CHANGE

ERR × • There was an illegal code on the paper tape.

E24 PLC RUN × • Data input/output or comparison was attempted when the PLC was not stopped.

• Analog output adjustment was attempted when the PLC was not stopped.

• An attempt was made to input or output language data during PLC execution.

• When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area was set to the FROM area, formatting of the FROM area (#1060 SETUP "20") was attempted when the PLC was not stopped, writing of the machine manufacturer macro program was attempted on the PROGRAM COPY screen, or input of the macro program was attempted.

(Measures) Stop the PLC. • Set the control unit rotary switch to 1. • Set the onboard file screen RUN/STOP setting to 1.

E25 DATA MEMORY ERR

× • When inputting the tool offset data onto tape‚ an offset type exceeding the specifications range was designated‚ and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen‚ the input will continue from the next block.

E26 NO CHARACTERS

∆ • The designated character string was not found from the block displayed on the screen to the end of the program when searching with data search in the edit screen. Press the INPUT key again' and the search will start at the head of the program.

E35 COMPARE ERROR

× • An inconsistency was found in the paper tape and memory data during comparison.

E40 OP MODE ERROR

× • Continuous or step graphic check was not possible because the operation mode was illegal.


I - 52


E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

FILE ERR FILE OPEN ERR FILE CLOSE ERR FILE SEEK ERR FILE READ ERR FILE DELETE ERR FILE INSERT ERR

× • If one of these errors occurs‚ the editing or input/output operations cannot be continued. Contact the Service Center. As for E50‚ a classification No. will display at the end of the message. Inform the service center of this No. as well.

E60

IOP ERR × A classification number is displayed after the message for E60. Refer to the section shown in parentheses‚ and remedy the problem.

E60 lOP ERROR - 2 (Port already being used) E60 lOP ERROR - 4 (E09 TIME OUT) E60 lOP ERROR - 5 (E08 PHYSICAL ERR) E60 lOP ERROR - 7 (E07 RESET END) E60 lOP ERROR - 10 (E04 DEV. NOT READY) E60 lOP ERROR - 15 (E17 PARITY H ERR) E60 lOP ERROR - 16 (E18 PARITY V ERR) E60 lOP ERROR - 17 (E20 OVER RUN ERR) E60 lOP ERROR - 18 (E22 CODE CHANGE ERR)

E60 IOP ERROR - 20 (framing and H/W errors) • Setting for the bit length is incorrect. (Baud rate, stop bit,

and character length) Check the setting of the I/O device system and its parameters and set it again.

• Check the situations of the connected devices (cable wiring and noise measures).

• Data was input/output or the tape search was executed during the host link. Set 0 in #8109 HOST LINK, and then set 1 again before performing the cycle start. (IOP error -2)

• The host link parameter was turned ON during connecting to the Anshin-net. Turn the Anshin-net valid OFF. (IOP error -2)

• When #10812 Anshin-net/ Machine builders network system valid is set to 1, the modem connection port of the Anshin-net or machine builders network system is occupied. Perform inputting or outputting using a port other than the modem connection port. (IOP error -2)

• When connecting the GX Developer (when the bit selection parameter #6451 bit5 is set to 1), the port 2 of the RS232C communication port is always used. Use a port other than the port 2 of the RS232C communication port. (IOP error -2)


I - 53


E62 I/O PARAM ERR ∆ • The "EIA code" data set for I/O parameter is of an unusable code.

• The unusable codes are those used as the EIA standard codes and the even hole codes.

E64 PROGRAM No. ERR

∆ • The same No. as the program No. designated for program copy was found in the memory.

• During tape input‚ the first character of the machining program block is the program No. address "O" or "L".

E65 PROG. No. DUPLl

∆ • During tape input‚ the same No. as the specified program was found in the memory.

E66 NO PROG. NUMBER

∆ • During tape input‚ the program No. was not found on the paper tape‚ and a program No. was not designated on the screen's data setting area. Set the program No.‚ and input again.

E69 PROG. CHECK MODE

× • Search (operation search) was attempted during program check (continuous or step).

• Retry search after the program check is completed‚ or after resetting the program search

E70 TOOL No. DUPLl

∆ • A tool No. already registered was newly registered on the tool life management screen.

E71 TOOL ENTRY OVER

× • Registration of data exceeding the max. No. of registerable tools was attempted on the tool life management screen.

• When inputting the tool offset data onto tape‚ a compensation number exceeding the specifications range was specified‚ and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen' the input will continue from the next block.

E73 CAN'T CALCULATE

× • The coordinate value of the hole center cannot be obtained.

• Reset the measurement point, which must not applied to the following conditions.

The measurement A point is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The measurement B is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The slope of the line through A and C point is the same as the slope of the line through B and C point.

E74 MENU IMPOSSIBLE

× • Press the operation menu "= Input" or "+ input" during the tool measurement.

• Press the operation menu "= Input" or "+ input" during the manual value command mode.

• Press the screen selection menu on which "↓" is displayed during the tool measurement.

• Press the screen selection menu on which "↓" is displayed during the manual value command mode.


I - 54


E75 TLM ILL. SIGNAL

• The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.

• After the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated, the sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement.

• The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100µm from the final entry start position.

• Turn the tool measurement mode signal input OFF, or turn the sensor signal OFF and move the axis in a safe direction.

Note) This display will be erased when another screen is opened.

The display will not be erased even if the tool measurement mode signal input is turned OFF, or if the axis is moved in a direction away from the sensor.

E76 TOOL No. ERROR

× • The offset No. to be used for workpiece coordinate system offset data measurement was invalid. Restart from tool selection. (Correctly specify the R register that contains the offset number.)

E77 AXIS No. REF-RET

× • Zero point return has not been completed for the axis being measured. Return the axis to the zero point.

E78 AX UNMATCH (TLM)

× • During movement of two or more axes‚ the sensor turned ON and the tool length was measured. Keep off from the sensor and perform the measurement for one axis at a time.

E79 NO REF-RTN (TLM)

× • The sensor turned on for an axis that has not completed dog-type reference point return‚ and the tool length was measured. Return the axis to the zero point.

E80 TOP SEARCH ERR

× • The program head search (unmodal type search) was not executed before type 2 (standard specification) restart search was executed for program restart. Set the type to unmodal, search for the head of the program, and then search for the restart block with type 2.

E82 ALREADY RESEARCH

× • After completing the type 1 or type 2 search for program restart, the unmodal type, type 1 or type 2 search was attempted again.

If program restart is continued (if the axis is return to the restart position with automatic or manual operations), the program will restart from the block searched for first.

To search again, cancel the previous search by resetting, and then search again.

E84 CAN'T IN/OUT × • An attempt was made to input a parameter in the setup parameter locked state. Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer.

• The parameter "#1925 EtherNet" of the high-speed program server function is set to 0.

• When writing data to the IC card, the file name is illegal. (Exceeding 8 characters of file name + 3 characters of extension.)

• Input of maintenance data from the host or IC card was attempted.


I - 55


E86 INPUT DATA ERR

× • When inputting the tool offset data‚ the data format was not correct‚ so that block could not be input.

• If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen‚ the input will continue from the next block.

• When data is read from parameter tape, its format is incorrect.

• The format of file written to the NC memory is illegal. E87 NOT EDIT

PROG. × • Playback edit was executed for a fixed cycle subprogram.

Playback edit of a fixed cycle subprogram is not possible.E88 CAN'T ADD

BLOCK × • Playback edit cannot be executed unless the block being

edited with playback is displayed to the end (EOB) on the left side of the machining program display area. Press the cursor key ↓ ‚ and display the whole block to the end. Then‚ input the data.

E91 MODE ERROR (PBK)

× • G90 was set when "PB_G90" was OFF. • G91 was set when "PB_G90" was ON.

E98 CAN'T RESEARCH

× • When restarting the program, the type 3 restart search was attempted with a program containing no T command. Check the program.

• When restarting the program, the T command corresponding to the type 3 restart search was not found in the program. Check the program.

• When restarting a program for 2-systems, restart search was performed simultaneously for the 1st and 2nd systems, and then the 2nd system was searched again.

If program restart is continued (if the axis is return to the restart position with automatic or manual operations), the program will restart from the block searched for first.

To search again, cancel the previous search by resetting, and then search again.

• When carrying our program restart, type 3 restart search was attempted while the machine was at the negative (-) side of the restart limit parameters. Manually move the machine to the positive (+) side of the restart limit parameters, and search again.

E165 AUX RUNNING × • The keys other than Function/Menu/Previous page/Next page were pressed in Auxiliary monitor screen during auxiliary axis operation.

E190 FORE EDITING × • An attempt was made to perform background search for the program that is in foreground search status. (Word editing)

E191 NOT COM. SEARCH

× • Operation search was attempted in tape mode.

E200 ADJUST ERROR

× • The hardware status can't be read correctly‚ so automatic adjustment was not possible.

• Check the remote l/O unit. • A Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT occurred. • Adjust manually. • Unit defect (replace unit)


I - 56


E201 UNIT NOT EQUIP

× • The analog output unit is not mounted. • Confirm the remote l/O unit. • Prepare a unit having analog output. • Check the connection (power and signal wires) • Unit defect (replace unit)

E301 CONNECT ERROR

× • A socket connection attempt failed during Ethernet communication.

• Check the host address, the setting of the port No. and that the host computer is turned ON.

E302 LOGIN ERR × • A login attempt failed during Ethernet communication. Check the user name and password.

• Check the account settings, such as the home directory. E303 TIME OUT × • Transmission of a file with Ethernet communication ended

because of timeout. E311 DOWNLOAD

ERR × • An attempt to read a host file failed during Ethernet

communication. E312 UPLOAD ERR × • An attempt to write to a host file failed during Ethernet

communication. E313 NO FILE × • The file specified by host receive (host → IC) operation

during Ethernet communication is not found in the host. • The file specified by host send (IC → host) operation during

Ethernet communication is not found in the IC card. E314 FILE

DUPLICATE × • The file name specified to be stored by host receive (host

→ IC) operation during Ethernet communication already exists in the IC card.

• The file name specified to be loaded by host send (IC → host) operation during Ethernet communication already exists in the host.

E315 FILE WRITE ERR

× • An attempt to write to the IC card failed during Ethernet communication.

E316 FILE READ ERR × • An attempt to read a file from the IC card failed during Ethernet communication.

E317 MEMORY OVER × • IC card memory is full. • NC memory is full.

E318 OVER FLOW ERR

× • A host directory contains too many files.

E319 DIRECTORY ERR

× • An attempt to move a directory failed. • In the IC card device, accessing a directory in the

nineteenth layer or more was attempted. E320 HR437

UNEQU × • When backup or writing of the expansion cassette into/from

the FROM, the expansion cassette (HR437) was not mounted in CBUS#1 or was incorrectly mounted.

• When backup or writing of the expansion cassette into/from the FROM, a card other than the expansion cassette (HR437) was mounted in CBUS#1.

• When the program memory was formatted to 1280m or more, the expansion cassette (HR437) was not mounted in CBUS#1.

2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES

I - 57

2.2 OPERATOR MESSAGES

The following messages indicate the status of the setting and display functions‚ and are not operation errors. They are mainly used to show that operation is normal‚ and serve as guides for the following operations. There is no classification by numbers.

2.2.1 SEARCH AND OPERATION RELATED

Message Message details

SEARCH EXECUTION • Search is being executed normally.

SEARCH COMPLET • Search was completed normally.

BUFFER EDIT The buffer is being corrected. This appears when the cursor or a tab key is pressed and the buffer correction mode is entered. This is erased when INPUT is pressed.

CAN'T BUF. EDIT When using 2 systems, the program being buffer corrected is being used by the other system. Buffer correcting of a machine manufacturer macro program was attempted.

DATA PROTECTING Buffer correcting is prohibited since the data protection key 3 is valid.


I - 58

2.2.2 MDI/EDITING RELATED


MDI NO SETTING • Only display of MDI data (no execution)

MDI SETTING COMPLETE • The MDI data setting has been completed (execution is now possible).

MDI ENTRY COMPLETE • The MDI data was saved in the memory with the specified program No.

MDI RUNNING • The NC is operating with an MDI program‚ and the MDI data cannot be corrected.

PUSH KEY SERCH/PROG • Status in which no programs to be edited have been called on the editing screen. To edit‚ press the SEARCH or PROGRAM edit key.

EDITING • The details of a program are being edited on the screen. Press INPUT to write the data in the memory.

PROGRAM RUNNING • A machining program to be edited is currently being run with memory operation‚ and cannot be edited.

DELETE? (Y/N) • Waiting for a key entry (whether to delete the program) in word edit status (when the background search menu is selected)

BACK GROUND EDITING • Background edit mode

EDIT POSSIBLE • Editing can be performed in foreground edit mode.

EDIT IMPOSSIBLE • Editing cannot be performed in foreground edit mode. • This state also occurs during feed hold or fixed cycle mode

(single-block stop).

WORD SEARCH FIN • The word matching the search data was searched on word editing.


I - 59

2.2.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT RELATED


DATA IN EXECUTION • Data is being read without error from the paper tape.

DATA WRITING IN PROGRESS

• Data has been entered normally and the input data is being written to the ROM.

DATA IN COMPLETE • Data has been stored without error.

COMPARE EXECUTION • Comparison is being executed without error.

COMPARE COMPLETE • Comparison has completed without error.

DATA OUT EXECUTION • Data is being output without error.

DATA OUT COMPLETE • Data has been output without error.

ERASE EXECUTION • Data is being erased without error.

ERASE COMPLETE • Data has been erased without error.

COPY EXECUTION • The machining program is being copied without error.

COPY COMPLETE • The machining program has been copied without error.

CONDENSE EXECUTION • The machining program is being condensed without error.

CONDENSE COMPLETE • The machining program has been condensed without error.

MERGE EXECUTION • The machining program is being merged without error.

MERGE COMPLETE • The machining program has been merged without error.

No. CHANGE EXECUTION • The machining program No. is being changed without error.

No. CHANGE COMPLETE • The machining program No. has been changed without error.


I - 60

2.2.4 S-ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT RELATED


ADJUST EXECUTION • Analog output adjustment is being executed without error.

ADJUST COMPLETE • Analog output adjustment has completed without error.

2.2.5 AUXILIARY AXIS


CONTINUE Y/N • Type "Y" or "N" to specify whether to perform operation.

BACKUP EXECUTION • The auxiliary axis parameters are being backed up in SRAM.

BACKUP COMPLETE • The backup of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM has been completed.

AUX. WRITING EXEC. • The auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM is being written to MR-J2-CT.

WRITE COMPLETE • The writing of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM to MR-J2-CT has been completed.

ABS POS RESTORED • The absolute position in SRAM has been restored in MR-J2-CT.

2.2.6 PARAMETER BACKUP RELATED


BACKUP EXEC. Y/N Type "Y" or "N" to specify whether to perform the operation.

BACKUP EXECUTION The parameters are being backed up.

BACKUP COMPLTE Backup of the parameters has been completed.

RESTORE EXEC. Y/N Type "Y" or "N" to specify whether to perform the operation.

RESTORE EXECUTION The parameters are being restored.

RESTORE COMPLETE Restoration of the parameters has been completed.


I - 61

2.2.7 OTHERS


DATA PROTECTING • The data protection key is valid‚ and the various data cannot be set or erased‚ etc.

BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N) • Waiting for the key input of standard parameter setting (Y/N).

BASE PARA EXECUTION • The standard parameters are being set.

EXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N) • Waiting for the key input of execute format (Y/N).

FORMAT EXECUTION • Formatting is being executed.

SETUP COMPLETE • The simple setup has been completed. Setup with #1060 SETUP "1" has been completed. Formatting with #1060 SETUP "20" has been completed.

NON SETUP • Completed without executing simple setup. (When "N" has been set for both "BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N)" and "EXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N)".)

CONFIRM OPE? (Y/N) • Confirmation for erasing operating time or alarm history.

INPUT? (Y/N) • Waiting for the key input of tool length data by manual measurement.

V-ANALIZER EXEC. • Waveform display data cannot be output while waveform is

displayed.

ROM WRITE? (Y/N) • The system is waiting for a key input to indicate whether to write

the macro programs into the FROM.

DATA WRITING • The macro program is being written into the FROM.

WRITE COMPLETE • The macro program has been written into the FROM.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 62

3. PROGRAM ERROR

(The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.) These alarms occur during automatic operation‚ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors which occur‚ for instance‚ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.


P 10 EXCS. AXIS No. The number of axis addresses commanded in the same block exceeds the specifications.

• Divide the alarm block command into two.

• Check the specifications.

P 11 AXIS ADR. ERROR The axis address commanded by the program and the axis address set by the parameter do not match.

• Revise the axis names in the program.

P 20 DIVISION ERROR An axis command which cannot be divided by the command unit has been issued.


P 29 NOT ACCEPT CMND The normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the modal in which the normal line control is not acceptable.


P 30 PARITY H The number of holes per character on the paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for ISO code.

• Check the paper tape. • Check the tape puncher and tape reader.

P 31 PARITY V The number of characters per block on the paper tape is odd.

• Make the number of characters per block on the paper tape even.

• Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.

P 32 ADDRESS ERROR An address not listed in the specifications has been used.

• Check and revise the program address. • Check and correct the parameters

values. • Check the specifications.

P 33 FORMAT ERROR The command format in the program is not correct.


3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 63


G-CODE ERROR A G code not listed in the specifications has been used. An illegal G code was commanded during the coordinate rotation command (G68).

• Check and correct the G code address in the program.

P 34

G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the rotary tool axis No. (#1501 polyax) was set to "0". G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the tool axis was set to the linear axis (#1017 rot "0").

• Check the parameter setting values.

P 35 CMD-VALUE OVER The setting range for the addresses has been exceeded.


P 36 PROGRAM END ERR "EOR" has been read during tape and memory operation.

• Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end of the program.

• Enter the M99 command at the end of the subprogram.

P 37 PROG. NO. ZERO A zero has been specified for program and sequence numbers.

• The program numbers are designated across a range from 1 to 99999999.

• The sequence numbers are designated across a range from 1 to 99999.

P 39 NO SPEC ERR • A non-specified G code was specified.• The high-speed program server

operation specifications are not provided.


P 40 PREREAD BL. ERR When tool radius compensation is executed‚ there is an error in the pre-read block and so the interference check is disabled.

• Reconsider the program.

P 60 OVER CMP. LENG. The commanded movement distance is excessive. (Over 231)

• Reconsider the axis address command.

P 62 F-CMD. NOTHING • No feed rate command has been

issued. • There is no F command in the

cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation immediately after the G95 mode is commanded.

• The default movement modal command at power ON is G01. This causes the machine to move without a G01 command if a movement command is issued in the program, and an alarm results. Use an F command to specify the feedrate.

• Specify F with a thread lead command. P 65 NO G05P3 SPEC • Check the high-speed mode III

specifications.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 64


P 70 ARC ERROR • There is an error in the arc start and

end points as well as in the arc center.• The difference of the involute curve

through the start point and the end point is large.

• When arc was commanded, one of the two axes configuring the arc plane was a scaling valid axis.

• Check the numerical values of the addresses that specify the start and end points, arc center as well as the radius in the program.

• Check the "+" and "-" directions of the address numerical values.

P 71 ARC CENTER • The arc center is not sought during

R-specified circular interpolation. • The curvature center of the involute

curve cannot be obtained.

• Check the numerical values of the addresses in the program.

• Check whether the start point or end point is on the inner side of the base circle for involute interpolation. When carrying out tool radius compensation, check that the start point and end point after compensation are not on the inner side of the base circle for involute interpolation.

• Check whether the start point and end point are at an even distance from the center of the base circle for involute interpolation.

P 72 NO HELICAL SPEC A helical command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications.

• Check the helical specifications. • An Axis 3 command was issued by the

circular interpolation command. If there is no helical specification, the linear axis is moved to the next block.

P 90 NO THREAD SPEC A thread cutting command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications.


P 93 SCREW PITCH ERR The screw pitch has not been set correctly when the thread cutting command is issued.

• Issue the thread cutting command and then set the screw pitch command properly.

P100 NO CYLIND SPEC Cylindrical interpolation was commanded when the cylindrical interpolation specifications were not provided.


P111 PLANE CHG (CR) Plane selection commands (G17, G18, and G19) were issued when a coordinate rotation command (G68) was issued.

• Before issuing the plane selection commands, issue G68 and then G69 (coordinate rotation cancel).

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 65


P112 PLANE CHG (CC) • A plane selection command (G17‚

G18‚ G19) has been issued when the tool radius compensation command (G41‚ G42) or nose R compensation command (G41‚ G42‚ G46) is issued.

• The plane selection command was issued when nose R compensation is completed‚ there is no axial movement command after the G40 command‚ and the compensation has not been canceled.

• Issue the plane selection command after the tool radius compensation command or nose R compensation command has been canceled (issue axial movement command after the G40 cancel command).

P113 ILLEGAL PLANE The arc command axis is not on the selected plane.

• Issue arc command on the correctly selected plane.

P122 NO AUTO C-OVR An automatic corner override command (G62) has been issued though it is not included in the specifications.

• Check the specifications. • Delete the G62 command from the

program.

P130 2nd AUX. ADDR The 2nd miscellaneous function address specified in the program does not match that set by the parameter.

• Check and correct the 2nd miscellaneous function address in the program.

P131 NO G96 SPEC (No constant peripheral speed) The constant peripheral speed command (G96) was issued despite the fact that such a command does not exist in the specifications.

• Check the specifications. • Change from the constant peripheral

speed command (G96) to the rotation speed command (G97).

P132 SPINDLE S = 0 No spindle speed command has been specified.


P133 G96 P-No. ERR An invalid constant peripheral speed control axis has been specified.

• Reconsider the parameter specified for the constant peripheral speed control axis.

P134 G96 Clamp Err. The constant surface speed control command (G96) was issued without commanding the spindle speed clamp (G92/G50).

Press the reset key and carry out the remedy below. • Check the program. • Issue the G92/G50 command before the

G96 command. • Command the constant surface speed

cancel (G97) to switch to the rotation speed command.

(Applicable only to M65V series and M64 C version series)

P140 NO T-POS OFST The position compensation command (G45 to G48) specifications are not available.


3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 66

P141 PAT-ROT ERROR

Position compensation was commanded during the figure rotation or coordinate rotation command.


P142 T-OFFS G2 ERR A position compensation invalid arc command was commanded.


P150 NO R-CMP SPEC • Even though there were no tool

radius compensation specifications, tool radius compensation commands (G41 and G42) were issued.

• Even though there were no nose R compensation specifications, nose R compensation commands (G41, G42, and G46) were issued.


P151 G2‚ 3 CMP. ERR A compensation command (G40‚ G41‚ G42‚ G43‚ G44‚ G46) has been issued in the arc mode (G02‚ G03).

• Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid traverse command (G00) in the compensation command block or cancel block. (Set the modal to linear interpolation.)

P152 I.S.P NOTHING In interference block processing during execution of a tool radius compensation (G41 or G42) or nose R compensation (G41‚ G42‚ or G46) command‚ the intersection point after one block is skipped cannot be determined.


P153 I.F ERROR An interference error has arisen while the tool radius compensation command (G41‚ G42) or nose R compensation command (G41‚ G42‚ G46) was being executed.


P155 F-CYC ERR (CC) A fixed cycle command has been issued in the radius compensation mode.

• The radius compensation mode is established when a fixed cycle command is executed and so the radius compensation cancel command (G40) should be issued.

P156 BOUND DIRECT At the start of G46 nose R compensation‚ the compensation direction is undefined if this shift vector is used.

• Change the vector to that with which the compensation direction is defined.

• Exchange with a tool having a different tip point number.

P157 SIDE REVERSED During G46 nose R compensation‚ the compensation direction is inverted.

• Change the G command to that which allows inversion of the compensation direction (G00‚ G28‚ G30‚ G33‚ or G53).

• Exchange with a tool having a different tip point number.

• Turn ON the #8106 G46 inversion error avoidance parameter.

P158 ILLEGAL TIP P. During G46 nose R compensation‚ the tip point is illegal (other than 1 to 8).

• Change the tip point number to a legal one.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 67


P170 NO CORR. No. The compensation number (DOO‚ TOO‚ HOO) command was not given when the radius compensation (G41‚ G42‚ G43‚ G46) command was issued. Alternatively‚ the compensation number is larger than the number of sets in the specifications.

• Add the compensation number command to the compensation command block.

• Check the number of compensation number sets a correct it to a compensation number command within the permitted number of compensation sets.

P172 G10 L-No. ERR (G10 L-number error)

The L address command is not correct when the G10 command is issued.

• Check the address L-Number of the G10 command and correct the number.

P173 G10 P-No. ERR (G10 compensation error)

When the G10 command is issued‚ a compensation number outside the permitted number of sets in the specifications has been commanded for the compensation number command.

• First check the number of compensation sets and then set the address P designation to within the permitted number of sets.

P177 LIFE COUNT ACT Registration of tool life management data with G10 was attempted when the used data count valid signal was ON.

• The tool life management data cannot be registered when counting the used data. Turn the used data count valid signal OFF.

P178 LIFE DATA OVER The No. of registration groups‚ total No. of registered tools or the No. of registrations per group exceeded the specifications range.

• Review the No. of registrations. The maximum No. of registrations is shown below.

System System 1 System 2

No. of groups 80 40/40

No. of tools 80 40/40

Per group 16

P179 GROUP No. ILL.

• When registering the tool life management data with G10‚ the group No. was commanded in duplicate.

• A group No. that was not registered was designated during the T 99 command.

• An M code command must be issued as a single command but coexists in the same block as that of another M code command.

• The M code commands set in the same group exist in the same block.

• The group No. cannot be commanded in duplicate. When registering the group data‚ register it in group units.

• Correct to the correct group No.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 68


P180 NO BORING CYC. A fixed cycle command was issued though there are not fixed cycle (G72 - G89) specifications.

• Check the specifications. • Correct the program.

P181 NO S-CMD (TAP) The spindle rotation speed command has not been issued when the hole drilling fixed cycle command is given.

• Issue the spindle rotation speed command (S) when the hole drilling fixedcycle command G84‚ G74 (G84‚ G88) is given.

P182 SYN TAP ERROR Connection to the main spindle unit was not established.

• Check connection to the main spindle. • Check that the main spindle encoder

exists. P183 PTC/THD‚ No.

The pitch or thread number command has not been issued in the tap cycle of a hole drilling fixed cycle command.

• Specify the pitch data and the number of threads by F or E command.

P184 NO PTC/THD CMD The pitch or the number of threads per inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the hole drilling fixed cycle command.

• Check the pitch or the number of threads per inch.

P190 NO CUTTING CYC A lathe cutting cycle command was input although the lathe cutting cycle was undefined in the specification.

• Check the specification. • Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.

P191 TAPER LENG ERR In the lathe cutting cycle‚ the specified length of taper section is illegal.

• The radius set value in the lathe cycle command must be smaller than the axis shift amount.

P192 CHAMFERING ERR Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is illegal.

• Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the cycle.

P200 NO MRC CYC SPC The fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) was commanded when the fixed cycle for compound lathe I specifications were not provided.

• Check the specification.

P201 PROG. ERR (MRC) • When called with a fixed cycle for

compound lathe I command, the subprogram contained at least one of the following commands: • Reference point return command

(G27, G28, G29, G30) • Thread cutting (G33, G34) • Fixed cycle skip-function (G31)

• The first move block of the finish shape program in fixed cycle for compound lathe I contains an arc command.

• Delete the following G codes from this subprogram that is called with the fixed cycle for compound lathe I commands (G70 to G73): G27‚ G28‚ G29, G30‚ G31‚ G33‚ G34, fixed cycle G-code.

• Remove G2 and G3 from the first move block of the finish shape program in fixed cycle for compound lathe I.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 69


P202 BLOCK OVR (MRC) The number of blocks in the shape program of the fixed cycle for compound lathe I is over 50 or 200 (this differs according to the model).

• Specify 50 or a less value. The number of blocks in the shape program called by the fixed cycle for compound lathe I commands (G70 to G73) must be decreased below 50 or 200 (this differs according to the model).

P203 CONF. ERR (MRC) The fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) shape program could not cut the work normally because it defined an abnormal shape.

• Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) shape program.

P204 VALUE ERR (MRC) A command value of the fixed cycle for compound lathe (G70 to G76) is illegal.

• Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe (G70 to G76) command value.

P210 NO PAT CYC SPC A fixed cycle for compound lathe II (G74 to G76) command was input although it was undefined in the specification.


P220 NO SPECIAL CYC No special fixed cycle specifications are available.


P221 NO HOLE (S_CYC) A 0 has been specified for the number of holes in special fixed cycle mode.


P222 G36 ANGLE ERR A G36 command specifies 0 for angle intervals.


P223 G12 G13 R ERR The radius value specified with a G12 or G13 command is below the compensation amount.


P224 NO G12‚ G13 SPC There are no circular cutting specifications.


P230 NESTING OVER • A subprogram has been called 4 or

more times in succession from the subprogram.

• The program in the IC card contains the M198 command.

• The program in the IC card has been called more than once (the program in the IC card can be called only once at a time).

• Check the number of subprogram calls and correct the program so that it does not exceed 4 times.

• When using the IC card, the IC card and the number of IC card program calls.

P231 NO N-NUMBER At subprogram call time‚ the sequence number set at return from the subprogram or specified by GOTO‚ was not set.

• Specify the sequence numbers in the call block of the subprogram.

• When using an IC card, check the program and its No. in the IC card.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 70


P232 NO PROGRAM No. The subprogram has not been found when the subprogram is called.

• Enter the subprogram. • Check the program number in the IC

card. P241 NO VARl NUMBER

The variable number commanded is higher than the numbers in the specifications.

• Check the specifications. • Check the program variable number.

P242 EQL. SYM. MSSG. The "=" sign has not been commanded when a variable is defined.

• Designate the "=" sign in the variable definition of the program.

P243 VARIABLE ERR. An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression.

• Correct the program.

P252 PAT.&COOD-ROT A coordinate rotation related command (G68, G69) was issued during figure rotation.


P260 NO COOD-RT SPC Even though there were no coordinate rotation specifications, a coordinate rotation command was issued.


P270 NO MACRO SPEC A macro specification was commanded though there are no such command specifications.


P271 NO MACRO INT. A macro interrupt command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications.


P272 MACRO ILL. A statement and a macro statement exist together in the same block.

• Reconsider the program and place the executable statement and macro statement in separate blocks.

P273 MACRO OVERCALL The number of macro call nests exceeded the specifications.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so that the macro calls do not exceed the limit imposed by the specification.

P275 MACRO ARG. EX. The number of macro call argument type II sets has exceeded the limit.


P276 CALL CANCEL A G67 command was issued though it was not during the G66 command modal.

• Reconsider the program. • The G67 command is the call cancel

command and so the G66 command must be designated first before it is issued.

P277 MACRO ALM MESG An alarm command has been issued in #3000.

• Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG screen.

• Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine manufacturer.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 71


P280 EXC. [ ‚ The number of parentheses "[" or "]" which can be commanded in a single block has exceeded five.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so the number of "[" or "]" does not exceed five.

P281 [ ‚ ] ILLEGAL

The number of "[" and "]" parentheses commanded in a single block does not match.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so that "[" and "]" parentheses are paired up properly.

P282 CALC. IMPOSS. The arithmetic formula is incorrect.

• Reconsider the program and correct the formula.

P283 DIVIDE BY ZERO The denominator of the division is zero.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so that the denominator for division in the formula is not zero.

P290 IF SNT. ERROR There is an error in the IF conditional GOTO statement.


P291 WHILE SNT. ERR There is an error in the WHILE conditional DO -END statement.


P292 SETVN SNT. ERR There is an error in the SETVN statement when the variable name setting was made.

• Reconsider the program. • The number of characters in the variable

name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or less.

P293 DO-END EXCESS The number of 's for DO-END in the WHILE conditional DO - ENDstatement has exceed 27.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so that the number of 's in the DO - END statement does not exceed 27.

P294 DO-END MMC. The DO's and END's are not paired off properly.

• Reconsider the program and correct it so that the DO's and END's are paired off properly.

P295 WHILE/GOTO TPE There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the tape during tape operation.

• During tape operation‚ a program which includes a WHILE or GOTO statement cannot be executed and so the memory operation mode is established instead.

P296 NO ADR (MACRO) A required address has not been specified in the user macro.

• Review the program.

P297 ADR-A ERR. The user macro does not use address A as a variable.


P298 PTR OP (MACRO) User macro G200‚ G201‚ or G202 was specified during tape or MDI operation.


P300 VER. NAME ERROR The variable names have not been commanded properly.

• Reconsider the variable names in the program and correct them.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 72


P301 VAR NAME DUPLI The name of the variable has been duplicated.

• Correct the program so that the name is not duplicated.

P350 NO SCALING SPC The scaling command (G50, G51) was issued when the scaling specifications were not available.


P360 NO PROG.MIRR. A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command has been issued though the programmable mirror image specifications are not provided.


P370 NO OPOS MR SPC The facing turret mirror image specifications are not provided.


P371 MIRR ILLEGAL Facing turret mirror image was commanded to an axis for which external mirror image or parameter mirror image is valid. Facing turret mirror image validating mirror image for a rotary axis was commanded.

• Check the program. • Check the parameters.

P380 NO CORNER R/C A command was issued for corner chamfering/corner rounding though there are no such specifications.

• Check the specifications. • Remove the corner chamfering/corner

rounding command from the program.

P381 NO ARC R/C SPC Corner chamfering/corner rounding was specified in the arc interpolation block although corner chamfering/corner rounding II is unsupported.


P382 CORNER NO MOVE The block next to corner chamfering/corner rounding is not a movement command.

• Replace the block succeeding the corner chamfering/corner rounding command by G01 command.

P383 CORNER SHORT In the corner chamfering/corner rounding command‚ the movement distance was shorter than the value in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command.

• Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this distance is shorter than the corner chamfering/ corner rounding.

P384 CORNER SHORT When the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was input‚ the movement distance in the following block was shorter than the length of the corner chamfering/corner rounding.

• Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this distance in the following block is shorter than the corner chamfering/corner rounding.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 73


P385 G0 G33 IN CONR A block with corner chamfering/corner rounding was given during G00 or G33 modal.

• Recheck the program.

P390 NO GEOMETRIC A geometric command was issued though there are no geometric specifications.


P391 NO GEOMETRIC 2 There are no geometric IB specifications.


P392 LES AGL (GEOMT) The angular difference between the geometric line and line is 1° or less.

• Correct the geometric angle.

P393 INC ERR (GEOMT) The second geometric block was specified by an incremental value.

• Specify this block by an absolute value.

P394 NO G01 (GEOMT) The second geometric block contains no linear command.

• Specify the G01 command.

P395 NO ADRS (GEOMT) The geometric format is invalid.

• Recheck the program.

P396 PL CHG. (GEOMT) A plane switching command was executed during geometric command processing.

• Execute the plane switching command before geometric command processing.

P397 ARC ERR (GEOMT) In geometric IB‚ the circular arc end point does not contact or cross the next block start point.

• Recheck the geometric circular arc command and the preceding and following commands.

P398 NO GEOMETRIC 1B Although the geometric IB specifications are not included‚ a geometric command is given.


P421 PRAM. IN ERROR • The specified parameter number or

set data is illegal. • An illegal G command address was

input in parameter input mode. • A parameter input command was

input during fixed cycle modal or nose R compensation.


P430 AXIS NOT RET. • A command was issued to move an

axis‚ which has not returned to the reference point‚ away from that reference point.

• A command was issued to an axis removal axis.

• Execute reference point return manually.• The command was issued to an axis for

which axis removal is validated so invalidate axis removal.

P431 NO 2nd REF. SPC A command for second‚ third or fourth reference point return was issued though there are no such command specifications.


3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 74

P434 COLLATION ERR

One of the axes did not return to the start position when the origin point collate command (G27) was executed.


P435 G27/M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G27 command block.

• An M code command cannot be issued in a G27 command block and so the G27 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks.

P436 G29/M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G29 command block.

• An M code command cannot be issued in a G29 command block and so the G29 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks.

P438 NOT USE (G52) A local coordinate system command was issued during execution of the G54.1 command.


P450 NO CHUCK BARR. The chuck barrier on command (G22) was specified although the chuck barrier was undefined in the specification.


P460 TAPE I/O ERROR An error has arisen in the tape reader or‚ alternatively‚ in the printer during macro printing.

• Check the power and cable of the connected devices.

• Check the I/O device parameters.

P461 FILE I/O ERROR A file of the machining program cannot be read.

• In memory mode, the programs stored in memory may have been destroyed. Output all of the programs and tool data once and format them.

• Ensure that the external device (including a floppy disk drive and IC card) that contains the file is mounted.

P462 DNC ERROR A communication error occurred during the BTR operation.

• L01 DNC ERROR is displayed simultaneously, so remedy the problem according to the error No.

P480 NO MILL SPEC • Milling was commanded when the

milling specifications were not provided.

• Pole coordinate interpolation was commanded when the pole coordinate interpolation specifications were not provided.


3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 75


P481 MILL ILL. G • An illegal G code was used during the

milling mode. • An illegal G code was used during

cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation.

• The G07.1 command was issued during the tool radius compensation.


P482 MILL ILL. AXIS • A rotary axis was commanded during

the milling mode. • Milling was executed even though an

illegal value was set for the milling axis No.

• Cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded during mirror image.

• Cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded before the tool compensation was completed after the T command.

• G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical interpolation was not possible (there is no rotary axis, or external mirror image is ON).

• An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate system axis was commanded during cylindrical interpolation.

• Check the machining program, parameters and PLC I/F signal.

P484 MILL AXIS RET. • Movement was commanded to an

axis that had not completed reference point return during the milling mode.

• Movement was commanded to an axis that had not completed reference point return during cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation.

• Carry out manual reference point return.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 76


P485 MILL ILL. MODAL • The milling mode was turned ON

during nose R compensation or constant surface speed control.

• A T command was issued during the milling mode.

• The mode was switched from milling to cutting during tool compensation.

• Cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded during the constant surface speed control mode (G96).

• The command unacceptable in the cylindrical interpolation was issued.

• A T command was issued during the cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation mode.

• A movement command was issued when the plane was not selected just before or after the G07.1 command.

• A plane selection command was issued during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.

• Cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded during tool radius compensation.

• The G16 plane in which the radius value of a cylinder is 0 was specified.

• A cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation command was issued during program coordinate rotation (G68).

• Check the program. • Before issuing G12.1, issue G40 or G97.• Before issuing G12.1, issue a T

command. • Before issuing G13.1, issue G40. • Specify the radius value of a cylinder

other than 0, or specify the X axis's current value other than 0 before issuing G12.1/G16.

P486 MILLING ERROR • The milling command was issued

during the mirror image (when parameter or external input is turned ON).

• Pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation or milling interpolation was commanded during facing turret mirror image.

• The start command of the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was issued during the normal line control.


3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 77


P511 SYNC CODE ERR • Two or more synchronization M codes

were commanded in the same block.• The synchronization M code and "!"

code were commanded in the same block.


P600 NO AUTO TLM. An automatic tool length measurement command (G37) was execute though there are no such command specifications.


P601 NO SKIP SPEC. A skip command (G31) was issued though there are no such command specifications.


P602 NO MULTI SKIP A multiple skipping command (G31.1‚ G31.2 or G31.3) was issued though there are no such command specifications.


P603 SKIP SPEED 0 The skip speed is 0.

• Specify the skip speed.

P604 TLM ILL. AXIS No axis or more than one axis was specified in the automatic tool length measurement block.

• Specify only one axis.

P605 T-CMD IN BLOCK The T code is in the same block as the automatic tool length measurement block.

• Specify this T code before the block.

P606 NO T-CMD BEFOR The T code was not yet specified in automatic tool length measurement.

• Specify this T code before the block.

P607 TLM ILL. SIGNL Before the area specified by the D command or decelerating area parameter d‚ the measurement position arrival signal went ON. The signal remains OFF to the end.


P608 SKIP ERROR (CC) A skip command was specified during radius compensation processing.

• Specify a radius compensation cancel (G40) command' or remove the skip command.

3. PROGRAM ERROR

I - 78


P610 ILLEGAL PARA. • The parameter setting is not correct. • G114.1 was commanded when the

spindle synchronization with PLC I/F command was selected.

• G113 was commanded when the spindle-spindle polygon machining option was OFF and the spindle synchronization with PLC I/F command was selected.

• Check whether #1549 Iv0vR1 to #1553 Iv0vR5 are set in descending order (in order of large values).

• Check whether #1554 Iv0rd2 to #1557 Iv0rd5 are set in descending order.

• Check and correct #1514 expLinax and #1515 expRotax.

• Check the program. • Check the parameter.

P612 EXP. ERROR A movement command for exponential function interpolation was issued during facing turret mirror image.


P700 CMD-VALUE ILL. Spindle synchronization was commanded to a spindle that is not connected serially.

• Check the program. • Check the parameter.

P900 NO TANZ. SPEC A normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) was issued when the normal line control specifications were not provided.


P901 TAN. AXIS G92 A coordinate system preset command (G92) was issued to a normal line control axis during normal line control.


P902 TAN. AXIS LINE • The normal line control axis was set to

a linear axis. • The normal line control axis was set to

the linear type rotary axis II axis. • The normal line control axis has not

been set. • The normal line control axis was the

same as the plane selection axis.

• Correct the normal line control axis.

P903 PLANE CHG (TAN) The plane selection command (G17, G18, G19) was issued during normal line control.

• Delete the plane selection command (G17, G18, G19) from the program for normal line control.

P990 PREPRO S/W ERR Combining commands that required pre-reading (nose R offset‚ corner chamfering/corner rounding‚ geometric I‚ geometric IB‚ and fixed cycle for compound lathe) resulted in eight or more pre-read blocks.

• Reduce the number of commands that require pre-reading or delete such commands.

II EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS

1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS

II - 1

1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION

1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS

When the function selection key MENU is pressed‚ the following menu appears: TOOL menu is displayed after the power is turned on. To display PARAM menu‚ use menu key on the TOOL screen.

Machiningparameter

#8019 to #8059

CONTROLPARAM

Linkparameter

PROCESS I/O BASEPARAM

#9001 to #9014

WORK

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

OFFSET REGIST LIFE

Previouspage Key Menu selection key

Next page key

MENU

Setup parameter menu display (No.1 to 4)

Tool offset menu display (No.1 to 4)

Previouspage

Nextpage

SETUPPARAMETERPARAM menu

No.1 to 4

MENU

TOOL menu The contents of TOOL menu depends on the system.

. . .

I/O deviceparameter

BARRIERPARAM

#8300 to #8319

AXIS PARAM#8201 to #8212

Machiningparameter

#8001 to #8018

#8071 to #8086

#8101 to #8124

#9101 to #9130

#9501 to #9530

#9601 to #9630

1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS

II - 2

Press the menu key SETUP to display the setup selection screen. If the setup parameter menu opening option is specified in this screen, the setup parameters can be set up and displayed.

#3573 to #3584

#3201 to #3212

Spindleparameter

#2261 to #2265

Work Process I/O PAR Setup MENU

MENU

MENU

Offset Registration Life

Previous page key Menu selection key Next page key

MENU

Base Axis Servo Spindle

MC-ERR PLC Macro PSW

Parameter menu display (No.1 to 4)

Tool offset menu display (No.1 to 4)

Setup parameter menu display (No.1 to 4)Setup parameter menu display (No.5 to 8)

Previouspage

Nextpage

Setup parameter menuNo.1 to 4

Menuswitch

Position switch

#7501 to #7574

PLC timer

#6000 to #6055

Servoparameter

#2201 to #2212

Servoadjustmentparameter

Axis specificationparameter

#2061 to #2072

Absolute positionparameter

#2049 to #2060

#6581 to #6596

Bit selection#6401 to #6460

Machiningoffset data

#4101 to #4184

Spindle offsetparameter

Setup parameter menuNo.5 to 8

#5109 to #5124

. . .

. . .

. . .

#1925 to #1936

ASCII macro#7401 to #7415

. . .

#2037 to #2048

Zero pointreturn parameter

#2025 to #2036

Servospecificationparameter

Basic specificationparameter ofspindle

#3001 to #3036

Spindlespecificationparameter

#6349 to #6396

PLC constant

#6301 to #6348

G macro#7201 to #7313

Macro listM macro

#7001 to #7103

PLC counter#6200 to #6223

#6936 to #6999

. . .

Basicspecificationparameter

#1001 to #1024

#2013 to #2024

Axisspecificationparameter

#2001 to #2012

. . .

#4051 to #4097

#2073 to #2084

Machiningerror correction

#4000 to #4047

#2085 to #2096


Zero pointreturn parameter



Spindlespecificationparameter

Spindle offsetparameter

Machiningerror correction

Previouspage

Nextpage

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS

II - 3

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS

2.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS

<WRK COUNT> (No. of workpieces machined) # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8001 WRK COUNT M Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece repeated machining. The No. will not be counted when set to 0.

0 to 99

8002 WRK COUNT The current machining No. is displayed. Set the initial value.

0 to 999999

8003 WRK LIMIT Set the maximum No. of workpieces machined.A signal is output to PLC when the No. of machining times is counted to this limit.

0 to 999999

<AUTO TLM> (Automatic tool length measurement)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8004 SPEED Set the feedrate during automatic tool length

measurement. 1 to 60000 (mm/min)

8005 ZONE r Set the distance between the measurement position and deceleration start point.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8006 ZONE d Set the tolerable zone of the measurement position. If the sensor signal turns ON in front of d before the measurement position‚ or if the signal does not turn ON after d is passed‚ an alarm will occur.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

<AUTO CORNER OVR> (Automatic corner override)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8007 OVERRIDE Set the override value for automatic corner

override. 0 to 100 (%)

8008 MAX ANGLE Set the max. corner opening angle where deceleration should start automatically. If the angle is larger than this value‚ deceleration will not start.

0 to 180 (°)

8009 DSC. ZONE Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner. Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

<T-TIP OFFSET> (Wear data input)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8010 ABS. MAX.

(For L system only)Set the max. value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8011 INC. MAX. (For L system only)

Set the max. value for when inputting the tool wear compensation amount in the addition mode.

0 to 999.999 (mm)


II - 4

<FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8012 G73 n

(For M system only)Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). 0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8013 G83 n Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling cycle).

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8014 CDZ-VALE (For L system only)

Set the screw cut up amount for G76‚ G78 (thread cutting cycle).

0 to 127 (0.1 lead)

8015 CDZ-ANGLE (For L system only)

Set the screw cut up angle for G76‚ G78 (thread cutting cycle).

0 to 89 (°)

8016 G71 MINIMUM (For L system only)

Set the minimum cut amount for the final cutting in G71‚ G72 (rough cutting cycle). If the final cutting amount is smaller than this value‚ the final cut will not be performed.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8017 DELTA-D (For L system only)

Set the change amount to the command cut amount D for G71‚ G72 (rough cutting cycle). Each cut amount will be the value obtained by adding or subtracting this value from command D‚ and thus‚ the amount can be changed each cut.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8018 G84/G74 return (For M system only)

Set up return length m at a G84/G74 pecking tap cycle. Note: Set "0" to specify a usual tap cycle.

0 to 999.999 (mm)


II - 5

<PRECISION> (High precision control)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8019 R COMP Set up a compensation factor for reducing a

control error in the reduction of a corner roundness and arch radius. Indicates a maximum control error (mm) in parentheses. The larger the setup value, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the corner goes down, the cycle time is extended. Coefficient = 100 - setting value Note: This is valid when "#8021 COMP

CHANGE" is set to "0".

0 to 99 (%)

8020 DCC ANGLE Set up the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner.When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-precision mode is larger than the set value, it is determined as a corner and the speed goes down to sharpen the edge.

θ If the set value is smaller than θ, the speed goes down to optimize the corner.

Note: If "0" is set, it will be handled as 5

degrees. The standard setting value is "0".

0 to 89 (degrees) 0: The angle will be

5°.

8021 COMP CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the high-accuracy control mode. 0: Share (#8019 R COMP) 1: Separate • Corner (#8022 CORNER COMP) • Curve (#8023 CURVE COMP) (Note) Set "1" when using SSS control.

0/1

8022 CORNER COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value Note: This is valid when "#8021 COMP


-1000 to 99 (%)

8023 CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the radius reduction amount at the curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 - setting value Note: This is valid when "#8021 COMP


-1000 to 99 (%)

8024 EDGE ANGLE Not used. -


II - 6

<PRECISION> (High precision control)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8025 SPLINE ON

(for M system only) Specify whether to enable the spline function.0: Disable the spline function. 1: Enable the spline function.

0/1

8026 CANCEL ANG. (for M system only)

When the angle made by blocks exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed angle.

0 to 180° 0: 180°

8027 Toler-1 (for M system only)

Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 µm) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.

At 1µm 0.000 to 100.000mmAt 0.1µm 0.0000 to

10.0000mm

8028 Toler-2 (for M system only)

Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 µm) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.

At 1µm 0.000 to 100.000mmAt 0.1µm 0.0000 to

10.0000mm

8029 FairingL (for M system only)

Set the length of the block subject to fairing. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0 to 100.000mm

8030 MINUTE LENGTH (for M system only)

When the length of one block exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a little smaller than linear block length of the workpiece to be machined. If - 1 is set, spline interpolation is performed regardless of block length.

-1 to 127mm 0: 1mm

8033 Fairing ON (for M system only)

Set whether to use the fairing function. 0: Fairing invalid 1: Fairing valid

0/1

8034 AccClamp ON (for M system only)

Set the method for clamping the cutting speed.0: Clamp with parameter "#2002 clamp" or the

corner deceleration function. 1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration

judgment. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0/1

8035 AccClampMag Not used. 8036 CordecJudge

(for M system only) Change the conditions for judging a corner. 0: Judge the corner from the angle of the

neighboring block. 1: Judge the corner from the angle of the

neighboring block, excluding minute blocks.(Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0/1

8037 CorJudgeL (for M system only)

Set the length of the block to be excluded. (Valid when #8036 CordecJudge is set to 1.)

0 to 99999.999 (mm)


II - 7

<C axis normal line>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8041 C-rot.R This is valid with normal line control type II.

Set the length from the center of the normal line control axis to the end of the tool. This is used to calculate the turning speed at the block joint.

0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)

8042 C-ins.R This is valid with normal line control type I. Set the radius of the arc to be automatically inserted into the corner during normal line control.

0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)

<Fixed cycle>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8051 G71 THICK Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting

cycle (G71, G72) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8052 PULL UP Set the amount of recess after cutting by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8053 G73 U Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

8054 W Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

8055 R Set the number of times cutting is performed by the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

0 to 99999 (times)

8056 G74 RETRACT Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the push-cut cycle (G74, G75).

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8057 G76 LAST-D Set the amount of final cut-in by the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8058 TIMES Set the number of times the amount of final cut-in (G76 finish margin) is divided in the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 99 (times)

8059 ANGLE Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 99 (°)

<Three-dimensional cutter compensation>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8071 3-D CMP

(for M system only) Value of p in the following denominator constants for three-dimensional tool radius compensation Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p Vx, Vy, Vz: X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes i, j, k: Program command value r: Offset

p = 222 kji ++ when the set value is 0.

0 to 99999.999


II - 8

< Scale factor>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8072 SCALING P

(for M system only) Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification for the machining program for which the G50 or G51 command is issued. This parameter is effective when the program specifies no scale factor.

0 to 99.999999

<Tool ID>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8073 OfsetPosition

(for M system only) Set the tool offset memory number position for writing the tool information data's tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount, tool length wear amount and tool radius wear amount into the tool offset data. Note: If 0 or a value exceeding the number of

tool compensation sets is set, the data will not be written into the tool offset data.

0 to 999

8074 IDMacroTop (for M system only)

Set the head position when writing the tool information data's user areas 4 to 9 in the macro variables.

0 to 999

<Spiral interpolation>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8075 SpiralEndErr

(for M system only) Designate the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position commanded with the command format type 2 spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command differs from the end point position obtained from the speed and increment/ decrement amount.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8076 SpiralMinRad (for M system only)

Not used.

<Involute interpolation>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8077 InvoluteErr

(for M system only) Set the tolerable error value of the involute curve that passes through the start point and the involute curve that passes through the end point during involute interpolation.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

<Screen saver>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8078 Screen Saver Set the time to turn the screen OFF.

The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. (Note) This parameter setting is valid only for

the LCD display unit.

0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen

OFF.


II - 9

<Deep hole drilling cycle>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8083 G83S modeM

(for M system only) Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.

1 to 99999999

8084 G83S Clearanse (for M system only)

Set the clearance amount for the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8085 G83S Forward F (for M system only)

Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 99999 (mm/min)

8086 G83S Back F (for M system only)

Set the speed for returning from the hole base during the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 99999 (mm/min)

<SSS control>

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8090 SSS ON

(for M system only)Set whether to validate SSS control with G05 P10000.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

8091 StdLength (for M system only)

Adjust the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape. To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a large value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a small value. If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will be applied.

0 to 100.000 (mm)

8092 ClampCoeff (for M system only)

Adjust the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments.

Coefficient = setting value

1 to 100

8093 StepLeng (for M system only)

Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as the CAM path difference [Tolerance].) If 0 is set, the standard value (5µm) will be applied. If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps.

-0.001 to 0.100 (mm)

8094 DccWaitAdd (for M system only)

Set the time to wait for deceleration when the speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.

0 to 100 (ms)

8095 Tolerance (for M system only)

Set the tolerable error when the error between the command path and tool path is large. The error will decrease when a small value is set, but the machining time will increase. If "0.000" is set, the error will not be adjusted.

0 to 100.000 (mm)

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

II - 10

2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)8101 MACRO SINGLE Select the control of the blocks where the user

macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro block continues.1: Stop every block during signal block

operation.

0/1

8102 COLL. ALM OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.

0: An alarm is output and operation stops when an interference is judged.

1: Changes the path to avoid interference.

0/1

8103 COLL. CHK OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.

0: Performs interference check. 1: Does not perform interference check.

0/1

8105 EDIT LOCK B Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999.

0: Program can be edited. 1: Editing of above program is prohibited.

0/1

8106 G46 NO REV-ERR (For L system only)

Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).

0: An alarm is output and operation stops when the compensation direction is reversed (G41 → G42‚ G42 → G41).

1: An alarm does not occur when the compensation direction is reversed‚ and the current compensation direction is maintained.

0/1

8107 R COMPENSATION 0: In arc cutting mode, the machine moves to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command, making the arc smaller than the command value.

1: In arc cutting mode, the machine compensates the movement to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command

0/1

8108 R COMP Select Specify whether to perform arc radius error correction over all axes or axis by axis.

0: Perform correction over all axes. 1: Perform correction over axis by axis. Note: This parameter is effective only when

#8107 R COMPENSATION is 1.

0/1

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS

II - 11

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8109 HOST LINK Specify whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port.

0: Disable computer link B to enable normal RS-232C communication.

1: Enable computer link B to disable normal RS-232C communication.

0/1

8110 G71/G72 POCKET Set the pocket machining if there is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) finishing program.

0: Pocket machining OFF 1: Pocket machining ON

0/1

8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.

0: All axes radius command 1: Each axis setting (follows #1019 dia

diameter designated axis) Note: This parameter is valid only in the milling

(cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation mode.

0/1

8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0: The decimal point command for G04 address P is invalidated.

1: The decimal point command for G04 address P is validated.

0/1

8113 MillingInitG16 0: Plane other than G16

1: Select G16 plane

8114 MillingInitG19

Designate which plane to use for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.

#8113 #8114 Plane 0 0 G17 plane 0 1 G19 plane 1 0 1 1 G16 plane

Note: This parameter is valid for the G code

system 2, 3 (#1037 cmdtyp=3, 4).

0: Plane other than G19

1: Select G19 plane

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

II - 12

2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

Set up the parameter required for each axis. # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target.

0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target.

0/1

8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205.

0: Stored stroke limit II valid 1: Stored stroke limit II invalid

0/1

8203 OT-CHECK- CANCEL

When the simple absolute position method (#2049 type is 9) is selected‚ the stored stroke limits I, II (or IIB) and IB will be invalid until the first zero point return is executed after the power is turned ON.

0: Stored stroke limit II valid (according to #8202)

1: Stored stroke limit II invalid Note: Temporary cancel of #8203 soft limit

affects all the stored stroke limits.

0/1

8204 OT-CHECK-N This sets the coordinates of the (-) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the lower limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB. If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid.If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the prohibited range will be between two pointseven when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. When II is selected, the entire range will be prohibited.

±99999.999 (mm)

8205 OT-CHECK-P This sets the coordinates of the (+) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.

±99999.999 (mm)

8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return). Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.

±99999.999 (mm)

8207 G76/87 IGNR (For M system only)

Select the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring).

0: Shift effective 1: No shift

8208 G76/87 (-) (For M system only)

Specifies the shift direction at G76 and G87. 0: Shift to (+) direction

1: Shift to (-) direction

8209 G60 SHIFT (For M system only)

Set the last positioning direction and distance for a G60 (uni-directional positioning) command.

±99999.999 (mm)

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS

II - 13


8210 OT INSIDE The stored stoke limit function to be set in #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to the inside or outside of the specified range.

0: Inhibits outside area (select stored stroke limit II.)

1: Inhibits inside area (select stored stroke limit II B.)

0/1

8211 MIRR. IMAGE Enable or disable the parameter mirror image function.

0: Disable 1: Enable

0/1

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.4 BARRIER DATA

II - 14

2.4 BARRIER DATA

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8300 PO

(For L system only)Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate (Radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.

±99999.999 (mm)

8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 (For L system only)

Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. (Radius value) Set the coordinate value from the center of workpiece for X-axis. Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.

±99999.999 (mm)

8310 Barrier ON (For L system only)

Select the validity of the chuck and tailstock barrier.

0: Invalid (Setting from special display unit valid)

1: Valid

0/1

8311 8312

P7 P8 (For L system only)

Set the area of the left spindle section. • X axis: Set the coordinate value from the

workpiece center (P0). (radius value)

• Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.

±99999.999 (mm)

8313 8314

P9 P10 (For L system only)

Set the area of the right spindle section. • X axis: Set the coordinate value from the

workpiece center (P0). (radius value)

• Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.

±99999.999 (mm)

8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)(For L system only)

Set the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier.

0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock

0/1/2

8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)(For L system only)

Set the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier.

0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock

0/1/2

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.4 BARRIER DATA

II - 15


8317 DELIV. AX. NAME (For L system only)

When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable, set the name of the delivery axis. When using the 2-system method and the delivery axis is an axis in the other system, designate the system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the system is not designated as A and B, the set system will be used.

A/B/.. (axis address)

1A/1B/.. 2A/2B/..

(system designation)0 (cancel)

8318 STOCK ANGLE (L)(For L system only)

Set the angle for the left tailstock end section.The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (0).

0 to 180 (°) 0: 90° default

8319 STOCK ANGLE (R)(For L system only)

Set the angle for the right tailstock end section.The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (0).

0 to 180 (°)

2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.5 TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS

II - 16

2.5 TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS

Set up the parameter of the tool (touch tool sensor), etc, used for measurement. # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8701 Tool length Set the length to the end of the touch tool. ±99999.999 (mm) 8702 Tool Dia Set the spherical diameter of the touch tool

end. ±99999.999 (mm)

8703 OFFSET X Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the X axis direction.

±99999.999 (mm)

8704 Y Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the Y axis direction.

±99999.999 (mm)

8705 RETURN Set the return distance to contact the touch tool against the workpiece again.

±99999.999 (mm)

8706 FEED Set the feedrate when contacting the touch tool against the workpiece again.

1 to 60000 (mm/min)

3. I/O PARAMETERS 3.1 BASE PARAMETERS

II - 17

3. I/O PARAMETERS

Pressing the menu key I/OPARA displays the I/O BASE PARAM screen.

There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting‚ outputting or referring to data‚ or when performing tape operation. One type is the parameters related to the input/output device. The baud rate‚ etc.‚ is set according to each device. Up to five types of input/output devices can be registered. The other type of input/output parameters is the I/O base parameters which determine which device is connected to which channel per input/output application.

3.1 BASE PARAMETERS

<I/O> # <PORT No.> # <DEV. No.> <DEV. NAME> Specify the board No. to which the

serial input/output device is connected to 2. • Set "1" to use ch1. • Set "2" to use ch2.

Set the input/output device No. for each application. The device Nos. are 0 to 4 and correspond to the input/output device parameters. The device name set in the input/output device parameter is also displayed for identification.

DATA IN 9001 Specify the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters.

9002 Specify the No. of the device that inputs the data.

DATA OUT 9003 Specify the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters.

9004 Specify the No. of the device that outputs the data.

TAPE MODE 9005 Specify the input port for running with the tape mode.

9006 Specify the No. of the device to be run with the tape mode.

MACRO PRINT

9007 Specify the output port for the user macro DPRINT command.

9008 Specify the No. of the device for the DPRINT command.

PLC IN/OUT 9009 Specify the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC.

9010 Specify the No. of the device for the PLC input/output.

REMOTE PROG IN

9011 Specify the port for inputting remote programs.

9012 Specify the number of the device used to input remote programs.

EXT UNIT 9013 Specify the port for communication with an external unit.

9014 Specify the number of the unit used for communication with an external unit


9015 PORT NO. (tool ID)

Set the number of the port connected with the tool ID. (Either ch1 or ch2 can be used.) • Set "1" to use ch1. • Set "2" to use ch2.

1/2 (M64)

9016 DEV. NO. (tool ID)

Set the number of the input/output device to be used. (Any device No. can be used.)

0 to 4 (M64)

3. I/O PARAMETERS 3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS

II - 18

3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS

Parameters for up to five types of input/output devices can be set in DEV <0> to <4>. # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9101 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification.

Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.

9102 BAUD RATE Set the serial communication speed. 0:19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 150

9103 STOP BIT Set the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.

1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2

9104 PARITY CHECK Specify whether to add the parity check bit to the data during communication.

0: Parity bit not added

1: Parity bit added 9105 EVEN PARITY Specify the odd or even parity when it is added

to the data. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity

9106 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 3: 8

9107 TERMINATOR TYPE

The code to terminate data reading can be selected.

0 and 3: EOR 1 and 2: EOB or EOR

9108 HAND SHAKE Specify the transmission control method. The method will be no procedure if a value except 1 to 3 is set.

1: RTS/CTS method2: No procedure (No

handshaking) 3: DC code method

9109 DC CODE PARITY Specify the DC code when the DC code method is selected.

0: No parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)

1: DC code with parity (DC3 = 93H)

9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT Specify the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.

DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes

9112 CR OUTPUT Specify whether to insert the <CR> code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.

0: Do not add 1: Add

3. I/O PARAMETERS 3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS

II - 19


9113 EIA OUTPUT In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.

0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output

9114 FEED CHR. Specify the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.

0 to 999 (characters)

9115 PARITY V Specify whether to check the parity of the No. of characters in block during data input. The No. of characters is factory-set so that the check is valid at all times.

0: Do not perform parity V check

1: Perform parity V check

9116 TIME-OUT Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to 0 to 30 seconds.

0 to 30 (s)

9117 DR OFF Specify whether to check the DR data at the data input/output.

0: DR valid 1: DR invalid

9118 DATA ASC II 0: Output in ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413, or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up)

1: Output in ASC II code

0/1

9119 INPUT FORM Specify the mode for input (collation). 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB

is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input

data are skipped until data other than EOB is input.

0/1

9121 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9127 9128

EIA CODE [ ] # ∗ = : $ !

When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code not included in EIA is specified. Specify the codes which do not duplicate the existing EIA codes by hexadecimal for respective special codes.

0 to FF (hexadecimal)

9201 ∼ Set the same settings for device 1. 9301 ∼ Set the same settings for device 2. 9401 ∼ Set the same settings for device 3. 9501 ∼ Set the same settings for device 4.

3. I/O PARAMETERS 3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS

II - 20

3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)9601 BAUD RATE Specify the rate at which data is transferred. 0:19200 (bps)

1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 8: 38400

9602 STOP BIT Specify stop bit length used in start-stop mode. See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603. The number of characters is adjusted in output mode so that no problems occur if the parity check is enabled.

1: 1 2: 1.5 3: 2

9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE

This parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit.

ONOFF

Start bit Data bit

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn

1 character

Stop bitParity bit Set this to match the input/output device specifications.

0: No parity bit used in I/O mode

1: Parity bit used in I/O mode

9604 EVEN PARITY Specify whether even or odd parity is used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when no parity is used.

0: Odd parity 1: Even parity

9605 CHR. LENGTH Specify data bit length. See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603.

2: 7 3: 8

9606 HAND SHAKE RS-232C transmission control mode DC control mode should be set for computer line B.

0: No control 1: RTS/CTS method2: No handshaking 3: DC control mode

9607 TIME-OUT SET Specify time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be detected. If 0 is set, time infinity is specified.

0 to 999 (1/10s)

9608 DATA CODE Specify the code to be used. See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603.

0: ASCII code 1: ISO code

3. I/O PARAMETERS 3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS

II - 21


9609 LINK PARAM. 1 Bit 1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN Specify whether to output the DC1 code

after the NAK or SYN code is output. Bit 7: Enable/disable resetting Specify whether to enable resetting in the

computer link.

0: Don't output the DC1 code.

1: Output the DC1 code.

0: Enable resetting

in the computer link.

1: Disable resetting in the computer link

9610 LINK PARAM. 2 Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code).

Set the parity in accordance with the I/O device specifications.

Bit 3: Parity V Specify whether to enable checking of parity

V in one block in data input mode.

0: No control code parity added

1: Control code parity added


9611 LINK PARAM. 3 Not used 9612 LINK PARAM.4 Not used 9613 LINK PARAM.5 Not used 9614 START CODE Specify the code by which file data transfer

begins at first. This parameter is used for a specific user, and set 0 in this parameter for normal operation.

0: DC1 (11H) 1: BEL (07H)

9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output Specify whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.

Bit 1: SYN output Specify whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B.

Bit 3: DC3 output Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the host when communication ends in computer link B.

0: Do not output the NAK code.

1: Output the NAK code.

0: Do not output the

SYN code. 1: Output the SYN

code. 0: Do not output the

DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3

code. 9616 CTRL. INTERVAL Not used 9617 WAIT TIME Not used 9618 PACKET LENGTH Not used 9619 BUFFER SIZE Not used 9620 START SIZE Not used 9621 DC1 OUT SIZE Not used 9622 POLLING TIMER Not used 9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR Not used 9624 RETRY COUNTER Not used

4. SETUP PARAMETERS

II - 22

4. SETUP PARAMETERS

Pressing the menu key SETUP displays the OPEN SETUP PARAM screen. The system's basic parameters are normally hidden as setup parameters to prevent mistaken operations and to simplify the display. The setup parameters can be displayed and set by making a declaration to open the setup parameters on this screen.

1) Select the setup parameter. Key-in "Y" in # ( )‚ and then press INPUT.

The basic specification parameter screen appears and the normally hidden setup parameter menu will display.

The required menu can be selected to display and set the setup parameters.

2) Cancel the setup parameter selection. Key-in "N" in # ( )‚ and then press INPUT. The setup parameter menu will disappear. Note: The setup parameters are not displayed when the power is turned ON.

(Note 1) Refer to "5. Base Specifications Parameters" to "13. Position Switch" for details on the

setup parameters. (Note 2) Be sure to turn OFF the power supply after selecting the setup parameter. (Note 3) If a key other than the screen changeover key is pressed when the setup parameters are

locked, the message "Data Protected" will appear.

MENU I/O PARPROCESSWORK

PARAM 3 [OPEN SETUP PARAM]

Open the menu setup parameter? *YES: “Y” “INPUT” *NO: “N” “INPUT”

SETUP

# ( )

5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS

II - 23


After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again.

(SETUP PARAM 1. 1/15) # Items Details Setting range (unit)

1001 (PR)

SYS_ON System validation setup

Specify the existence of the 1st system‚ 2nd system and PLC axis with 1 or 0.

0: Not used 1: Used

1002 (PR)

axisno Number of axes

Set No. of axes in each system and the No. of PLC axes. Specify 6 as the maximum value for each system and 4 as that for the PLC axis so that the total of those values is 6 or less.

0 to 6

1003 (PR)

iunit Input setup unit

Specify the input setting value for each system and the PLC axis. The parameter units will follow this specification.

B: 1 µm C: 0.1 µm D: 0.01 µm

1013 axname Axis name Specify each axis' name address with an alphabetic character. Use the characters X‚ Y‚ Z‚ U‚ V‚ W‚ A‚ B or C. Do not specify the same address in one system. The same address can be specified for the 1st and 2nd system. The PLC address does not need to be set. (The axis name is displayed as 1 and 2.)

Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C

1014 incax Increment command axis name

When specifying the program movement rate's absolute or incremental method with an address‚ specify the incremental command axis name address with an alphabetic character. The address that can be used is the same as #1013 axname. Specify an address that is different from that #1013. Setting is not required if absolute/incremental specification with addresses is not performed (#1076 Abslnc = 0).

1015 (PR)

cunit Command unit

Specify the minimum unit of the program movement amount.

cunit Movement amount for movement command 1

0: Follow #1003 iunit 1: 0.0001 mm ( 0.1 µm) 10: 0.001 mm ( 1 µm) 100: 0.01 mm ( 10 µm) 1000: 0.1 mm (100 µm) 10000: 1.0 mm If there is a decimal point in the movement command‚ the decimal point position will be handled as 1mm regardless of this setting.

0 #1003 iunit

1 0.1 µm

10 1 µm

100 10 µm

1000 100 µm

10000 1 mm


II - 24

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1016 (PR)

iout Inch output Specify whether the machine system (ball screw pitch‚ position detection unit) is an inch unit system or metric unit system.

0: Metric unit system 1: Inch unit system

1017 (PR)

rot Rotational axis

Specify whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear axis. For the rotary axis‚ the position display will be 360°‚ and the axis will return to 0°. If the position display is to be continuously displayed even with the rotary axis‚ set the axis as a linear axis

0: Linear axis 1: Rotary axis

1018 (PR)

ccw Motor CCW Specify the direction of the motor rotation to the command direction.

0: Rotates clockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command.

1: Rotates counterclockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command.

0: Rotates clockwise 1: Rotates counter-

clockwise

1019 (PR)

dia Diameter specification axis

Specify whether the program movement amount is to be commanded with the diameter dimension or as movement amount. When the movement amount is commanded with the diameter dimensions‚ 5mm will be moved when the command is a movement distance of 10mm. The movement amount per pulse will also be halved during manual pulse feed. Among parameters concerning length‚ the tool length‚ the wear compensation amount and the workpiece coordinate offset are displayed in diameter value when diameter is specified‚ but other parameters are always displayed in radius value.

0: Command with movement amount

1: Command with diameter dimension

1020 (PR)

sp_ax Spindle Interpolation

Specify 1 when the NC control axis is used as the spindle.

0: The NC control axis is used as the servo axis.

1: The NC control axis is used as the spindle.

1021 (PR)

mcp_no Amplifier I/F channel No. (servo)

Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting an axis amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to "0000".

0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207

1022 (PR)

axname2

2nd axis name

Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.)

Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when 0 is set)


II - 25


1023 (PR)

crsadr Command address during cross machining

Set the address for issuing a command to this axis during cross machining control.

A to Z (Setting is cleared when 0 is set)

1024 (PR)

crsinc Incremental command address during cross machining

Set the address for issuing an incremental command to this axis during cross machining control.

A to Z (Setting is cleared when 0 is set)


1025 l_plane Initial plane selection

Specify the plane to be selected when the power is turned ON or reset. When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed (X-Y plane).

1: X-Y plane (G17 command state)

2: Z-X plane (G18 command state)

3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state)

1026 1027 1028

base_l base_J base_K

Base axis IBase axis J Base axis K

Specify the basic axis address that composes the plane. Specify the axis address set in #1013 axname.If all three items do not need to be specified‚ such as for 2-axis specifications‚ input "0"‚ and the parameter will be blank. Normally‚ when X‚ Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l‚_J‚_K‚ the following relation will be established:

G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z

Specify the desired address to set an axis address other than the above.

Control axis addresses such as X, Y, and Z

1029 aux_I Flat axis I If there is an axis parallel to #1026 base_l‚ specify that axis address.


1030 aux_J Flat axis J If there is an axis parallel to #1027 base_J‚ specify that axis address.


1031 aux_K Flat axis K If there is an axis parallel to #1028 base_K‚ specify that axis address.



II - 26


1037 cmdtyp Command type

Specify the program G code series and compensation type. There are some items in the specifications that can be used or cannot be used according to the value set in this parameter. The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type. Thus‚ after changing this parameter‚ initialize the system with #1060 SETUP.

1 to 8

1038 plcsel Ladder selection

Specify the PLC type. 0: User custom PLC1: Standard PLC 2: Exclusive PLC for

MELSEC bus link 1039 spinno Number of

spindles Specify the existence of a spindle. 0: No spindle

1: One spindle 2: Two spindles 3: Three spindles 4: Four spindles

1040 (PR)

M_inch Constant input (inch)

Specify the parameter unit system for the position and length.

0: Metric system 1: Inch system

1041 (PR)

l_inch Initial state (inch)

Specify the unit system for the program movement amount when the power is turned ON or reset and for position display. Designate an internal unit.


1042 (PR)

pcinch PLC axis command (inch)

Specify the unit system for the commands to the PLC axis.


cmdtyp G code series Compensation type 1 System 1 (for M) Type A (one compensation

amount for one compensation number)

2 System 2 (for M) Type B (shape and wear amounts for one compensation number)

3 System 2 (for L) Type C (two kinds of compensation amount of shape and wear per compensation No.)

4 System 3 (for L) Same as above 5 System 4

(for special L) Same as above

6 System 5 (for special L)

Same as above


Same as above


Same as above


II - 27


1043 lang Select language displayed

Specify the display language.

0: Japanese display (Standard) 1: English display (Standard) 2: Third language displayed (Note)

(Option) 3: Fourth language displayed (Note)

(Option) 11: Display in German (Option) 12: Display in French (Option) 13: Display in Italian (Option) 14: Display in Spanish (Option) 15: Display in Chinese (Option)

(traditional Chinese) 16: Display in Korean (Option) 17: Display in Portuguese (Option) 18: Display in Dutch (Option) 19: Display in Swedish (Option) 20: Display in Hungarian (Option) 22: Display in Chinese (Option) (simplified Chinese)

Note: If no character package is available for a

specified language, the screen is displayed in English.

0 to 3 11 to 22

1044 (PR)

auxno MR-J2-CT Connections

Specify the number of MR-J2-CTs connected. 0 to 4

1045 (PR)

nskno Megatorgue motor connections

Specify the number of NSK megatorque motors connected. When a value other than 0 is specified, 2nd miscellaneous function data is output as signed binary data.

0 to 16

1049 (PR)

mmac_R Machine maker macro RAM-ROM changeover

Select the memory area for the machine manufacturer macro program. 0: SRAM area 1: FROM area When this parameter is changed, the power must be turned OFF and ON, and the area must be formatted. Note: "1" cannot be set if the machine

manufacturer macro option is not valid.

0/1

Note: Selection of inch and metric unit

When set value of #1041 I_inch is changed‚ the unit of length is changed after reset. Among parameters concerning length‚ following items are not changed automatically‚ therefore change the set values to agree with the new unit system when the unit system is changed.


II - 28

Tool compensation amount (Tool length compensation amount‚ tool wear compensation amount and tool tip compensation amount) Workpiece coordinate offset

#8004 SPEED #8027 Toler-1 #8056 G74 RETRACT

#8005 ZONE r #8028 Toler-2 #8057 G76 LAST-D #8006 ZONE d #8029 FairingL #8075 SpiralEndErr

#8009 DSC. ZONE #8030 MINUTE LENGS

#8010 ABS. MAX. #8037 CorJudgeL #8077 InvoluteErr

#8011 INC. MAX. #8041 C-rot. R #8012 G73n #8042 C-ins. R

#8084 G83S Clearanse

#8013 G83n #8051 G71 THICK #8085 G83S Forward F

#8016 G71 MINIMUM #8052 PULL UP #8086 G83S Back F #8017 G71 DELTA-D #8053 G73U

Machining parameter

#8018 G84/G74n #8054 W Axis parameter #8204 OT-CHECK-N #8205 OT-CHECK-P #8206 TOOL CHG.P #8209 G60 Shift Barrier data #8300 - #8306, #8311 - #8314 Basic specification parameter

#1084 RadErr

#8004 SPEED is 10 inches/min. unit for the inch system.


II - 29


1050 (PR)

MemPrg Definition of program save area

Setting 0 1 2 3

Machining program

MDI data

(Machining program) : System common

Machining program save area is shared by systems.

: System independent Machining programs can be registered for each system.

(MDI data)

: System common MDI data is shared by systems.

: System independent MDI data can be set for each system.

When this parameter is changed, the power must be turned OFF and ON, and the system formatted. (Note) This parameter is valid when #1001

SYS_ON[2] is 1.

0 to 3

1051 (PR)

MemTol Tool compensation memory common for systems

0: Tool compensation memory separate for systems

1: Tool compensation memory common for systems

0/1

1052 (PR)

MemVal No. of common variables shared in system designation

0: Common variables common for system (number fixed)

#100 to : Per system #500 to : Common for systems 1: Common variables common for system

(number fixed) #100 to : Designate with V1comN #500 to : Designate with V0comN

* When this parameter is changed, the method of reading the file system will change after the power is turned ON, so always reformat again. Setting order

MemVal changeover

Format Mismatch displays

Format

Turn power ON again

0/1


II - 30


1060 SETUP Activate setup processing

Execute the functions required for initializing the system.

1: Execute one-touch setup

#(1060) Data( 1)( )

"BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N)" is displayed.

To initialize the parameters.

The parameters are initialized according tothe setting values in #1001 to #1043.

To retain the current parameters.

"FORMAT?(Y/N)" is displayed.

To initialize the machining programfile and tool offset file.

The above files are initialized and the standardcanned cycle program is input.

To retain the current machiningprogram file and tool offset file.

"SETUP COMPLETE" is displayed.

INPUT

INPUT

INPUT

INPUT

INPUT

N

N

Y

Y

Note: Most setup parameters will be initialized

with one-touch setup‚ so confirm the data before executing.

This parameter will automatically be set to 0 when the power is turned ON.

1


II - 31

(SETUP PARAM 1. 3/15)

# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1061 (PR)

intabs Manual ABS updating

Defines whether to update the absolute value data during automatic handle interrupt. This parameter is valid only when #1145 l_abs is set to 1.

0: Do not update (shift coordinates the amount of the interruption)

1: Update (same coordinates as when interrupt did not occur will be applied.)

1062 T_cmp Tool offset function

Specify whether the tool length offset and wear compensation is valid during T command execution.

0 to 3

1063 mandog Manual dog-type

The initial return to the reference point is performed with dog-type return after the power is turned ON‚ and the coordinate system is established. Specify the manual reference point return method after the coordinate system is established with this parameter. (This setting is not required when using absolute position detection.)

0: High speed return

1: Dog-type

1064 (PR)

svof Error correction

Specify whether to correct the error when the servo is OFF.

0: Do not correct the error

1: Correct the error

Setting value Tool length offset Wear compensation 0 Valid Valid 1 Valid Invalid 2 Invalid Valid 3 Invalid Invalid


II - 32


1065 JOG_H JOG response type

Set up an improved JOG response type. 0: Conventional specification The system is started and stopped by

signal via ladder without reference to external input signals.

1: Type 1 The system is started up and stopped by

external signal. 2: Type 2 The system is started up and stopped by

performing the AND operation for external signals and those via ladder.

3: Type 3 The system is started up when signals via

ladder rise. It is stopped when external signals and those via ladder fall.

4: Type 4 Zero point return mode: The system is

started up and stopped by signal via ladder without reference to external input signals (conventional specification).

Non-zero point return mode: The system is started up and stopped by performing AND for external signals and those via ladder (type 2).

0 to 4

1066 JOG_HP Select JOG activation (+) device

Specify the number of the device that inputs +JOG activation signals. The device type is specified by JOG_D in #1071. The effective range of set values vary depending on the device type. A value outside of the effective range is invalid if specified.

X: 0000 to 013F (hexadecimal)

G: 0000 to 3071 M: 0000 to 5119

(decimal)

1067 JOG_HN Select JOG activation (-) device

Specify the number of the device that inputs -JOG activation signals. The device type is specified by JOG_D in #1071. The effective range of set values vary depending on the device type. A value outside of the effective range is invalid if specified.

X: 0000 to 013F (hexadecimal)

G: 0000 to 3071 M: 0000 to 5119

(decimal)

1068 (PR)

slavno Slave axis number

Specify the number of the slave axis for synchronous control. The axis number is an NC number excluding the spindle and PLC axis. Two or more slave axes cannot be set up for one master axis. slaveno cannot be set up for a slave axis. A dual system cannot be set up so that the relationship between the master and slave axes extends over a system.

0: No slave axis 1 to 4: First to fourth

axes 1 to 14: 1st axis to 14th

axis (For simple C

axis synchronous control)


II - 33


1069 (PR)

no_dsp Axis with no counter display

Set up an axis that displays no counter. This option is valid on the counter display screen (relative value screen).

0: Displays the counter

1: Does not display the counter.

1070 axoff Axis removal

Define an axis that enables axis removal control. 0: Disables axis removal.

1: Enables axis removal

1071 (PR)

J0G_D ±J0G activation signal device name

Specify the number of the device that inputs ±J0G activation signals.

0: X device 1: G device 2: M device

Set the JOG_HP (#1066) and JOG_HN (#1067) parameters according to this device specification parameter.

0 to 2

1072 chop_ax Chopping axis

Designate the chopping axis. 0: Non-chopping axis

1: Chopping axis


II - 34


# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1073 I_Absm Initial

absolute value

Specify the absolute value/incremental value mode for when the power is turned ON or reset.

0: Incremental value command mode

1: Absolute value command mode

1074 l_Sync Initial synchronous feed

Specify the feedrate specification mode for when the power is turned ON or reset.

0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute) 1: Synchronous feed (feed per rotation)

0: Asynchronous feed

1: Synchronous feed

1075 I_G00 Initial G00 Specify the linear command mode for when the power is turned ON or reset.

0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state)

1: Positioning (G00 command state)

0: Linear interpolation

1: Positioning

1076 Abslnc (For L system only)

ABS/INC address

The absolute value/incremental commands can be issued by using the absolute value address and incremental value address for the same axis.

0: Absolute/incremental with G command 1: Absolute/incremental with address

code (The #1013 axname address will be the

absolute value command‚ and #1014 incax address will be the incremental value command)

0: Absolute/ incremental with G command

1: Absolute/ incremental with address code

1077 radius Incremental command for diameter specification axis

Specify if the diameter specification axis' (#1019 dia is set to 1) incremental value command uses the diameter value or radius value

0: Diameter value 1: Radius value

1078 Decpt2 Decimal point type 2

Specify the unit of position commands that do not have a decimal point.

0: The min. input command unit is used (follows #1015 cunit)

1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit is used (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.)

0: The min. input command unit is used

1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit is used

1079 F1digt Validate F1 digit

Specify whether to execute the F command with a 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical command.

0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)

1: 1-digit code command (feedrate specified with #1185 spd_F1 - #1189 F5)

0: Direct numerical command

1: 1-digit code command

1080 Dril_Z (For D system only)

Specify boring axis

Specify a fixed cycle hole drilling axis. 0: Use an axis vertical to the selected

plane as the hole drilling axis. 1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis

regardless of the selected plane.

0/1


II - 35


1081 Gmac_P Give priority to G code parameter

Specify the G code priority relationship during the macro call with the G command.

0: G code used in system is priority. 1: Registered G code for call out is priority.

0/1

1082 Geomet (For L system only)

Geometric Specify whether to use the geometric I or IB function.

0: Do not use. 1: Use only geometric I. 2: Use geometric I and IB.

With geometric, specific address codes are used for exclusive meanings. Thus, if A or C is used for the axis address or 2nd miscellaneous command code, the A used for the axis address may function as the geometric's angle designation. Take special care when designating the axis name, etc., when using this function.

0/1/2

1084 RadErr Arc error Specify the tolerable error range when a deviation occurs in the end point and center coordinate in the circular command.

0 to 1.000 (mm)

1085 G00Drn G00 dry run

Specify whether to apply dry run (feed with manual setting speed instead of command feedrate) to the G00 command.

0: Do not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate)

1: Apply to G00. (move at manual set feedrate)

0: Do not apply to G00

1: Apply to G00

1086 G0lntp G00 non-interpolation

Specify the G00 movement path type 0: Move linearly toward the end point.

(interpolation type) 1: Move to the end point of each axis at the

rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (non-interpolation)

0/1

1087 G96_G0 Constant surface speed control by rapid traverse feed command

Specify how to handle the cycle speed for the G00 command when using the constant surface speed control function.

0: Calculate the cycle speed constantly even during G00 movement.

1: Calculate the cycle speed at the block end point in the G00 command.

0/1

1088 G30SL Disable G30 soft limit

Specify how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd reference point return) movement.

0: Soft limit valid during G30 movement 1: Soft limit invalid during G30 movement

0: Soft limit valid 1: Soft limit invalid

1089 Cut_RT Short cut for rotary axis

Specify how to handle the short cut control for the rotary axis (#1017 rot is set to 1).

0: No short cut (move toward end point) 1: Use short cut (when using the absolute

value command‚ move in the direction where the movement amount will be 180° or less)

0: No short cut 1: Use short cut


II - 36


1090 Lin_RT Linear rotary axis

Specify how to handle a command for the rotary axis that exceeds 360°.

0: For absolute value commands that exceed 360°‚ the value will be converted into a remainder of 360° and the axis will move. Example: If the command is 420°‚ the

applied value will be 60°. 1: For absolute value commands that

exceed 360°‚ the axis will move in the same manner as a linear axis. Example: If the command is 420°‚ the axis

will pass the 360° position and will move to the 60° position.

0/1

1091 Mpoint Ignore middle point

Specify now to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference point return.

0: Move to the reference point after passing the middle point designated in the program.

1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program and move straight to the reference point.

0/1

1092 Tchg _A Replace tools for additional axis

Specify the movement of the additional axis during tool change position return.

0: The additional axis does not move with the tool change position return command.

1: After returning the standard axis with the tool change position return command‚ the additional axis also returns to the tool change position.

0/1

1093 Wmvfin Inter- system waiting method

Specify the method for waiting between systems when using two systems. When the movement command is found in the wait command (!, M) block:

0: Wait before executing movement command

1: Wait after executing movement command

0/1

1094 Tl_SBK (for L system only)

Select life count for single block

Select whether to count the data units to be used for a single block when using the tool life management II function (L system).

0: Does not count the data units. 1: Count the data units.

0/1


II - 37


1095 T0tfof TF output Select how to handle TF for T00 command. 0: TF is output. 1: TF is not output

0/1

1096 T_Ltyp (for L system only)

Tool life management type

Specify the tool life management type. 1: Life management type l

2: Life management type ll

1097 T1digt Tool wear compensation number 1-digit command

Specify the No. of digits in the tool wear compensation No. in the T command.

0: The 2 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and the 2 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No.

1: The 3 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and the 1 Iow-order digit is the wear compensation No.

This parameter will be fixed to 0 when tool life management II is selected.

0/1

1098 Tlno. Tool length offset number

Specify the No. of digits in the tool length offset No. in the T command.

0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No.

The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length offset and wear compensation Nos.

1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length offset Nos.

The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No.

0/1

1099 Treset Cancel tool wear compensation amount

Specify how to handle tool compensation vector when resetting system.

0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting.

1: Save the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting.

When the values are cleared‚ the compensation will not be applied‚ so the axis will move the compensation amount in the next compensation operation. When the values are saved‚ the compensation will be applied‚ so the axis will shift the differential amount of the compensation amount in the next compensation operation.

0: Clear 1: Save


II - 38


1100 Tmove Tool wear compensation

Specify the period to perform tool length offset and wear compensation.

0: Compensate when T command is executed.

1: Superimpose and compensate with the movement command in the block where the T command is located. If there is no movement command in the same block‚ compensation will be executed after the movement command is superimposed in the next movement command block.

2: Compensate when the T command is executed. 1: Superimpose and compensate a tool length offset with the movement command in the same block. If there is no movement command in the same block, compensation will be executed after the movement command is superimposed in the next movement command block.

0 to 2

1101 Tabsmv Tool wear compensation method

Specify the type of movement command when #1100 Tmove is set to 1.

0: Compensate regardless of the movement command type.

1: Compensate only at the movement command in the absolute value command.

0: Compensate regardless of the command type.

1: Compensate only with the absolute value command.

1102 tlm (For L system only)

Manual tool length measuring system

Specify the measurement method for manual tool measurement l.

0: Align tool with reference position 1: Input measurement results

0: Reference position method

1: Measured value input method

1103 T_life Validate life management

Select the usage of the tool life management function.

0: Do not use. 1: Perform tool life

management control.

1104 T_Com2 Tool command method 2

Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.

0: Handle the program tool command as the group No.

1: Handle the program tool command as the tool No.

0/1


II - 39


1105 T_Sel2 Tool selection method 2

Select the tool selection method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.

0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group.

1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from tools used in the same group and the unused tools.

0/1

1106 Tcount (For L system only)

Life management count

Specify the function when address N is omitted when inputting data (G10 L3 command) for tool life management function ll.

0: Time specified input

1: No. of times specified input

1107 Tllfsc (For L system only)

Split life management display screen

Set up the number of groups to be displayed on the tool life management II (L system) screen.

0: Displayed group count 1, maximum number of registered tools: 16



0 to 2

1108 TlrectM (For L system only)

Life management re-count M code

Set up the M code for tool life management II (L system) re-count.

0 to 99

1109 (PR)

subs_M Validate alternate M code

Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M code.

0: Alternate M code invalid

1: Alternate M code valid

1110 M96_M M96 alternate M code

Specify an M code to replace M96 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1.

3 to 97 (excluding 30)

1111 M97_M M97 alternate M code

Specify an M code to replace M97 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1.

3 to 97 (excluding 30)

1112 (PR)

S_TRG Validate status trigger system

Specify the validity conditions for the user macro interrupt signal.

0: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) turns OFF to ON.

1: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON.

0: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) turns OFF to ON.

1: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON.

1113 (PR)

INT_2 Validate interrupt method type 2

Specify the movement after user macro interrupt signal (UIT) input.

0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for block being executed to end.

1: Execute interrupt program after completing block being executed.

0/1


II - 40


1114 mcrint Macro argument initialization

Select whether to clear statements other than specified arguments by macro call. Also, select whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting.

0: Delete non-specified arguments by macro call.

1: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call.

2: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call and clear local variables by power-ON and resetting.

0/1/2

1115 thwait Waiting for thread cutting

Set the queue number during screw thread cutting when the chamfering is not valid.

0 to 99 (Approx. 4 ms.) Standard set value: 4

1116 G30SLM Invalidate soft limit (manual operation)

Enable this function when disabling the soft limit check function from the second to the fourth zero point return by manual operation.

0: Enable soft limit function.

1: Disable soft limit function.

1117 H_sens Handle response switch

Switch the handle response mode when feeding the handle.

0: Standard handle response 1: High-speed handle response

0/1

1118 mirr_A (For L system only)

Select how to set up the length of tools on cutter tables (opposed tables)

Select one of the following two methods: • Set up the current length of tools on each

facing turret. • Set up a value, assuming that the tools

on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on the base turret.

0: Current length of the tools on each facing turret

1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on the base turret.

0/1

1119 Tmiron (For L system only)

Select the mirror image of each facing turret with T command

Select whether to validate the mirror image of each facing turret with the T command.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

1120 (PR)

TofVal Change macro variable

Specify whether to change the macro variable (tool offset) numbers for shape compensation and wear compensation.

0: Do not change. (Conventional specifications)

1: Change the shape and wear compensation variable numbers each for X, Z, and R.

0/1


II - 41


# Items Details Setting range (unit)1121 edlk_c Edit lock C Specify whether to prohibit editing of program

Nos. 9000 to 9999. Note: If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in

#1121 when the power is turned ON.

0: Editing possible 1: Editing

prohibited

1122 (PR)

pglk_c Program display lock

The display and search of program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can be prohibited. Specify whether to prohibit display and search.

0: Display and search is possible. 1: Program details are not displayed. 2: Program details are not displayed‚ and

operation search is prohibited. The program details will not be displayed‚ but the program No. and sequence No. will display in the prohibited state. Note: If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in

#1121 when the power is turned ON.

0 to 2

1123 origin Origin zero inhibition

Select whether to use the origin zero function. 0: Use 1: Do not use

1124 ofsfix Fix tool wear compensation number

Specify whether to automatically increment the offset No. by 1 with the input or to display the No. as it is in the setting on the tool offset screen.

0: Increment the # No. by 1 when the input key is pressed. (Same as general parameters)

1: # No. does not change even if INPUT key is pressed.

When making settings in sequence‚ 0 is handier. When changing and setting repeatedly while adjusting one offset value‚ 1 is handier

0/1

1125 real_f Actual feedrate display

Specify the feedrate display on the monitor screen.

0: Command speed

1: Real movement feedrate

1126 PB_G90 Playback G90

Specify whether the playback movement amount when performing playback editing is to be an absolute value or incremental value.

0: Incremental value

1: Absolute value 1127 DPRINT DPRINT

alignment Specify the alignment for printing out with the DPRINT function.

0: No alignment‚ data is printed with left justification.

1: Align the minimum digit and output.

0/1


II - 42


1128 RstVCI Clear variables by resetting

Specify how to handle the common variables when resetting.

0: Common variables do not change after resetting.

1: The following common variables are cleared by resetting: During variable 100 group specifications:

#100 to #149 are cleared. During variable 200 group and 300 group

specifications: #100 to #199 are cleared.

0/1

1129 PwrVCl Clear variables by power-ON

Specify how to handle the common variables when the power is turned ON.

0: The common variables are in the same state as before turning the power OFF.

1: The following common variables are cleared when the power is turned ON. During variable 100 group specifications:

#100 to #149 are cleared. During variable 200 group and 300 group

specifications: #100 to #199 are cleared.

0/1

1130 set_t Display selected tool number

Specify the tool command value display on the POSITION screen.

0: T-modal value of program command is displayed.

1: Tool number sent from PLC is displayed.

0/1

1131 (PR)

Fldcc Feed forward filter

Parameter to suppress acceleration changes with a filter when starting acceleration or deceleration Specify the parameter in bits.

3 0125 46 7

Feed forward filter

bit1: 7.1 (ms) bit2: 14.2 (ms) bit3: 28.4 (ms) bit4: 56.8 (ms) bit5: 113.6 (ms) If bit 1 to bit 5 are all 0 or two or more bits of bit 1 to bit 5 are 1, 3.5 ms is set up.

1132 CRT CRT brightness control

This parameter adjusts the brightness of the CRT display unit.

-3: Highest luminance (Brightest state) -3: Lowest luminance (Darkest state)

Adjust this parameter to an appropriate brightness between -3 and 3. The EL display unit does not have brightness adjustment‚ so setting is not required.

-3 to 3


II - 43


1133 ofsmem Select how to set up tool wear compensation screen

Select the number stored by previous setup when selecting the tool wear compensation screen.

0: Does not display the number when selecting the screen.

1: Displays the stored number when selecting the screen.

0/1

1134 LCDneg LCD reverse display

Specify 1 to reverse the display on the 10.4-type monochrome LCD.

0: Normal display 1: Reverse display

1135 unt_nm Unit name Set up a unit name. Set up the unit name with 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers. If 0 is set up, the unit name is not displayed.

4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers

1136 optype Operation menu display valid

This parameter validates the operation menu display. Specify the setting method for the tool offset data's absolute value or incremental value.

0: Mode selection method (Conventional specification)

1: Menu selection method This parameter is valid on the following screens. • TOOL TIP OFFSET screen (L system) • TOOL DATA screen (L system) • NOSE-R screen (L system) • TOOL OFFSET screen type I (M system) • TOOL OFFSET screen type II (M system)

0/1

1137 Cntsel Coordinate value screen display counter select

Set the type of the position counter to be displayed on the COORDINATE screen.

0 : MST (Default)

1 : Next command

2 : Current value B

3 : Manual interrupt amount

0 or 1 : Next value (Default)

2 : Current value B

3 : Manual interrupt amount

1st digit : 0 to 3 2nd digit: 0 to 3 (Default : 00)

1138 Pnosel Select screen by parameter number:

Specify whether to enable the function to select a screen by specifying a parameter number.



II - 44


1139 edtype Edit type selection

Set up an edit type. 0: Screen edit type (M50 or equivalent

operation) 1: Screen edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI

is changed automatically according to the selected operation mode.)

2: Word edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI is changed automatically according to the selected operation mode.)

3: Screen edit type (type 0 + retaining cursor position) (Applicable only to M64 D version series)

4: Screen edit type (type 1 + retaining cursor position) (Applicable only to M64 D version series)

0/1/2/3/4

1140 Mn100 M code number

First number of M code that corresponds to setup number from 100 to 199

0 to 99999999



0 to 99999999



0 to 99999999



0 to 99999999

1144 mdlkof MDI setup lock

Select whether to enable MDI setup in non-MDI mode.

0: Disable MDI setup

1: Enable MDI setup

1145 I_abs Manual ABS parameter

Specify how to handle the absolute value data during automatic handle interrupt.

0: Absolute value data is renewed if manual ABS switch is ON.

Data is not renewed if switch is OFF. 1: Follows the intabs state when #1061 intabs

is valid.

0/1

1146 Sclamp Spindle rotation speed clamp function

Specify how to handle the spindle rotation speed clamp function with the G92S command.

0: G92S command is handled as a clamp command only in the G96 state (during constant surface speed control). G92S will be handled as normal S command in G97 state (constant surface speed OFF).

1: The S command in the same block as G92 is constantly handled as a clamp command.

0/1

1147 smin_V Minimum spindle rotation speed clamp type

Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp value.

0: Rotation speed setting 1: Output voltage coefficient setting

Set the #3023 smini parameter according to this type setting.

0/1


II - 45


1148 I_G611

Initial high precision

The modal state when the power is turned ON is set to the high accuracy control mode.

0: OFF 1: ON

0/1

1149 cireft Arc deceleration speed change

Specify whether to enable deceleration at the arc entrance or exit.


0/1

1150 Fldc0 G00 feed forward filter

This parameter is used to filter acceleration changes at the start of rapid acceleration/deceleration. Specify the filters in bit units.

3 0125 46 7

Feed forward filter G00/G01 separation

G00 feed forward filter

0: Common 1: Separation

bit1: 7.1 (ms) bit2: 14.2 (ms) bit3: 28.4 (ms) bit4: 56.8 (ms) bit5: 113.6 (ms) When bits 1 to 5 are all 0 or when two or more of bits 1 to 5 are 1, 3.5 (ms) is assumed.

1151 rstint Reset initial Specify whether to initialize (power ON state) the modals by resetting.

0: Do not initialize modal state. 1: Initialize modal state.

0/1

1152 I_G20 Initial command unit

Specify whether the default mode after power-ON or resetting, inch command or metric command mode.

0: Metric command (G21 command state) 1: Inch command (G20 command state) Valid when reset input is made.

Related parameter: Bit 6 "Select setting and display unit" of #1226

0/1

1153 FixbDc Hole bottom deceleration check

Specify whether to perform a deceleration check or in-position check at the hole bottom in the hole drilling cycle. This parameter is valid only for a hole drilling cycle in which no dwell command can be issued at the hole bottom.

0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position check.

1: Perform a deceleration check. 2: Perform an in-position check.

0 to 2


II - 46


1154 (PR)

pdoor Door interlock II (for each system)

Specify whether to control door interlock II independently for each of the two systems. When door interlock II is controlled for each system of the two systems, system 1 is connected to SV1 (channel 1) of the base I/O unit and system 2 is connected to SV2 (channel 2) of the base I/O unit. Base I/O unit

SV1 SV2

AMPAMP AMP System 1

AMPAMP AMP System 2

When the auxiliary axis (MR-J2-CT) is used, connect it to the SV2 side (after the spindle). This validates door interlock II of system 2.

0: Do not use door interlock II independently for channels.

1: Use door interlock II independently for channels.

(Separate systems when using two systems) 2: Use door interlock II independently for

channels. (Use independently for system 1 channels) (Use both for system 2)

When 0 is specified for this parameter, "Signal input device 1 for door interlock II (#1155 DOOR_m)" and "Signal input device 2 for door interlock II (#1156 DOOR_s)" are valid. When 1 is specified, "Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each system (#1511 DOORPm)" and "Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each system (#1512 DOORPs)".

0/1


II - 47


1155 DOOR_m Signal input device 1 for door interlock II

Set up a fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input. A device number from X01 to XFF can be set up. Device number 000 is invalid. Set up device number 100 when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input. Related parameter: #1154 pdoor Door interlock

II (for each system)

000 to 100 (Hexadecimal)

1156 DOOR_s Device number 2 for door interlock II signal input

Set up a fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input. (Set up the same value as that of #1155.) Related parameter: #1154 pdoor Door interlock

II (for each system)

000 to 100 (Hexadecimal)

1157 F0atrn F0 automatic running

Not used

1158 F0atno F0 automatic running program

Not used

1165 p_trans Parameter FROM backup

The parameters are written, read and compared. 0: No process 1: The backed up parameters are read from

the FROM. 2: The parameters are written into the FROM. 3: The parameters are compared with those

backed up in the FROM.

0 to 3

1166 fixpro Fixed cycle editing

Select whether to use the edit, program list and data input/output functions for the fixed cycles, machine manufacturer macro programs or general programs.

0: General programs can be edited, etc. 1: The fixed cycles can be edited, etc.

Password No.: The machine manufacturer macro programs can be edited, etc.

0 to 99999999

1167 e2rom Not used. 1168 test Simulation

test Specify the test mode for the control unit. The test mode does not use reference point return‚ and tests with a hypothetical zero point return completed state. This is limited to test operation of the control unit itself‚ and must not be used when connected to the machine.

0: Normal operation mode

1: Test mode


II - 48


# Items Details Setting range (unit)1169 system

name System name

Set the name of each system. This must be set only when using two systems. This name is displayed on the screen only when the systems must be identified. Use a max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.

A max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.

1170 M2name Second miscellaneous code

Set this address code when using the 2nd miscellaneous command. Set an address with A‚ B and C that is not used with #1013 axname or #1014 incax.

A, B, C

1171 taprov Tap return override

Set the tap return override value for the synchronous tap.

1 to 100 (%)

1172 tapovr Tap return override

Set the override value when leaving the tap end point in the synchronous tap cycle. The setting range is 1 to 999‚ and the unit is %. When a value less than 100 is set‚ it will be judged as 100%.

1 to 999 (%)

1173 dwlskp G04 skip condition

Specify the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) command.

Skip condition 0 to 7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Skip 1 Skip 2Skip 3

Set- ting

PLC interface input signal

End when signal is input.

1174 skip_F G31 skip speed

Specify the feedrate when there is no F command in the program at G31 (skip) command.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

1175

1176

1177

1178

1179

1180

skip1 1f 2 2f 3 3f

G31.1 skip condition G31.2 skip speed G31.2 skip condition G31.2 skip speed G31.3 skip condition G31.3 skip speed

Specify the skip signal in the G31.1 to G31.3 (multi-step skip) command‚ and the feedrate when there is no F command in the program. Skip signal specified at G31.1 Skip feedrate at G31.1 Skip signal specified at G31.2 Skip feedrate at G31.2 Skip signal specified at G31.3 Skip feedrate at G31.3

Skip condition 0 to 7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Skip 1 Skip 2Skip 3

Set- ting

PLC interface input signal

Skip feedrate 1 to 999999 (mm/min)


II - 49


1181 G96_ax Constant surface speed control

Specify the axis to be targeted for constant surface speed control.

0: Program specification will be invalidated‚ and the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis.

1: 1st axis specification 2: 2nd axis specification 3: 3rd axis specification 4: 4th axis specification

The program specification will be the priority for all settings other than 0.

0 to 4

1182 thr_F Thread cutting speed

Set the screw cut up speed when not using chamfering in the thread cutting cycle.

0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate 1 to 60000 mm/min: Set feedrate

0 to 60000 (mm/min)

1183 clmp_M M code for clamp

Set the M code for C-axis clamp in the hole drilling cycle.

0 to 99999999

1184 clmp_D Dwelling time after outputting M code for unclamp

Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for C-axis unclamp in the hole drilling cycle.

0.000 to 99999.999 (s)

1185 1186 1187 1188 1189

spd_F1 spd_F2 spd_F3 spd_F4 spd_F5

F1 digit feedrate F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Specify the feedrate for the F command in the F1-digit command (#1079 F1 digt is set to 1). Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min) Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min) Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min) Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min) Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min)

1 to 60000 (mm/min)

1190 (PR)

s_xcnt (For L system only)

Validate inclined- axis control

Specify whether to disable or enable inclined-axis control.

0: Disable inclined-axis control 1: Enable inclined-axis control

0/1

1191 (PR)

s_angl (For L system only)

Inclination angle

Specify the inclination angle (θ). Note: If 0 is specified for this parameter, the

angle determined by three-side setting is valid.

± 80.000 (°)

1192 (PR)

s_zrmv (For L system only)

Compensation at origin return

Specify whether to perform compensation for the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis at original return.

0: Perform compensation. 1: Don't perform compensation.

0/1


II - 50


# Items Details Setting range (unit)The setting is selected with "#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type".

0: Deceleration check method 1 1: Validate in-position check

Deceleration check method 1

Specify the deceleration check method for G0. 0: Command deceleration check 1: In-position check

0/1

1193 inpos

Validate in-position check

Specify the deceleration confirmation method for the positioning or cutting command.

0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check

1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check

0/1

1194 H_acdc Time constant 0 for handle feed

Specify the time constant for the manual handle feed.

0: Use time constant for G01 1: Time constant 0 (step)

0/1

1195 1196 1197 1198

Mmac Smac Tmac M2mac

Macro call for M command Macro call for S command Macro call for T command Macro call with 2nd miscellaneous code

Specify the user macro M‚ S or T command macro call out. Macro call out with M command Macro call out with S command Macro call out with T command Macro call out with 2nd miscellaneous command

0: Invalid 1: Valid

1199 Sselect Select initial spindle control

Select the initial condition of spindle control after power is turned ON.

0: 1st spindle control mode (G43.1) 1: Selected spindle control mode (G44.1) 2: All spindle simultaneously control mode

(G47.1) Note: Spindle No. when G44.1 is

commanded is selected with #1534 SnG44.1.

0: G43.1 1: G44.1 2: G47.1

1200 (PR)

G0_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant G0

Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a rapid traverse command is issued

0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) with time constant

1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant

0: Acceleration and deceleration with time constant



II - 51


1201 (PR)

G1_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G1

Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a liner interpolation command is issued.

0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) with time constant


0: Acceleration and deceleration with time constant


1202 mirofs (For L system only)

Distance between facing turrets

Set up the distance between tools (edges) (between facing turrets).

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

1203 TmirS1 (For L system only)

Select turrets as facing turrets with T command

Set up turrets as shown in the mirror image of facing turrets with the T command that corresponds to tool numbers 1 to 32.

0 to FFFFFFFF

1204 TmirS2 (For L system only)

Select turrets as facing turrets with T command

Set up turrets as shown in the mirror image of facing turrets with the T command that corresponds to tool numbers 33 to 64.

0 to FFFFFFFF

1205 G0bdcc Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation

0: G00 acceleration and deceleration are selected as those after interpolation.

1: The G00 acceleration/deceleration is the acceleration/decelerate before interpolation regardless of whether the mode is the high accuracy control mode.

(Note) "1" cannot be set for the 2nd system.

0/1

1206 G1bF Maximum speed

Set up a cutting feedrate when selecting acceleration and deceleration before interpolation.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

1207 G1btL Time constant

Set up a cutting feed time constant when selecting acceleration and deceleration before interpolation.

G1bF

G1btL Time

Speed

1 to 5000 (ms)

1208 RCK Arc radius error compensation factor

An arc radius error compensation can be increased and decreased from −60.0 to 20.0%.

−60.0 to +20.0 (%)


II - 52


1209 cirdcc Arc deceleration speed

Specify the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

1210 RstGmd Modal G code reset

Specify whether to initialize each G code group modal and the H and D codes when the system is reset. Specify the initialization items in bit correspondence. 0. Initialize. 1: Don't initialize. M system

Specify a hexadecimal number.

The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and the D code indicates the tool radius compensation number. When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group 8 G modal area retained. When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G modal are retained. (To be continued to the next page)

10 Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal 11 Group 18 pole coordinate command modal 12 Group 19 G command mirror modal 13 Group 20 Spindle 2 control modal 14 15 16 17 18 H, D codes 19 Spindle clamp rotation speed 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

0 Group 1 Move G modal 1 Group 2 Flat selection modal 2 Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal 3 4 Group 5 Feed G modal 5 Group 6 Inch/metric modal 6 Group 7 Radius compensation modal 7 Group 8 Length compensation modal 8 9 Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal A B Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal C Group 13 Cut modal D E Grpup 15 Normal line control modal F


II - 53

# Items Details Setting range (unit) (Continued from the previous page)

L system

Specify a hexadecimal number.

1211 FHtyp Feed hold stop type

Specify the type of the external signal used for feed hold.

0: Disable the external signal. 1: Enable the external signal (contact A) 2: Enable the external signal (contact B)

0 to 2

1212 FHno Feed hold external signal device

Specify the number (X??) of the device used to input the feed hold signal.

000 to 13F (hexadecimal)

1213 proaxy (For L system only)

Side 1 of inclination angle

Specify the length on the rectangular coordinates of the inclined axis in the triangle made up of the inclination angle.

±9999.999

0 Group 1 Move G modal 1 Group 2 Flat selection modal 2 Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal 3 Group 4 Barrier check modal 4 Group 5 Feed G modal 5 Group 6 Inch/metric modal 6 Group 7 Nose R compensation modal 7 8 9 Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal A B Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal C Group 13 Cut modal D E F

10 Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal 11 Group 18 Balance cut 12 13 Group 20 Spindle 2 control modal 14 Group 15 Facing turret mirror image 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F


II - 54


1214 macaxy (For L system only)


Specify the length of the actual base axis corresponding to the inclined axis in the triangle made up of the inclination angle.

±9999.999

1215 macaxx (For L system only)


Specify the length of the actual axis of the inclined axis in the triangle made up of the inclination angle.

±9999.999

1216 extdcc External deceleration level

Use an upper limit value at the feedrate indicated when validating external deceleration signals. This parameter is valid when #1239 set11/bit6 is set to 0.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)


II - 55


# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1217 aux01 Not used 1218 aux02

(bit3) Parameter input/output format

Specify a parameter input/output format. 0: Type I 1: Type II (related to #1218 aux02/bit5)

0/1

aux02 (bit4)

Tool number selection

Specify the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring the coordinate offset of an external workpiece.

0: Conforms to #1130 set_t. 1: Uses the tool number indicated by user PLC

0/1

aux02 (bit5)

Parameter I/O II spindle specification address

Specify the spindle specification address of parameter I/O type II.

0: C 1: T

This parameter also applies to the spindle specification address for input and collation. Note: This parameter is valid only for parameter

I/O type II (bit 3 of aux02 in #1218 is 1).

0/1

aux02 (bit6)

Set No. valid when program input

Specify which program No. is selected when inputting operation using "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" in Data I/O screen.

0: The No. in the input data is valid. 1: The No. set in the data setting area is valid.

0/1

aux02 (bit7)

Input by program overwrite

(1) When inputting operation using "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" in Data I/O screen, select one of the following options when the input program has already been registered:

0: An operation error (E65) occurs. 1: Input by overwrite.

(2) When using the high-speed program server, select the operation if the name of the file to be transmitted with transmission (IC → host) operations already exists in the host.

0: Overwrite prohibit 1: Overwrite valid

0/1

1219 aux03 (bit1)

Stop high- speed PC monitoring function

Set 1 to disable the function that stops the system when the high-speed processing time is extended. Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure.

0/1

aux03 (bit2)

Improve skip coordinate accuracy

0: Skip accuracy (conventional specification) 1: Changes skip accuracy (correct a position in

skip coordinates when entering skip signals).

0/1

aux03 (bit5)

Dog-type intermediate point

Select whether to move to the intermediate point during automatic dog-type reference point return.

0: Do not move to intermediate point during dog-type reference point return.

1: Move to intermediate point during dog-type reference point return.

0/1


II - 56


1220 aux04 (bit 0) (For L system only)

Tool life check timing selection

Specify the life check standard applicable when the use count is incremented in tool life management II.

0: Determine that the tool life is over when the incremented use count exceeds the life count. (Use count > life count)

1: Determine that the tool life is over when the incremented use count has reached the life count. (Use count ≥ life count)

0/1 (Default: 0)

aux04 (bit1)

Validity of space code in comment

Validate or invalidate the space code described in the comment statements in the machining program in edit operation with the special display.

0: Invalidate the space code in the comment statements of the machining program.

1: Validate the space code in the comment statements of the machining program.

0/1 (Default: 0)

aux04 (bit2)

Not used.

aux04 (bit3)

Not used.

aux04 (bit4)

Data input/ output unit selection

Specify the input/output data unit for tool data and user parameter input/output.

0: Internal unit (metric) 1: Follows command mode set with #1152

I_G20 Metric when set to 0 Inch when #1152

I_G20 is set to 1 This parameter is valid when initial metric (#1041 I_inch 0) is set and the setting and display unit is the command unit (#1226 aux10 bit6 1). In all other cases, the tool data will be input and output with the internal units.

0/1

aux04 (bit7)

Host communication validity during automatic operation

Set whether Ethernet communication is enabled during automatic operation.

0: Ethernet communication disabled during automatic operation

1: Ethernet communication enabled during automatic operation

(Note) If Ethernet communication is enabled during automatic operation, interrupt processes required for communication will be carried out, so the machining performance could be affected.

0/1


II - 57


1221 aux05 (bit7)

Current value B valid

Select the type of counter to be displayed on the POSITION screen.

0: Displays a relative value (value that includes tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and workpiece coordinate offset amount)

1: Displays current value B (value that does not include tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and workpiece coordinate offset amount)

Workpiece offset

Tool offset

aux05/bit7 = 1

aux05/bit7 = 0

(Note1) When "#1221 aux05/bit7" is set to "1", the current value B is selected regardless of the bit type of #1287 ext23. When the current value B is valid, the counter zero or origin zero is invalid.

(Note2) The following limits apply to

M64A/M64: • This is compatible only with the lathe

system. • The relative value counter on the

COORDINATE screen will also display the current value B.

• When "#1287 ext23/bit3" is set to 0, the relative value will be displayed instead of the current value B regardless of this parameter setting.

0/1

1222 aux06 (bit0)

Validity of tool length measurement confirmation message

0: Display no confirmation message when tool compensation data is set.

1: Display a confirmation message when tool compensation data is set.

(Applicable only to M64 D version series)

0/1

aux06 (bit1)

Height axis specification

When 1 is set in this parameter, the axis specified by base specification parameter #1028 base_k is measured and no other axes are measured if they move. (Applicable only to M64 D version series)

0/1


II - 58

# Items Details Setting range (unit) aux06

(bit2) Servo waveform display

Specify whether to enable the waveform display function. (Applicable only to M64 D version series)

0: Disable the waveform display function. 1: Enable the waveform display function.

0/1

aux06 (bit3)

Enable/disable setup parameter lock

Specify whether to enable the setup parameter lock function.


0/1

aux06 (bit4)

Minimum cut-in amount selection

Select the minimum cut-in amount command value for the compound thread cutting cycle (G76 command).

0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is "0". 1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is the CNC

internal data.

0/1

aux06 (bit5)

Fixed cycle for compound lath command format check selection

Select the operation to be made if the 1st block of the fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted when the conventional format is selected (#1265 ext01/bit0 "0").

0: Program error (P33) occurs. 1: Parameter setting value is used.

0/1

aux06 (bit7)

Zero point return deceleration check method

Set the deceleration check method used during automatic reference point return. (Applicable only to M64 D version series)

0: In-position check 1: Commanded deceleration check

0/1

1223 aux07 (bit0)

Rapid traverse inclination constant multi-stage acceleration and deceleration

Specify whether to enable the rapid traverse inclination constant multi-stage acceleration/deceleration function. (Applicable only to M64 D version series)


Related parameters: #2064 rapid2 Speed 2 #2065 G0tL2 Time constant 2 #2066 rapid3 Speed 3 #2067 G0tL3 Time constant 3

0/1

aux07 (bit1)

Deceleration check method 2

Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9. 0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9 1: In-position check in G1+G9

The deceleration check is not performed except G1+G9. When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check specification type" is set to 1 (Deceleration check specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.

0/1


II - 59


(bit2) Synchronous tap R-point in-position check

0: Disable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point in-position check.

1: Enable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point in-position check.

(Applicable only to M64 D version series) Note: This parameter is valid only when 1

(in-position check is valid) is set in bit 3 of #1223 aux07 (synchronous tap in-position check improvement).

0/1

aux07 (bit3)

Synchronous tap in-position check improvement

Specify whether to enable the synchronous tap in-position check improvement function. (Applicable only to M64 D version series)


Related parameters: #1223 bit 2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position

check bit 4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position

check bit 5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position

check 2

0/1

aux07 (bit4)

Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check

0: Disable the synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check.

1: Enable the synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check.



0/1

aux07 (bit5)

Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2

0: Disable synchronous tape R-point in-position check.

1: Enable synchronous tape R-point in-position check.



0/1

aux07 (bit6)

Cancel synchronous tap (,S) return

0: Retains a spindle rotation speed (, S) when performing synchronous tap return.

1: Cancels a spindle rotation speed (, S) by return with G80.

0/1

aux07 (bit7)

Synchronous tap method

Specify a synchronous tap method. 0: Synchronous tap (multi-step acceleration

and deceleration and rapid return) 1: Conventional type synchronous tap

0/1

1224 aux08 (bit0)

Sampling data output

Set the validity of the sampling data output. 0: Sampling output invalid 1: Sampling output valid

0/1


II - 60


1225 aux09 (bit0)

PLC Interface Diagnosis screen changeover

Set this to change to the PLC Interface Diagnosis screen.

0: 40-character compatible screen 1: 80-character compatible screen

0/1

aux09 (bit7)

Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp

Specify whether to enable spindle rotation speed clamp by the spindle rotation speed clamp command (G92S, Q) instead of the spindle rotation speed command (R108) specified by the user ladder.

0: Enable 1: Disable

0/1

1226 aux10 (bit0)

Tool compensation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement

Select the tool offset data to be used for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement.

0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data 1: Tool length data

0/1

aux10 (bit1)

Optional block skip type

Specify whether to enable optional block skipping in the middle of a block.

0: Enable block skipping only at the beginning of a block.

1: Enable block skipping at the beginning of the block and in the middle of a block.

0/1

aux10 (bit2)

Single block stop timing

Specify the time at which the single block signal is activated.

0: When the signal goes ON while automatic operation is starting, the block stops after it is finished.

1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block, the block stops.

0/1

aux10 (bit3)

C-axis reference point return type

Specify the C-axis reference point return type. 0: Origin return is performed by the G28

reference point return command or when manual reference point return is activated. The origin dog is used.

1: When the first C-axis command is issued after the C-axis mode is entered in automatic mode, reference point return is performed before execution of the block. Also, reference return is performed by the G28 reference point return command or when manual reference point return is activated. The Z phase of the encoder is used.

0/1

aux10 (bit4)

S command during constant surface speed

Specify whether to output a strobe signal when the S command is issued in constant surface speed mode.

0: Output no strobe signal in constant surface speed mode.

1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed mode.

0/1


II - 61


(bit5) Arbitrary allocation of dog signal

Specify whether to enable the arbitrary allocation parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT.

0: Disable arbitrary allocation. (Fixed device) 1: Enable arbitrary allocation. (Device

specified by the parameter)

0/1

aux10 (bit6)

Setup and display unit

Specify the unit to be used as the setup/display unit or handle feed unit, the command unit or internal unit. The machining program variables (system variables for coordinate system) are changed simultaneously. 0: Internal unit 1: Unit specified by command Note 1: This parameter is valid only in initial

millimeter mode (0 is set in 14041 I_inch). The internal unit is always used in initial inch mode (1 is set in 14041 I_inch).

Note 2: This parameter is validated immediately after it is set.

Note 3: If addition setting is performed for tool and workpiece offset data with the command unit being inch and internal unit being mm, an error may be generated.

Note 4: If "1" is set for this parameter and two systems are used, the operation will follow the unit commanded for each system.

Note 5: The internal data is an internal unit determined with #1041 I_inch.

Note 6: This parameter is not related to the PLC axis.

Related parameter: #1152 I_G20 (Initial command unit)

0/1

aux10 (bit7)

Shorten JOG stop time

Specify whether to shorten the JOG stop time. 0: Do not shorten the JOG stop time. (Same as

before) 1: Shorten the JOG stop time.

0/1

1227 aux11 (bit0)

Select PLC signal or spindle feedrate attained

Set up this option when disabling the cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained.

0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal 1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate

attained

0/1

aux11 (bit1)

Select H or D code

Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on the tool life management screen when issuing the H99 or D99 command.

0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up on the management setup screen.

1: Validates the data that is set up on the management setup screen when issuing the H99 or D99 command.

0/1


II - 62


(bit2) Measures against tool setter chattering

Select a condition where a relieving operation completes after measurement with tools.

0: Sensor signals has stopped for 500 ms or longer.

1: 100 µs or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped.

0/1

aux11 (bit3)

Absolute coordinate switching (nose R) [Special display unit compatible]

Select whether to display a tool nose position or coordinate value with the absolute coordinate counter.

0: Displays the tool nose position. 1: Displays the position specified by

program command.

0/1

aux11 (bit4)

Program address check

Specify whether to simply check the program address when the machining program is executed.

0: Don't check the program address. 1: Check the program address.

0/1

aux11 (bit5)

Spindle rotation speed clamp

Specify whether to clamp the rotation in constant surface speed mode when the spindle rotation speed clamp command is issued.

0: Clamp the rotation regardless of the constant surface speed mode.

1: Clamp the rotation only in constant surface speed mode.

0/1

aux11 (bit6)

Word edit menu

Select the word edit menu format. Set 0 in this parameter to select the following menu format:

LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU

COPY PROGRAM MENU

SEARCH B.G. SRH B.G. END COMMENT RETURN

WORD ↓ WORD ↑ STR ↓ STR ↑ RETURN

Set 1 in this parameter to select the following men

COPY PROGRAM MENU

LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU

SEARCH B.G. SRH B.G. END COMMENT RETURN

WORD ↓ WORD ↑ STR ↓ STR ↑ RETURN

0/1


II - 63


(bit7) Switch the range of tool life data to be input (For M system only)

set up the range of tool life data to be input or compared.

0: Inputs or compares all of the data output. 1: Inputs or compares part of the data output

1) Tool life management I data to be input or compared tool number (D), lifetime (E), life count (F), and auxiliary data (B).

2) Tool life management II data to be input or compared Group number (G), method (M), life (E/F), tool number (D), and compensation number (H)

Note: When the maintenance function data input/output #(99) ( ) is set, all data will be input and compared.

0/1

1228 aux12 (bit0)

Switch coordinate value screen

Set up this option to switch the coordinate value screen.

0: 80-character screen 1: 40-character screen

0/1

aux12 (bit1)

Switch offset and parameter screen

Set up this option to switch the offset and parameter screen to the parameter screen.

0: Displays the offset and parameter screen. 1: Displays the parameter screen.

0/1

aux12 (bit2)

Switch data protection in data transmission mode

Set up the range of data protection in data transmission mode.

0: Protects both send and receive data. 1: Protects receive data only.

0/1

aux12 (bit3)

Nose R specification

Select whether to specify the nose R compensation by shape or wear number.

0: Specifies the nose R compensation by shape number.

1: Specifies the nose R compensation by wear number.

0/1

aux12 (bit4)

Select operation error or stop code

Specify both block cutting start interlock and cutting start interlock as the operation error or stop code.

0: Operation error 1: Stop code

0/1

aux12 (bit5)

Select constant surface speed coordinates

Select constant surface speed coordinates. 0: Workpiece coordinate value 1: Absolute coordinate value

0/1

aux12 (bit6)

Switch relative values displayed

Select whether to preset the relative coordinates with workpiece coordinate preset (G92.1) or counter preset (G92).

0: Preset relative coordinates. 1: Do not preset relative coordinates.

0/1


II - 64


(bit7) Protection with manual value command

Set up this option to protect a manual value command.

0: Does not protect the manual value command (same as before).

1: Protects the manual value command.

0/1

1229 set01 (bit0)

Subprogram interrupt

0: Specifies the user macro interrupt of macro type.

1: Specifies the user macro interrupt of sub-program type.

0/1

set01 (bit1)

Accurate thread cutting E

0: Address E specifies the number of threads per inch for inch screw cutting.

1: Address E specifies precise reading for inch screw cutting.

0/1

set01 (bit2)

Radius compensation type B (For M system only)

0: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during radius compensation, their blocks are not handled by intersection operation processing; they are handled as offset vectors in the direction vertical to that of the commands.

1: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during radius compensation, the intersection operation processing of the command block and the next block is executed.

0/1

set01 (bit2)

Nose R compensation type B (For L system only)

0: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during nose R and radius compensation, their blocks are not handled by intersection operation processing; they are handled as offset vectors in the direction vertical to that of the commands.

1: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during nose R and radius compensation, the intersection operation processing of the command block and the next block is executed.

0/1

set01 (bit3)

Initial constant surface speed

0: The initial state after power-ON is a constant surface speed control cancel mode.

1: The initial state after power-ON is a constant surface speed control mode.

0/1

set01 (bit4)

Synchronous tap

0: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap cycles with a floating tap chuck.

1: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap cycles without a floating tap chuck.

0/1

set01 (bit5)

Start point alarm

Select an operation when the operation start point cannot be found while moving the next block of G117.

0: Enables an auxiliary function after the block has been moved.

1: Outputs an program error (P33) when the operation start point is not found.

0/1


II - 65

# Items Details Setting range (unit) set01

(bit6) Grid display selection

Select a grid type to be displayed on the servo monitor screen during dog type reference point return.

0: Selects the distance between dog OFF and zero point (including a grid mask amount).

1: Selects a value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and zero point.

0/1

1230 set02 (bit7)

Macro interface input/output for each system

0: The macro interface input/output are shared by the systems.

1: The macro interface input/output are used independently by the systems.

0/1

1231 set03 (bit1)

Switch graphic coordinates

Select whether to draw graphics with the machine coordinate value or the tool position coordinate value (position being machined, obtained by subtracting the tool compensation amount from machine coordinate values) when displaying the trace function.

0: Machine coordinate value (same as conventional method)

1: Tool position coordinate value The counter display and counter name are sequenced with this.

0/1

set03 (bit2)

Switch graphic check trace

Select whether to draw both the machine coordinate value (tool center path) and tool position coordinate value (program path) or draw only the coordinates selected with switch graphic coordinates (#1231 set03/ bit1) when using the program check function.

0: Both machine coordinates and tool position coordinates (same as conventional method)

1: Only coordinates designated with switch graphic coordinates.

0/1

set03 (bit3)

Hold display range information

Select whether to hold the display range information (drawing position and scale value) for graphic displays.

0: Hold. 1: Do not hold. (Initialize each time ... same

as conventional method)

0/1

set03 (bit4)

Switch zero point mark display position

Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic display.

0: Machine coordinate zero point (same as conventional method)

1: Workpiece coordinate zero point

0/1


II - 66


set04 (bit0)

Switch load monitor

Select whether to detect the load with the load monitor's load detection, excluding during acceleration/ deceleration.

0: Detect also during acceleration/deceleration. (Conventional)

1: Do not detect during acceleration/deceleration.

0/1 1232

set04 (bit1)

Program format (IC card)

Select the format of the file output during copying (NC → IC).

0: Add "%" to the head of the file. 1: The head of the file is No. 0.

0/1

1233 set05 (bit1)

Spindle clamp selection

Select whether to validate the spindle override for the spindle speed clamp command (G92 S?).

0: Spindle override invalid 1: Spindle override valid

0/1

1234 set06 (bit6)

Not used. 0/1

set06 (bit7)

Enable/disable MELDASNET

Enable or disable the MELDASNET function. 0: Enable 1: Disable

0/1

1235 set07 (bit0)

Helical interpolation speed 2

0: Select normal speed designation also for 3rd axis

1: Select arc plane element speed designation

0/1 (MAGIC64)

set07 (bit1)

File server selection for version upgrade

0: Set upper limit of program file size to 2 gigabytes.

1: Set upper limit of program file size to 16 megabytes.

0/1 (MAGIC64)

set07 (bit2)

Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start

When the fixed type compensation value is selected, the method is changed to the compensation value sequential update type after the first four cycles.

0: Method changeover invalid 1: Method changeover valid

0/1

1236 set08 (bit0)

Manual rotation axis feedrate unit

Select the unit of manual rotation axis feedrate. 0: Fixed to [°/min] 1: Same speed as before

0/1

set08 (bit1)

Spindle speed detection

Select the pulse input source of actual spindle rotation speed output (R18/19) when spindle encoder serial connection (#3025 enc-on: 2) is selected.

0: Serial input 1: Encoder input connector

0/1

set08 (bit2)

Current limit droop cancel invalid

Set whether to cancel the position droop when the current limit changeover signal is canceled.

0: Cancel droop. 1: Do not cancel droop.

0/1

set08 (bit7)

Not used. 0/1


II - 67


set09 (bit0)

External workpiece offset

Set up this function to use the external workpiece coordinates by shifting them to the Z axis.

0: Does not reverse the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift) (same as before).

1: Reverses the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift).

Note: When the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift) has been reversed, do not measure those external workpiece offsets. However, the external workpiece offsets can be measured by tool pre-setter.

0/1 1237 (PR)

set09 (bit1)

Switch PC I/F F modal

The feedrate display for the special display unit is changed.

0: Display as feed per minute. 1: Change between feed per minute and

feed per rotation according to the modal state.

0/1

set09 (bit2)

Switch PC I/F T modal

The T command display for the special display unit is changed. (Only L system)

0: Display tool No. (excluding low-order two digits).

1: Display including the compensation No.

0/1

set09 (bit3)

Switch PC I/F remaining distance dwell time display

The dwell time display for the special display unit is changed.

0: Display at feedrate display position. 1: Display at remaining distance display

position.

0/1

set09 (bit4)

Switch PC I/F execution program display/ comment display

The display of the program being executed for the special display unit is displayed.

0: Display as searched state, regardless of operation mode.

1: If operation mode and searched program differ, program is not displayed.

Comment is displayed for head block search.

0/1

set09 (bit5)

Switch PC I/F modal S

This parameter is for the special display unit I/F. 0: The S command commanded last is

returned. 1: When #1039 spinno is 1

The 1st spindle data is returned. When #1039 spinno is 2

If #1199 Sselect for 2nd system is set to 1 with 2nd system setting, the 2nd spindle data is returned. When another command is issued, the 1st spindle data is returned.

Note: When using constant surface speed control (G96 modal), the actual rotation speed command is returned.

0/1


II - 68


set10 (bit0)

Switch G36 function

If a G code system containing the G36 (automatic tool length measurement X) function is selected, select whether to use G36 for the automatic tool length measurement or arc thread cutting (CCW) function.

0: Automatic tool length measurement 1: Arc thread cutting (CCW)

0/1

set10 (bit6)

Not used. 0/1

1238 (PR)

set10 (bit7)

Switch operation alarm

Select whether to validate the NC alarm 5 (AL5) signal output.

0: NC alarm 5 (AL5) invalid All operation alarms are output to NC

alarm 4 (AL4). All operation alarms are recorded in the

alarm history. 1: NC alarm 5 (AL5) valid The following operation alarms are not

output to NC alarm 4 (AL4). These are output to NC alarm 5 (AL5).

The operation alarms output to NC alarm 5 (AL5) are not recorded in the alarm history. • External interlock axis found • Cutting override zero • External feedrate zero • Block start interlock • Cutting block start interlock • Cutting interlock for spindle-spindle

polygon (G51.2)

0/1 (Default: 0)

1239 (PR)

set11 (bit0)

Coil switching method

0: Via PLC. (Y2D7) 1: NC internal processing. (Y2D7 is invalid.)

0/1

set11 (bit1)

Not used. 0/1

set11 (bit2)

Not used. 0/1

set11 (bit3)

Polygon machining mode at reset

Select whether to cancel the polygon machining mode when reset is applied.

0: Do not cancel. 1: Cancel.

0/1

set11 (bit4)

Invalidate G51.1 phase command

Select whether to carry out phase control with the spindle-spindle polygon function.

0: Always validate phase control. * When R is not commanded, it is

handled as R0. 1: Validate phase control only at R

command

0/1


II - 69


set11 (bit5)

Door interlock spindle speed clamp valid

Select whether to validate the spindle clamp speed changeover function by the PLC signal.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

set11 (bit6)

External deceleration axis compliance valid

Designate the method for setting the external deceleration speed.

0: Set speed common for all axes (#1216 extdcc external deceleration speed)

1: Set speed for each axis (#2086 exdcax external deceleration speed)

0/1

set11 (bit7)

APLC software working environment setting

0: Run the APLC software with the ROM. 1: Run the APLC software with the RAM.

0/1

1240 (PR)

set12 (bit0)

Handle input pulse

Select the handle input pulse. 0: MELDAS standard handle pulse 1: Handle 400 pulse

0/1

set12 (bit1)

Megatorque motor handle feed magnification

Select the magnification of megatorque motor handle 1 pulse.

0: Double the handle 1 pulse magnification specified by the handle feed magnification signal (Y2C0 to Y2C2).

1: Use the handle 1 pulse magnification specified by the handle feed magnification signal (Y2C0 to Y2C2) as is.

0/1

set12 (bit2)

Zero point shift amount magnification

If "1" is set, the following magnification will be applied on the #2027 G28sft reference point shift amount, #2057 zero point proximity + and #2058 zero point proximity - settings.

For 0.1µm : 10-fold For 0.01µm : 100-fold

0/1


II - 70


# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1265 (PR)

ext01 (bit0)

Command format 1

Select the command format for the fixed cycle for compound lathe.

0: Conventional format 1: MELDAS special format

(1 block command method)

0/1

ext01 (bit1)

Command format 2

Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle.


0/1

ext01 (bit2)

Command format 3

Select the command format for the hole drilling fixed cycle.


0/1

1266 (PR)

ext02 Not used.

1267 (PR)

ext03 (bit0)

G code type Select the high-speed high-accuracy G code type.

0: Conventional format 1: F format

0/1

1268 (PR)

ext04 Not used.

1269 (PR)

ext05 Not used.

1270 (PR)

ext06 (bit7)

Handle C axis coordinate during cylindrical interpolation

Specify whether the rotary axis coordinate before the cylindrical interpolation start command is issued is kept during the cylindrical interpolation or not.

0: Do not keep 1: keep

0/1

1271 (PR)

ext07 (bit0)

Mirror image operation

Select the type of mirror image operation. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0: Type 1 - The program mirror image, external mirror

image, and parameter mirror image are exclusive to each other.

- An increment command moves the image to the position indicated by the move amount with the sign inverted.

1: Type 2 - Mirror image operation is enabled when

the program mirror image (G51.1) command is issued or when the external signal or parameter is ON.

- An increment command moves the image to the position determined by applying the mirror image to the absolute program coordinates.

0/1 (Default: 0)


II - 71

# Items Details Setting range (unit) ext07

(bit1) Address specifying fixed cycle repetition count (For M system only)

Specify the address that specifies the fixed cycle repetition count. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0: Address L only 1: Addresses K and L

If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously, the data at address K is used for operation.

0/1 (Default: 0)

ext07 (bit2)

F-command unit

Specify the unit to be used if a thread cutting read command contains on decimal point. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) F1 → 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev 1: Type 2 F1 → 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev

0/1 (Default: 0)

ext07 (bit3)

G-code group for unidirectional positioning (for M system only)

Specify the G-code group for unidirectional positioning. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0: Unmodal G code (group 00) 1: Modal G code (group 01)

Related parameter: #8209 G60 SHIFT (Set the last positioning direction and distance for each axis applicable when the unidirectional positioning command is issued.)

0/1

ext07 (bit4)

Operation by independent G40 command

Specify the mode of canceling radius compensation vector by the independent G40 command. (Applicable only to M65 and M66) (Default: 0)

0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) The independent G40 command cancels the radius compensation vector.

1: Type 2 The radius compensation vector is not canceled by the independent G40 command but is canceled by the next move command for the radius compensation plane.

0/1 (Default: 0)

ext07 (bit5)

Cut start position (For L system only)

Specify the position from where cutting begins in a fixed cycle for compound lathe.

0: Conventional specifications The cut start position is determined by the final shaping program.

1: Extended specifications The cut start position is determined from the cycle start point.

0/1 (Default: 0)


II - 72


(bit6) Nose R compensation (For L system only)

Specify whether to apply nose R compensation to shapes in a rough cutting cycle.

0: Conventional specifications If nose R compensation is enabled for the final shaping program, the shape obtained after applying nose R compensation to the final shaping program is used as the rough cutting shape.

1: Extended specifications The shape made by the final shaping program, without nose R compensation, is used as the rough cutting shape.

0/1 (Default: 0)

ext07 (bit7)

Cut amount (For L system only)

Specify the operation to be performed when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program.

0: Conventional specifications A program error occurs if the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program.

1: Extended specifications Rough cutting is performed by one cut if the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program.

0/1 (Default: 0)

1272 (PR)

ext08 (bit0)

Switch pocket machining operation

0: Conventional specifications Pocket machining is selected with the H

designation. The pull direction when pocket machining

is ON is the Z direction. 1: Extended specifications If there is an X and Z axis in the first

movement block after the finished shape start block is started, pocket machining will start.

The pull direction when pocket machining is ON is the X direction.

0/1

ext08 (bit1)

M function synchronous tap cycle

Specify whether to enable the M function synchronous tap cycle.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

ext08 (bit2)

Spiral/conical interpolation command format 2

Select the command format for spiral interpolation and conical interpolation.

0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) 1: Type 2 (spiral speed L designation,

increment designation)

0/1

ext08 (bit3)

Switch macro call function

Select whether to shift the argument to the subprogram if nests are overlapped when per block call (G66.1) is commanded.

0: Shift argument even if nests are overlapped.

1: Do not shift arguments if nests differ. (Conventional specifications)

0/1


II - 73


(bit4) Tap cycle selection

Select the tap cycle. 0: Pecking tap cycle 1: Deep hole tap cycle

0/1

ext08 (bit5)

Deep hole tap cycle override selection

Select whether to validate override on the pulling operation during synchronized tapping with the deep hole tap cycle.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

ext08 (bit6)

Switch corner chamfering/ corner R command format

The corner chamfering/corner R command format is extended.

0: Command format I (conventional format) Issue a command with comma (,C

and ,R). 1: Command format II In addition to command format I,

commands can be issued with an address that does not have a comma.

Corner chamfering: I/K or C, corner R: R

0/1

ext08 (bit7)

Return position after macro interrupt in fixed cycle selection

Select the destination to return to after a macro interrupt in the fixed cycle.

0: Return to block in fixed cycle. 1: Return to block after fixed cycle.

0/1

1273 (PR)

ext09 (bit0)

Switch ASIN calculation results range

Select the ASIN calculation results range. 0: -90° to 90° 1: 90° to 270°

0/1

ext09 (bit1)

Switch system variable unit

Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (time during automatic start).

0: 1ms unit 1: 1 hour unit

0/1

ext09 (bit2)

Switch G71, G72, G73 cutting direction judgment

Select whether to determine the cutting direction with the finished shape, or according to the commanded finishing allowance and cutting allowance when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71), face rough cutting cycle (G72) or closed loop cutting cycle (G73) is commanded.

0: Conventional specifications Determined according to the finished

shape program. 1: Extended specifications Determined according to the finishing

allowance and cutting allowance commanded in the program.

0/1

ext09 (bit3)

Facing turret mirror image coordinate value type

Select the coordinate values of the axis for which facing turret mirror image is valid.

0: Move axis in same direction as machine value.

1: Move axis in direction opposite machine value.

0/1

ext09 (bit4)

Facing turret mirror image valid axis selection

Select the axis for which facing turret mirror image is valid.

0: Fixed to 1st axis. 1: Determined according to plane selected

when facing turret mirror image is commanded.

0/1


II - 74


1274 (PR)

ext10 (bit7)

Word range check

Select whether to check that the operation expression of the word date in the program is enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine program is executed. This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999 and the machine manufacture macro program.

0: Check valid 1: Check invalid

0/1

1275 (PR)

ext11 Not used.

1276 (PR)

ext12 Not used.

1277 (PR)

ext13 (bit0)

Tool life management II count type 2

Specify how and when the mount or use count is incremented in tool life management II.

0: Type 1 The count is incremented when the spindle is used for cutting.

1: Type 2 The count is incremented for the tool used or mounted for one program. The increment is enabled by resetting.

0/1 (Default: 0)

1278 (PR)

ext14 (bit0)

Program restart method selection

Select the program restart method. 0: Conventional format 1: F format

0/1

ext15 (bit0)

System synchronization method

Select the system synchronization method. 0: If one system is not in automatic

operation, ignore the synchronization command and execute the next block.

1: Operate according to the synchronization ignore signal.

If the synchronization ignore signal is set to "1", the synchronization command will be ignored. When set to "0", synchronization will be applied.

0/1

ext15 (bit1)

Interrupt amount during machine lock

Select the manner to handle the interruption amount during machine lock.

0: Cancel when reset. 1: Do not cancel when reset. Instead cancel

during manual zero point return.

0/1

1279 (PR)

ext15 (bit2)

Selection of cutting start interlock target block

Select whether the cutting start interlock is valid for successive cutting blocks.

0: Valid for successive cutting blocks. 1: Invalid for successive cutting blocks.

0/1


II - 75


1280 (PR)

ext16 (bit0)

I/F per axis during cross machining control

Set the handling of the following PLC I/F for axes interchanged with cross machining control. • Mirror image • Manual/automatic interlock • Manual/automatic machine lock

0: Follows axis configuration before cross machining control.

1: Follows axis configuration after cross machining control.

(Example) Set as follows for the automatic interlock (+) device for X1 when carrying out cross machining with the 1st axis (X1) in the 1st system and 1st axis (X2) in the 2nd system. Setting value 0: Y1A8 (I/F for 1st

axis in 1st system) Setting value 1: W28 (I/F for 1st axis

in 2nd system) Note: If the number of axes in the system

changes with cross machining, the I/F of the target axis may change when this parameter is set to "1".

(Example) When 1st system's C axis is moved to 2nd system with a 1st system (X, Z, C, Y) and 2nd system (X, Z) configuration:

When setting value is 1: W2A, W12 and W4A, etc., will be

the I/F for the C axis moved to the 2nd system. However, Y192, Y1AA and Y1CA, etc., will change to the I/F of the Y axis in the 1st system because the axes following the removed C axis (third place) are shifted up.

0/1


II - 76


1280 (PR)

ext16 (bit1)

Cross machining control cancel with reset

Select whether to cancel the cross machining control when reset is applied.

0: Cancel cross machining control with reset.

1: Do not cancel cross machining control with reset

0/1

ext16 (bit2)

Interchange coordinate value display

Set whether to interchange (or move) the coordinate values when displaying. This setting will be followed when the axes are interchanged and when the axes are moved.

0: Interchange (or move) coordinate values with cross machining control, and display.

1: Display coordinate values for cross machining control without interchanging (or moving).

(Example) When 1st system's C axis is moved to 2nd system with a 1st system (X, Z, C, Y) and 2nd system (X, Z) configuration: 1st system: X, Z and Y coordinate

values are displayed. 2nd system: X, Z and C coordinate

values are displayed.

0/1

ext16 (bit3)

Reset operation for synchronization/superimposition control

Select whether to cancel synchronization/ superimposition control with resetting.

0: Cancel. 1: Do not cancel.

0/1


II - 77


1281 (PR)

ext17 (bit0)

Zero point return operation changeover parameter

(Zero point setting operation) The "Operation error 1036" will occur regardless of this parameter, and regardless of manual or automatic operation. (High-speed zero point return)

0: <During manual operation> The master axis and slave axis will

simultaneously start zero point return. Even if one of the axes reaches the zero point, the other axis will continue to move until it reaches the zero point. Thus, if the difference of the master axis and slave axis feedback position before zero point return is larger than the tolerable synchronization error amount, the error "Operation error 0051" will occur during zero point return.

<During automatic operation> The master axis and slave axis will

simultaneously start zero point return. When the master axis reaches the zero point, the slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional relation of the master axis and slave axis established before zero point return is maintained.

1: <During manual operation> <During automatic operation>

The master axis and slave axis will simultaneously start zero point return. When the master axis reaches the zero point, the slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional relation of the master axis and slave axis established before zero point return is maintained.

0/1

ext17 (bit1)

Tool offset addition axis selection

0: Follows Tchg34 1: Plane selection Base J setting name is

set as the 3rd axis compensation axis.

0/1

1282 (PR)

ext18 Not used.

1283 (PR)

ext19 Not used.

1284 (PR)

ext20 (bit0)

Spindle speed clamp check

Select whether to check the spindle speed clamp under the constant surface speed control.

0: Check the spindle speed clamp. 1: Not check the spindle speed clamp.

(Note) This parameter is enabled when the parameter "#1146 Sclamp" is set to "1". (Applicable only to M65V series and M64 C version series)

0/1


II - 78


1285 (PR)

ext21 (bit0)

Multi-system program generation and operation

0: When a machining program is newly registered, it is registered as a program for the selected system.

1: When a program is newly registered, a system common program No. is generated unconditionally. If there are no contents in the subprogram when a subprogram is called during automatic operation, the program will be searched for and executed from $1.

0/1

ext21 (bit1)

Changeover of method to select operation program

0: Select the program in the selected system with operation search.

1: Select a common system program with operation search. (A common system program No. will be selected.)

0/1

1286 (PR)

ext22 (bit0)

Program input/output method selection

0: Only the programs in the selected system are input/output.

1: The designated programs are output for all systems. The systems are delimited with the "$" mark. The programs delimited with the $ mark are assigned and input into each system. (If the program does not have a $ mark, it will be handled as system 1.)

0/1

ext22 (bit1)

Not used.

ext22 (bit2)

0 No. for program input No.

Select the action to be taken when the same program No. is input during data input.

0: The 0 No. when the same 0 No. is input successively is handled as a character string data.

1: The 0 No. is handled as a program No. when the same 0 No. is input successively. Whether to overwrite the program or cause an error is set with #1218 bit 7 "Input by program overwrite".

0/1

ext22 (bit3)

No 0 No. at machining program input

This setting enables the machining program input even if there is no program No. (0 No.). The program No. is fixed to 01 in this case.

0: Input disabled 1: Input enabled

0/1

1287 (PR)

ext23 (bit0)

Workpiece coordinate display

Select the mode of displaying the workpiece coordinate counter.

0: Don't update the display immediately after workpiece coordinate data is changed.

1: Update the display immediately after workpiece coordinate data is changed.

0/1


II - 79


ext23 (bit3)

Counter display expanded function selection

0: Display the command value that does not consider the tool length offset amount or workpiece coordinate offset amount.

1: The counter display expanded function is validated. (bit4 to bit7)

0/1 (Version D, M65)

ext23 (bit4)

Relative coordinate display

(M system) 0: Display the actual position including tool

length offset. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool length offset.

(L system) 0: Display the actual position including tool

shape compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool shape compensation.


ext23 (bit5)

Relative coordinate display


radius compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool radius compensation.

(L system) 0: Display the actual position including nose

R compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding nose R compensation.


ext23 (bit6)

Absolute coordinate display [Special display unit compatible]


length offset. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool length offset.

(L system) 0: Display the actual position including tool

shape compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool shape compensation.



II - 80


(bit7) Absolute coordinate display [Special display unit compatible]


radius compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding tool radius compensation.

(L system) 0: Display the actual position including nose

R compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of

a program command excluding nose R compensation.

With the L system, the effect onto the nose R compensation's absolute coordinate counter is also affected by the L system coordinate changeover parameter (#1227 aux11/bit 3 absolute coordinate changeover (nose R)). In actual use, if this parameter is set to 1, or if #1227 aux 11/bit 3 is set to 1, the position in the program commands will be displayed with the absolute coordinate counter.


1288 (PR)

ext24 (bit0)

MDI program clear

Select whether to initialize the MDI buffer when MDI operation ends, the power is turned ON again, reset is input, or emergency stop is canceled.

0: Do not clear programs registered with MDI.

1: Clear programs registered with MDI, and save only % programs.

0/1

1289 (PR)

ext25 Not used.

1290 (PR)

ext26 Not used.

1291 (PR)

ext27 Not used.

1292 (PR)

ext28 Not used.

1293 (PR)

ext29 Not used.

1294 (PR)

ext30 Not used.

1295 (PR)

ext31 Not used.

1296 (PR)

ext32 Not used.

1297 (PR)

ext33 Not used.

1298 (PR)

ext34 Not used.


II - 81


1299 (PR)

ext35 Not used.

1300 (PR)

ext36 (bit0)

Multiple spindle control II

Select multiple spindle control I or II. 0: Multiple spindle control I 1: Multiple spindle control II (select from

ladder)

0/1

ext36 (bit7)

Spindle synchronization command method

Select the spindle synchronization command method.

0: Spindle synchronization with PLC I/F 1: Spindle synchronization with G

command

0/1


II - 82


# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1301 nrfchk Origin

neighboring check method

Select the high-speed check method of the origin neighboring signal.

0: Do not check positions near the origin at high speeds. (Conventional specifications)

1: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using command machine positions.

2: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using detector feedback positions.

0 to 2

1302 AutoRP Automatic return by program restart

0: Return the system to the restart position manually and then restart the program.

1: For program restarting, the first activation automatically moves the system to the restart position.

0/1

1303 (PR)

V1comN No. of #100 address system common variables

Set the number of common variables common for the system starting from address #100.

0 to 100

1304 (PR)

V0comN No. of #500 address system common variables

Set the number of common variables common for the system starting from address #500.

0 to 500

1305 corjug Corner deceleration tangent judgment

Select whether to judge corner deceleration with a polygon shape or tangent during helical interpolation and spiral interpolation.

0: Polygon judgment Helical interpolation is interpreted as

polygonal, and the corner deceleration is judged with the approximate vector.

1: Tangent judgment The vector is calculated from the center

of the helical interpolation, the start point and the end point, and corner deceleration is judged.

0/1

1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type

Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check.

0: Deceleration check specification type 1 G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/BIT1".

1: Deceleration check specification type 2 G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".

0/1

1310 WtMmin Minimum value for synchronization M code

Set the minimum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.

0, 100 to 99999999


II - 83


1311 WtMmax Maximum value for synchronization M code

Set the maximum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.

0, 100 to 99999999

1312 T_base Tool life management standard number

When the T code command is issued while specifying a value that exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value obtained by subtracting the set value from the command value is used as the tool group number for tool life management. The value specified by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in this parameter, the T code is handled as a normal T code and not subjected to tool life management. When 0 is set in this parameter, the T code command always specifies a group number. (This parameter is valid for M-system tool life management II.)

0 to 9999

1313 TapDw1 Synchronous tap hole bottom wait time

Specify the hole bottom wait time for synchronous tapping. When the P address is specified, the greater value is used as the hole bottom wait time. When an in-position check is performed at the hole bottom, dwelling for the specified time is completed after the in-position check is complete. (Applicable only to the M64 D version series) Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 is

set in #1223 aux07 bit 3 (synchronous tap in-position check improvement).

0 to 999 (ms)

1314 TapInp Synchronous tap in-position check width (tap axis)

Specify the hole bottom in-position check width for synchronous tapping. (Applicable only to the M64 D version series) Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 is

set in #1223 aux07 bit 3 (synchronous tap in-position check improvement).

1 to 32767 (1µm steps)

1324 Chop_R Chopping compensation value fixing method

Head number of the R register used as the compensation amount save area during fixed compensation amount method.

1900 to 2782


II - 84


# Items Details Setting range (unit)1501 polyax

(For L system only)

Rotational tool axis number

Specify the number of the rotational tool axis (servo axis) used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set 0 when not using polygon machining (spindle-servo axis), or when using spindle-spindle polygon machining. A value exceeding the base specification parameter #1002 axisno cannot be specified. This parameter is valid when the G code system is 6 or 7 (7 or 8 is set in base specification parameter #1037 cmdtyp).

0 to controlled axis number

1502 G0Ipfg G1 → G0 deceleration check

0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G0.

1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G0. (Applicable only to the M64 D version series)

0/1

1503 G1Ipfg G1 → G1 deceleration check

0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G1.

1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G1. (Applicable only to the M64 D version series)

0/1

1505 ckref2 Second origin return check

Specify the trigger for a check at the specified position in manual second original return mode.

0: Completion of spindle orientation 1: Generation of second origin return interlock

signal

0/1

1506 F1_FM Upper limit of F1 digit feedrate

Specify the maximum value up to which the F1 digit feedrate can be changed. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0 to 60000 (mm/min)

1507 F1_K F1 digit feedrate change constant

Specify the constant that determines the speed change rate per manual handle graduation in F1 digit feedrate change mode. (Applicable only to M65 and M66)

0 to 32767

1510 DOOR_H Shorten door interlock II axis stop time

Specify whether to shorten the time during which the axis is stopped when the door is opened.

0: Use the conventional axis stop time. 1: Shorten the axis stop time.

Note: When the door interlock II signal is input via a ladder, the conventional axis stop time is used.

0/1

1511 DOORPm Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each system

Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each system. A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified. Device number 000 is invalid. Specify device number 100 when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input. Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door

interlock II for each system)

000 to 100 (hexadecimal)


II - 85

# Items Details Setting range

(unit) 1512 DOORPs Signal input

device 2 for door interlock II: for each system

Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each system. (Specify the same value as that of #1155.) Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door

interlock II for each system)

000 to 100 (hexadecimal)

1513 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection

Select the synchronous tap mode using the miscellaneous function code of the value set in this parameter. The M function command can be issued immediately before the tap command or in the same block. This function is valid only when 1 is set in #1272 ext08/bit 1 (Enable/disable M-function synchronous tap cycle). Note: Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99.

0 to 99999999

1514 expLinax Exponential function interpolation linear axis

Set the axis address name for the linear axis used in exponential function interpolation.

A to Z

1515 expRotax Exponential function interpolation rotary axis

Set the axis address name for the rotary axis used in exponential function interpolation.

A to Z

1516 mill_ax Milling axis name

Set the name of the rotary axis used in milling interpolation. Only one rotary axis can be set. When there is no E command in issuing the G12.1 command, this parameter will be followed.

A to Z

1517 mill_C Milling interpolation hypothetical axis name

Select the hypothetical axis command name for milling interpolation. When there is no D command in issuing the G12.1 command, this parameter will be followed.

0: Y axis command 1: Command rotary axis name.

0/1

1518 polm Spindle- spindle polygon Workpiece spindle No.

Set the number of the workpiece spindle used in spindle-spindle polygon machining. Note: The 1st spindle will be selected when "0" is set.

0 to number of spindles

1519 pols Spindle- spindle polygon Tool spindle No.

Set the number of the tool spindle used in spindle- spindle polygon machining. Note: The 2nd spindle will be selected when "0" is set.

0 to number of spindles

1520 (PR)

Tchg34 Additional axis tool compensation operation

Select whether to carry out the additional axis' tool compensation function with the 3rd axis or 4th axis.

0: Select 3rd axis. 1: Select 4th axis.

0/1

1521 C_min Minimum turning angle

Set the minimum turning angle of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line control.

0.000 to 360.000 (°)


II - 86


1522 (PR)

C_axis Normal line control axis

Set the number of the axis for normal line control. Designate a rotary axis.

0: Normal line control disabled

1 to 6: Axis No. (number of control axes)

1523 C_feed Normal line control axis turning speed

This is valid with normal line control type I. Designate the turning speed of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line control. Set a value that does not exceed the normal line control axis' clamp speed (#2002 clamp).

0 to 1000000 (°/min)

1524 C_type Normal line control type

Set the normal line control type. 0: Normal line control type I

1: Normal line control type II

1525 laxlen L axis length Special function 1526 raxlen R axis length Special function 1527 flclen Distance

between support points

Special function

1528 rflch R point support point height

Special function

1529 laxcmp L axis compensation amount

Special function

1530 raxcmp R axis compensation amount

Special function

1531 flccmp Distance between support point compensation amount

Special function

1532 G01rsm G00 L/R interpolation simultaneous reach

Special function

1533 millPax Pole coordinate linear axis name

Set the linear axis used for pole coordinate interpolation.

Control axis address such as X, Y or Z


II - 87


1534 SnG44.1 Spindle No. for G44.1 command

Set the selected spindle No. for the G44.1 command.

0: 2nd spindle 1: 1st spindle 2: 2nd spindle 3: 3rd spindle 4: 4th spindle If a spindle that does not exist is set, the 2nd spindle will be used. Note that if there is only one spindle, the 1st spindle will be used.

1535 C_leng Minimum turning movement amount

Set the minimum turning movement amount of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line control.

0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)

1537 to

1544

crsax[1] to crsax[8]

Cross machining control axis

Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control. Using two digits, set the name of the axis interchanged with that where the cross machining control request signal is input, or that moves to the position where the signal is input.

Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when 0 is set)


1549 Iv0vr1 Override 1 start curvature radius

Set the override 1 start curvature radius for executing involute interpolation with the high-speed high-accuracy II mode.

0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)



0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)



0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)



0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)



0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)

1554 Iv0rd2 Involute interpolation override 2

Set the override value at the curvature radius Iv0vR2 for executing involute interpolation with the high-speed high-accuracy II mode. Note: If the override value is not set (setting

value: 0), the setting will be invalid, and the override will be 100%.

1 to 100 (%)

#1199 #1534 Selected spindle0:G43.1 Not used. 1st spindle 1:G44.1 0 2nd spindle

1 1st spindle 2 2nd spindle 3 3rd spindle 4 4th spindle

2:G47.1 Not used. All spindles


II - 88





1 to 100 (%)




1 to 100 (%)




1 to 100 (%)

1558 Iv0Min Involute interpolation override lower limit value

Set the lower limit value of the involute interpolation override. Note: If the override value is not set (setting


1 to 100 (%)

1559 IvAMax Involute interpolation maximum acceleration rate

Set the maximum acceleration rate of the constant acceleration control for executing involute interpolation with the high-speed high-accuracy II mode. Note: If this parameter is not set (setting value:

0), the setting will be invalid, and the normal acceleration rate (#1207 G1btL) will be applied.

1 to 32767 (ms)

1560 IvFMin Involute interpolation minimum feedrate

Set the minimum feedrate of the constant acceleration control for executing involute interpolation with the high-speed high-accuracy II mode. (Valid when executing compensation with the accuracy coefficient.) Note: If this parameter is not set (setting value:

0), the feedrate will not be clamped.

1 to 32767 (ms)

1571 SSSdis SSS control adjustment coefficient fixed value selection

The shape recognition range for SSS control is fixed.

0/1


II - 89


1572 Cirorp Arc command overlap

Fluctuation of the speed at the arc and linear or arc and arc joints will be eliminated during the high-speed high-accuracy II mode.

0: Do not overlap arc command blocks. 1: Overlap arc command blocks. (Eliminate

the speed fluctuation) Note: This parameter is invalid during SSS

control.

0/1


1801 Hacc_c Arc radius clam acceleration -99999999 to +99999999

1802 Macc_c Acceleration check at middle speed -99999999 to +99999999

1803 Lacc_c Acceleration check at low speed -99999999 to +99999999

1811 Hcof_A X-axis high acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1812 Hcof_B X-axis high acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1813 Mcof_A X-axis middle acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1814 Mcof_B X-axis middle acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1815 Lcof_A X-axis low acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1816 Lcof_B X-axis low acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1817 mag_C X-axis change magnification θ [%] Set 0 when no compensation or change is executed.

-99999999 to +99999999

1821 Hcof_A Y-axis high acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1822 Hcof_B Y-axis high acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1823 Mcof_A Y-axis middle acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1824 Mcof_B Y-axis middle acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1825 Lcof_A Y-axis low acceleration coefficient β -99999999 to +99999999

1826 Lcof_B Y-axis low acceleration coefficient α -99999999 to +99999999

1827 mag_C Y-axis change magnification θ [%] Set 0 when no compensation or change is executed.

-99999999 to +99999999


II - 90


# Items Details Setting range (unit)1901 (PR)

station addr Set up a station address number (the NC is the n-th slave station).

1 to 7

1902 (PR)

Din size Set up the size of the data to be transferred from the PC to the NC (from the master station to the slave station) in bytes (8 points).

0 to 32 (bytes (8 bits))

1903 (PR)

Dout size Set up the size of the data to be transferred from the NC to the PC (from the slave station to the master station) in bytes (8 points).

0 to 32 (bytes (8 bits))

1904 (PR)

data length Set up the data length of a character. 0 to 2 : 7 bits 3 : 8 bits

1905 (PR)

baud rate Set up a data transfer rate. The transfer rate differs according to operation clock rates

Clock: 6 MHz/ 10 MHz

0: 38400 / 57600 1: 19200 / 28800 2: 9600 / 14400 3: 4800 / 7200 4: 2400 / 3600 5: 1200 / 1800 6: 600 / 900 (bps)

1906 (PR)

stop bit Set up the stop bit length. 0 and 1: 1 bit 2 and 3: 2 bits

1907 (PR)

parity check Select whether to make a parity check. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

1908 (PR)

even parity Select the odd or even parity bit. If no parity check is specified, this parameter is ignored.

0: Odd parity 1: Even parity

1909 (PR)

Tout (ini) (ini) specifies a time-out from when the connection check sequence finishes to when the first usual sequence (input) finishes.

0 to 999 (0.1 s)

1910 (PR)

(run) (run) specifies a time-out from when the NC (slave station) outputs usual sequence data to when the next usual sequence data is input. If the time-out is exceeded, an emergency stop occurs and the system waits for the preparation sequence to start. If the set value is 0, no time-out occurs or no communication stop can be detected.

1911 (PR)

clock select Select an operation cycle. 0: 6 MHz 1: 10 MHz


II - 91


# Items Details Setting range (unit)1925 EtherNet Start of

service Start or stop the Ethernet communication function.

0: Stop 1: Start

0/1

1926 IP address

IP address Specify the NC IP address

1927 Subnet mask

Subnet mask Specify the subnet mask.

1928 Gateway address

Gateway Specify the gateway IP address.

Set these parameters in accordance with the network rules in the connection environment.

1929 Port number

Port No. Set the port No. for the service function. 1 to 9999 (Set 2000 when not connected to the Ethernet.)

1930 Host address

Host address Set the host's IP address. 1 to 255

1931 Host number

Host No. Set the host's port No. 1 to 9999

(Note) Always set #1925 to #1931 when the FCU6-EP203-1 is mounted.

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.1 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS

II - 92

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS

6.1 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS



2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate

Set up the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. The maximum value to be set differs with mechanical systems.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2002 clamp Cutting feedrate for clamp function

Define the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this value‚ the clamp will be applied at this feedrate.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2003 (PR)

smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes

Specify acceleration and deceleration control modes.

O T3

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0O T2 O T1 C3 C1 LC R3 R1 LR

Note: Set 0 in null bits. Rapid traverse feed acceleration and deceleration types

LR: Linear acceleration/deceleration R1: Primary delay R3: Exponential acceleration and linear

deceleration Note: Designate "F" with bits 0 to 3 for rapid

traverse with acceleration/deceleration by software.

Cutting feed acceleration and deceleration

types LC: Linear acceleration/deceleration C1: Primary delay C3: Exponential acceleration and linear

deceleration Note: Designate "F" with bits 4 to 7 for cutting

feed with acceleration/deceleration by software.

(To be continued to the next page)

Specify the modes in hexadecimal notation.


II - 93

# Items Details Setting range (unit) (Continued from the previous page)

<Combination of acceleration and deceleration patterns>

Parameters in parentheses are forcutting feed.

Commandspeed

Linear to linearLR=1 (LC=1)StepLR=0 (LC=0)

Primary delayR1=1 (C1=1)

Exponential to linearR3=1 (C3=1)StepR1-R3=0 (C1-C3=0)

R1 > R3 when both R1 and R3 contain 1. <Stroke end stop types>

G0t1

Speed Stroke end signal

Time

2 G0t 1 (OT1=1,OT2=OT3=0)G0t 1 (OT1=OT2=OT3=0)

OT1 is valid under the following conditions (valid for dog type zero point return): Stop type: Linear deceleration Acceleration mode: Exponential Deceleration mode: Linear

Type OT2 OT3Linear deceleration 0 0 Position loop step stop 1 0 Speed loop step stop 0 1 Position loop step stop 1 1

OT1 0 Deceleration by G0t1 1 Deceleration by 2 × G0t1


II - 94


2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)

Set up a linear control time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear acceleration or deceleration) or F (acceleration or deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".

G0tL

Speed

G0tL

Time

1 to 4000 (ms)

2005 G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay) Second-step time constant for acceleration and deceleration by software

Set up a primary-delay time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst". When acceleration or deceleration by software is selected, the second-step time constant is used.

<Rapid traverse feed with exponentialacceleration and linear deceleration>

G0t1

Speed

2 G0t1

Time

G0t1

Speed

Time

G0t1

<Rapid traverse feed with primary delay>

1 to 5000 (ms)

2006 G0t2 Not used. 0


II - 95


2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)

Set up a linear control time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F (acceleration and deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".

G1tL

Speed

G1tL

Time

1 to 4000 (ms)

2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay) Second stage time constant for acceleration and deceleration by software

Set up the primary delay time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst". When acceleration or deceleration by software is selected, the second stage time constant is used.

<Cutting feed with exponential accelerationand linear deceleration>

G1t1

Speed

2 G1t1

Time

G1t1

Speed

Time

G1t1

<Cutting feed with primary time constant>

1 to 5000 (ms)

2009 G1t2 Not used. 0


II - 96


2010 fwd_g Feed forward gain

Set up a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation acceleration and deceleration. The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical control error will be. However, if a mechanical vibration occurs, the set value must be reduced.

0 to 100 (%)

2011 G0back G0 backlash

Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement command in rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode.

-32768 to 32767

2012 G1back G1 backlash

Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement command in cutting mode.

-32768 to 32767


II - 97


# Items Details Setting range (unit)2013 2014

OT - OT +

Soft limit I - soft limit I +

Set up a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic mechanical coordinates. For the movable area of stored stroke limit 1, set the coordinate in the negative direction in #2013 and the coordinate in the positive direction in #2014. To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters #8204 OT- and #8205 OT+. When the same value (other than 0) is set in #2013 and #2014, this function is disabled.

M

OT+ (Z)

OT- (Z)OT+ (X)

OT- (X)

Basic mechanical coordinates

Movable area

±99999.999 (mm)

2015 t1m1- Negative direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length

Set up a sensor position in the negative direction when using the tool setter. When the TLM is used, set up the distance of a tool replacement point (reference point) for measuring the tool length from the zero point to the measurement reference point (surface).

±99999.999 (mm)

2016 t1m1+ Positive direction sensor of tool setter

Set up the sensor position in the positive direction when using the tool setter.

±99999.999 (mm)

2017 tap_g Axis servo gain

Set the position loop gain for special operations (synchronized tapping, interpolation with spindle C axis, etc.) The setting range is 1.00 to 200.00rad/s.‚ in 0.25 increment units. The standard setting is 10.

1.00 to 200.00 (rad/s)

2018 no_srv Operation with no servo control

Set when performing test operation without connecting the drive amplifier and motor.

0: Specify normal operation. 1: Operation is possible even if units are not

connected as the drive system alarm will be ignored.

This is for test operation during start up and is not used normally. If 1 is set during normal operation‚ errors will not be detected even if they occur.

0/1


II - 98


2019 revnum Return steps Set up the steps required for reference point return for each axis.

0: Does not execute reference point return. 1 to max. number of NC axes: Sets up the steps required for reference

point return.

0 to max. number of NC axes

2020 o_chkp Spindle orientation completion check during second zero point return

Set up the distance from the second zero point to the position for checking that the spindle orientation has completed during second zero point return. If the set value is 0, the above check is omitted.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

2021 out_f Maximum speed outside soft limit range

Set up the maximum speed outside the soft limit range.

0 to 999999

2022 G30SLX

Validate soft limit (automatic and manual)

Set up this function to disable a soft limit check during the second to the fourth zero point return in both automatic and manual operation modes.

0: Enables soft limit check. 1: Disables soft limit check.

0/1

2023 ozfmin Set up ATC speed lower limit

Set up the minimum speed outside the soft limit range during the second to the fourth zero point return in both automatic and manual operation modes.

0 to 999999

2024 synerr Allowable error

Set up the following for the master axis: the maximum synchronization error that is allowed to check for synchronization errors When 0 is set up, the error check is not carried out.

0 to 99999.999 (mm) During spindle C axissynchroniza- tion control: 0 to 99999.999 (°)

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.2 ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS

II - 99

6.2 ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS



2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate

Set up a rapid traverse rate for dog type reference point return command.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2026 G28crp G28 approach speed

Set up the speed of approach to the reference point in the reference point return command. This speed is attained after the system stops with deceleration by dog detection. Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10°/min)

only when using the Z-phase type encoder (#1226 aux10 bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis reference point return type. The same unit is used for both the micron and sub-micron specifications.

1 to 60000 (mm/min)

2027 G28sft Reference point shift distance

Set up the distance from the electrical zero-point detection position to the actual machine reference point during reference point return control. Note) When #1240 set12 (bit2) is ON, a

magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold) corresponding to the input setting unit (#1003 iunit) will be applied on the setting value.

0 to 65535 (µm)

2028 grmask Grip mask amount

Set up a distance where the grid point is ignored when near-point dog OFF signals are close to that grid point during reference point return.

The grid mask is valid by one grid.

0 to 65535 (µm) Even for the specifications in sub-microns, set up the value in units of µm.

2029 grspc Grid interval Set up a detector grid interval. Generally, set up the value equal to the ball screw pitch. However, if the detector grid interval is not equal to the screw pitch when measured with a linear scale, set up the detector grid interval. To reduce the grid interval, use its divisors. To use 0.001 mm as minimum setup units, set up the negative value. Example) Setup value

−1 → 1.000 mm (°) -1 → 0.001 mm (°)

Even when the specifications in sub-microns are used, 0.001 mm is specified for the minimum setup units.

-32767 to 999 (mm)


II - 100


2030 (PR)

dir (-) Reference point direction (-)

Set which side of the near-point dog the reference point is at during reference point return. <For dog type reference point return>

Negativedirection

Positivedirection

dir(-)=0

dir(-)=1

Near-point dog

Direction in which zero point is establishedas viewed from the near-point dog

0: Positive direction

1: Negative direction

2031 noref Axis without reference point

Specify the axis that does not have a reference point. Before automatic operation starts, reference point return is not required.

0: Normal controlled axis

1: Axis without reference point

2032 nochk Whether reference point return is completed not checked

The absolute and incremental commands can be executed even if dog type (or Z phase pulse system) reference point return is not completed. Specify whether to check that the reference point return is completed.

0: Reference point return completion is checked.

1: Reference point return completion is not checked.

2033 zp_no Z phase pulse system reference point return spindle encoder No.

The reference point return is performed with the Z phase pulse of the spindle encoder. Set the spindle encoder No. to be used.

0: Dog type 1 to 4: Spindle No.


II - 101


# Items Details Setting range (unit)2037 2038 2039 2040

G53ofs #2_rfp #3_rfp #4_rfp

Reference point #1 to #4

Set up the position of the first, second, third, and fourth reference points from the zero point of the basic mechanical coordinates.

Basic mechanical coordinates

MReference point #1

Reference point #2

Reference point #3 Reference point #4

±999999.999 (mm)

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS

II - 102

6.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS


2049 (PR)

type Absolute position detection method

Specify the absolute position zero point alignment method.

0: Not absolute position detection 1: Stopper method (push with mechanical

stopper) 2: Origin point alignment method (align with

marked point) 3: Dog-type (align with dog and proximity

switch) 4: Reference point alignment method II (align

to alignment mark) (Type that does not return grid after

reference alignment) 9: Simple absolute position

(Not absolute position detection‚ but the position when the power is turned off is registered.)

Automatic initial setting is valid only when the stopper method is selected.

0 to 9

2050 absdir Base point of Z direction

Set the direction of the absolute position reference point (grid point immediately before) seen from the machine reference point for when using reference point alignment.

0: Positive direction

1: Negative direction

2051 check Check Set the tolerable range for the movement amount (deviation amount) when the power is turned OFF.

0: Not checked 1 to 99999.999mm: If the difference of the

position when the power is turned OFF and turned ON again is larger than this value‚ an alarm will be output.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

2052 absg28 Not used. 2053 absm02 Not used. 2054 clpush Current

limit (%) Set up the current limit value for the initial setting when detecting an absolute position with a dog-less system. The setup value is the ratio of the current limit value to the rated value.

0 to 100 (%)

2055 pushf Push speed

Set the feedrate for the automatic initial setting during stopper method.

1 to 999 (mm/min)

2056 aproch Approach Set the approach distance for the automatic initial setting in the push method. Approach distance: After using stopper once‚ the

tool returns this distance‚ and then use stopper again. When set to 0‚ the reference point coordinates set in #2037 G53ofs will be used as the approach start position.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS

II - 103


2057 nrefp Near zero point +

Set the width where the near-reference-point signal is output. (Positive direction width) When set to 0‚ the width is equivalent to the grid width setting. Note: When #1240 set12 (bit2) is ON, a


0 to 32.767 (mm)

2058 nrefn Near zero point -

Set the width where the near-reference-point signal is output. (Negative direction width) When set to 0‚ the width is equivalent to the grid width setting. Note: When #1240 set12 (bit2) is ON, a


0 to 32.767 (mm)

2059 zerbas Select zero point parameter and reference point

Specify the position to be the zero point coordinate during absolute position initial setting.

0: Position that was stopped during stopper method

Specify the coordinates of the alignment mark position when using the reference point method.

1: Grid point just before stopper Specify the coordinates of the grid point just

before the alignment mark.

0/1

6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2

II - 104

6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2


2061 OT_1B-

Soft limit IB-

Set up the coordinates of the lower limit of the inhibited area of stored stroke limit IB. Specify a value in the basic mechanical coordinates system. If the same value (non-zero) with the same sign as that of #2062 OT_IB+ is specified, the stored stroke limit IB function is disabled.

±99999.999 (mm)

2062 OT_1B+

Soft limit IB+

Set up the coordinates of the upper limit of the inhibited area of stored stroke limit IB. Specify a value in the basic mechanical coordinates system.

±99999.999 (mm)

2063 OT_1B type

Soft limit IB type

Select OT_IB or OT_IC in which OT_IB+/- is used in stored stroke limit I.

0: Soft limit IB valid 1: Soft limit IB and IC invalid 2: Soft limit IC valid 3: When using the inclined axis specifications,

the soft limit is checked with the program coordinate system.

Note: This is invalid for axes other than the inclined axis' base axis and inclined axis.

0/1/2/3

2064 rapid2 Speed 2 Specify the speed applicable to the speed area for 2-stage acceleration/deceleration. If the following conditions are not satisfied, inclination constant acceleration/deceleration is used for operation. (0 < rapid2 < rapid and rapid3 = 0 and 0 < G0tL2 <G0tL and G0tL3 = 0) (Applicable only to M64 D version series) Related parameters: #1223 aux07 bit 0 (Rapid

traverse content multistage acceleration/deceleration) #2065 G0tL2 (Time constant 2)

0 to 999999 (mm/min) 0: No setting

2065 G0tL2 Time constant 2

Specify the time constant applicable to the speed area for 2-stage acceleration/deceleration. If the following conditions are not satisfied, inclination constant acceleration/deceleration is used for operation. (0 < rapid2 < rapid and rapid3 = 0 and 0 < G0tL2 <G0tL and G0tL3 = 0) (Applicable only to M64 D version series) Related parameters: #1223 aux07 bit 0 (Rapid

traverse content multistage acceleration/deceleration) #2064 rapid2 (Speed 2)

1 to 4000 (ms) 0: No setting


II - 105


2066 rapid3 Speed 3 Specify the speed applicable to the speed area for 2-stage or 3-stage acceleration/deceleration. If the following conditions are not satisfied, inclination constant acceleration/deceleration is used for operation. (0 < rapid3 < rapid2 < rapid and 0 < G0tL3 <G0tL2 < G0tL) (Applicable only to M64 D version series) Related parameters: #1223 aux07 bit 0 (Rapid

traverse content multistage acceleration/deceleration) #2067 G0tL3 (Time constant 3)

0 to 999999 (mm/min) 0: No setting

2067 G0tL3 Time constant 3

Specify the time constant applicable to the speed area for 2-stage or 3-stage acceleration/deceleration. If the following conditions are not satisfied, inclination constant acceleration/deceleration is used for operation. (0 < rapid3 < rapid2 < rapid and 0 < G0tL3 <G0tL2 < G0tL) (Applicable only to M64 D version series) Related parameters: #1223 aux07 bit 0 (Rapid

traverse content multistage acceleration/deceleration) #2066 rapid3 (Speed 3)

1 to 4000 (ms) 0: No setting

2068 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain

Specify the feed forward gain applicable to acceleration/deceleration before G00 interpolation. The greater the set value, the shorter the positioning time during in-position checking. If machine vibration occurs, decrease the set value.

0 to 200 (%)

2069 Rcoeff Axis arc radius error correction efficient

The amount of arc radius error correction can be increased or decreased between -100% to +100% for each axis.

-100.0 to +100.0 (%)

2070 (PR)

div_RT Rotational axis division count

Specify the number of divisions of one turn of the rotational axis for purpose of control. Example: When 36 is set, one turn is supposed to

be 36.000. Note 1: When 0 is set, the normal rotational axis

(360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed.

Note 2: If this parameter is changed when the absolute position detection specification is used, absolute position data is lost. Initialization must be performed again.

0 to 999


II - 106


2071 s_axis (For L system only)

Inclined axis selection

Select the axis subjected to inclined-axis control or the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis.

0: Axis not subjected to inclined-axis control 1: Inclined axis 2: Base axis corresponding to inclined axis

Note: Set 1 or 2 for only one axis. If it is set for two or more axes, inclined-axis control does not work.

0 to 2

2072 rslimt Restart limit If the machine is positioned on the minus (-) side of the set value in T-command restart mode, restart search in type 3 is disabled.

±9999.999 (mm)


II - 107


# Items Details Setting range (unit)2073 zrn_dog Origin

dog Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in

#1226 aux10 bit 5. Note 2: When this parameter is valid, do not set the

same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the near-point dog signal (R157) is input.

00 to FF (HEX)

2074 H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the OT (+) g signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in


same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the OT signal (R156) is input.

00 to FF (HEX)

2075 H/W_OT- H/W OT- Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the OT (-) g signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in


same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the OT signal (R156) is input.

00 to FF (HEX)


II - 108


2076 index_x Index table indexing axis

Specify the index table indexing axis. 0: Normal axis 1: Index table indexing axis Note: This parameter is valid only for the NC axis.

The parameter is invalid if specified for the PLC axis.

0/1

2077 G0inps G0 in-position width

When an in-position check is performed for G0, this parameter is valid. (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the parameter that the in-position width is wider is applied.) When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid. (Applicable only to SV024)

0 to 32767 (µm) M64 specifies a 0.5 µm unit.

2078 G1inps G1 in-position width

When an in-position check is performed for G1, this parameter is valid. (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the parameter that the in-position width is wider is applied.) When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid. (Applicable only to SV024)

0 to 32767 (µm) M64 specifies a 0.5 µm unit.

2079 chcomp Chopping compensation coefficient

Set the coefficient applied on the compensation amount for the insufficient amount caused by servo delay during chopping.

0 to 10 (standard value: 8)

2080 chwid Bottom dead center position width

Set the tolerance between the commanded stroke and actual stroke. During chopping, if the (command width - maximum stroke of top/bottom dead center position /2) is within this tolerance, compensation will be applied.

Micron: 0 to 10000 (µm) Sub-micron: 0 to 10000 (0.1 µm)

2081 chclsp Maximum chopping speed

Set the chopping axis clamp speed applied during chopping.

Micron: 0 to 60000 (mm/min) Sub-micron: 0 to 60000 (0.1 mm)/min

2082 a_rstax Restart position return order

Designate the order for automatically returning to the restart position.

0: Do not return. When 0 is designated for all axes, all of the

axes will return simultaneously.

0 to 6


II - 109


2083 rot_2 Linear type rotary axis II

The linear type rotary axis II is validated. 0: Invalidate linear type rotary axis II. 1: Validate linear type rotary axis II.

Note that this is valid only when the power is turned ON, and the rotary axis parameters must be validated. The axis type is determined by the combination with the existing rotary axis parameters (#1017 rot rotary axis). If #1017 is set to 0, the linear axis will be applied. When #1017 is set to 1 and this parameter is set to 0, the rotary axis will be applied, and when set to 1, the linear type rotary axis II will be applied. <Related parameters> #1089: Cut_RT Short cut for rotary axis #1090: Lin_RT Linear type rotary axis #2070: div_RT Rotary axis division count #2076: index_x Index table indexing axis Note: These parameters are invalid when the

linear type rotary axis II is set.

0/1

2084 G60_ax Unidirectional positioning operation selection

Select the unidirectional positioning with G00. Select the axis for carrying out the positioning per time operation when the positioning command is issued regardless of the unidirectional positioning command and modal.

0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to the command and modal.

1: When the positioning command (G00) is issued, carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of the command and modal.

<Related parameters> #8209 G60 SHIFT: The final positioning direction and

distance for the unidirectional positioning command is set for each axis.

#2076 Index table indexing axis: Set the indexing axis for each axis.

0/1


II - 110


# Items Details Setting range (unit)2086 exdcax External

deceleration speed

Set the upper limit of the feedrate for each axis when the external deceleration signal is valid. This parameter is valid when the #1239 set11/bit6 external deceleration axis compliance valid is set to 1.

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2087 syncnt Synchroniza- tion/superimposition control setting for each axis

BIT0: Polarity of synchronous axis in respect to reference axis

0: Polarity with reference axis is positive 1: Polarity with reference axis is negative

0 to FF (hexadecimal)

2088 bsax_sy Reference axis for synchronous control

Set the reference axis for synchronous control with the 2nd axis name (axname2).

1st character: A to Z 2nd character: A to Z, 1 to 9

2089 bsax_pl Reference axis for superimposition control

Set the reference axis for superimposition control with the 2nd axis name (axname2).

1st character: A to Z 2nd character: A to Z, 1 to 9

2090 plrapid Rapid traverse rate for superimposition control

Set the rapid traverse rate for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2001 rapid (rapid traverse rate).)

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2091 plclamp Cutting feed clamp speed for superimposition control

Set the cutting feed clamp speed for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2002 clamp (cutting feed clamp speed).)

1 to 999999 (mm/min)

2092 plG0tL G0 time constant for superimposition control (linear)

Set the G0 time constant (linear) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2004 G0tL (G0 time constant (linear).)

1 to 4000 (ms)

2093 plG0t1 G0 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)

Set the G0 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2005 G0t1 (G0 time constant (primary delay).)

1 to 5000 (ms)

2094 plG1tL G1 time constant for superimposition control (linear)

Set the G1 time constant (linear) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2007 G1tL (G1 time constant (linear).)

1 to 4000 (ms)


II - 111


2095 plG1t1 G1 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)

Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control. (Equivalent to #2008 G1t1 (G1 time constant (primary delay).)

1 to 5000 (ms)

2096 crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed

Set the minimum clamp speed for corner deceleration during the high-accuracy control mode. Normally set "0". Note: This parameter is invalid during SSS control.

0 to 1000000 (mm/min)

2099 igConr Axis excluded from corner angle calculation

Set the axis excluded from the corner angle calculation. For example, set this for the Cs axis during spring machining.

0/1

2102 skip_tL Skip time constant linear

Set up a linear control time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F (acceleration and deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".

1 to 4000 (ms)

2103 skip_t1 Skip time constant primary delay acceleration and deceleration by software second stage

Set up a primary-delay time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed with primary delay) or C3 (exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst". When acceleration or deceleration by software is selected, the second-step time constant is used.

1 to 5000 (ms)

7. SERVO PARAMETERS

II - 112

7. SERVO PARAMETERS

The parameters can be changed from any screen. The valid servo parameters will differ according to the motor type. The setting values and meanings may also differ. Follow the correspondence table given below, and set the correct parameters. Refer to each Instruction Manual or the following manuals for details on each motor.

MELDAS AC Servo/ Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specification Manual... BNP-B3759 MELDAS AC Servo MDS-B-SVJ2 Series Specification and Instruction Manual ........ BNP-B3937 MELDAS AC Servo/ Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specification Manual ........................ BNP-C3000

Corresponding model

Parameter MDS-B-SVJ2

MDS-C1-Vx (High-gain)

(MDS-B-Vx4)

MDS-C1-Vx(Standard) (MDS-B-Vx)

SV001 Motor side gear ratio SV002 Machine side gear ratio SV003 Position loop gain 1 SV004 Position loop gain 2 SV005 Speed loop gain 1 SV006 Speed loop gain 2 - SV007 Speed loop delay compensation - SV008 Speed loop lead compensation SV009 Current loop q axis lead compensation SV010 Current loop d axis lead compensation SV011 Current loop q axis gain SV012 Current loop d axis gain SV013 Current limit value SV014 Current limit value in special control SV015 Acceleration rate feed forward gain SV016 Lost motion compensation 1 SV017 Servo specification selection SV018 Ball screw pitch SV019 Position detector resolution SV020 Speed detector resolution SV021 Overload detection time constant SV022 Overload detection level

SV023 Excessive error detection width during servo ON

SV024 In-position detection width SV025 Motor/Detector type

SV026 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF

SV027 Servo function selection 1 SV028 Linear motor magnetic pole shift length - - - SV029 Speed at the change of speed loop gain - SV030 Voltage dead time compensation -/ / / SV031 Overshooting compensation 1 SV032 Torque offset

7. SERVO PARAMETERS

II - 113

Corresponding model

Parameter MDS-B-SVJ2

MDS-C1-Vx (High-gain)

(MDS-B-Vx4)

MDS-C1-Vx(Standard) (MDS-B-Vx)

SV033 Servo function selection 2 SV034 Servo function selection 3 SV035 Servo function selection 4 SV036 Regenerative resistor type SV037 Load inertia scale SV038 Notch filter frequency 1 - SV039 Lost motion compensation timing -

SV040 Non-sensitive band in feed forward control -/ / /

SV041 Lost motion compensation 2 SV042 Overshooting compensation 2 SV043 Disturbance observer filter frequency SV044 Disturbance observer gain SV045 Frictional torque -/ / / SV046 Notch filter frequency 2 - - SV047 Inductive voltage compensation gain SV048 Vertical axis drop prevention time

SV049 Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control

SV050 Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control

SV051 Dual feedback control time constant -

SV052 Dual feedback control non-sensitive band -

SV053 Excessive error detection width in special control

SV054 Overrun detection width in closed loop control -/- / /

SV055 Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop -

SV056 Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

SV057 SHG control gain

SV058 SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control

SV059 Collision detection torque estimating gain

SV060 Collision detection level SV061 D/A output channel 1 data No. SV062 D/A output channel 2 data No. SV063 D/A output channel 1 output scale SV064 D/A output channel 2 output scale SV065 Tool end compensation spring constant - -

7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2

II - 114

7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2

(1) Details for servo parameters For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is turned ON again, the parameter is validated.

! CAUTION

! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

No. Items Details Setting range

2201 (PR)

SV001 PC1

Motor side gear ratio

1 to 32767

2202 (PR)

SV002 PC2

Machine side gear ratio

Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio. Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and cause an alarm.

1 to 32767

2203 SV003 PGN1

Position loop gain 1

Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33". The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration. When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).

1 to 200 (rad/s)

2204 SV004 PGN2


When using the SHG control, also set SV003 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). When not using the SHG control, set to "0".

0 to 999 (rad/s)

2205 SV005 VGN1

Speed loop gain

Set the speed loop gain. Set this according to the load inertia size. The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be, however, vibration tends to occur. If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%. The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the value at the time when the vibration stops.

1 to 999

2206 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2207 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2208 SV008

VIA Speed loop lead compensation

Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. The standard setting is "1364". During the SHG control, the standard setting is "1900". Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a time. Raise this value to improve contour tracking precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).

1 to 9999

2209 SV009 IQA

Current loop q axis lead compensation

1 to 20480

2210 SV010 IDA

Current loop d axis lead compensation

1 to 20480

2211 SV011 IQG

Current loop q axis gain

1 to 2560

2212 SV012 IDG

Current loop d axis gain

Set the gain of current loop. As this setting is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for each type of motor. Set the standard values for all the parameters depending on each motor type.

1 to 2560


II - 115


2213 SV013 ILMT

Current limit value

Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit values for both + and - direction.) When the value is "500" (a standard setting), the maximum torque is determined by the specification of the motor.

0 to 500 (Stall [rated] current %)

2214 SV014 ILMTsp

Current limit value in special control

Set the current (torque) limit value in a special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and - directions.) Set to "500" when not using.


2215 SV015 FFC

Acceleration rate feed forward gain

When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to "100". To adjust a relative error in acceleration/ deceleration, increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.

0 to 999 (%)

Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at quadrant change is too large. This compensates the torque at quadrant change. This is valid only when the lost motion compensation (SV027 (SSF1/lmc)) is selected.

Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=01 Set the compensation amount based on the motor torque before the quadrant change. The standard setting is "100". Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is zero. Normally, use Type 2.

-1 to 200 (%)

Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10 Set the compensation amount based on the stall (rated) current of the motor. The standard setting is double of the friction torque. Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is zero.

-1 to 100 (Stall [rated] current %)

2216 SV016 LMC1

Lost motion compensation 1

When you wish different compensation amount depending on the direction When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and -directions. If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this and SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on other settings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation won't be performed in the direction of the command.


II - 116


2217 (PR)

SV017 SPEC

Servo specification selection

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 abs vdir mc dmk

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 dmk Deceleration control stop (SVJ2 standard) Dynamic brake stop

1 2

3 mc Contactor control output invalid

Contactor control output valid

4

5 vdir HA053N to HA33N motor Detector installation position standard (A, C)

HA053N to HA33N motor Detector installation position 90 degrees (B, D)

6 7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control 8 9 A B C D E F

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description. 2218 (PR)

SV018 PIT

Ball screw pitch

Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis.

1 to 32767 (mm/rev)

For both parameters, set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor detector. Setting

value

2219 (PR)

SV019 RNG1

Position detector resolution

Motor model name

SV019

SV020

HC*-E42/A42/A47, HC*R-E42/A42/A47 HA*N-E42/A42

100 100

HC*-E33/A33, HC*R-E33/A33 HA*N-E33/A33

25 25

HC-SF, HC-RF 16 16 HA-FF, HC-MF 8 8

2220 (PR)

SV020 RNG2

Speed detector resolution

8 to 100 (kp/rev)

2221 SV021 OLT

Overload detection time constant

Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). Set to "60" as a standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)

1 to 300 (s)

2222 SV022 OLL

Overload detection level

Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to "150" as a standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)



II - 117


Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. <Standard setting value>

Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)

OD1=OD2= 60*PGN1

/2 (mm)

2223 SV023 OD1

Excessive error detection width during servo ON

When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be performed.

0 to 32767 (mm)

2224 SV024 INP

In-position detection width

Set the in-position detection width. Set the accuracy required for the machine. The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer. The standard setting is "50".

0 to 32767 (µm)


II - 118


2225 (PR)

SV025 MTYP

Motor/ Detector type

F E D C B A 9 8 pen ent

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mtyp

bit Explanation

0 Set the motor type.

1 Set-ting 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x

2 x0 HA40N HA-FF43 HA43N3 x1 HA80N HA-FF63 HA83N4 x2 HA100N HA103N5 x3 HA200N 6 x4 7

mtyp

x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA HA93NxB xC HA-FF053 HA053NxD HA-FF13 HA13NxE HA-FF23 HA23NxF HA-FF33 HA33N

Set-ting 9x Ax Bx Cx Dx Ex Fx

x0 HC-MF43 HC52 orHC-SF52

HC53 or HC-SF53

x1 HC-MF73 HC102 orHC-SF102

HC103 or HC-SF103 HC103R or

HC-RF103

x2 HC152 orHC-SF152


HC-RF153

x3 HC202 orHC-SF202


HC-RF203

x4 HC352 orHC-SF352HC-SF353

x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC HC-MF053 xD HC-MF13 xE HC-MF23 xF



II - 119


(Continued from the previous page)

bit Explanation 8 9 A B

ent

Set the speed detector type. Set to "2".

C D E F

pen

Set the position detector type. Set to "2".

2226 SV026

OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF

Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of SV023 (OD1). When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be performed.

0 to 32767 (mm)

2227 SV027 SSF1

Servo function selection 1

F E D C B A 9 8 aflt zrn2 ovs lmc

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 vfct zup


0 zup Vertical axis lift-up control stop Vertical axis lift-up control start

1 2 3

4 Set the jitter compensation No. of compensation pulses with a binary.

5 vfct

00: Jitter compensation invalid 01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse 10: Jitter compensation 2 pulses 11: Jitter compensation 3 pulses

6 7

8 Set the compensation amount with SV016 (LMC1) and SV041 (LMC2).

9 lmc

00: Lost motion compensation stop 01: Lost motion compensation type 1 10: Lost motion compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited

A Set the compensation amount with SV031 (OVS1) and SV042 (OVS2).

B ovs

00: Overshooting compensation stop 01: Overshooting compensation type 1 10: Overshooting compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited

C D E zrn2 Set to "1". F aflt Adoptive filter stops Adoptive filter starts

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description. 2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2229 SV029 Not used. Set to "0". 0


II - 120


2230 SV030 IVC

Voltage dead time compensation

When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated. Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated. When not using, set to "0".

0 to 200 (%)

Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=01 Set the compensation amount based on the motor's stall (rated) current. Increase by 1% and determine the amount that overshooting doesn't occur. In Type 1, compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting won't be performed. Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=10 Use this if you perform the overshooting compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting. The setting method is the same in Type 1.

2231 SV031 OVS1

Overshoot- ing compensation 1

When you wish different compensation amount depending on the direction When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and -directions. If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this and SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on other settings.) When "-1" is set, the compensation won't be performed in the direction of the command.


2232 SV032 TOF

Torque offset

Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined axis.



II - 121


2233 SV033 SSF2


F E D C B A 9 8 afs

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fhz2 nfd


0 Set the filter depth for Notch filter (SV038: FHz1). 1 The control is stabilized by making the filter shallower. 2 Value 0 2 4 6 8 A C E

3

nfd Depth (dB)

Infntly deep -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2

Deep Shallow 4 Set the operation frequency of Notch filter 2. 5 fhz2 00: No operation 01:2250Hz 10:1125Hz 11:750Hz 6 7 8 9 A B

afs

Set the vibration sensitivity of the adaptive filter. If the filter depth is not deep enough (generally 70% or more) and the vibration cannot be sufficiently eliminated, raise the value.

C D E F

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.


II - 122


2234 SV034 SSF3


F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 daf2 daf1 dac2 dac1 mon

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set0 NC servo monitor MAX current display data changeover

1 Set-ting MAX current 1 MAX current 2

2

0 Max. current command value when power is turned ON (%)

Max. current command value for one second (%)

3

mon

1

Max. current command value for one second (%)

Max. current FB value for one second (%)

2 Max. current FB value when power is turned ON (%)


3 Load inertia rate (%) -

4 Adaptive filter operation frequency (Hz)

Adaptive filter operation gain (%)

5 PN bus voltage (V) Regenerative operation

frequency monitor (The number of times/sec)

6 Estimated max. torque for one second (%)


7 Estimated max. torque for one second (%)

Max. disturbance torque for two seconds (%)

8 to F Setting prohibited

4 dac1 D/A output ch.1 overflow setting

D/A output ch.1 clamp setting

5 dac2 D/A output ch.2 overflow setting

D/A output ch.2 clamp setting

6 daf1 D/A output ch.1 no filter D/A output ch.1 filter setting

7 daf2 D/A output ch.2 no filter D/A output ch.2 filter setting

8 9 A B C D E F



II - 123


2235 SV035 SSF4


F E D C B A 9 8 cl2n clG1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D

E clG1

Collision detection method 1 Set the collision detection level during cutting feed (G1). The G1 collision detection level=SV060*clG1. When clG1=0, the collision detection method 1 during cutting feed won't function.

F cl2n Collision detection method 2 valid

Collision detection method 2 invalid



II - 124


2236 (PR)

SV036 PTYP

Regenera- tive resistor type

F E D C B A 9 8 amp rtyp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 emgx

bit Explanation 0 1 2 3

Always set to "0(0000)".

4 Set the external emergency stop function. (Setting is prohibited for values with no description.)

5 Set-ting Explanation

6 0 External emergency stop invalid 7

emgx

4 External emergency stop valid

8 Set the regenerative resistor type.

9 Set-ting Explanation

A 0 Drive unit standard built-in resistor (SVJ2-01 doesn't have a built-in resistor)

B

rtyp

1 Setting prohibited 2 MR-RB032 3 MR-RB12 or GZG200W390HMK

4 MR-RB32 or GZG200W1200HMK: 3 units connected in parallel



7 to F Setting prohibited

C D E F

amp

Always set to "0(0000)".


II - 125


Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertia" in respect to the motor inertia.

Jl+Jm SV037 (JL) =

Jm *100

Jm: Motor inertia

2237 SV037 JL

Load inertia scale

Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia

0 to 5000 (%)

2238 SV038 FHz1

Notch filter frequency 1

Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration occurs. (Valid at 72 or more) When not using, set to "0".

0 to 3000 (Hz)

2239 SV039 LMCD

Lost motion compensation timing

Set this when the lost motion compensation timing doest not match. Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.

0 to 2000 (ms)

2240 SV040 LMCT

Non-sensitive band in feed forward control

Set the non-sensitive bad of the lost motion compensation and overshooting compensation during the feed forward control. When "0" is set, the actual value that will be set is 2µm. Adjust by increasing by 1µm.

0 to 100 (µm)

2241 SV041 LMC2


Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set the lost motion compensation amount to be different depending on the command directions. Set to "0" as a standard.


2242 SV042 OVS2

Overshooting compensation 2

Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set the overshooting compensation amount to be different depending on the command directions. Set to "0" as a standard.


2243 SV043 OBS1

Disturbance observer filter frequency

Set the disturbance observer filter band. The standard setting is "300". Lower the setting by 50 at a time if vibration occurs. To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".

0 to 1000 (rad/s)

2244 SV044 OBS2

Disturbance observer gain

Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100" to "300". To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV043 (OBS1). When not using, set to "0".

0 to 1000 (%)

2245 SV045 TRUB

Frictional torque

Set the frictional torque when using the collision detection function.


2246 SV046 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2247 SV047

EC Inductive voltage compensation gain

Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to "100" as a standard. If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain.

0 to 200 (%)

2248 SV048 EMGrt

Vertical axis drop prevention time

Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis from dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the brake works when the emergency stop occurs. Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the value where the axis does not drop.

0 to 2000 (ms)


II - 126


2249 SV049 PGN1sp

Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control

Set the position loop gain during the spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). Set the same value as the value of the spindle parameter, position loop gain in synchronous control. When performing the SHG control, set this with SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).

1 to 200 (rad/s)

2250 PGN2sp Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control

Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp) if you wish to perform the SHG control in the spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".

0 to 999 (rad/s)

2251 SV051 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2252 SV052 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2253 SV053

OD3 Excessive error detection width in special control

Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON in a special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper control, etc.). If "0" is set, excessive error detection won't be performed when servo ON during a special control.

0 to 32767 (mm)

2254 SV054 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2255 SV055 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2256 SV056

EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set a length of time that takes from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping. Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 5000 (ms)

2257 SV057 SHGC

SHG control gain

When performing the SHG control, set this with S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".

0 to 999 (rad/s)

2258 SV058 SHGCsp

SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control

Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (PGN2sp) if you wish to perform the SHG control in the spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".

0 to 999 (rad/s)

2259 SV059 TCNV

Collision detection torque estimating gain

To use the collision detection function, set the torque estimating gain. In the case of MDS-B-SVJ2, the value is the same as the load inertia ratio that includes the motor inertia. (=SV037:JL) If acceleration/deceleration is performed after setting SV034.mon=3 and SV060=0, the load inertia ratio will be displayed on the NC monitor screen.

0 to 5000 (%)

2260 SV060 TLMT

Collision detection level

When using the collision detection function, set the collision detection level during the G0 feeding. If "0" is set, none of the collision detection function will work.



II - 127


2261 SV061 DA1NO

D/A output channel 1 data No.

2262 SV062 DA2NO


Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel.

0 to 102

2263 SV063 DA1MPY

D/A output channel 1 output scale

2264 SV064 DA2MPY


When "0" is set, output is done with the standard output unit. Set other than "0" when you wish to change the unit. Set the scale with a 1/256 unit. When "256" is set, the output unit will be the same as the standard output unit.

-32768 to 32767 (Unit: 1/256)

2265 SV065 Not used. Set to "0". 0


II - 128

(2) Initial setting value

(a) HC**/HC**R series

Motor HC 52

HC 102*

HC 102

HC 152*

HC 152

HC 202*

HC 202

HC 352*

Drive unit capacity 06 07 10 10 20 10 20 20

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 50 80 50 80 50 115 80 130SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 8192 4096 8192 4096 8192 2048 4096 2048SV010 IDA 8192 4096 8192 4096 8192 2048 4096 2048SV011 IQG 512 256 384 256 384 256 384 256SV012 IDG 512 256 384 256 384 256 384 256SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 - - - - - - - -SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP 22B0 22B1 22B1 22B2 22B2 22B3 22B3 22B4SV026 OD2 - - - - - - - -SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 129

Motor HC 52

HC 102*

HC 102

HC 152*

HC 152

HC 202*

HC 202

HC 352*


SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV036 PTYP - - - - - - - -SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 130

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203*

HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R

Drive unit capacity 06 10 20 20 10 10 20

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 80 80 80 100 10 10 10 SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 2048 8192 8192 8192 SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 2048 8192 8192 8192 SV011 IQG 256 256 256 200 384 384 256 SV012 IDG 256 256 256 200 384 384 256 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 - - - - - - - SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP 22C0 22C1 22C2 22C3 22E1 22E2 22E3 SV026 OD2 - - - - - - - SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 131

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203*

HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R


SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV036 PTYP - - - - - - - SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 132

(b) HA**N series

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA100N

HA200N*

HA053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N

HA 43N

HA 83N

HA103N*

Drive unit capacity 06 10 20 20 01 01 03 03 06 10 20

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 90 150 150 220 35 35 35 35 120 150 180SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV011 IQG 512 512 512 200 256 256 256 256 512 512 512SV012 IDG 512 512 512 200 256 256 256 256 512 512 512SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

SV025 MTYP 2200 2201 2202 2203 228C

228D 228E 228F 2280 2281 2282

SV026 OD2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 133

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA100N

HA200N*

HA 053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N

HA 43N

HA 83N

HA103N*


SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV036 PTYP - - - - - - - - - - -SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 134

(c) HC-SF series

Motor HC-SF 52

HC-SF 102

HC-SF152

HC-SF202

HC-SF352

HC-SF53

HC-SF 103

HC-SF 153

HC-SF203

HC-SF353

Drive unit capacity 06 07 10 10 20 06 07 10 10 20

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 80 80 80 120 130 90 90 130 180 180SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 8192 4096 4096 2048 2048 4096 4096 2048 2048 2048SV010 IDA 8192 4096 4096 2048 2048 4096 4096 2048 2048 2048SV011 IQG 500 300 300 300 250 250 250 200 200 200SV012 IDG 500 300 300 300 250 250 250 200 200 200SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16SV020 RNG2 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 - - - - - - - - - -SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP 22B0 22B1 22B2 22B3 22B4 22C0 22C1 22C2 22C3 22C4SV026 OD2 - - - - - - - - - -SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 135

Motor HC-SF 52

HC-SF 102

HC-SF152

HC-SF202

HC-SF352

HC-SF53

HC-SF 103

HC-SF 153

HC-SF203

HC-SF353

Drive unit capacity 06 07 10 10 20 06 07 10 10 20

SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV036 PTYP - - - - - - - - - -SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 136

(d) HC-RF/HA-FF series

Motor HC-RF 103

HC-RF 153

HC-RF203

HA-FF053

HA-FF13

HA-FF23

HA-FF 33

HA-FF43

HA-FF63

Drive unit capacity 10 10 20 01 01 03 03 04 06

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 10 10 10 10 13 13 18 20 20SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 8192 8192 8192 8192 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 8192 8192 8192 8192 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 384 384 256 500 300 700 500 700 700SV012 IDG 384 384 256 500 300 700 500 700 700SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8SV020 RNG2 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 - - - - - - - - -SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP 22E1 22E2 22E3 227C 227D 227E 227F 2270 2271SV026 OD2 - - - - - - - - -SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 137

Motor HC-RF 103

HC-RF 153

HC-RF203

HA-FF053

HA-FF13

HA-FF23

HA-FF 33

HA-FF43

HA-FF63

Drive unit capacity 10 10 20 01 01 03 03 04 06

SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV036 PTYP - - - - - - - - -SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 138

(e) HC-MF series

Motor HC-MF 053

HC-MF 13

HC-MF23

HC-MF43

HC-MF73

Drive unit capacity 01 01 03 04 07

SV001 PC1 - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 6 6 6 6 8SV006 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 200 300 400 300 300SV012 IDG 200 300 400 300 300SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - -SV019 RNG1 8 8 8 8 8SV020 RNG2 8 8 8 8 8SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 - - - - -SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP 229C 229D 229E 2290 2291SV026 OD2 - - - - -SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0


II - 139

Motor HC-MF 053

HC-MF 13

HC-MF23

HC-MF43

HC-MF73

Drive unit capacity 01 01 03 04 07

SV033 SSF2 0 0 0 0 0SV034 SSF3 0 0 0 0 0SV035 SSF4 0 0 0 0 0SV036 PTYP - - - - -SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0SV051 0 0 0 0 0SV052 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0SV054 0 0 0 0 0SV055 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0

7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx HIGH-GAIN (MDS-B-Vx4 COMPATIBLE)

II - 140

7.2 MDS-C1-Vx HIGH-GAIN (MDS-B-Vx4 COMPATIBLE)


! CAUTION



2201 (PR)

SV001 PC1


1 to 32767

2202 (PR)

SV002 PC2



1 to 32767

2203 SV003 PGN1


Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33". The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration. When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC). (If "201" or bigger is set, the SHG control cannot be used.)

1 to 200 (In case of MDS-B-Vx4, 1 to 400) (rad/s)

2204 SV004 PGN2



0 to 999 (rad/s)

2205 SV005 VGN1

Speed loop gain 1


1 to 999

2206 SV006 VGN2

Speed loop gain 2

If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. As in the right figure, set the speed loop gain of the speed 1.2 times as fast as the motor's rated speed, and use this with SV029 (VCS). When not using, set to "0".

VGN1VGN2

VCS VLMT 0

(Rated speed*1.2)

-1000 to 1000


II - 141


Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1, 0 (vcnt). Normally, use "Changeover type 2". When you set this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset (SV032 (TOF)). When not using, set to "0". No changeover When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=00 The delay compensation control is always valid. Changeover type 1 When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=01 The delay compensation control works when the command from the NC is "0". Overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding can be suppressed.

2207 SV007 VIL

Speed loop delay compensation

Changeover type 2 When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=10 The delay compensation control works when the command from the NC is "0" and the position droop is "0". Overshooting or the limit cycle that occurs during pulse feeding or positioning can be suppressed.

0 to 32767

2208 SV008 VIA

Speed loop lead compensation


1 to 9999

2209 SV009 IQA


2210 SV010 IDA


1 to 20480

2211 SV011 IQG


2212 SV012 IDG



1 to 4096 (In case of MDS-B-Vx4, 1 to 8192)

2213 SV013 ILMT

Current limit value



2214 SV014 ILMTsp





II - 142


2215 SV015 FFC


When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to "100". To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.

0 to 999(%)



-1 to 200 (%)



2216 SV016 LMC1

Lost motion compensation 1



II - 143


2217 (PR)

SV017 SPEC


F E D C B A 9 8 spm drvall drvup mpt3 mp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 abs vdir fdir vfb seqh dfbx fdir2


0 fdir2 Speed feedback forward polarity

Speed feedback reverse polarity

1 dfbx Dual feedback control stop Dual feedback control start

2 seqh READY/Servo ON time normal

READY/Servo ON time high speed

3 vfb Speed feedback filter stop Speed feedback filter stop (2250Hz)

4 fdir Position feedback forward polarity

Position feedback reverse polarity

5 vdir Standard setting HA motor (4 pole motor)

Detector installation position 90 degrees (B, D)

6 7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control 8 mp MP scale 360P (2mm pitch) MP scale 720P (1mm pitch)

9 mpt3 MP scale ABS detection type 1, 2

MP scale ABS detection type 3

A drvup

Standard setting Possible to connect a drive unit whose capacity is 1 rank higher/lower than the standard one.

B drvall

Setting for normal use Possible to connect a drive unit with any capacity.

C D E F

spm

0 1 2 to F

: Setting for normal use : When using the S type drive unit (Only in the case of MDS-C1-Vx)

: Setting prohibited (Note 1) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description. (Note 2) bit3 (vfb) is only for MDS-C1-Vx.


II - 144


2218 (PR)

SV018 PIT

Ball screw pitch


1 to 32767 (mm/rev)

2219 (PR)

SV019 RNG1


In the case of the semi-closed loop control Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (Refer to the explanation of SV020.)

1 to 9999 (kp/rev)


1 to 9999 (kp/pit)

Detector model name Resolution SV019 setting OHE25K-ET, OHA25K-ET

100,000(p/rev) 100

OSE104-ET, OSA104-ET

100,000(p/rev) 100

OSE105-ET, OSA105-ET

1,000,000(p/rev) 1000

RCN723 (Heidenhain) 8,000,000(p/rev) 8000 Relative position detection scale

Refer to specification manual for each detector

PIT/Resolution (µm)

AT41 (Mitsutoyo) 1 (µm/p) The same as SV018 (PIT)

FME type, FLE type (Futaba)



MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries)



AT342 (Mitsutoyo) 0.5 (µm/p) Twice as big as SV018 (PIT)

AT343 (Mitsutoyo) 0.05 (µm/p) 20 times as big as SV018 (PIT)

LC191M (Heidenhain) Refer to specification manual for each detector


LC491M (Heidenhain) Refer to specification manual for each detector


Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor end detector. Detector model name SV020 setting OSE104, OSA104 100 OSE105, OSA105 1000

2220 (PR)

SV020 RNG2


1 to 9999 (kp/rev)

2221 SV021 OLT



1 to 999 (s)

2222 SV022 OLL





II - 145




OD1=OD2= 60*PGN1

/2 (mm)

2223 SV023 OD1



0 to 32767 (mm)

2224 SV024 INP



0 to 32767 (µm)


II - 146


2225 (PR)

SV025 MTYP

Motor /Detector type


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mtyp

bit Explanation

0 Set the motor type. 1 Set this along with SV017 (SPEC)/spm. 2 1) When SV017/spm=0 (Normal drive unit)

3 Set-ting 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x

4 x0 HA40N HA50L HA53L 5 x1 HA80N HA100L HA103L 6 x2 HA100N HA200L HA203L 7 x3 HA200N HA300L HA303L x4 HA300N HA500L HA503L

mtyp

x5 HA700N x6 HA900N x7 HA-LH11K2 x8 HA-LH15K2 x9 xA HA150L HA153L xB xC xD HA-LF15K2 xE xF

Set-ting 8x 9x Ax Bx Cx Dx Ex Fx

x0 HA43N HC52 HC53 x1 HA83N HC102 HC103 HC103R x2 HA103N HC152 HC153 HC153R x3 HA203N HC202 HC203 HC203R x4 HA303N HC352 HC353 HC353R x5 HA703N HC452 HC453 HC503R x6 HC702 HC703 x7 HC902 x8 x9 xA HA93N xB xC HA053N xD HA13N xE HA23N xF HA33N

(Continued to the next page)


II - 147


(Continued from the previous page) bit Explanation

2) When SV017/spm=1 (S type drive unit) Set-

ting 8x 9x Ax Bx Cx Dx Ex Fx

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 HC353 x5 HC452 HC453 x6 HC702 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

8 Set the detector type. 9

A

Set the position detector type for "pen", and the speed detector type for "ent". In the case of the semi-closed loop control, set the same value for "pen" and "ent".

B

ent

pen setting

ent setting Detector model name

C 0 0 OSE104 D 1 1 OSA104 E 2 2 OSE105, OSA105 F

pen

3 3 4 Setting

impossibleOHE25K-ET, OSE104-ET

5 Setting impossible

OHA25K-ET, OSA104-ET


OSE105-ET, OSA105-ET, RCN723 (Heidenhain)



Relative position detection scale, MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries)


AT41 (Mitsutoyo), FME type, FLE type (Futaba)

A Setting impossible

AT342,AT343 (Mitsutoyo), LC191M/491M (Heidenhain), MDS-B-HR

B Setting impossible

C C (Current

synchroni-zation)

The setting of the slave axis in the speed/current synchronization control.When the master axis is the semi-closed control.

D E (Current

synchroni-zation)

The setting of the slave axis in the speed/current synchronization control.When the master axis is the full-closed control. (Current synchronization control is only for MDS-C2-Vx.)

E Setting impossible

F Setting impossible


II - 148


2226 SV026 OD2

Excessive error detection width during servo OFF


0 to 32767 (mm)

2227 SV027 SSF1


F E D C B A 9 8 aflt zrn2 afse ovs lmc 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

omr zrn3 vfct upc vcnt bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay compensation.

1 vcnt

00: Delay compensation changeover invalid 01: Delay compensation changeover type 1 10: Delay compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited

2 upc Start torque compensation invalid

Start torque compensation valid

3

4 Set the number of compensation pulses of the jitter compensation.

5 vfct


6 zrn3 ABS scale: Set to "1" in using AT342, AT343, LC191M/491M.

7 omr Machine end compensation invalid

Machine end compensation valid


9 lmc

00: Lost motion compensation stop 01: Lost motion compensation type 1 10: Overshooting compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited


B ovs

00: Overshooting compensation stop 01: Overshooting compensation type 1 10: Overshooting compensation type 2 11: Overshooting compensation type 3

C D afse 00: Adoptive filter sensitivity standard

11: Adoptive filter sensitivity increase (Set 2bits at a time) E zrn2 Set to "1". F aflt Adoptive filter stop Adoptive filter start


2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2229 SV029 Speed at

the change of speed loop gain

If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes, and use this with SV006 (VGN2). (Refer to SV006.) When not using, set to "0".

0 to 9999 (r/min)


II - 149


The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. "The setting value of SV030" = (Icx*256) + IVC

0 to 32767

SV030 IVC (Low order)

Voltage dead time compensation

When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated. When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be performed. Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.

0 to 255 (%)

2230

SV030 Icx (High order)

Current bias 1 Set to "0" as a standard. Use this in combination with SV040 and the high order 8bits of SV045.

0 to 127

Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=01 Set the compensation amount based on the motor's stall current. This compensates overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding. Normally, use Type 2. Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=10 Set the compensation amount based on the motor's stall current. Increase by 1% and determine the amount that overshooting doesn't occur. In Type 2, compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting won't be performed. Type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=11 Use this to perform the overshooting compensation during circular cutting or the feed forward control. The setting method is the same in Type 2.

2231 SV031 OVS1




2232 SV032 TOF

Torque offset Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined axis.



II - 150


2233 SV033 SSF2


F E D C B A 9 8 dos hvx svx

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 nfd2 nf3 nfd1 zck


0 zck Z phase check valid (Alarm 42)

Z phase check invalid

1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038). 2 Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

3 nfd1

Depth (dB)

Infntly deep -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2

Deep Shallow 4 nf3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)5 Set the operation frequency of Notch filter 2 (SV046). 6 Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

7 nfd2

Depth (dB)

Infntly deep -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2

Deep Shallow

8 svx Set the performance mode of the servo control. (Only for MDS-C1-Vx)

9 hvx

00: By current loop gain 01: MDS-B-Vx compatible mode selected 10: High gain mode selected 11: High gain mode selected

A B C Digital signal output selection

D 0 : MP scale absolute position detection, offset demand signal output

E 1 : Specified speed signal output F

dos

2 to F : Setting prohibited (Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.


II - 151


2234 SV034 SSF3


F E D C B A 9 8 ovsn

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 os2 zeg mohn has2 has1


0 has1 Setting for normal use (Except for HC)

HAS control 1 valid (HC: High acceleration rate support)

1 has2 Setting for normal use (Except for HC)

HAS control 2 valid (HC: Overshooting support)

2 mohn MDS-B-HR motor thermal valid

MDS-B-HR motor thermal ignored

3 4 5 zeg

Z phase normal edge detection (Setting for normal use)

Z phase reverse edge detection(Valid only when SV027/bit6=1)

6 os2 Setting for normal use Overspeed detection level changeover

7 8 9 A B C D E

F

ovsn

Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation type 3 in increments of 2µm at a time. In the feed forward control, the non-sensitive band of the model position droop is set, and overshooting of the model is ignored. Set the same value as the standard SV040.



II - 152

No. Items Details Setting range2235 SV035

SSF4 Servo function selection 4

F E D C B A 9 8 clt clG1 cl2n clet cltq 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ckab iup tdt bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 1 2 3 4 5

tdt

Td creation time setting Set to "0". (For machine tool builder adjustment)

6 iup Set to "1" when using any of motors from HC152 to HC702 and from HC153 to HC453.

7 ckab Setting for normal use No signal 2 (Alarm 21) special detection

8 Set the retracting torque for collision detection in respect to the maximum torque of the motor.

9 cltq

00: 100% 01: 90% 10: 80% (Standard) 11: 70% A clet Setting for normal use

The disturbance torque peak of the latest two seconds is displayed in MPOS of the servo monitor screen.

B cl2n Collision detection method 2 valid


C D

E clG1


F clt Setting for normal use

The guide value of the SV059 setting value is displayed in MPOS of the servo monitor screen.

(Note) bit7 (ckab) is only for MDS-C1-Vx.


II - 153

No. Items Details Setting range2236 (PR)

SV036 PTYP

Power supply type


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ptyp

bit Explanation

0 1 2

When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary. To validate the external emergency stop function, add 40h.


4 x0 Not used CV-300

5 x1 CV-110 CR-106 x2 CV-220 CR-157

ptyp

x3 CR-22 x4 CV-37 CR-37 x5 CV-150 CV-450CV-550 x6 CV-55 CV-260 CR-55 x7 CV-370 x8 CV-75 CR-75 x9 CV-185 CR-90

8 Set the regenerative resistor type when MDS-A-CR is used.

9 Set- ting

Regenerative resistor model name

Resistance value Capacity

A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration)

B

rtyp

1 GZG200W260HMJ 26Ω 80W 2 GZG300W130HMJ×2 26Ω 150W 3 MR-RB30 13Ω 300W 4 MR-RB50 13Ω 500W 5 GZG200W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 350W 6 GZG300W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 500W 7 R-UNIT-1 30Ω 700W 8 R-UNIT-2 15Ω 700W 9 R-UNIT-3 15Ω 2100W A to F No setting

C D E F

amp

Always set to "0".


Jl+Jm SV037 (JL) =

Jm *100

Jm: Motor inertia

2237 SV037 JL

Load inertia scale


0 to 5000 (%)

2238 SV038 FHz1



0 to 9000 (Hz)


II - 154


2239 SV039 LMCD



0 to 2000 (ms)

The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. "Setting value of SV040" = (Icy*256) + LMCT

0 to 32767

SV040 LMCT (Low order)

Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control. When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2µm. Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.

0 to 100 (µm)

2240

SV040 Icy (High order)

Current bias 2 Normally, set to "40" if you use HC202 to HC902, HC203 to HC703. Use this in combination with SV030 and the high order 8bits of SV045.

0 to 127

2241 SV041 LMC2




2242 SV042 OVS2




2243 SV043 OBS1


Set the disturbance observer filter band. Set to "100" as a standard. To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".

0 to 1000 (rad/s)

2244 SV044 OBS2



0 to 500 (%)


0 to 32767

SV045 TRUB (Low order)

Frictional torque

When you use the collision detection function, set the frictional torque.


2245

SV045 Ib1 (High order)


0 to 127

2246 SV046 FHz2



0 to 9000 (Hz)

2247 SV047 EC

Inductive voltage compensation gain


0 to 200 (%)

2248 SV048 EMGrt



0 to 20000 (ms)


II - 155


2249 SV049 PGN1sp



1 to 200 (rad/s)



0 to 999 (rad/s)

2251 SV051 DFBT

Dual feed back control time constant

Set the control time constant in dual feed back. When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 1ms. The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to the semi-closed control, so the limit of the position loop gain is raised.

0 to 9999 (ms)

2252 SV052 DFBN

Dual feedback control non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control. Set to "0" as a standard.

0 to 9999 (µm)

2253 SV053 OD3

Excessive error detection width in special control


0 to 32767 (mm)


II - 156


When SV035 (SSF4)/ bitF (ckab)=0 SV054 ORE

Overrun detection width in closed loop control

Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control. If the gap between the motor end detector and the linear scale (machine end detector) exceeds the value set by this parameter, it is judged to be overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected. When "-1" is set, the alarm detection won't be performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected with a 2mm width.

-1 to 32767 (mm)

When SV035 (SSF4)/ bitF (ckab)=1 (Note) This applies to only MDS-C1-Vx.

The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. "Setting value of SV054" =(NSE*256)+ORE

0 to 32767

SV054 ORE (Low order)

Overrun detection- width in closed loop control

Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control. If the gap between the motor end detector and the linear scale (machine end detector) exceeds the value set by this parameter, it is judged to be overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected. When "255" is set, the alarm detection won't be performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected with a 2mm width.

0 to 255 (mm)

2254

SV054 NSE (High order)

Special detection width for No signal 2

When SV035 (SSF4)/ bitF (ckab) =1, this setting is valid. Set the special detection width for No signal 2 (Alarm 21). When "0" is set, overrun is detected with a 15µm width.

0 to 127 (µm)

2255 SV055 EMGx

Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop

Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop is input to the point when READY OFF is compulsorily executed. Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of SV056. In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the gate off is delayed for the length of time set by SV048 if SV055's value is smaller than that of SV048.

0 to 20000 (ms)

2256 SV056 EMGt

Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

In the vertical axis drop prevention time control, set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set a length of time that takes from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping. Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant. When executing the synchronous operation, put the minus sign to the settings of both of the master axis and slave axis.

-20000 to 20000(ms)

2257 SV057 SHGC

SHG control gain


0 to 1200 (rad/s)

2258 SV058 SHGCsp



0 to 1200 (rad/s)


II - 157


2259 SV059 TCNV


Set the torque estimating gain when using the collision detection function. After setting as SV035/bitF(clt)=1 and performing acceleration/deceleration, set the value displayed in MPOS of the NC servo monitor screen. Set to "0" when not using the collision detection function.

-32768 to 32767

2260 SV060 TLMT




2261 SV061 DA1NO


2262 SV062 DA2NO


Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel. In the case of MDS-C1-V2, set the axis on the side to which the data will not be output to "-1".

-1 to 127

2263 SV063 DA1MPY


2264 SV064 DA2MPY


Set the scale with a 1/256 unit. When "0" is set, output is done with the standard output unit.

-32768 to 32767(Unit: 1/256)

Set the spring constant of the tool end compensation. In the semi-closed loop control, the tool end compensation amount is calculated with the following equation.

F (mm/min)2*SV065Compensation amount=

R (mm)*109 (µm)

F: Commanded speed R: Radius

2265 SV065 TLC

Tool end compensation spring constant

When not using, set to "0".

-32768 to 32767


II - 158



Motor HC 52

HC 102

HC 152

HC 202

HC 352

HC 452

HC 702

HC 902

Drive unit capacity 05 10 20 20 35 45s 45 70s 70 90

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV012 IDG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 1000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xxB0 xxB1 xxB2 xxB3 xxB4 xx95 xxB5 xx96 xxB6 xxB7SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 159

Motor HC 52

HC 102

HC 152

HC 202

HC 352

HC 452

HC 702

HC 902

Drive unit capacity 05 10 20 20 35 45s 45 70s 70 90

SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 160

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203

HC 353

HC 453

HC 703

Drive unit capacity 05 10 20 35 45s 45 70s 70 90

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV012 IDG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 1000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xxC0 xxC1 xxC2 xxC3 xxA4 xxC4 xxA5 xxC5 xxC6SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 161

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203

HC 353

HC 453

HC 703

Drive unit capacity 05 10 20 35 45s 45 70s 70 90

SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 162

Motor HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R

HC 353R

Drive unit capacity 10 10 20 35

SV001 PC1 - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 15 15 20 40SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 256 256 256 256SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xxE1 xxE2 xxE3 xxE4SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0


II - 163

Motor HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R

HC 353R

Drive unit capacity 10 10 20 35

SV033 SSF2 0200 0200 0200 0200SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0


II - 164

(b) HA**N series

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA 100N

HA 200N

HA 300N

HA 700N

HA 900N


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 25 25 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 150 150 150 150 150 250 250 SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 SV011 IQG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 SV012 IDG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP xx00 xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 165

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA 100N

HA 200N

HA 300N

HA 700N

HA 900N


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 166

Motor HA 43N

HA 83N

HA 93N

HA 103N

HA 203N

HA 303N

HA 703N

HA 053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 25 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 150 150 150 150 150 150 250 70 70 100 100SV006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV012 IDG 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xx80 xx81 xx8A xx82 xx83 xx84 xx85 xx8C xx8D xx8E xx8FSV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 167

Motor HA 43N

HA 83N

HA 93N

HA 103N

HA 203N

HA 303N

HA 703N

HA 053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx STANDARD SPECIFICATION (MDS-B-Vx COMPATIBLE)

II - 168

7.3 MDS-C1-Vx STANDARD SPECIFICATION (MDS-B-Vx COMPATIBLE)


! CAUTION



2201 (PR)

SV001 PC1


1 to 32767

2202 (PR)

SV002 PC2



1 to 32767

2203 SV003 PGN1


Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33". The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration. When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).

1 to 200 (rad/s)

2204 SV004 PGN2



0 to 999 (rad/s)

2205 SV005 VGN1

Speed loop gain 1


1 to 999

2206 SV006 VGN2

Speed loop gain 2

If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. As in the right figure, set the speed loop gain of the speed 1.2 times as fast as the motor's rated speed, and use this with SV029 (VCS). When not using, set to "0".

VGN1VGN2

VCS VLMT 0

(Rated speed*1.2)

-1000 to 1000


II - 169


Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1, 0 (vcnt). Normally, use "Changeover type 2". When you set this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset (SV032 (TOF)). When not using, set to "0". No changeover When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=00 The delay compensation control is always valid. Changeover type 1 When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=01 The delay compensation control works when the command from the NC is "0". Overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding can be suppressed.

2207 SV007 VIL

Speed loop delay compensation

Changeover type 2 When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=10 The delay compensation control works when the command from the NC is "0" and the position droop is "0". Overshooting or the limit cycle that occurs during pulse feeding or positioning can be suppressed.

0 to 32767

2208 SV008 VIA

Speed loop lead compensation


1 to 9999

2209 SV009 IQA


1 to 20480

2210 SV010 IDA


1 to 20480

2211 SV011 IQG


1 to 2560

2212 SV012 IDG



1 to 2560

2213 SV013 ILMT

Current limit value



2214 SV014 ILMTsp





II - 170


2215 SV015 FFC


When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to "100". To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.

0 to 999 (%)



-1 to 200 (%)



2216 SV016 LMC1




II - 171


2217 (PR)

SV017 SPEC


F E D C B A 9 8 mpt3 mp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 abs vdir fdir spwv seqh dfbx fdir2


0 fdir2 Speed feedback forward polarity

Speed feedback reverse polarity

1 dfbx Dual feedback control stop Dual feedback control start

2 seqh READY/Servo ON time normal

READY/Servo ON time high speed

3 spwv Normal mode High gain servo synchronous mode

4 fdir Position feedback forward polarity

Position feedback reverse polarity

5

vdir Standard setting

HA motor (4 pole motor) Detector installation position 90 degrees (B, D)

6 7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control 8 mp MP scale 360P (2mm pitch) MP scale 720P (1mm pitch)

9 mpt3 MP scale ABS detection type 1, 2

MP scale ABS detection type 3

A B C D E F

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description. 2218 (PR)

SV018 PIT

Ball screw pitch


1 to 32767 (mm/rev)


II - 172


2219 (PR)

SV019 RNG1



1 to 9999 (kp/rev)

In the case of the full-closed loop control Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch.

1 to 9999 (kp/pit)

Detector model name Resolution SV019 setting OHE25K-ET, OHA25K-ET 100,000(p/rev) 100

OSE104-ET, OSA104-ET 100,000(p/rev) 100

OSE105-ET, OSA105-ET 1,000,000(p/rev) 1000

Relative position detection scale



AT41 (Mitsutoyo) 1 (µm/p) The same as SV018 (PIT)

FME type, FLE type (Futaba)



MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries)



AT342 (Mitsutoyo) 0.5 (µm/p) Twice as big as SV018 (PIT)

Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor end detector. Detector model name SV020 setting Equipped to HA053, HA13 (Only for MDS-B-Vx) 10

OHE25K, OHA25K (Only for MDS-B-Vx) 100

OSE104, OSA104 100 OSE105, OSA105 1000

2220 (PR)

SV020 RNG2


1 to 9999 (kp/rev)

2221 SV021 OLT



1 to 999 (s)

2222 SV022 OLL






OD1=OD2= 60*PGN1

/2 (mm)

2223 SV023 OD1



0 to 32767 (mm)


II - 173


2224 SV024 INP



0 to 32767 (µm)

2225 (PR)

SV025 MTYP

Motor/ Detector type


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mtyp

bit Explanation 0 Set the motor type.

1 Set-ting 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x

2 x0 HA40N HA50L HA53L 3 x1 HA80N HA100L HA103L 4 x2 HA100N HA200L HA203L 5 x3 HA200N HA300L HA303L 6 x4 HA300N HA500L HA503L 7

mtyp

x5 HA700N x6 HA900N x7 HA-LH11K2 x8 HA-LH15K2 x9 xA HA150L HA153L xB xC xD xE xF

Set-ting 8x 9x Ax Bx Cx Dx Ex Fx

x0 HA43N HC52 HC53 x1 HA83N HC102 HC103 HC103Rx2 HA103N HC152 HC153 HC153Rx3 HA203N HC202 HC203 HC203Rx4 HA303N HC352 HC353 HC353Rx5 HA703N HC452 HC453 HC503Rx6 HC702 HC703 x7 HC902 x8 x9 xA HA93N xB xC HA053(N) xD HA13(N) xE HA23N xF HA33N



II - 174


(Continued from the previous page) bit Explanation

8 9 A B

ent

Set the detector type. Set position detector type for "pen", and speed detector type for "ent". In the case of the semi-closed loop control, set the same value for "pen" and "ent".

C pen setting ent setting Detector model name

D 0 0 OHE25K (Only for MDS-B-Vx), OSE104

E 1 1 OHA25K (Only for MDS-B-Vx), OSA104

F

pen

2 2 OSE105, OSA105

3 3 Equipped to HA053, HA13 (Only for MDS-B-Vx)

4 Setting impossible OHE25K-ET, OSE104-ET

5 Setting impossible OHA25K-ET, OSA104-ET

6 Setting impossible OSE105-ET, OSA105-ET



Relative position detection scale, MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries)


AT41 (Mitsutoyo), FME type, FLE type (Futaba)

A Setting impossible AT342 (Mitsutoyo)

B Setting impossible

C

C (Current

synchroni-zation)

The setting of the slave axis in the speed/current synchronization control. When the master axis is the semi-closed control.

D Setting impossible

E Setting impossible

F Setting impossible

2226 SV026

OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF


0 to 32767 (mm)


II - 175


2227 SV027 SSF1


F E D C B A 9 8 aflt zrn2 afse ovs lmc

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 zrn3 vfct upc vcnt


0 vcnt Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay compensation.

1

00: Delay compensation changeover invalid 01: Delay compensation changeover type 1 10: Delay compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited

2 upc Start torque compensation invalid

Start torque compensation valid

3

4 Set the number of compensation pulses of the jitter compensation.

5 vfct


6 zrn3 ABS scale: Set to "1" in using AT342, AT343, LC191M/491M.

7


9 lmc

00: Lost motion compensation stop 01: Lost motion compensation type 1 10: Lost motion compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited


B ovs

00: Overshooting compensation stop 01: Overshooting compensation type 1 10: Overshooting compensation type 2 11: Overshooting compensation type 3

C 00: Adoptive filter sensitivity standard

D afse 11: Adoptive filter sensitivity increase (Set 2bits at a time)

E zrn2 Set to "1". F aflt Adoptive filter stops Adoptive filter starts

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description. 2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2229 SV029

VCS Speed at the change of speed loop gain

If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes, and use this with SV006 (VGN2). (Refer to SV006.) When not using, set to "0".

0 to 9999 (r/min)


II - 176


The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. "The setting value of SV030" = (Icx*256) + IVC

0 to 32767

SV030 IVC (Low order)

Voltage dead time compensation

When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated. When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be performed. Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.

0 to 255 (%)

2230

SV030 Icx (High order)


0 to 127

Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=01 Set the compensation amount based on the motor's stall current. This compensates overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding. Normally, use Type 2. Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=10 Set the compensation amount based on the motor's stall current. Increase by 1% and determine the amount that overshooting doesn't occur. In Type 2, compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting won't be performed. Type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=11 Use this to perform the overshooting compensation during circular cutting or the feed forward control. The setting method is the same in Type 2.

2231 SV031 OVS1



-1 to 100 (Stall [rated] current%)


II - 177


2232 SV032 TOF

Torque offset

Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined axis.


2233 SV033 SSF2


F E D C B A 9 8 dos hvx svx

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fhz2 nfd zck


0 zck Z phase check valid (Alarm 42) Z phase check invalid

1 nfd1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038). 2 Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

3 Depth (dB)

Infntly deep -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2

Deep Shallow 4 Set the operation frequency of Notch filter 2. 5 0: Invalid 3: 750Hz 6: 375Hz 6 1: 2250Hz 4: 563Hz 7: 321Hz 7

fhz2

2: 1125Hz 5: 450Hz 8 to F: 281Hz 8 svx 9 hvx

Set the performance mode of the servo control. (Only for MDS-C1-Vx) 00: By current loop gain 01: MDS-B-Vx compatible mode selected 10: High gain mode selected 11: High gain mode selected

A B C Digital signal output selection

D dos 0 : MP scale absolute position detection, offset demand signal output

E 1 : Specified speed signal output F 2 to F : Setting prohibited



II - 178


2234 SV034 SSF3


F E D C B A 9 8 ovsn

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 os2 zeg has2 has1


0 has1 Setting for normal use HAS control 1 valid

(Except for HC) (HC: High acceleration rate support)

1 has2 Setting for normal use HAS control 2 valid (Except for HC) (HC: Overshooting support)

2 3 4

5 zeg Z phase normal edge detection

Z phase reverse edge detection

(Setting for normal use) (Valid only when SV027/bit6=1)

6 os2 Setting for normal use Overspeed detection level changeover

7 8 9 A B C D E

F

ovsn

Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation type 3 in increments of 2µm at a time. In the feed forward control, the non-sensitive band of the model position droop is set, and overshooting of the model is ignored. Set the same value as the standard SV040.



II - 179


2235 SV035 SSF4

Servo function selection4

F E D C B A 9 8 clt clG1 cl2n clet cltq

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 iup tdt

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set 0 Td creation time setting 1 Set to "0". (For machine tool builder adjustment) 2 3 4 5

tdt

6 iup Set to "1" in the case of any motors from HC152 to HC702 and from HC153 to HC453.

7

8 Set the retracting torque for collision detection in respect tothe maximum torque of the motor.

9 cltq

00: 100% 01: 90% 10: 80% (Standard) 11: 70% A

clet

Setting for normal use The disturbance torque peak of the latest two seconds is displayed in MPOS of the servo monitor screen.

B cl2n Collision detection method 2 valid


C D

E clG1


F clt

Setting for normal use The guide value of the SV059 setting value is displayed in MPOS of the servo monitor screen.



II - 180


2236 (PR)

SV036 PTYP

Power supply type


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ptyp

bit Explanation

0 1 2


3 Set-ting 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x7x 8x

4 x0 Not used CV-300

5 x1 CV-110 CR-106 x2 CV-220 CR-157

ptyp

x3 CR-22 x4 CV-37 CR-37 x5 CV-150 CV-450 CV-550 x6 CV-55 CV-260 CR-55 x7 CV-370 x8 CV-75 CR-75 x9 CV-185 CR-90


9 Set-ting



A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration)

B

rtyp

1 GZG200W260HMJ 26Ω 80W 2 GZG300W130HMJ×2 26Ω 150W 3 MR-RB30 13Ω 300W 4 MR-RB50 13Ω 500W 5 GZG200W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 350W 6 GZG300W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 500W 7 R-UNIT-1 30Ω 700W 8 R-UNIT-2 15Ω 700W 9 R-UNIT-3 15Ω 2100W

A to F No setting

C D E F

amp

Always set to "0".


II - 181



Jl+Jm SV037 (JL) =

Jm *100

Jm: Motor inertia

2237 SV037 JL

Load inertia scale


0 to 5000 (%)

2238 SV038 FHz1



0 to 3000 (Hz)

2239 SV039 LMCD



0 to 2000 (ms)


0 to 32767

SV040 LMCT (Low order)

Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control. When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2µm. Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.

0 to 100 (µm)

2240

SV040 Icy (High order)

Current bias 2 Normally, set to "40" if you use HC202 to HC902, HC203 to HC703. Use this in combination with SV030 and the high order 8bits of SV045.

0 to 127

2241 SV041 LMC2




2242 SV042 OVS2




2243 SV043 OBS1


Set the disturbance observer filter band. Set to "100" as a standard. To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".

0 to 1000 (rad/s)

2244 SV044 OBS2



0 to 500 (%)


0 to 32767

SV045 TRUB (Low order)

Frictional torque

When you use the collision detection function, set the frictional torque.


2245

SV045 Ib1 (High order)


0 to 127


II - 182


2246 SV046 Not used. Set to "0". 0 2247 SV047

EC Inductive voltage compensation gain


0 to 200 (%)

2248 SV048 EMGrt



0 to 20000 (ms)

2249 SV049 PGN1sp



1 to 200 (rad/s)



0 to 999 (rad/s)

2251 SV051 DFBT

Dual feed back control time constant

Set the control time constant in dual feed back. When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 1ms. The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to the semi-closed control, so the limit of the position loop gain is raised.

0 to 9999 (ms)

2252 SV052 DFBN

Dual feedback control non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control. Set to "0" as a standard.

0 to 9999 (µm)

2253 SV053 OD3

Excessive error detection width in special control


0 to 32767 (mm)

2254 SV054 ORE

Overrun detection width in closed loop control

Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control. If the gap between the motor end detector and the linear scale (machine end detector) exceeds the value set by this parameter, it is judged to be overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected. When "-1" is set, the alarm detection won't be performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected with a 2mm width.

-1 to 32767 (mm)

2255 SV055 EMGx

Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop

Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop is input to the point when READY OFF is compulsorily executed. Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of SV056. In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the gate off is delayed for the length of time set by SV048 if SV055's value is smaller than that of SV048.

0 to 20000 (ms)


II - 183


2256 SV056 EMGt

Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

In the vertical axis drop prevention control, set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set a length of time that takes from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping. Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant. When executing the synchronous operation, put the minus sign to the settings of both of the master axis and slave axis.

-20000 to 20000(ms)

2257 SV057 SHGC

SHG control gain


0 to 999 (rad/s)

2258 SV058 SHGCsp



0 to 999 (rad/s)

2259 SV059 TCNV


Set the torque estimating gain when using the collision detection function. After setting as SV035/bitF(clt)=1 and performing acceleration/deceleration, set the value displayed in MPOS of the NC servo monitor screen. Set to "0" when not using the collision detection function.

-32768 to 32767

2260 SV060 TLMT




2261 SV061 DA1NO


2262 SV062 DA2NO


Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel. In the case of MDS-C1-V2, set the axis on the side to which the data will not be output to "-1".

-1 to 127

2263 SV063 DA1MPY


2264 SV064 DA2MPY


Set the scale with a 1/256 unit. When "0" is set, output is done with the standard output unit.

-32768 to 32767(Unit: 1/256)

2265 SV065 Not used. Set to "0". 0


II - 184



Motor HC 52

HC 102

HC 152

HC 202

HC 352

HC 452

HC 702

HC 902


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV011 IQG 512 512 512 256 256 256 200 200SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 512 256 256SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xxB0 xxB1 xxB2 xxB3 xxB4 xxB5 xxB6 xxB7SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 185

Motor HC 52

HC 102

HC 152

HC 202

HC 352

HC 452

HC 702

HC 902


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 10240 10240 10240 10240 10240SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 186

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203

HC 353

HC 453

HC 703

HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R

HC 353R


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 15 15 20 40SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 4096 4096 4096 4096SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 4096 4096 4096 4096SV011 IQG 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xxC0 xxC1 xxC2 xxC3 xxC4 xxC5 xxC6 xxE1 xxE2 xxE3 xxE4SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 187

Motor HC 53

HC 103

HC 153

HC 203

HC 353

HC 453

HC 703

HC 103R

HC 153R

HC 203R

HC 353R


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0000 0000 0000 0000SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0000 0000 0000 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 10240

10240

10240

10240

0 0 0 0

SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 188

(b) HA**N series

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA 100N

HA 200N

HA 300N

HA 700N

HA 900N


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 25 25 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 150 150 150 150 150 250 250 SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV011 IQG 512 512 256 256 256 200 200 SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 256 256 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP xx00 xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 189

Motor HA 40N

HA 80N

HA 100N

HA 200N

HA 300N

HA 700N

HA 900N


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 190

Motor HA 43N

HA 83N

HA 93N

HA 103N

HA 203N

HA 303N

HA 703N


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 25 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 150 150 150 150 150 150 250 SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV011 IQG 256 256 256 256 256 256 200 SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 512 256 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP xx80 xx81 xx8A xx82 xx83 xx84 xx85 SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 191

Motor HA 43N

HA 83N

HA 93N

HA 103N

HA 203N

HA 303N

HA 703N


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 192

Motor HA 053

HA 13

HA 053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N

Drive unit capacity 01 01 01 01 03 03

SV001 PC1 - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 70 70 70 70 100 100 SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV011 IQG 256 256 256 256 224 224 SV012 IDG 256 256 256 256 224 224 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 10 10 - - - - SV020 RNG2 10 10 - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP 338C 338D xx8C xx8D xx8E xx8F SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Note) The HA053 and HA13 are dedicated for the MDS-B-Vx.


II - 193

Motor HA 053

HA 13

HA 053N

HA 13N

HA 23N

HA 33N


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Note) The HA053 and HA13 are dedicated for the MDS-B-Vx.


II - 194

(c) HA**L series

Motor HA 50L

HA 100L

HA 150L

HA 200L

HA 300L

HA 500L

HA- A11KL

HA- A15KL


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - -SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - -SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV005 VGN1 30 30 30 30 30 50 150 150SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048SV011 IQG 512 512 512 512 256 256 512 512SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV018 PIT - - - - - - - -SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - -SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - -SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 3SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50SV025 MTYP xx20 xx21 xx2A xx22 xx23 xx24 xx27 xx28SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 195

Motor HA 50L

HA 100L

HA 150L

HA 200L

HA 300L

HA 500L

HA- A11KL

HA- A15KL


SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


II - 196

Motor HA 53L

HA 103L

HA 153L

HA 203L

HA 303L

HA 503L


SV001 PC1 - - - - - - SV002 PC2 - - - - - - SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV005 VGN1 30 30 30 30 30 50 SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 IQA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV010 IDA 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV011 IQG 512 512 512 512 256 256 SV012 IDG 512 512 512 512 512 512 SV013 ILMT 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV014 ILMTsp 500 500 500 500 500 500 SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV018 PIT - - - - - - SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 SV025 MTYP xx30 xx31 xx3A xx32 xx33 xx34 SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000


II - 197

Motor HA 53L

HA 103L

HA 153L

HA 203L

HA 303L

HA 503L


SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV046 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV047 EC 100 100 100 100 100 100 SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 SV065 0 0 0 0 0 0

7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.4 SUPPLEMENT

II - 198

7.4 SUPPLEMENT

7.4.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

(1) MDS-B-SVJ2

(a) D/A output specifications Item Explanation

No. of channels 2ch Output cycle 888µs (min. value) Output precision

8bit

Output voltage range

-10V to 0 to +10V

Output scale setting

±1/256 to ±128 times

CN3 connector MO1 = pin 4 MO2 = pin 14

Output pins

GND = pin 1,11 Function Offset amount adjustment function

Output clamp function Low path filter function

Option Relay terminal: MR-J2CN3TM Connect from the CN3 connector using the SH21 cable as a lead-in wire.

CN3 Connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal1 LG 11 LG2 12 3 SG 13 MBR4 MO1 14 MO25 COM 15 MC6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19

10 VDD 20 EMGX


II - 199

(b) Setting the output data

Set the No. of the data to be outputted to each D/A output channel.

# No. Abbrev Parameter name 2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1

data No. 2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2

data No.

No. Output data Standard output unit

Output cycle

0 0V test output For offset amount adjustment 1 Speed feedback 1000rpm / 2V 888µs

2 Current feedback Stall (rated) 100% / 2V 888µs

3 Speed command 1000rpm / 2V 888µs

4 Current command Stall (rated) 100% / 2V 888µs

5 V-phase current value 10A / V 888µs 6 W-phase current-value 10A / V 888µs

7 Estimated disturbance torque Stall (rated) 100% / 2V 888µs

8 Collision detection disturbance torque

Stall (rated) 100% / 2V 888µs

9 Position feedback (stroke) 100mm / V 3.55ms 10 Position feedback (pulse) 10µm / V 3.55ms 11 Position droop mm / V 3.55ms 12 Position droop (x10) 100µm / V 3.55ms 13 Position droop (x100) 10µm / V 3.55ms 14 Feedrate (F∆T) 10000(mm/min) / V 888µs 15 Feedrate (F∆T x 10) 1000(mm/min) / V 888µs 16 Model position droop mm / V 3.55ms 17 Model position droop (x10) 100µm / V 3.55ms 18 Model position droop (x100) 10µm / V 3.55ms 19 q-axis current cumulative value - 888µs 20 d-axis current cumulative value - 888µs 21 Motor load level 100% / 5V 113.7ms 22 Amplifier load level 100% / 5V 113.7ms 23 Regenerative load level 100% / 5V 910.2ms 24 PN bus wire voltage 50V / V (1/50) 888µs 25 Speed cumulative item - 888µs

26 Cycle counter 0-5V (Regardless of resolution) 888µs

27 Excessive error detection amount mm / V 3.55ms

28 Collision detection estimated torque

Stall (rated) 100% / 2V 888µs

29 Position command (stroke) 100mm / V 3.55ms 30 Position command (pulse) 10µm / V 3.55ms

31 to 99 - 100 5V test output - -

101 Saw-tooth wave test output -5 to 5V Cycle: 113.7ms 888µs

102 Recutangular wave test output 0 to 5V Cycle: 227.5ms 888µs

103 to Setting prohibited


II - 200

(c) Setting the output scale

When "0" is set, the output will be made with the standard output unit. To change the output unit, set a value other than "0". The scale is set with a 1/256 unit. When 256 is set, the unit will be the same as the standard output.

# No. Abbrev Parameter name 2263 SV063 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1

output scale 2264 SV064 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2

output scale (Example 1) When SV061 = 5, SV063 = 2560

The V-phase current value will be output with 1 A/V unit to D/A output ch.1. (Example 2) When SV063 = 11, SV064 = 128

The position droop will be output with a 2mm/Vunit to D/A output ch.2.


II - 201

(2) MDS-C1-Vx, MDS-B-Vx, MDS-B-Vx4

(a) D/A Output specifications

Item Explanation No. of channels 2ch Output cycle 888µs (min. value) Output precision

8bit

Output voltage 0V to 2.5V to +5V Output scale setting

±1/256 to ±128 times

CN9 connector MO1 = pin 9 MO2 = pin 19

Output pins

GND = pin 1,11 Phase current feed back output function L-axis U-phase current FB : pin 7 L-axis V-phase current FB : pin 17 M-axis U-phase current FB : pin 6

Function

M-axis V-phase current FB : pin 16 Option An drive unit with 2 axes also has 2 channels for D/A

output. Therefore, set the output data of the axis (SV061,62), which is not observed, to "-1".

CN9 Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 LG 11 LG 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15 6 MUIFB 16 MVIFB 7 LUIFB 17 LVIFB 8 18 9 MO1 19 MO2

10 20


II - 202

(b) Setting the output data

Set the No. of the data to be outputted to each data D/A output channel.

# No. Abbrev Parameter name 2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1

data No. 2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2

data No.


Standard setting value of output

scale (Setting values

in SV063, SV064)

Standard output unit

Outputcycle

-1 D/A output non-selected

For a drive unit. with 2 axes (MDS-C1-V2). Set for the parameter of the axis which is not used.

13 (in case of 2000rpm)

1000rpm / V 3.55msch1: Speed feedback r/min 9

(in case of 3000rpm)

1500rpm / V 3.55ms0

ch2: Current command Stall% 131 Stall 100% / V 3.55ms

1 Current command Stall% 131 Stall 100% / V 3.55ms2 - 3 Current feedback Stall% 131 Stall 100% / V 3.55ms4 - 5 -

6 Position droop NC display unit / 2

328 (When the display

unit=1µm) 10µm / 0.5V 3.55ms

7 -

8 Feedrate (F∆T) (NC display unit / 2)

/ comminucation cycle

55 (When 1µm,

3.5ms)

1000 (mm/min)/ 0.5V 3.55ms

9 -

10 Position command NC display unit / 2


unit=1µm) 10µm / 0.5V 3.55ms

11 -

12 Position feedback NC display unit / 2


unit=1µm) 10µm / 0.5V 3.55ms

13 -

14 Collision detection estimated torque Stall% 131 Stall 100% / V 3.55ms

15 Collision detection disturbance torque Stall% 131 Stall 100% / V 3.55ms

64 Current command (High-speed) Internal unit

8 (adjustment

required) - 888µs

65 Current feedback (High-speed) Internal unit

8 (adjustment

required) - 888µs



II - 203

(Continued from the previous page)


Standard setting value of output

scale (Setting values

in SV063, SV064)


Outputcycle

77 Estimated disturbance torque Internal unit

8 (adjustment

required) - 888µs

125 Saw-tooth wave test output 0V to 5V 0 (256) Cycle: 227.5ms 888µs

126 Rectangular wave test output 0V to 5V 0 (256) Cycle: 1.7ms 888µs

127 2.5V (data 0) test output 2.5V 0 (256) - 888µs

(c) Setting the output scale

# No. Abbrev Parameter name

2263 SV063 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 output scale

2264 SV064 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 output scale

Usually, the standard setting value is set for the output scale (SV063, SV 064). When "0" is set, the output will be made as well as when "256" is set.

SV063 5 [V] DATA x 256 x 256 (8bit) + 2.5 [V] (offset) = Output voltage [V]

(Example) When outputting the current FB with 100%/V-stall (SV061=3, SV063=131)

131 5 100 x 256 x 256 + 2.5 = 3.499 [V]


II - 204

7.4.2 ELECTRONIC GEARS

By setting the ball screw lead, deceleration ratio (or acceleration ratio), and detector resolution correctly with parameters, the command movement amount and machine end movement amount can be matched. The following parameters are related to these electronic gears, and directly affect the machine operation. Take care to set these correctly.

Parameters related to electronic gears SV001 (PC1), SV002 (PC2), SV003 (PGN1)(SV049(PGN1sp)), SV018 (PIT), SV019

(RNG1), SV020 (RNG2) PC1 and PC2 setting range

As a principle, the setting range of SV001 (PC1) and SV002 (PC2) is 1 to 30. However, if the following conditions are satisfied, a value higher than 30 can be set. Note that the following conditions must be satisfied even when setting a value between 1 and 30. For semi-closed loop:

RNG1 x PC2 PIT x PC1 x IUNIT

PC1 '' < 32767 / PIT'' / IUNIT'' PC2''' < 32767 / RNG1'''

For closed loop: PGN1 x RNG2 x PC2

30 x RNG1 x PC1

PC1''' < 32767 / RNG1''' / C30'' PC2''' < 32767 / RNG2''' / PGN1'

Meaning of symbols PC1''' Value obtained by dividing PC1. PC2'' Value obtained by dividing PC2. PIT(') Value obtained by dividing PIT once (twice). RNG1'(') Value obtained by dividing RNG1 once (twice). RNG2'(') Value obtained by dividing RNG2 once (twice). PGN1' Value obtained by dividing PGN1 once (twice). IUNIT'(') Value obtained by dividing CNC interpolation unit once (twice). C30'(') Value obtained by dividing a number "30" once (twice).


II - 205

Example of calculating PC1 and PC2 setting range

To use a ball screw lead of 10mm, interpolation unit of 0.5µm and OSE104 or OSA104 motor end detector with semi-closed loop. The following parameters are determined by the above conditions. SV018 (PIT) = 10, SV019 (RNG1) = 100, SV020 (RNG2) = 100, IUNIT = 2 Divide the denominator and numerator. PIT' = 1, RGN1' = 10 (Greatest common divisor = 10) IUNIT' = 1, RGN1'' = 5 (Greatest common divisor = 2) Obtain the maximum value of PC1 and PC2 with the calculation expression for the semi-closed loop. PC1' < 32767 / 1 / 1 < 32767 PC2' < 32767 / 5 < 6553 With the above calculations, the setting range for PC1 is 1 to 32767 and for PC2 is 1 to 6553.

To use a rotation table, interpolation unit of 0.5µm and OSE104 or OSA104 motor end detector with semi-closed loop. The following parameters are determined by the above conditions.

SV018 (PIT) = 360, SV019 (RNG1) = 100, SV020 (RNG2) = 100, IUNIT = 2 Divide the denominator and numerator.

PIT' = 18, RGN1' = 5 (Greatest common divisor = 20) Obtain the maximum value of PC1 and PC2 with the calculation expression for the closed loop.

PC1' < 32767 / 18 / 2 < 910 PC2' < 32767 / 5 < 6553

With the above calculations, the setting range for PC1 is 1 to 910 and for PC2 is 1 to 6553.

To use a ball screw lead of 10mm, interpolation unit of 0.5µm, position loop gain of 33, OSE104 or OSA104 motor end detector with closed loop, and 1µm scale machine end detector. The following parameters are determined by the above conditions.

SV018 (PIT) = 10, SV019 (RNG1) = 10, SV020 (RNG2) = 100, IUNIT = 2, PGN1 = 33 Divide the denominator and numerator.

RNG1' = 1, RNG2' = 10 (Greatest common divisor = 10) C30' = 3, RNG2'' = 1 (Greatest common divisor = 10) C30'' = 1, PGN1' = 11 (Greatest common divisor = 3)

Obtain the maximum value of PC1 and PC2 with the calculation expression for the closed loop.PC1' < 32767 / 1 / 1 < 32767 PC2' < 32767 / 1 / 11 < 2978


To use a ball screw lead of 10mm, interpolation unit of 0.5µm, position loop gain of 33, OSE105 or OSA105 motor end detector with closed loop, and 1µm scale machine end detector.

The following parameters are determined by the above conditions. SV018 (PIT) = 12, SV019 (RNG1) = 12, SV020 (RNG2) = 1000, IUNIT = 2, PGN1 = 33

Divide the denominator and numerator. RNG1' = 3, RNG2' = 250 (Greatest common divisor = 4) C30' = 3, RNG2'' = 25 (Greatest common divisor = 10) C30'' = 1, PGN1' = 11 (Greatest common divisor = 3)

Obtain the maximum value of PC1 and PC2 with the calculation expression for the closed loop.PC1' < 32767 / 3 / 1 < 10922 PC2' < 32767 / 25 / 11 < 119



II - 206

7.4.3 LOST MOTION COMPENSATION

When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the + direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, the command direction is CCW. This rotation direction can be set with the CNC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the ± will differ for some servo parameters according to this motor rotation direction. The servo parameters affected by CW/CCW are shown below.

SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2) (When different values are set for SV016 and SV041) SV031 (OVS1), SV042 (OVS2) (When different values are set for SV031 and SV042) <Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction,

the compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity.

CW CCW A X: SV041 X: SV016B Y: SV016 Y: SV041C X: SV016 X: SV041D Y: SV041 Y: SV016

+X-X

-Y

+Y

The Y axis command direction changes from the – to + direction.

The X axis command direction changes from the – to + direction.

The X axis command direction changes from the + to – direction.

The Y axis command direction changes from the + to – direction.

A

B

C

D

(Note) The setting value for the parameter is "0" or "-1", the compensation amount is determined

as shown below. Setting value

for SV016 (Setting value

for SV031)

Setting value for SV041

(Setting valuefor SV041)

Compensation amount

in + direction

Compensation amount

in - direction

0 0 No compensation No compensation n 0 n n 0 m m m n m n m n -1 n No compensation -1 m No compensation m

8. MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS

II - 207

8. MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the CNC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each CNC and the following spindles.

MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual .................................BNP-B3759

8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH,SPJ2 SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS

For parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The setting is validated after the power is turned ON again.

No. Items Details Setting range (Unit)

3001 3002 3003 3004

slimit 1 2 3 4

Limit rotation speed

Set spindle rotation speed for maximum motor rotation speed with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. (Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)

3005 3006 3007 3008

smax 1 2 3 4

Maximum rotation speed

Set maximum spindle rotation speed with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. Set to slimt ≥ smax. By comparing the S command value and the value of gear 1 to 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically.

0 to 99999 (r/min)

3009 3010 3011 3012

ssift 1 2 3 4

Shift rotation speed

Set spindle speed for gear shifting with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. (Note) Setting too large value may cause a

gear nicks when changing gears.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3013 3014 3015 3016

stap 1 2 3 4

Tap rotation speed

Set maximum spindle rotation speed during tap cycle with gears 00, 01, 10, 11.

0 to 99999 (r/min)

3017 3018 3019 3020

stapt 1 2 3 4

Tap time constant

Set time constants for constant inclination synchronous tap cycles for gears 00, 01, 10, 11 (linear acceleration/ deceleration pattern).

1 to 5000 (ms)


II - 208

Relationship between spindle limit rotation speed and maximum spindle rotation speed

10V

0 smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n)

Output voltage (V)

Maximum rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting) Set "0" for any unused gear.

Limit rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting)

Spindle rotation speed (r/min)

Relation between the spindle limit rotation speed and the spindle tap time constant (for the constant inclination synchronous tap cycle)

Execution time constant

slimt(n)

stapt(n)stapt(n)

stapt2

stapt1 0

S command

Time (ms)

slimt(n)

slimt2

slimt1

Time (ms)

Spindle rotation speed (r/min) Spindle rotation speed (r/min)


II - 209

# Items Details Setting range (Unit)

3021 sori Orientation rotation speed

Set the spindle orientation rotation speed. Set the rotation speed for when the spindle rotates at the constant rotation speed.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3022 sgear Encoder gear ratio Set the gear ratio of the spindle to the encoder.

0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/4 3: 1/8

3023 smini Minimum rotation speed

Set the minimum rotation speed of the spindle. If an S command instructs the rotation speed below this setting, the spindle rotates at the minimum rotation speed set by this parameter.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3024 (PR)

sout Spindle connection

Set the type of the spindle to be connected. 0: No connection with the spindle 1: Serial connection (bus) 2 to 5: Analog output

0 to 5

3025 enc-on Spindle encoder Set connection information of the spindle encoder. 0: No connection 1: Spindle connection (Spindle encoder connection check function valid.) 2: Serial connection of encoder

0 to 2

3026 cs_ori Selection of winding in orientation mode

0: Perform orientation using the winding selected when the orientation command is issued.

1: Use winding L whenever the orientation command is issued.

0/1

3027 cs_syn Selection of winding in spindle synchronous mode

0: The winding H/L is selected by the actual spindle motor rotation speed (calculated from commanded rotation speed) when spindle synchronous control starts. (The winding is not switched during synchronous control. The control is carried out with the winding selected at start.) If the actual spindle motor rotation speed is less than SP020, the winding L is selected, and if more than the value, the winding H is selected.

1: Use winding H whenever the spindle synchronous command is issued.

0/1

3028 sprcmm L system tap cycle spindle forward run/ reverse run M command

Set the M code of the spindle forward run/reverse run command. High-order three digits: The spindle

forward run command's M code is set.

Low-order three digits: The spindle reverse run command's M code is set.

0 to 999999


II - 210


3029 tapsel Asynchronous tap gear selection

Specify whether to use the tap rotation speed or maximum rotation speed for the gear that is selected when an asynchronous tap command is issued. 0: Tap rotation speed 1: Maximum rotation speed This parameter is valid only when the M-function synchronous tap cycle enable parameter (#1272 ext08 bit1) is ON.

0/1

3030 (PR)

mbsel Selection of magnetic bearings

Select whether to use magnetic bearings. 0: Magnetic bearings invalid 1: Magnetic bearings valid

0/1

3031 (PR)

smcp_no Amplifier I/F channel No. (spindle)

Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting a spindle amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to "0000". Set "0000" when using an analog spindle.

0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207

3032 (PR)

mbmcp_no Amplifier I/F channel No. (magnetic bearing)

Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting a magnetic bearing amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to "0000".

0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207

3037 3038 3039 3040

taps21 22 23 24

Synchronous tap switching spindle speed 2

Set the spindle rotation speed at which the step-2 acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be switched at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.

0 to 99999 (r/min)

3041 3042 3043 3044

tapt 21 22 23 24

Synchronous tap switching time constant 2

Set the time constant to reach synchronous tap switching spindle rotation speed 2 (#3037 to #3040) at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.

1 to 5000 (ms)

3045 3046 3047 3048

tapt 31 32 33 34

Synchronous tap switching time constant 3

Set the time constant to reach the maximum rotation speed (#3005 to #3008) at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.

1 to 5000 (ms)


II - 211


3049 spt Spindle synchronization acceleration/ deceleration time constant

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for when the spindle synchronization command's rotation speed changes during spindle synchronous control.

0 to 9999 (ms)

3050 sprlv Spindle synchronization rotation speed attainment level

The spindle rotation speed synchronization complete signal will turn ON when the difference of the reference spindle and synchronous spindle actual rotation speeds is less than the level set for the synchronous spindle rotation speed command value during spindle synchronous control.

0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)

3051 spplv Spindle phase synchronization attainment level

The spindle phase synchronization complete signal will turn ON when the phase difference of the reference spindle and synchronous spindle is less than the set level during spindle phase synchronization control.

0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)

3052 spplr Spindle motor spindle relative polarity

Set the spindle motor and spindle's relative polarity. Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation: Positive polarity Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation: Negative polarity

0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity

3053 sppst Spindle encoder Z -phase position

Set the deviation amount from the spindle's reference position to the spindle encoder's Z phase. The deviation amount is obtained using the clockwise direction looking from the front of the spindle as the positive direction.

0 to 359999 (1/1000°)

3054 sptc1 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 1

Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 99999 (r/min)


II - 212



Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 99999 (r/min)


Set the spindle speed for changing the 3rd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 99999 (r/min)


Set the spindle speed for changing the 4th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 99999 (r/min)



0 to 99999 (r/min)



0 to 99999 (r/min)


II - 213




0 to 99999 (r/min)

3061 spdiv1 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 1

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (sptc1) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).

0 to 127


Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).

0 to 127



0 to 127



0 to 127



0 to 127


II - 214




0 to 127


Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) and higher as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).

0 to 127

3068 symtm1 Phase synchronization start confirmation time

Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attained before phase synchronization control is started. When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.

0 to 9999 (ms)

3069 symtm2 Phase synchronization end confirmation time

Set the time to wait for phase synchronization control to end as the time for the rotation speed to reach the attainment range. When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.

0 to 9999 (ms)

3070 syprt Phase synchronization speed

Set the fluctuation amount to change the synchronous spindle rotation speed during phase synchronization control as the command speed and rate. When "0" is set, the amount will be 100%.

0 to 100 (%)

3071 (Not used.) 3072 (Not used.)

8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2

II - 215

8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The valid spindle parameters will differ according to the motor and amplifier type. Follow the correspondence table given below, and set the correct parameters. The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles.

MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual............................................................................................................................. BNP-B3759

The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi.

! CAUTION

! Do not make remarkable adjustments or changes of the parameters as the operation may become unstable.



Standard setting

3201 SP001 PGM Magnetic detector and motor built- in encoder orientation- mode position loop gain

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. On the contrary, however, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3202 SP002 PGE Encoder orientation-mode position loop gain

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. On the contrary, however, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3203

SP003 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0

3204 SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width

Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3205 (PR)

SP005 OSP Orientation mode changing speed limit value

Set the motor speed limit value to be used when the speed loop is changed to the position loop in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3206 SP006 CSP Orientation mode deceleration rate

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter. On the contrary, however, the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

1 to 1000 20

3207 SP007 OPST In-position shift amount for orientation

Set the stop position for orientation. Set the value by dividing 360° by 4096.

0 to 4095 0

3208


3209 SP009 PGT Synchronous tapping position loop gain

Set the spindle position loop gain in synchronous tapping mode.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15


II - 216


Standard setting

3210 SP010 PGS Spindle synchronous position loop gain

Set the spindle position loop gain in spindle synchronization mode.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3211 to

3216

SP011 to

SP016

Use not possible. 0 0

3217 (PR)

SP017 TSP Maximum motor speed

Set the maximum motor speed of the spindle.

1 to 32767 (r/min)

6000

3218 (PR)

SP018 ZSP Motor zero speed

Set the motor speed for which zero-speed output is performed.

1 to 1000 (r/min)

50

3219 (PR)

SP019 CSN1 Speed cushion 1

Set the time constant for a speed command from "0" to the maximum speed. (This parameter is invalid in position loop mode.)

0 to 32767 (10ms)

30

3220 (PR)

SP020 SDTS Speed detection set value

Set the motor speed so for which speed detection output is performed. Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP).

0 to 32767 (r/min)

600

3221

SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001.

0 to 120 (%)

10

3222 (PR)

SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control

Set the speed loop proportional gain in speed control mode. When the gain is increased, response is improved but vibration and sound become larger.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3223 (PR)

SP023 VGNI1 Speed loop gain integral term under speed control

Set the speed loop integral gain in speed control mode. Usually, set a value in proportion to SP022 (VGNP1).

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3224


3225 (PR)

SP025 GRA1 Spindle gear teeth count 1

Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle corresponding to gear 000.

1 to 32767 1

3226 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3227 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3228 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3229 (PR)

SP029 GRB1 Motor shaft gear teeth count 1

Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft corresponding to gear 000.

1 to 32767 1

3230 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3231 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3232 (PR)



1 to 32767 1


II - 217


Standard setting

3233 (PR)

SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1

Set the spindle function 1 in bit units.

0000 to FFFF HEX setting

0000

3234 (PR)


Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. (Note1) To validate bit3(mkc2), NC side

needs to prepare. (Note1) Always turn the bit2 at the same

time to use bit3.


0000

F E D C B A 9 8 poff hzs ront

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 sftk dflt 1a2m

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits.

bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1

0 1a2m 1 amplifier 2 motor function: Invalid

1 amplifier 2 motor function: Valid

1 dflt Default motor: Main Default motor: Sub 2 sftk SF-TK card invalid SF-TK card valid 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C rontD E hzsF poff

This is a fixed control bit.

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mts1

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1

0 mts1 Special motor constant invalid

Special motor constant setting valid

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F


II - 218


Standard setting

3235 (PR)

SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function3



0000

3236 (PR)



F E D C B A 9 8 dslm dssm

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1


bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 plg1 PLG of motor 1 valid PLG of motor 1 invalid 1 plg2 PLG of motor 2 valid PLG of motor 2 invalid 2 mag1 MAG of motor 1 valid MAG of motor 1 invalid 3 mag2 MAG of motor 2 valid MAG of motor 2 invalid 4 enc1 ENC of motor 1 valid ENC of motor 1 invalid5 enc2 ENC of motor 2 valid ENC of motor 2 invalid6 7 8 dssm Speedometer valid Speedometer invalid 9 dslm Load meter valid Load meter invalid A B C D E F


0 hwid H-coil wide-range constant output invalid

H-coil wide-range constant output valid

1 2 hbsd H-coil base slide invalid H-coil base slide valid 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 hbsd hwid


II - 219


Standard setting

3237 (PR)




0000

3238 (PR)


Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits.


0000

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits.bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1

0 enco Encoder orientation invalid

Encoder orientation valid

1 2 plgo PLG orientation invalid PLG orientation valid 3 4 5 6 7

8 nstv No-signal detection type

(Always monitoring) Monitoring only in position loop or orientation-mode

9 A B C D E F

F E D C B A 9 8 nstv

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 plgo enco

F E D C B A 9 8 oplp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pftm alty


0 alty Deceleration stop during special alarm invalid

Deceleration stop during special alarm valid

1

2 pftm Thread cutting position data invalid

Thread cutting position data valid

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

F oplp Open loop operation invalid

Open loop operation valid


II - 220


Standard setting

3239 (PR)

SP039 ATYP Amplifier type

Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0". This parameter corresponds to MDS-B-SPJ2.


0000

3240 (PR)

SP040 MTYP Motor type 0000 to FFFF HEX setting

0000

This is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit 0 is set to 0. Refer to the following standard motors, and set the applicable motor number.

Parameter setting Amplifier type0000 -- 0001 SPJ2-02 0002 SPJ2-04 0003 SPJ2-075 0004 SPJ2-15 0005 SPJ2-22 0006 SPJ2-37 0007 SPJ2-55 0008 SPJ2-75 0009 SPJ2-110/110C

Parameter setting Motor type Maximum

speed Corresponding

amplifier 1000 1001 SJ-P0.2A 10000 r/min SPJ2-02 1002 SJ-P0.4A 10000 r/min SPJ2-04 1003 SJ-P0.75A 10000 r/min SPJ2-075 1004 SJ-P1.5A 10000 r/min SPJ2-15 1005 SJ-P2.2A 8000 r/min SPJ2-22 1006 SJ-P3.7A 8000 r/min SPJ2-37 1007 SJ-PF5.5-01 8000 r/min SPJ2-55 1008 SJ-PF7.5-01 8000 r/min SPJ2-75 1009 SJ-PF11-01 6000 r/min SPJ2-110/110C


II - 221


Standard setting

3241 (PR)

SP041 PTYP Power supply type

When this unit is a signal connection axis with power supply unit, set this parameter. Set "0" for this parameter for the unit which is not a signal connection axis. Select a value from the following table according to the regenerative resistance being used. (Note 1) This setting is used when using

one FCUA-RB75/2 and when using two in parallel.


0000

3242 (PR)


3243 (PR)


3244 (PR)

SP044 TRANS NC communication frequency

Set a frequency of data communication with NC.

0 to 32767 Standard: 0 Special: 1028

3245


3246 (PR)

SP046 CSN2 Speed command dual cushion

For an acceleration/deceleration time constant defined in SP019 (CSN1) , this parameter is used to provide smooth movement only at the start of acceleration/deceleration. As the value of this parameter is smaller, it moves smoother but the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer. To make this parameter invalid, set "0".

0 to 1000 0

3247 (PR)

SP047 SDTR Speed detection reset value

Set the reset hysteresis width for a speed detection set value defined in SP020 (SDTS).

0 to 1000 (r/min)

30

Setting value

Regenerative resistance type

Resistance value (Ω)

Capacity (W)

000020002100220023002400250026002700280029002A002B002C00

- Not connected FCUA-RB04 FCUA-RB075 FCUA-RB15 FCUA-RB22 FCUA-RB37 FCUA-RB55 FCUA-RB75/2 R-UNIT-1 R-UNIT-2 R-UNIT-3 R-UNIT-4 R-UNIT-5

- -

200 100 60 40 25 20

30/15 30 15 15 10 10

- -

60 80 120 155 185 340

340/680700 700

2100 2100 3100


II - 222


Standard setting

3248 (PR)

SP048 SUT Speed reach range

Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the commanded speed for output of the speed reach signal.

0 to 100 (%)

15

3249 SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 010.

1 to 120 (%)

20


1 to 120 (%)

30


1 to 120 (%)

40


1 to 120 (%)

50


1 to 120 (%)

60


1 to 120 (%)

70

3255 (PR)

SP055 SETM Excessive speed deviation timer

Set the timer value until the excessive speed deviation alarm is output. The value of this parameter should be longer than the acceleration/deceleration time.

0 to 60 (s) 12

3256 SP056 PYVR Variable excitation (min value)

Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate. Select a smaller value when gear noise is too high. However, a larger value is effective for impact response.

0 to 100 (%)

50

3257 (PR)

SP057 STOD Fixed control constant

Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular.

0 0

3258 to

3262

SP058 to

SP062

Not used. Set to "0". 0 0

3263 (PR)

SP063 OLT Overload alarm detection time

Set the time constant for detection of the motor overload alarm.

0 to 1000 (s)

60

3264 (PR)

SP064 OLL Overload alarm detection level

Set the detection level of the motor overload alarm.

0 to 120 (%)

110

3265 (PR)

SP065 VCGN1

Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP).

0 to 100 (%)

100

3266 (PR)

SP066 VCSN1

Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed for starting change of speed loop proportional gain.

SP066 SP017

SP022

SP022× (SP065/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0


II - 223


Standard setting

3267 (PR)

SP067 VIGWA Change starting speed of variable current loop gain

Set the speed for starting change of current loop gain.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3268 (PR)

SP068 VIGWB Change ending speed of variable current loop gain

Set the speed for ending change of current loop gain.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3269 (PR)

SP069 VIGN Target value of variable current loop gain

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component and excitation component) for a change ending speed defined in SP068 (VIGWB). When this parameter is set to "0", the magnification is 1.

SP067 SP017SP068

Speed

Gain

SP069×(1/16)-fold

1-fold

SP017 (TSP)Maximum

motor speedSP067

(VIGWA)SP068

(VIGWB)SP069 (VIGN)

0 to 6000 0 0 0 6001 to 8000 5000 8000 45 8001 or more 5000 10000 64

0 to 32767 (1/16 -fold)

0

3270


3271 (PR)

SP071 VR2WA

3272 (PR)

SP072 VR2WB

3273 (PR)

SP073 VR2GN

3274 (PR)

SP074 IGDEC

3275

SP075 R2KWS

Fixed control constant


0 0


II - 224


Standard setting

3276


3277 SP077 TDSL Fixed control constant


0 0

3278 (PR)

SP078 FPWM

3279 (PR)

SP079 ILMT

3280

SP080

3281

SP081 LMCA

3282

SP082 LMCB

3283 to

3286

SP083 to

SP086

Not used. Set to "0".

0 0

3287 (PR)

SP087 DIQM Target value of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration

Set the minimum value of variable torque limit at deceleration.

0 to 150 (%)

75

3288 (PR)

SP088 DIQN Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration

Set the speed for starting change of torque limit value at deceleration.

SP088 SP017

100%

SP087

Speed

Inversely proportionalto speed

Torque limit

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3000

3289 to

3292

SP089 to

SP092


3293 (PR)

SP093 ORE Fixed control constant


0 0

3294 (PR)


3295 (PR)

SP095 VFAV Fixed control constant


0 0


II - 225


Standard setting

3296 (PR)

SP096 EGAR Encoder gear ratio

Set the gear ratio between the spindle end and the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below.

Setting value

Gear ratio (Acceleration)

–1 1 : 2 –2 1 : 4 –3 1 : 3

Setting value

Gear ratio (deceleration)

0 1 : 1 1 1 : 1/2 2 1 : 1/4 3 1 : 1/8 4 1 : 1/16

-3 to 4 0

3297 (PR)

SP097 SPECO

Orientation specification

Set the orientation specifications in bit units.


0000

3298 (PR)

SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional term in orientation mode

Set the speed loop proportional gain in orientation mode. When the gain is increased, rigidity is improved in the orientation stop but vibration and sound become larger.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3299 (PR)

SP099 VGOI Orientation mode speed loop gain integral term

Set the speed loop integral gain in orientation mode.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3300 (PR)

SP100 VGOD Orientation mode speed loop gain delay advance term

Set the a loop gain delay advance gain in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

F E D C B A 9 8 tlet

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir pyfx dmin odi2 odi1


bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 odi1

1

odi2Orientation rotation direction 00: Previous (the direction in which the motor has

so far rotated under speed control) 01: Forward rotation 10: Backward rotation 11: Prohibited (Same as setting value = 10)

2 dmin Dummy in-position invalid

Dummy in-position valid

3 pyfx Excitation min. (50%)

during orientation servo lock invalid

Excitation min. (50%) during orientation servo lock valid

4

5 fdir Encoder detector polarity: +

Encoder detector polarity: -

6 7 8 tlet Turret indexing invalid Turret indexing valid 9 A B C D E F


II - 226


Standard setting

3301 (PR)

SP101 DINP Orientation advance in-position width

When using the orientation in-position advance function, set the in-position width that is larger than the normal in-position width defined in SP004 (OINP).

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3302 (PR)

SP102 OODR Excessive error value in orientation mode

Set the excessive error width in orientation mode.

1 to 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088°)

32767

3303 (PR)

SP103 FTM Index positioning completion OFF time timer

Set the time for forcedly turn OFF the index positioning completion signal (different from the orientation completion signal) after the leading edge of the indexing start signal.

1 to 10000 (ms)

200

3304 (PR)

SP104 TLOR Torque limit value for orientation servo locking

Set the torque limit value for orientation in-position output. If the external torque limit signal is input the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid.

1 to 120 (%)

100

3305 (PR)

SP105 IQG0 Current loop gain magnification 1 in orientation mode

Set the magnification for current loop gain (torque component) at orientation completion.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3306 SP106 IDG0 Current loop gain magnification 2 in orientation mode

Set the magnification for current loop gain (excitation component) at orientation completion.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3307 SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode

Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 001. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP).

0 to 1000 0



0 to 1000 0

3309 (PR)

SP109 CSP4 Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode


0 to 1000 0

3310 (PR)

SP110 WCML Turret index command magnification

The integer magnification (gear ratio 1 : N) for the index position command (0 to 359) is set.

0 to 32767 (fold)

0

3311 SP111 WDEL Turret index deceleration magnification

The magnification for the orientation deceleration rate is set using 256 as 1.

0 to 32767 (1/256 -fold)

0

3312 SP112 WCLP Turret index clamp speed

The max. speed during indexing is set. This becomes the max. speed of the motor when set to "0".

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0


II - 227


Standard setting

3313 (PR)

SP113 WINP Turret index in-position width

The position error range is set in which an orientation (indexing) completed signal is output during turret indexing. This becomes the same as SP004 (OINP) when set to "0".

0 to 32767 (1/16°)

0

3314 SP114 OPER Orientation pulse miss check value

An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse miss value in the orientation stop exceed this setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 × SP004 (orientation in-position width)

0 to 32767 (360°/4096)

0

3315 SP115 OSP2 Orientation changeover speed limit value 2

When the door interlock spindle speed clamp signal is ON, this setting is used instead of OSP(SP005), CZRN(SP149) and TZRN(SP214). (Note that SP149 and SP214 are used only for the M65V.)

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3316

SP116 OPYVR

3317

SP117 ORUT

Fixed control constants


0 0

3318 SP118 ORCT Number of orientation retry times

Set the number of times to retry when an orientation or feedback error occurs. The warning (A9) is issued while retrying orientation, and an alarm (5C) is issued when the set number of times is exceeded.

0 to 100 (time)

0

3319 to

3376

SP119 to

SP176



II - 228


Standard setting

3377 (PR)

SP177 SPECS Spindle synchronous specifications

Set the spindle synchronous specifications in bit units.


0000

3378 (PR)

SP178 VGSP Spindle synchronous speed loop gain proportional term

Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle synchronization mode.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3379 (PR)

SP179 VGSI Spindle synchronous speed loop gain integral term

Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronization mode.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3380 (PR)

SP180 VGSD Spindle synchronous speed loop gain delay advance term

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in spindle synchronization mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3381 (PR)

SP181 VCGS Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain at spindle synchroniza-tion

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) at spindle synchronization.

0 to 100 (%)

100

F E D C B A 9 8 odx8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir pyfx fclx


bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 1 2

3 pyfx Normal excitation Position loop excitation fixed (strong)

4

5 fdir Position detector polarity (+)

Position detector polarity (-)

6 7 8 9 A B C

D odx8 Magnification of

excessive error width × 8 times invalid

Magnification of excessive error width × 8 times valid

E F


II - 229


Standard setting

3382 (PR)

SP182 VCSS Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain at spindle synchroniza-tion

Set the speed for starting change of speed loop proportional gain at spindle synchronization.

SP182 SP017

SP178

SP178× (SP181/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3383 SP183 SYNV Sync matching speed at spindle synchronization

For changeover from the speed loop to the position loop at spindle synchronization, set a speed command error range for output of the sync speed matching signal.

0 to 1000 (r/min)

20

3384 (PR)

SP184 FFCS Acceleration rate feed forward gain at spindle synchronization

Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain at spindle synchronization. This parameter is used only with the SPJ2.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3385 SP185 SINP Spindle sync in-position width

Set the position error range for output of the in-position signal at spindle synchronization.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3386 (PR)

SP186 SODR Excessive error width at spindle synchronization

Set the excessive error width at spindle synchronization.

1 to 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3387 (PR)

SP187 IQGS Current loop gain magnifi- cation1 at spindle synchronization

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) at spindle synchronization.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3388 (PR)

SP188 IDGS Current loop gain magnification 2 at spindle synchronization

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) at spindle synchronization.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3389 to

3392

SP189 to

SP192



II - 230


Standard setting

3393 (PR)

SP193 SPECT Synchronous tapping specifications

Set the synchronous tapping specifications in bit units.


0000

3394 (PR)

SP194 VGTP Synchronous tapping speed loop gain proportional term

Set the speed loop proportional gain in synchronous tapping mode.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3395 (PR)

SP195 VGTI Synchronous tapping speed loop gain integral term

Set the speed loop integral gain in synchronous tapping mode.

0 to1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3396 (PR)

SP196 VGTD Synchronous tapping speed loop gain delay advance term

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in synchronous tapping mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised.

0 to1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3397


3398 (PR)

SP198 VCGT Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain at synchronous tapping

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP194 (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) at synchronous tapping.

0 to 100 (%)

100

F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp od8x

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir cdir pyfx fclx

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 1 2


4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (-)



6 7 8 9 A B C

D od8x Magnification of



E ptyp Position control switch

type: After zero point return

Position control switch type: After deceleration stop

F zrtn Zero point return direction: CCW

Zero point return direction: CW


II - 231


Standard setting

3399 (PR)

SP199 VCST Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain at synchronous tapping

Set the speed for starting change of speed loop proportional gain at synchronous tapping.

SP199 SP017

SP194

SP194× (SP198/100) Speed

Proportional gain

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3400 (PR)

SP200 FFC1 Synchronous tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 1)

Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for selection of gear 000 at synchronous tapping. This parameter should be used when an error of relative position to Z-axis servo is large.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3401 (PR)


Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for selection of gear 001 at synchronous tapping.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3402 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3403 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3404 to

3413

SP204 to

SP213


3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronous tapping zero point return speed

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop.

0 to 500 (r/min)

50

3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronous tapping zero point return deceleration rate

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during synchronous tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value.

1 to 10000 (pulse)

1

3416 SP216 TPST Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronous tapping zero point position.

0 to 4095

0


II - 232


Standard setting

3417 SP217 TINP Synchronous tapping in-position width

Set the position error range in which in-position signal is output during synchronize tapping.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3418 (PR)

SP218 TODR Excessive error width at synchronous tapping

Set the excessive error width at synchronous tapping.

1 to 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3419 (PR)

SP219 IQGT Current loop gain magnification 1 at synchronous tapping

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) during synchronous tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3420 (PR)

SP220 IDGT Current loop gain magnification 2 at synchronous tapping

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) during synchronous tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3421 to

3424

SP221 to

SP224


3425

SP225 OXKPH

3426

SP226 OXKPL

3427

SP227 OXVKP

3428

SP228 OXVKI

3429

SP229 OXSFT

3430

SP230

3431

SP231

3432

SP232



0 0

3433 (PR)

SP233 JL Disturbance observer general inertia scale

Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load inertia and motor inertia. Setting value = Motor inertia + load inertia

Motor inertia × 100

(Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.)

0 to 5000 (%)

0


II - 233


Standard setting

3434 (PR)

SP234 OBS1 Disturbance observer low path filter frequency

Set the frequency of the low path filter for when the disturbance observer is valid. Setting (1/s) = 2πf

f: Approx. 1.5 times the disturbance frequency

0 to 1000 (1/s)

0

3435 (PR)

SP235 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain

Set the gain for the disturbance observer.

0 to 500 (%)

0

3436 to

3452

SP236 to

SP252


3453 SP253

DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data number

Set the output data number for channel 1 of the D/A output function. When the setting value is "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS".

-32768 to 32767

0

3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number

Set the output data number for channel 2 of the D/A output function. When the setting value is "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ".

-32768 to 32767

0

3455 SP255 DA1MPY DA output channel 1 magnification

Set the data magnification for channel 1 of the D/A output function. The output magnification is (setting value)/256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ".

-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0


Set the data magnification for channel 2 of the D/A output function. The output magnification is (setting value)/256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ".

-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0


II - 234


Standard setting

3457 (PR)

to 3520 (PR)

SP257

to SP320

RPM BSD

Motor constant (H coil)

This parameter is valid only in the following two conditional cases: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1

and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor.

(b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor.

(Note) It is not allowed for the user to

change the setting.


0000

3521 (PR)

to 3584 (PR)

SP321

to SP384

RPML BSDL

Motor constant (L coil)

This parameter is valid only in the following conditional case: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1

and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor.


change the setting.


0000

8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH

II - 235

8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH

The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles.

MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual............................................................................................................................BNP-B3759 MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ..........BNP-C3000

For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi.

! CAUTION




Standard setting

3201 SP001 PGM Magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3202 SP002 PGE Encoder orientation position loop gain


0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3203 SP003 PGC0 C-axis non-cutting position loop gain

Set the position loop gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. During non-cutting (rapid traverse, etc.) with the C axis control, this position loop gain setting is valid.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15



1 to 2880 (1/16 °)

16

3205 (PR)



0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3206 SP006 CSP Orientation mode deceleration rate

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

1 to 1000 20


II - 236


Standard setting

3207 SP007 OPST In-position shift amount for orientation

Set the stop position for orientation. (i)Motor built-in encoder, encoder:

Set the value by dividing 360° by 4096. (ii)Magnetic sensor:

Divide -5° to +5° by 1024 and put 0° for 0.

(i) 0 to 4095

(ii) -512 to 512

0

3208


3209 SP009 PGT Synchro- nized tapping Position loop gain

Set the spindle position loop gain in synchronized tapping mode.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3210 SP010 PGS Spindle synchronous position loop gain


1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3211 to

3216

SP011 to

SP016


3217 (PR)



1 to 32767 (r/min)

6000

3218 (PR)



1 to 1000 (r/min)

50

3219 (PR)



1 to 32767 (10ms)

30

3220 (PR)



0 to 32767 (r/min)

600

3221 SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1

Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001.

0 to 120 (%)

10

3222 (PR)

SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control


0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3223 (PR)



0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60


II - 237


Standard setting

3224

SP024 Use not possible. 0 0

3225 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3226 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3227 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3228 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3229 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3230 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3231 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3232 (PR)



1 to 32767 1


II - 238


Standard setting

3233 (PR)




0000 F E D C B A 9 8

poff hzs ront pycal pychg

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pyst pyoff sftk dflt 1a2m



0 1a2m 1 amplifier 2 motor function: Invalid

1 amplifier 2 motor function: Valid

1 dflt Default motor: Main Default motor: Sub 2 sftk SF-TK card invalid SF-TK card valid 3 4 5 6 pyoff7 pyst8 pychg

This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

9 pycal (Conventional

specifications) High-speed rate deceleration method valid for minimum excitation rate

A

B This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

C ront Normal ready ON High-speed ready ON

D This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

E hzs Gate OFF by high-cycle zero speed invalid

Gate OFF by high-cycle zero speed valid

F poff Contactor hold at NC power OFF invalid

Contactor hold at NC power OFF valid

(Note) When SPH is used, bit 0 and bit 1 will be invalid.


II - 239


Standard setting

3234 (PR)




000C

3235 (PR)




0000

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mkc2 mkch invm mts1





1 invm A general-purpose motor FV control invalid

A general-purpose motor FV control valid

2 mkch Coil switch function invalid Coil switch function valid

3 mkc2 Coil switch specification 2 invalid

Coil switch specification 2 valid (Note1) (Note2)

4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

(Note1) To validate bit3(mkc2), NC side needs to prepare. (Note2) Always turn the bit2 at the same time to use bit3.

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lbsd hbsd lwid hwid


0 hwid H-coil wide-range constant output invalid

H-coil wide-range constant output valid

1 lwid L-coil wide-range constant output invalid

L-coil wide-range constant output valid

2 hbsd H-coil base slide invalid H-coil base slide valid 3 lbsd L-coil base slide invalid L-coil base slide valid 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

(Used with SPJ.)


II - 240


Standard setting

3236 (PR)




0000

3237 (PR)




0000

F E D C B A 9 8 dslm dssm

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1


bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 10 plg1 PLG of motor 1 valid PLG of motor 1 invalid 1 plg2 PLG of motor 2 valid PLG of motor 2 invalid 2 mag1 MAG of motor 1 valid MAG of motor 1 invalid3 mag2 MAG of motor 2 valid MAG of motor 2 invalid4 enc1 ENC of motor 1 valid ENC of motor 1 invalid5 enc2 ENC of motor 2 valid ENC of motor 2 invalid6 7

8 dssm Speedometer output valid

Speedometer output invalid

9 dslm Load meter output valid Load meter output invalid

A B C D E F

F E D C B A 9 8 splg dplg noplg nsno nosg

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 plgo mago enco





1 mago Magnetic sensor orientation invalid

Magnetic sensor orientation valid

2 plgo PLG orientation invalid PLG orientation valid 3 4 5 6 7

8 nosg No-signal detection type


9 nsno No-signal detection valid

No-signal detection invalid

A noplgConstant monitor of PLG-Z phase no-signal invalid

Constant monitor of PLG-Z phase no-signal valid

B C D E dplgF splg


(Note) For bit0 to 2, do not set two bits or more to "1" at the same time.


II - 241


Standard setting

3238 (PR)




0000

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. For

MDS-C1-SP/SPH

For MDS-B-SP/SPH




1

2 pftm Encoder feedback serial communication invalid

Encoder feedback serial communication valid

3 plg2 Semi-closed pulse output signal ×2 invalid

Semi-closed pulse output signal ×2 valid

4

5 adin Interpolation during thread cutting invalid

Interpolation during thread cutting valid

6 orm Orientation start memo invalid

Orientation start memo valid

7 vfbs This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

8 sdt2 (Follows SFNC6-bitC setting)

Set output 2 to 2nd speed detection output

9 pl80 MHE90K detector's 180 wave PLG

180 wave PLG other than MHE90K

A lmnp This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

B dcsn Dual cushion during

acceleration/ deceleration valid

Dual cushion during acceleration/ deceleration invalid

C XFzs Set output 2 to MP scale low (L) speed mode

Set output 2 to zero speed output

D iqsvE lmx

This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated






1





4 tdn5 adin

Fixed control bit



7 vfbs8 sdt29 pl80A lmnpB dcsnC XFzsD iqsvE lmx

Fixed control bit



F E D C B A 9 8 oplp lmx iqsv XFzs dcsn lmnp pl80 sdt2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

vfbs orm adin tdn plg2 pftm alty


II - 242


Standard setting

3239 (PR)


Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0"

Parameter setting Amplifier type 0000 0001 SP-075 0002 SP-15 0003 SP-22 0004 SP-37 0005 SP-55 0006 SP-75 0007 SP-110 0008 SP-150 0009 SP-185 000A SP-220 000B SP-260 000C SP-300 000D SP (H)-370 000E SP (H)-450 000F SP-04 0010 SP-550


0000


II - 243


Standard setting

3240 (PR)

SP040 MTYP Motor type This parameter is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit0 is set to "0". Set the appropriate motor number from the standard motors listed below.


0000

Parameter setting Motor type Maximum

speed Corre-spo

nding amplifier

0000 0001 SJ-2.2A 10000 r/min SP-22 0002 SJ-3.7A 10000 r/min SP-37 0003 SJ-5.5A 8000 r/min SP-55 0004 SJ-7.5A 8000 r/min SP-75 0005 SJ-11A 6000 r/min SP-110 0006 SJ-15A 6000 r/min SP-150 0007 SJ-18.5A 6000 r/min SP-185 0008 SJ-22A 4500 r/min SP-220 0009 SJ-26A 4500 r/min SP-260 000A SJ-30A 4500 r/min SP-300 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 SJ-N0.75A 10000 r/min SP-075 0012 SJ-N1.5A 10000 r/min SP-15 0013 SJ-N2.2A 10000 r/min SP-22 0014 SJ-N3.7A 10000 r/min SP-37 0015 SJ-N5.5A 8000 r/min SP-55 0016 SJ-N7.5A 8000 r/min SP-75 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B SJ-J2.2A 10000 r/min SP-22 001C SJ-J3.7A 10000 r/min SP-37 001D SJ-J5.5A 8000 r/min SP-55 001E SJ-J7.5A 8000 r/min SP-75 001F


II - 244


Standard setting

3241 (PR)


Power supply type


0000

3242 (PR)

SP042 CRNG C-axis detector range

This parameter is used to set the C-axis detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. "2" is used by Mitsubishi for testing.

0 to 7 0


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ptyp bit Explanation

0 1 2



4 x0Not

used CV-300

5 x1 CV-110 CR-106 x2 CV-220 CR-157

ptyp



9 Set-ting



A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration)B

rtyp

1 GZG200W260HMJ 26Ω 80W 2 GZG300W130HMJ×2 26Ω 150W 3 MR-RB30 13Ω 300W 4 MR-RB50 13Ω 500W 5 GZG200W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 350W 6 GZG300W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 500W 7 R-UNIT-1 30Ω 700W 8 R-UNIT-2 15Ω 700W 9 R-UNIT-3 15Ω 2100W A to D No setting E Large capacity + ready ON high-speed sequence F Ready ON high-speed sequence

C D E F

amp

Always set to "0".


II - 245


Standard setting

3243 (PR)

SP043 TRNG Synchro- nous tapping, spindle synchronous detector range

This parameter is used to set the synchronous tapping or spindle synchronous detector range. Set "0" for this parameter.

0 to 7 0

3244 (PR)

SP044 TRANS NC communication frequency


0 to 32767 Standard: 0 Special: 1028

3245 SP045 CSNT Dual cushion timer

Set the cycle to add the increment values in the dual cushion process. When this setting value is increased, the dual cushion will increase, and the changes in the speed during acceleration/deceleration will become gradual.

0 to 1000 (ms)

0

3246 (PR)



0 to 1000 0

3247 (PR)



0 to 1000 (r/min)

30

3247 (PR)



0 to 1000 (r/min)

30

3248 (PR)



0 to 100 (%)

15


Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 010.

1 to 120 (%)

20



1 to 120 (%)

30



1 to 120 (%)

40



1 to 120 (%)

50



1 to 120 (%)

60



1 to 120 (%)

70


II - 246


Standard setting

3255 (PR)



0 to 60 (s) 12

3256 SP056 PYVR Variable excitation (min value)

Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate. Select a smaller value when gear noise is too high. However, a larger value is effective for impact response.

0 to 100 (%)

50

3257 (PR)

SP057 STOD Constant → excessive judgment value

Set the value for judging when changing from a constant to excessive speed command.

0 to 50 (r/min)

0

3258 (PR)

SP058 SDT2 Fixed control constant


0 0

3259 (PR)

SP059 MKT Winding changeover base shut-off timer

Set the base shut-off time for contactor switching at winding changeover. Note that the contactor may be damaged with burning if the value of this parameter is too small.

50 to 10000 (ms)

150

3260 (PR)

SP060 MKT2 Current limit timer after winding changeover

Set the current limit time to be taken after completion of contactor switching at winding changeover.

0 to 10000 (ms)

500

3261 (PR)

SP061 MKIL Current limit value after winding changeover

Set the current limit value during a period defined in SP060 (MKT2) after completion of contactor switching at winding changeover.

0 to 120 (%)

75

3262



II - 247


Standard setting

3263 (PR)



0 to 1000 (s)

60

3264 (PR)



0 to 120 (%)

110

3265 (PR)

SP065 VCGN1 Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain


0 to 100 (%)

100

3266 (PR)

SP066 VCSN1 Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed when the speed loop proportional gain change starts.

SP066 SP017

SP022

SP022× (SP065/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3267 (PR)


Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3268 (PR)


Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3269 (PR)



SP067 SP017SP068

Speed

1-fold

SP069×(1/16)-fold

0 to 32767 (1/16-fold)

0

SP017 (TSP)Maximum

motor speed

SP067 (VIGWA)

SP068 (VIGWB)

SP069 (VIGN)

0 to 6000 0 0 0 6001 to 8000 5000 8000 45 8001 or more 5000 10000 64


II - 248


Standard setting

3270 SP070 FHz Machine resonance suppression filter frequency

When machine vibration occurs in speed and position control, set the frequency of the required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used.

0 to 3000 (Hz)

0

3271 (PR)

SP071 VR2WA

3272 (PR)

SP072 VR2WB

3273 (PR)

SP073 VR2GN

3274 (PR)

SP074 IGDEC



0 0

3275 SP075 R2KWS

3276 SP076 FONS Machine resonance suppression filter operation speed

When the vibration increases in motor stop (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3277 (PR)

SP077 TDSL Fixed control constant


14

3278 (PR)

SP078 FPWM

3279 (PR)

SP079 ILMT



0 0

F E D C B A 9 8 r2ini

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r2am r2lm r2dn no51 r2ch

bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 r2ch1 no512 r2dm3 r2lm4 r2am


5 6 7 8 r2ini This is used by Mitsubishi.

Set to "0" unless particularly designated 9 A B C D E F


II - 249


Standard setting

3280


3281

SP081 LMCA

3282

SP082 LMCB

3283

SP083



0 0

3284 to

3286

SP084 to

SP086


3287 (PR)

SP087 DIQM Target value of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration


0 to 150 (%)

75

3288 (PR)

SP088 DIQN Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration

Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration starts to change.

SP088 SP017

100%

SP087

Torque limitInversely proportionalto speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3000

3289


3290


3291 SP091 OFSN Motor PLG forward rotation offset compensation

Set the PLG offset value for the forward rotation. Normally set to "0".

-2048 to 2047 (-1mv)

0

3292 SP092 OFSI Motor PLG reverse rotation offset compensation

Set the PLG offset value for the reverse rotation. Normally set to "0".

-2048 to 2047 (-1mv)

0

3293 (PR)

SP093 ORE Tolerable pulse check error

Set this when detecting the pulse detector's pulse mistakes. (Valid only for full close control.)

0 to 32767

0

3294 (PR)

SP094 LMAV Load meter output filter

Set the filter time constant of load meter output. When "0" is set, a filter time constant is set to 100ms.

0 to 32767 (2ms)

0

3295 (PR)



0 0


II - 250


Standard setting

3296 (PR)



Setting value

Gear ratio (acceleration)

–1 1 : 2 –2 1 : 4 –3 1 : 3

Setting value


0 1 : 1 1 1 : 1/2 2 1 : 1/4 3 1 : 1/8 4 1 : 1/16

-3 to 4 0

3297 (PR)

SP097 SPECO Orientation specification



0000 F E D C B A 9 8

ostp orze ksft gchg ips2 zdir

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 vg8x mdir fdir osc1 pyfx dmin odi2 odi1



1



2 dmin Orientation in-position advance invalid

Orientation in-position advance valid

3 pyfx Excitation min. (50%)

during orientation servo lock invalid

Excitation min. (50%) during orientation servo lock valid

4 osc1 Indexing speed clamp invalid

Indexing speed clamp valid



6 mdir Magnetic sensor polarity: +

Magnetic sensor polarity: -

7 vg8x Speed gain *1/8 during torque limit valid

Speed gain *1/8 during torque limit invalid

8

9 zdir This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

A ips2 2nd in-position invalid 2nd in-position valid B

C gchg Gain changeover during orientation invalid

Gain changeover during orientation valid

D ksft Orientation virtual target shift invalid

Orientation virtual target shift valid

E orzeF ostp


In-position advance (bit 2) 0 (invalid) 1 (valid)

0 (Invalid)

In-position signal in OINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal=0 Control output 4/ bit F=0

Sec

ond

in-p

ositi

on

1 (Valid)


In-position signal in DINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal in OINP width = 0 Control output 4/ bit F=1


II - 251


Standard setting

3298 (PR)



0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3299 (PR)



0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3300 (PR)


Set a loop gain delay advance gain in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3301 (PR)



1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3302 (PR)



0 to 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088°)

32767

3303 (PR)



0 to 10000 (ms)

200

3304 (PR)


Set the torque limit value for orientation in-position output. If the external torque limit signal is input, the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid.

0 to 120 (%)

100

3305 (PR)



1 to 1000 (%)

100

3306 (PR)

SP106 IDG0 Current loop gain magnification 2 in orientation mode


1 to 1000 (%)

100



0 to 1000 0


II - 252


Standard setting



0 to 1000 0



0 to 1000 0

3310 to

3313

SP110 to

SP113

Use not possible. 0


An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse miss value at the orientation stop exceeds this setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 × SP004 (orientation in-position width)

0 to 32767 (360°/4096)

0

3315 SP115 OSP2 Orientation motor speed clamp value 2

When the orientation clamp speed is changed by the control input, this parameter setting will be used instead of SP005: OSP. Indexing speed clamp valid This parameter is used when (SP097: SPEC0-bit4 = 1).

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3316 SP116 OPYVR Minimum excitation value after changeover (2nd minimum excitation rate)

Minimum excitation rate when position control input or external input is selected.

0 to 100 (%) 0

3317 SP117 ORUT This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

0 0



0 to 100 (time)

0

3319 SP119 MPGH Orientation position gain H winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation position loop gain for the H winding. H winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) × SP119/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0


II - 253


Standard setting

3320 SP120 MPGL Orientation position gain L winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation position loop gain for the L winding. L winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) × SP120/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3321 SP121 MPCSH

Orientation deceleration rate H winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the H winding. Orientation deceleration rate for the H winding = SP006 × SP121/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3322 SP122 MPCSL Orientation deceleration rate L winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the L winding. Orientation deceleration rate for the L winding = SP006 × SP122/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3323 SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor output peak value

This parameter is used for adjustment of orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the output peak value of the magnetic sensor. If a gap between the sensor and the magnetizing element is small, increase the value of this parameter. If it is large, decrease the value of this parameter.

1 to 10000 Standard magnetizing element: 542 Small magnetizing element: 500

3324 SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor linear zone width

This parameter is used for adjustment of orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the linear zone width of the magnetic sensor. If the radius of the mounted magnetizing element is large, decrease the value of this parameter. If it is small, increase the value of this parameter.

1 to 10000 Standard magnetizing element: 768 Small magnetizing element: 440


II - 254


Standard setting

3325 SP125 MGD2 Magnetic sensor switching point

This parameter is used for adjustment of orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the distance dimension from the target stop point at switching from position feedback to magnetic sensor output. Normally, set a value that is approx. 1/2 of the value defined in SP124.

1 to 10000

Standard magnetizing element: 384 Small magnetizing element: 220

3326 to

3328

SP126 to

SP128


3329 (PR)

SP129 SPECC C-axis specifications

Set the C-axis specifications in bit units.

0000

3330 SP130 PGC1 First position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the first gain is selected for C axis cutting.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3331 SP131 PGC2 Second position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the second gain is selected for C axis cutting.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp fb9x zrtd zrn2 zdir ztyp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

vg8x fdir phos rtrn adin fclx


0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop (Gear 1 : 1 only)

1 adin Interpolation A/D compensation invalid

Interpolation A/D compensation valid

2 rtrn Position monitor during ready OFF invalid

Position monitor during ready OFF valid

3 phos Normal (no compensation)

Vx4 synchronization compensation valid

4

5 fdir Position detector polarity (+) Position detector polarity (-)

6

7 vg8x Speed gain × 1/8 during torque limit valid

Speed gain × 1/8 during torque limit invalid

8 ztyp Z-phase type: Normal start up Z-phase type: Start up only

9 zdir Z-phase rising polarity (+) Z-phase rising polarity (-)

A B zrn2C zrtd


D fb9x Speed feedback Standard (PLG)

Speed feedback 90,000 pulse detector







II - 255


Standard setting

3332 SP132 PGC3 Third position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3333 SP133 PGC4 Stop position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain for stopping when carrying out C-axis cutting.

1 to 100 (1/s)

15

3334 (PR)

SP134 VGCP0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain proportional item

Set the speed loop proportional gain in C-axis non-cutting mode.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3335 (PR)

SP135 VGCI0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain integral item

Set the speed loop integral gain in C-axis non-cutting mode.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3336 (PR)

SP136 VGCD0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain delay advance item

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3337 (PR)

SP137 VGCP1 First speed loop gain proportional item for C-axis cutting

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3338 (PR)

SP138 VGCI1 First speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3339 (PR)

SP139 VGCD1 First speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the first gain is selected for curing on the C-axis. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3340 (PR)

SP140 VGCP2 Second speed loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63


II - 256


Standard setting

3341 (PR)

SP141 VGCI2 Second speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3342 (PR)

SP142 VGCD2 Second speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3343 (PR)

SP143 VGCP3 Third speed loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3344 (PR)

SP144 VGCI3 Third speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3345 (PR)

SP145 VGCD3 Third speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3346 (PR)

SP146 VGCP4 Speed loop gain proportional item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when C-axis cutting is stopped.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3347 (PR)

SP147 VGCI4 Speed loop gain integral item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when C-axis cutting is stopped.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3348 (PR)

SP148 VGCD4 Speed loop gain delay advance item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when C-axis cutting is stopped. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15


II - 257


Standard setting

3349 SP149 CZRN C-axis zero point return speed

This parameter is valid when SP129 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop.

1 to 500 (r/min)

50

3350 SP150 CPDT C-axis zero point return deceleration point

This parameter is valid when SP129 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during C-axis zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point, set the smaller value.

1 to 10000 1

3351 SP151 CPSTL C-axis zero point return shift amount (low byte)

3352 SP152 CPSTH C-axis zero point return shift amount (high byte)

This parameter is valid when SPECC (SP129) bitE is set to "0". Set the C-axis zero point position.

HEX setting 00000000 to FFFFFFFF (1/1000°)

H: 0000 L: 0000

3354 (PR)

SP154 CODRL Excessive error width on C-axis (low byte)

Set the excessive error width on the C-axis.


H: 0001 L: D4C0

3355 (PR)

SP155 CODRH Excessive error width on C-axis (high byte)

3356 SP156 OVSH C-axis overshoot compensation

Set this to prevent overshooting when shifting from movement to stopping with C-axis control. (Set this referring to the load meter display when overshooting occurred.)

0 to 1000 (0.1%)

0

3357 to

3358

SP157 to

SP158


3359 SP159 CPY0 C-axis non-cutting variable excitation ratio

Set the minimum value of variable excitation ratio for non-cutting on the C-axis .

0 to 100 (%)

50

3360 SP160 CPY1 C-axis cutting variable excitation ratio

Set the minimum variable excitation ratio for cutting on the C-axis.

0 to 100 (%)

100


II - 258


Standard setting

3361 (PR)

SP161 IQGC0 Current loop gain magnification 1 for non-cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) for C-axis non-cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3362 (PR)

SP162 IDGC0 Current loop gain magnification 2 for non-cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) for C-axis non-cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3363 (PR)

SP163 IQGC1 Current loop gain magnification 1 for cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) for C-axis cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3364 (PR)

SP164 IDGC1 Current loop gain magnification 2 for cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) for C-axis cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3365 SP165 PG2C C-axis position loop gain 2

Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out for control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out for control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3367 (PR)

SP167

PGU Position loop gain for increased spindle holding force

Set the position loop gain for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 100 (1/s)

15

3368 (PR)

SP168

VGUP Speed loop gain proportional item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain proportional item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3369 (PR)

SP169

VGUI Speed loop gain integral item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain integral item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60


II - 259


Standard setting

3370 (PR)

SP170

VGUD Speed loop gain delay advance item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain delay advance item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3371 to

3376

SP171 to

SP176


3377 (PR)




0000

3378 (PR)


Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3379 (PR)


Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop






4

5 fdir Position detector direc-tion (positive direction)

Position detector direction (negative direction)

6 7 8 9 A B C




E F (Used with SPJ)

F E D C B A 9 8 Odx8 phos

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir pyfx rtrn adin fclx


II - 260


Standard setting

3380 (PR)


Set the speed loop delay advance gain in spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3381 (PR)

SP181 VCGS Spindle synchronous Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 100 (%)

100

3382 (PR)

SP182 VCSS Spindle synchronous Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed when the speed loop proportional gain change starts in the spindle synchronous mode.

SP182 SP017

SP178

SP178× (SP181/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3383 SP183 SYNV Spindle synchronousSync matching speed

For changeover from the speed loop to the position loop in the spindle synchronous mode, set a speed command error range for output of the synchronous speed matching signal.

0 to 1000 (r/min)

20

3384 (PR)

SP184 FFCS Spindle synchronous Acceleration rate feed forward gain

Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain in the spindle synchronous mode. This parameter is used only with the SPJ2.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3385 SP185 SINP Spindle synchronous In-position width

Set the position error range for output of the in-position signal in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3386 (PR)

SP186 SODR Spindle synchronous Excessive error width

Set the excessive error width in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 32767 ( pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3387 (PR)

SP187 IQGS Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnifi- cation1

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 1000 (%)

100


II - 261


Standard setting

3388 (PR)

SP188 IDGS Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification 2

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3389 SP189 PG2S Spindle synchronous Position loop gain 2

Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out in the spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out in the spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3391


3392

SP192 Not used. Set to "0".

3393 (PR)

SP193 SPECT Synchronized tapping specifications

Set the synchronized tapping specifications in bit units.


0000

F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp od8x phos

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir cdir pyfx adin fclx








4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (-)



6 7

8 phos Normal

(no compensation) Synchronized tapping position compensation valid

9 A B C

D od8x Magnification of









II - 262


Standard setting

3394 (PR)

SP194 VGTP Synchronized tapping speed loop gain proportional term

Set the speed loop proportional gain in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3395 (PR)

SP195 VGTI Synchronized tapping speed loop gain integral term

Set the speed loop integral gain in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3396 (PR)

SP196 VGTD Synchronized tapping speed loop gain delay advance term

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in synchronized tapping mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3397 SP197 This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

0 0

3398 (PR)

SP198 VCGT Synchronized tapping target value of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP194 (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to 100 (%)

100

3399 (PR)

SP199 VCST Synchronized tapping change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed where the speed loop proportional gain change starts during synchronized tapping.

SP199 SP017

SP194

SP194× (SP198/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3400 (PR)

SP200 FFC1 Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 1)

Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 000 during synchronized tapping. This parameter should be used when an error of relative position to Z-axis servo is large.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3401 (PR)


Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 001 during synchronized tapping.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3402 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0


II - 263


Standard setting

3403 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3404 to

3413

SP204 to

SP213


3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronized tapping zero point return speed


0 to 500 (r/min)

50

3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronized tapping zero point return deceleration rate

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during synchronized tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value.

0 to 10000 (pulse)

1

3416 SP216 TPST Synchronized tapping zero point return shift amount

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronized tapping zero point position.

0 to 4095 0

3417 SP217 TINP Synchronized tapping in-position width

Set the position error range for output of the in-position during synchronized tapping.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3418 (PR)

SP218 TODR Synchronized tapping excessive error width

Set the excessive error width during synchronized tapping.

1 to 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3419 (PR)

SP219 IQGT Synchronized tapping current loop gain magnification 1

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) during synchronized tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3420 (PR)

SP220 IDGT Synchronized tapping current loop gain magnification 2

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) during synchronized tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100


II - 264


Standard setting

3421 SP221 PG2T Synchronized tapping position loop gain 2

Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3423 SP223 SPDV Speed monitor speed

Set the spindle limit speed in the door open state. (Invalid when 0 is set.) If the spindle end speed exceeds this setting value when the door is open, the speed monitor error (5E) will occur.

0 to 800 (r/min)

0

3424 SP224 SPDF Speed monitor time

Set the time (continuous) to detect alarms. (Detected instantly when 0 is set.)

0 to 2813 (3.5ms)

0

3425 SP225 OXKPH Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (H coil)

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3426 SP226 OXKPL Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (L coil)

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3427 SP227 OXVKP Speed loop proportional gain magnification after orientation gain changeover

If gain changeover is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the magnification of each gain changed to after in-position.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3428 SP228 OXVKI Speed loop cumulative gain magnification after orientation gain changeover


0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3429 SP229 OXSFT Orientation virtual target shift amount

Set the amount to shift the target position when orientation virtual target position is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitD=1).

0 to 2048 (360°/4096)

0

3430 to

3432

SP230 to

SP232

Use not possible.


II - 265


Standard setting

3433 (PR)


Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load inertia and motor inertia.

= ×100 Motor inertia + load inertia

Motor inertia

Setting value

(Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.)

0 to 5000 (%)

0

3434 (PR)




0 to 1000 (1/s)

0

3435 (PR)



0 to 500 (%) 0

3436 SP236 OBS3 This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

0 0

3437


3438 to

3441

SP238 to

SP241


3442

SP242 Vavx 0 0

3443

SP243 UTTM 0 0

3444

SP244 OPLP 0 0

3445

SP245 PGHS 0 0

3446

SP246 TEST


0 0

3447 to

3448

SP247 to

SP248


3449 SP249 SM0 Speed meter speed

Set the motor rotation speed when the speed meter 10V is output. When set to "0", this parameter becomes the same as SP017 (TSP).

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3450 SP250 LM0 Load meter voltage

Set the voltage when the load meter 120% is output. When set to "0", this becomes 10V.

0 to 10 (V)

0

3451 to

3452

SP251 to

SP252



II - 266


Standard setting

3453 SP253


Set the output data number for channel 1 of the D/A output function.When set to "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions".

-32768 to 32767

0


Set the output data number for channel 2 of the D/A output function.When set to "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions".

-32768 to 32767

0


Set the data magnification for channel 1 of the D/A output function. The output magnification is the setting value divided by 256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions".

-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0



-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0


II - 267


Standard setting

3457 (PR)

to 3520 (PR)

SP257

to SP320

RPM BSD


This parameter is valid only in the following two conditional cases: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2)

bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor.

(b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor.

(Note) It is not allowed for the user

to change the setting.


0000

3521 (PR)

to 3584 (PR)

SP321

to SP384

RPML BSDL


This parameter is valid only in the following conditional case: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2)

bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor.

(Note) It is not allowed for the user

to change the setting.


0000

8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM

II - 268

8.4 MDS-C1-SPM

The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles.

MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ........... BNP-C3000 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi.

! CAUTION




Standard setting

3201 SP001 PGM Magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain


0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3202 SP002 PGE Encoder orientation position loop gain


0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s)

100

3203 SP003 PGC0 C-axis non-cutting position loop gain

Set the position loop gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. During non-cutting (rapid traverse, etc.) with the C axis control, this position loop gain setting is valid.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15



1 to 2880 (1/16 °)

16

3205 (PR)



0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3206 SP006 CSP Orientation mode deceleration rate

As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to overshoot.

1 to 1000 20

3207 SP007 OPST In-position shift amount for orientation

Set the stop position for orientation. (i) Motor built-in encoder, encoder: Set the value by dividing 360° by 4096. (ii) Magnetic sensor: Divide -5° to +5° by 1024 and put 0° for 0.

(i) 0 to 4095

(ii) -512 to 512

0

3208



II - 269


Standard setting

3209 SP009 PGT Synchronized tapping Position loop gain

Set the spindle position loop gain in synchronized tapping mode.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15

3210 SP010 PGS Spindle synchronous position loop gain


1 to 200 (1/s)

15

3211 to

3216

SP011 to

SP016


3217 (PR)



1 to 32767 (r/min)

6000

3218 (PR)



1 to 1000 (r/min)

50

3219 (PR)



1 to 32767 (10ms)

30

3220 (PR)



0 to 32767 (r/min)

600


Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001.

0 to 120 (%)

10

3222 (PR)

SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control


0 to 1000 (1/s)

63

3223 (PR)



0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3224


3225 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3226 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3227 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3228 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3229 (PR)



1 to 32767 1


II - 270


Standard setting

3230 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3231 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3232 (PR)



1 to 32767 1

3233 (PR)




0000 F E D C B A 9 8

poff ront pycal pychg

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pyst pyoff

(Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

B This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

C ront Normal ready ON High-speed ready ON

D This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated.

E

F poff Contactor hold at NC power OFF invalid

Contactor hold at NC power OFF valid


II - 271


Standard setting

3234 (PR)




000C F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mkc2 mkch Mk3c mts1





1 Mk3c 3-step coil changeover function invalid

3-step coil changeover function valid

2 mkch Coil switch function invalid Coil switch function valid

3 mkc2 Coil switch specification 2 invalid

Coil switch specification 2 valid (Note1) (Note2)

4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

(Note1) To validate bit3(mkc2), NC side needs to prepare. (Note2) Always turn the bit2 at the same time to use bit3.


II - 272


Standard setting

3235 (PR)




0000 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mwid lwid hwid



0 hwid H coil output character-istics change invalid

H coil output character-istics change valid

1 lwid L coil output character-istics change invalid

L coil output character-istics change valid

2 mwid M coil output character-istics change invalid

M coil output character-istics change valid

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

(Used with SPJ.)


II - 273


Standard setting

3236


3237 (PR)




0000 F E D C B A 9 8 nsno nosg

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 plgo enco




1 2 plgo PLG orientation invalid PLG orientation valid 3 4 5 6 7

8 nosg No-signal detection type


9 nsno No-signal detection valid

No-signal detection invalid

A B C D E F

(Note) For bit0 to 2, do not set two bits or more to "1" at the same time.


II - 274


Standard setting

3238 (PR)




0000 F E D C B A 9 8 XFzs pl80 sdt2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

hzrn orm tdn plg2 pftm alty




1





4 tdn Fixed control bit 5



7 hzrn8 sdt29 pl80

Fixed control bit

A B C XFzs Fixed control bit D E F


II - 275


Standard setting

3239 (PR)


Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0"

Parameter setting Amplifier type 0000 –– 0001 –– 0002 –– 0003 –– 0004 –– 0005 –– 0006 –– 0007 SPM-110 0008 SPM-150 0009 SPM-185 000A SPM-220 000B SPM-260 000C SPM-300 000D (SPM-370) 000E (SPM-450) 000F –– 0010 ––

(Note) (SPM-370) and (SPM-450) are

used with MDS-B-SPM.


0000

3240 (PR)

SP040 MTYP Motor type


0000

F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 motr

bit Name Details 0 1 2 3 4

motr Set the motor type. Set "0" when using a special motor.

5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F


II - 276


Standard setting

3241 (PR)


Power supply type


0000

3242 (PR)

SP042 CRNG C-axis detector range

This parameter is used to set the C-axis detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. "2" is used by Mitsubishi for testing.

0 to 7 0


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ptyp

bit Explanation 0 1 2



4 x0Not

used CV-300

5 x1 CV-110 CR-106 x2 CV-220 CR-157

ptyp



9 Set-ting



A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration)B

rtyp

1 GZG200W260HMJ 26Ω 80W 2 GZG300W130HMJ×2 26Ω 150W 3 MR-RB30 13Ω 300W 4 MR-RB50 13Ω 500W 5 GZG200W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 350W 6 GZG300W200HMJ×3 6.7Ω 500W 7 R-UNIT-1 30Ω 700W 8 R-UNIT-2 15Ω 700W 9 R-UNIT-3 15Ω 2100W A to D No setting E Large capacity + ready ON high-speed sequence F Ready ON high-speed sequence

C D E F

amp

Always set to "0".


II - 277


Standard setting

3243 (PR)

SP043 TRNG Synchronous tapping, spindle synchronous detector range

This parameter is used to set the synchronous tapping or spindle synchronous detector range. Set "0" for this parameter.

0 to 7 0

3244 (PR)

SP044 TRANS

NC communication frequency


0 to 32767

Standard: 0 Special: 1028

3245 SP045 CSNT Dual cushion timer

Set the cycle to add the increment values in the dual cushion process. When this setting value is increased, the dual cushion will increase, and the changes in the speed during acceleration/deceleration will become gradual.

0 to 1000 (ms)

0

3246 (PR)



0 to 1000 0

3247 (PR)



0 to 1000 (r/min)

30

3248 (PR)



0 to 100 (%)

15


1 to 120 (%)

20


1 to 120 (%)

30


1 to 120 (%)

40


1 to 120 (%)

50


1 to 120 (%)

60


1 to 120 (%)

70

3255 (PR)



0 to 60 (s)

12


II - 278


Standard setting

3256


3257 (PR)

SP057 STOD Constant → excessive judgment value

Set the value for judging when changing from a constant to excessive speed command.

0 to 50 (r/min)

0

3258 (PR)

SP058 SDT2 2nd speed detection speed

Set the speed for turning the 2nd speed detection ON. (This is valid only when SP038: SFNC6-bit8 is set to "1".) If the speed drops below this set speed, the 2nd speed detection will turn ON. When the speed reaches this set speed +15r/min or more, the 2nd speed detection will turn OFF. If SP034: SFNC2-bit1 is set to "1", this will be the medium-speed and high-speed coil changeover speed. The speed detection reset width follows the SP047 (speed detection reset width) setting.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3259 (PR)

SP059 MKT Winding changeover base shut-off timer

Set the base shut-off time for contactor switching at winding changeover. Note that the contactor may be damaged with burning if the value of this parameter is too small.

50 to 10000 (ms)

150

3260 (PR)

SP060 MKT2 Current limit timer after winding changeover

Set the current limit time to be taken after completion of contactor switching at winding changeover.

0 to 10000 (ms)

500

3261 (PR)

SP061 MKIL Current limit value after winding changeover

Set the current limit value during a period defined in SP060 (MKT2) after completion of contactor switching at winding changeover.

0 to 120 (%)

75

3262


3263 (PR)



0 to 1000 (s)

60

3264 (PR)



0 to 180 (%)

110

3265 (PR)

SP065 VCGN1 Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain


0 to 100 (%)

100


II - 279


Standard setting

3266 (PR)

SP066 VCSN1 Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed when the speed loop proportional gain change starts.

SP066 SP017

SP022

SP022× (SP065/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3267 (PR)


Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3268 (PR)


Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3269 (PR)



SP067 SP017SP068

Speed

Gain

SP069×(1/16)-fold

1-fold

0 to 32767 (1/16-fold)

0

3270 SP070 FHz Machine resonance suppression filter frequency

When machine vibration occurs in speed and position control, set the frequency of the required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used.

0 to 3000 (Hz)

0

3271 to

3275

SP071 to

SP075


SP017 (TSP)Maximum

motor speed

SP067 (VIGWA)

SP068 (VIGWB)

SP069 (VIGN)

0 to 6000 0 0 0 6001 to 8000 5000 8000 45 8001 or more 5000 10000 64


II - 280


Standard setting

3276 SP076 FONS Machine resonance suppression filter operation speed

When the vibration increases in motor stop (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds.

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3277 (PR)

SP077 TDSL Fixed control constant


14

3278 (PR)

SP078 FPWM Fixed control constant


1 1

3279


3280 SP080 SWTD Fixed control constant


0 0

3281 to

3286

SP081 to

SP086


3287 (PR)

SP087 DIQM Target value of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration


0 to 150 (%)

75

3288 (PR)

SP088 DIQN Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration

Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration starts to change.

SP088 SP017

100%

SP087

Torque limit

Speed

Inversely proportionalto speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

3000

3289 to

3292

SP089 to

SP092


3293 (PR)

SP093 ORE Tolerable pulse check error

Set this when detecting the pulse detector's pulse mistakes. (Valid only for full close control.)

0 to 32767

0

3294 (PR)

SP094 LMAV Load meter output filter

Set the filter time constant of load meter output. When "0" is set, a filter time constant is set to 100ms.

0 to 32767 (2ms)

0

3295 (PR)



0 0


II - 281


Standard setting

3296 (PR)



Setting value


0 1 : 1 1 1 : 2 2 1 : 4 3 1 : 8 4 1 : 16

(Note) Use a combination so that the

encoder end is slower than the spindle end.

0 to 4 0

3297 (PR)

SP097 SPECO Orientation specification



0000 F E D C B A 9 8

ostp orze ksft gchg ips2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 vg8x fdir osc1 dmin odi2 odi1



1



2 dmin Orientation in-position advance invalid

Orientation in-position advance valid

3

4 osc1 Indexing speed clamp invalid

Indexing speed clamp valid



6

7 vg8x Speed gain *1/8 during torque limit valid

Speed gain *1/8 during torque limit invalid

8 9 A ips2 2nd in-position invalid 2nd in-position valid B

C gchg Gain changeover during orientation invalid

Gain changeover during orientation valid

D ksft Orientation virtual target shift invalid

Orientation virtual target shift valid

E orzeF ostp


In-position advance (bit 2) 0 (invalid) 1 (valid)

0 (Invalid)


Sec

ond

in-p

ositi

on

1 (Valid)


In-position signal in DINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal in OINP width = 0 Control output 4/ bit F=1


II - 282


Standard setting

3298 (PR)



0 to 2000 (1/s)

63

3299 (PR)



0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3300 (PR)


Set a loop gain delay advance gain in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3301 (PR)



1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3302 (PR)



0 to 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088°)

32767

3303 (PR)



0 to 10000 (ms)

200

3304 (PR)


Set the torque limit value for orientation in-position output. If the external torque limit signal is input, the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid.

0 to 120 (%)

100

3305 (PR)



1 to 1000 (%)

100

3306 (PR)

SP106 IDG0 Current loop gain magnification 2 in orientation mode


1 to 1000 (%)

100



0 to 1000 0



0 to 1000 0


II - 283


Standard setting



0 to 1000 0

3310 to

3313

SP110 to

SP003

Use not possible. 0


An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse miss value at the orientation stop exceeds this setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 × SP004 (orientation in-position width)

0 to 32767 (360°/4096)

0

3315 SP115 OSP2 Orientation motor speed clamp value 2

When the orientation clamp speed is changed by the control input, this parameter setting will be used instead of SP005: OSP. Indexing speed clamp valid This parameter is used when (SP097: SPEC0-bit4 = 1).

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3316


3317 SP117 ORUT Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular.

0 0



0 to 100 (time)

0

3319 SP119 MPGH Orientation position gain H winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation position loop gain for the H winding. H winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) × SP119/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3320 SP120 MPGL Orientation position gain L winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation position loop gain for the L winding. L winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) × SP120/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0


II - 284


Standard setting

3321 SP121 MPCSH Orientation deceleration rate H winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the H winding. Orientation deceleration rate for the H winding = SP006 × SP121/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3322 SP122 MPCSL Orientation deceleration rate L winding compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the L winding. Orientation deceleration rate for the L winding = SP006 × SP122/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3323 to

3325

SP123 to

SP125


3326 SP126 MPGH Orientation position gain M coil compensation

Set this to set the orientation position loop gain for the coil changeover motor to the M coil's unique value.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3327 SP127 MPCSM Orientation deceleration rate M coil compensation

Set this to set the orientation deceleration rate for the coil motor to the M coil's unique value.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3328 SP128 OXKPM Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (M coil)

Set the M coil gain magnification to be used after in-position when gain changeover is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation.

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0


II - 285


Standard setting

3329 (PR)

SP129 SPECC C-axis specifications

Set the C-axis specifications in bit units.

0000

3330 SP130 PGC1 First position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the first gain is selected for C axis cutting.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15

F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp fb9x zrtd zrn2 zdir ztyp

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

vg8x fdir phos rtrn fclx




1



3 phos Normal (no compensation)

Vx4 synchronization compensation valid

4



6

7 vg8x Speed gain × 1/8 during torque limit valid

Speed gain × 1/8 during torque limit invalid

8 ztyp Z-phase type: Normal start up

Z-phase type: Start up only

9 zdir Z-phase rising polarity (+)

Z-phase rising polarity (-)

A B zrn2C zrtd


D fb9x Speed feedback Standard (PLG)

Speed feedback 90,000 pulse detector







II - 286


Standard setting

3331 SP131 PGC2 Second position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the second gain is selected for C axis cutting.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15

3332 SP132 PGC3 Third position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15

3333 SP133 PGC4 Stop position loop gain for cutting on C-axis

Set the position loop gain for stopping when carrying out C-axis cutting.

1 to 200 (1/s)

15

3334 (PR)

SP134 VGCP0∗ C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain proportional item

Set the speed loop proportional gain in C-axis non-cutting mode.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3335 (PR)

SP135 VGCI0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain integral item

Set the speed loop integral gain in C-axis non-cutting mode.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3336 (PR)

SP136 VGCD0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain delay advance item

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3337 (PR)

SP137 VGCP1 First speed loop gain proportional item for C-axis cutting

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3338 (PR)

SP138 VGCI1 First speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3339 (PR)

SP139 VGCD1 First speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the first gain is selected for curing on the C-axis. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3340 (PR)

SP140 VGCP2 Second speed loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3341 (PR)

SP141 VGCI2 Second speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3342 (PR)

SP142 VGCD2 Second speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15


II - 287


Standard setting

3343 (PR)

SP143 VGCP3 Third speed loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3344 (PR)

SP144 VGCI3 Third speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3345 (PR)

SP145 VGCD3 Third speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3346 (PR)

SP146 VGCP4 Speed loop gain proportional item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop proportional gain when C-axis cutting is stopped.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3347 (PR)

SP147 VGCI4 Speed loop gain integral item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop integral gain when C-axis cutting is stopped.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3348 (PR)

SP148 VGCD4 Speed loop gain delay advance item for stop of cutting on C-axis

Set the speed loop delay advance gain when C-axis cutting is stopped. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3349 SP149 CZRN C-axis zero point return speed

This parameter is valid when SP129 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop.

1 to 500 (r/min)

50

3350 SP150 CPDT C-axis zero point return deceleration point

This parameter is valid when SP129 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during C-axis zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point, set the smaller value.

1 to 10000 1

3351 SP151 CPSTL C-axis zero point return shift amount (low byte)

3352 SP152 CPSTH C-axis zero point return shift amount (high byte)

This parameter is valid when SPECC (SP129) bitE is set to "0". Set the C-axis zero point position.


H: 0000 L: 0000


II - 288


Standard setting

3353 SP153 CINP C-axis in-position width

Set the position error range in which the in-position signal is output on the C-axis.

0000 to FFFF (1/1000°) HEX setting

03E8

3354 (PR)

SP154 CODRL Excessive error width on C-axis (low byte)

3355 (PR)

SP155 CODRH Excessive error width on C-axis (high byte)

Set the excessive error width on the C-axis.


H: 0001 L: D4C0

3356 SP156 OVSH C-axis overshoot compensation

Set this to prevent overshooting when shifting from movement to stopping with C-axis control. (Set this referring to the load meter display when overshooting occurred.)

0 to 1000 (0.1%)

0

3357

SP157


3358


3359


3360


3361 (PR)

SP161 IQGC0 Current loop gain magnification 1 for non-cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) for C-axis non-cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3362 (PR)

SP162 IDGC0 Current loop gain magnification 2 for non-cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) for C-axis non-cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3363 (PR)

SP163 IQGC1 Current loop gain magnification 1 for cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) for C-axis cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3364 (PR)

SP164 IDGC1 Current loop gain magnification 2 for cutting on C-axis

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) for C-axis cutting.

1 to 1000 (%)

100


Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out for control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control.When this function is not used, assign "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


II - 289


Standard setting


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out for control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3367 (PR)

SP167

PGU Position loop gain for increased spindle holding force

Set the position loop gain for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 100 (1/s)

15

3368 (PR)

SP168

VGUP Speed loop gain proportional item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain proportional item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (1/s)

63

3369 (PR)

SP169

VGUI Speed loop gain integral item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain integral item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3370 (PR)

SP170

VGUD Speed loop gain delay advance item for increased spindle holding force

Set the speed loop gain delay advance item for when the disturbance observer is valid.

0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3371 to

3376

SP171 to

SP176



II - 290


Standard setting

3377 (PR)




0000

3378 (PR)


Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 2000 (1/s)

63

3379 (PR)


Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3380 (PR)


Set the speed loop delay advance gain in spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3381 (PR)

SP181 VCGS Spindle synchronous Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in spindle synchronous mode.

0 to 100 (%)

100

bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 1 2

3 mach Automatic coil change-

over during spindle synchronization invalid

Automatic coil changeover during spindle synchronization valid

4

5 fdir Position detector direc-tion (positive direction)

Position detector direction (negative direction)

6 7 8 9 A B C




E F (Used with SPJ)

F E D C B A 9 8 odx8 phos

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir mach fclx


II - 291


Standard setting

3382 (PR)

SP182 VCSS Spindle synchronous Change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed when the speed loop proportional gain change starts in the spindle synchronous mode.

SP182 SP017

SP178

SP178× (SP181/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3383 SP183 SYNV Spindle synchronous Sync matching speed

For changeover from the speed loop to the position loop in the spindle synchronous mode, set a speed command error range for output of the synchronous speed matching signal.

0 to 1000 (r/min)

20

3384 (PR)

SP184 FFCS Spindle synchronous Acceleration rate feed forward gain

Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain in the spindle synchronous mode. This parameter is used only with the SPJ2.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3385 SP185 SINP Spindle synchronous In-position width

Set the position error range for output of the in-position signal in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3386 (PR)

SP186 SODR Spindle synchronous Excessive error width

Set the excessive error width in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 32767 ( pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3387 (PR)

SP187 IQGS Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnifi- cation1

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3388 (PR)

SP188 IDGS Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification 2

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) in the spindle synchronous mode.

1 to 1000 (%)

100


Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out in the spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


II - 292


Standard setting


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is carried out in the spindle synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3391


3392


3393 (PR)

SP193 SPECT Synchronized tapping specifications

Set the synchronized tapping specifications in bit units.


0000

F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp od8x phos

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fdir cdir pyfx rtrn fclx



1



3 4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (-)



6 7

8

phos Normal (no compensation)

Synchronized tapping position command compensation (for synchronization with high-gain servo)

9 A B C

Dod8x Magnification of



Eptyp Position control switch






II - 293


Standard setting

3394 (PR)

SP194 VGTP Synchronized tapping speed loop gain proportional term

Set the speed loop proportional gain in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to 2000 (1/s)

63

3395 (PR)

SP195 VGTI Synchronized tapping speed loop gain integral term

Set the speed loop integral gain in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to2000 (0.1 1/s)

60

3396 (PR)

SP196 VGTD Synchronized tapping speed loop gain delay advance term

Set the speed loop delay advance gain in synchronized tapping mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied.

0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s)

15

3397


3398 (PR)

SP198 VCGT Synchronized tapping target value of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP194 (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in synchronized tapping mode.

0 to 100 (%)

100

3399 (PR)

SP199 VCST Synchronized tapping change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain

Set the speed where the speed loop proportional gain change starts during synchronized tapping.

SP199 SP017

SP194

SP194× (SP198/100)

Proportional gain

Speed

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0


II - 294


Standard setting

3400 (PR)


Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 000 during synchronized tapping. This parameter should be used when an error of relative position to Z-axis servo is large.

0 to 1000 (%)

0

3401 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3402 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3403 (PR)



0 to 1000 (%)

0

3404

SP204

3405

SP205



0 0

3406 SP206 GCK Reverse run detection error detection width

When the motor moves (including movement with external force), the motor overrun alarm (3E) will be detected even if the speed command is 0 (including position control stop command) during servo ON (gate ON). Set the movement amount to be detected as an alarm. 0: Detect with 10° motor movement

amount (Recommended setting) 1: Detect with 20° motor movement

amount 2: Detect with 40° motor movement

amount

0/1/2 0


II - 295


Standard setting

3407 SP207 GDL Sequential mode startup timing

To carry out spindle synchronization or C-axis control in the both-chuck state with no movement immediately after the power is turned ON, set this parameter so that the reverse run detection function will function correctly. Set so that servo ON timing for the opposing spindle has the combination of (1) and (2) shown in the drawing below. 0: Servo turns ON simultaneously with

servo ON command, and servo ON status is returned immediately.

1: Gate turns ON at pattern (1) shown below, and servo ON status is returned two seconds later.

2: Gate turns ON at pattern (2) shown below, and servo ON status is returned two seconds later.

0/1/2 0

Servo ON command

Servo ON (1)

Servo ON (2)

Servo ON status

700ms 300ms

700ms

300ms

2s

Gate ON

Servo ON

Gate ON

3408 SP208 W2 This is used by Mitsubishi.

Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0

3409 to

3413

SP209 to

SP213


3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronized tapping zero point return speed


3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronized tapping zero point return deceleration rate

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during synchronized tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value.

0 to 10000 (pulse)

1

3416 SP216 TPST Synchronized tapping zero point return shift amount

This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronized tapping zero point position.

0 to 4095 0


II - 296


Standard setting

3417 SP217 TINP Synchronized tapping in-position width

Set the position error range for output of the in-position during synchronized tapping.

1 to 2880 (1/16°)

16

3418 (PR)

SP218 TODR Synchronized tapping excessive error width

Set the excessive error width during synchronized tapping.

1 to 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088°)

32767

3419 (PR)

SP219 IQGT Synchronized tapping current loop gain magnification 1

Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) during synchronized tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100

3420 (PR)

SP220 IDGT Synchronized tapping current loop gain magnification 2

Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) during synchronized tapping.

1 to 1000 (%)

100


Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0


Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0".

0 to 999 (1/s)

0

3423 SP223 SPDV Speed monitor speed

Set the spindle limit speed in the door open state. (Invalid when 0 is set.) If the spindle end speed exceeds this setting value when the door is open, the speed monitor error (5E) will occur.

0 to 800 (r/min)

0

3424 SP224 SPDF Speed monitor time

Set the time (continuous) to detect alarms. (Detected instantly when 0 is set.)

0 to 2813 (3.5ms)

0


II - 297


Standard setting

3425 SP225 OXKPH Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (H coil)

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3426 SP226 OXKPL Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (L coil)

0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3427 SP227 OXVKP Speed loop proportional gain magnification after orientation gain changeover


0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3428 SP228 OXVKI Speed loop cumulative gain magnification after orientation gain changeover


0 to 2560 (1/256-fold)

0

3429 SP229 OXSFT Orientation virtual target shift amount

Set the amount to shift the target position when orientation virtual target position is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitD=1).

0 to 2048 (360°/4096)

0

3430 to

3432

SP230 to

SP232

Use not possible.

3433 (PR)


Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load inertia and motor inertia.

= ×100 Motor inertia + load inertia

Motor inertia

Setting value

(Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.) To calculate speed loop gain with general inertia scale:

The effective proportional gain and effective cumulative gain during the speed control are changed at the set scale.

0 to 5000 (%)

0

3434 (PR)




0 to 1000 (1/s)

0


II - 298


Standard setting

3435 (PR)



0 to 500 (%) 0

3436 SP236 OBS3 Fixed control constant


0 0

3437

SP237 KSCP

3438

SP238 SEZR

3439

SP239 SEZT



0 0

3440


3441


3442

SP242 Vavx 0 0

3443

SP243 UTTM


0 0

3444

SP244 OPLP Use not possible. 0 0

3445

SP245 PGHS 0 0

3446

SP246 TEST


0 0

3447 to

3448

SP247 to

SP248


3449 SP249 SM0 Speed meter speed

Set the motor rotation speed when the speed meter 10V is output. When set to "0", this parameter becomes the same as SP017 (TSP).

0 to 32767 (r/min)

0

3450 SP250 LM0 Load meter voltage

Set the voltage when the load meter 120% is output. When set to "0", this becomes 10V.

0 to 10 (V)

0

3451 to

3452

SP251 to

SP252



II - 299


Standard setting

3453 SP253


Set the output data number for channel 1 of the D/A output function. When set to "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions".

-32768 to 32767

0


Set the output data number for channel 2 of the D/A output function. When set to "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions".

-32768 to 32767

0



-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0



-32768 to 32767 (1/256-fold)

0

3457 (PR)

to 3520 (PR)

SP257

to SP320

RPM BSD


This parameter is valid only in the following two conditional cases: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1

and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor.

(b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor.


change the setting.


0000

3521 (PR)

to 3584 (PR)

SP321

to SP384

RPML BSDL


This parameter is valid only in the following conditional case: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1

and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor.


change the setting.


0000

8. Spindle Parameters 8.5 Supplement

II - 300

8.5 Supplement

8.5.1 D/A Output Specifications

(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation No. of channels 2ch Output cycle 444µs (min. value) Output precision 8bit

Output voltage range

0V to +5V (zero) to +10V, 0V to +10V during meter output

Output scale setting 1/256 to ±128 tiems

Output pins CN9 connector MO1 = 9 pin MO2 = 19 pin GND = 11pin

Function Phase current feedback output function

U-phase current FB : 7

MDS-B-SPJ2 MDS-C1-SP

MO19

Signal

LG

UIFB

2

5

1 Pin

6

4 3

10

7 8

D/A output connector

MO2 19

Signal

VIFB

12

15

11 Pin

16

14 13

20

17 18


II - 301

(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.

# No. Abbrev Parameter name 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. 3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

No. Output data Original data unit

Standard setting value for output scale

(Setting values in SP255, SP256)


ch1: Speed meter output

10V=max. speed (0=0V)

0 Depends on the max. speed 0

ch2: Load meter output

10V=120% load (0=0V)

0 Rated 12%/V

1 -

2 Current command

Rated 100% = 4096 8 Rated 20%/V

3 Current feedback

Rated 100% = 4096 8 Rated 20%/V

4 Speed feedback r/min 13 500(r/min)/V 5 - 6 Position droop 1° = (64000/65536) 671 10°/V 7 -

8

Feedrate (F∆T) 1° = (64000/65536) 629 (When communicating by 3.5ms)

500(r/min)/V

9 -

10 Position command

1° = (64000/65536) 19 (18.64) 360°/V

11 -

12 Position feedback

1° = (64000/65536) 19 (18.64) 360°/V

13 -

80 Control input 1 81 Control input 2 82 Control input 3 83 Control input 4

HEX Bit correspondence

84 Control output 185 Control output 286 Control output 387 Control output 4

HEX Bit correspondence


II - 302

(3) Setting the output scale

# No. Abbrev Parameter name 3455 SP255 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 magnification 3456 SP256 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 magnification

Usually, the standard setting value is set for the output scale (SV063, SV 064). When "0" is set, the output will be made as well as when "256" is set.

SP255 10 [V] DATA x 256 x 256 (8bit) + 5 [V] (offset) = Output voltage [V]

(Example) When outputting the position droop with 10°/V.

640000 671 10 65536 x 256 x 256 + 5 = 5.999 [V]

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE

II - 303

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION

9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE

Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and memorized relative position compensation. (1) Memorized pitch error compensation

According to the specified parameters‚ this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch error‚ etc. With the reference point defined as the base‚ set the compensation amount in the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1. 1) The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system. Select the desired method with the #4000:Pinc. Machine position is compensated between division points n and n+1 as much as compensation amount between them by linear approximation.

Fig. 1. 1 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position


II - 304

(2) Memorized relative position compensation

This method‚ according to the parameters specified in advance‚ compensates the relative position error between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand. For this‚ as shown in Fig. 1. 2‚ specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis. The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate axis that is orthogonal to the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis. The section between division points n and n+1 is compensated smoothly by linear approximation.

Command machine positionalong base axis

Actual machine positionof compensation axis

Reference point

Actual machine position forwhich no compensation ismade

n n+1 n+2

Command machine position

Compensationamount

Compensation amountbetween division points

: Division points

Fig. 1. 2 Relationship between base and compensation axes


II - 305


# Item Details Setting range 4000 (PR)

Pinc Machine error offset increment method

Specify whether to use the incremental amount method or absolute amount method when setting the machine error compensation data.

0: Absolute volume method

1: Incremental volume method

<1st axis>

# Item Details Setting range 4001 cmpax Basic axis Specify the basic axis address for

machine error compensation. 1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the

name of the axis to be compensated. 2) For relative position compensation‚

set the name of the axis to be the base axis.

Set as the "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-system. (Example) Z axis for 2nd system: 2Z

X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address

4002 drcax Compensation axis

Set the compensation axis address for machine error compensation. 1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the

same axis name as #4001 cmpax. 2) For relative position compensation‚

set the name of the axis to be actually compensated.

Set as the "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-system. (Example) Z axis for 2nd system: 2Z


4003 rdvno Division point number at reference point position

Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference point position. The reference point is actually the base‚ so there is no compensation No. Set the number that is decremented by 1.

4101 to 5124

4004 mdvno Division point number at the most negative side

Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest negative side.

4101 to 5124

4005 pdvno Division point number at the most positive side

Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest positive side.

4101 to 5124

4006 sc Compensation scale factor

Set the compensation amount's scale. 0 to 99

4007 spcdv Division interval Set the interval to divide the basic axis. Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these intervals.

1 to 9999999


II - 306

<2nd axis>

<3rd axis>

<4th axis>

<5th axis>

<6th axis>

<7th axis>

<8th axis>

<9th axis>

<10th axis>

4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017

4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027

4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037

4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047

4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057

4061406240634064406540664067

4071407240734074407540764077

4081408240834084408540864087

4091409240934094409540964097

Set the parameters corresponding to the 1st axis' parameters 4001 to 4007 for each axis. A maximum of 6 axes can be controlled‚ but as the relative position is compensated‚ settings for 10 axes can be made.

(SETUP PARAM 5. 3/15) to (SETUP PARAM 5. 15/15)

# Item Details Setting range 4101

5124

Set the compensation amount for each axis.

-128 to 127 The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value with the compensation scale.

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA

II - 307

9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA

Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system. "#4000:Pinc" 0: Absolute system

1: Incremental system

(1) Absolute system Feed from the reference point to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 2. 1. The following is obtained at this time. Set it as the compensation amount.

(Specified position - Real machine position) × 2 (Unit of output) For example‚ assume that the feed from the reference point to the +100mm position is executed. Also‚ assume that the real machine position is 99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the compensation amount used at the +100mm position: (100000 - 99990) × 2 = 20 pulses The resultant value is defined as the compensation amount. Assume that the real machine position resulting when feed to the -100mm position is executed‚ is -99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the compensation amount used at the -100mm position: (-100000 - (-99990)) × 2 = -20 pulses

+99.990

+100

Compensation amount: 20 pulses (-10µm) -99.990

-100

Compensation amount: -20 pulses (10µm)

Fig. 2. 1

(2) Incremental system

Fig. 2. 2 contains a machine position that is placed in the positive direction with respect to the reference point. Assume that feed from division n-1 to n (division interval) is executed. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the compensation amount:

(Division interval - Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA

II - 308

(3) Fig. 2. 3 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the

reference point. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the compensation amount: (Division interval + Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)

nn-1 1

n+1n1

n: Division point compensation number 1: Division interval

Fig. 2. 2 Fig. 2. 3

Unit : Unit of output Range : -128 to 127

(Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting. The actual unit of compensation pulses depends on the compensation scale factor.

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.3 EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS

II - 309

9.3 EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS

(1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno":

#4101

Compensation amount in incremental system

#4103#4102 #4104 #4105 #4106

2

1

-1

Error

-2

-3

(1) (3) (-3) (-2) (0) (3)

(3) (-2)(0) (-2)

(-1) (1)

Base axis machine coordinate

3

Compensation amount in absolute system

Division point number #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 rdvno 4103Specified machine position

-300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 mdvno 4101

Real machine position -299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 4106Incremental

2 6 -6 -4 0 6 Compensation amount

Absolute -2 0 6 -4 -4 2 If the setting range (mdvno to "pdvno") is exceeded‚ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at mdvno or "pdvno".


II - 310

(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range:


#4114#4113 #4116 #4117

2

1

-1

Error

-2

-3

(-2) (1) (0) (3) (1)

(-2) (-1)

(2)


3 #4115

(-1)

(3)


Division point number #4113 #4114 #4115 #4116 #4117 rdvno 4112Incremental

-4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 4113Compensation amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 4117

If the machine position exceeds "pdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on the compensation amount at "pdvno". If the machine position is negative in this case‚ no compensation will be executed.


II - 311

(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range:

#4128#4127 #4130#4126

2

1

-1

-2

-3

(3) (1) (0) (-3)

(3)(3)

(-1)

3 #4129

(2)

(-2)

(-1) (1)

#4125

(-1)


Error



Division point number #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 rdvno 4130Incremental

-2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 4125Compensation amount Absolute -2 -4 -2 4 6 6 pdvno 4130

If the machine position exceeds "mdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at "mdvno".


II - 312

(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference point:

#4136 #4135 #4138 #4139

2

1

-1

-2

-3

(1)(-1) (-1) (3)

(-1) (-2)

(2)

3 #4137

(1)

#4140


Error




-2 -2 6 2 mdvno 4136Compensation amount Absolute -2 -4 2 4 pdvno 4140

In this case‚ the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting rule applies also when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine positions and no reference point.

9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.4 EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS

II - 313

9.4 EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS

#4124#4123 #4126 #4127

2

1

-1

-2

-3

(-2) (1) (0) (3) (1)

(-2) (-1)

(2)

3 #4125

(-1)

(3)

(-3)

#4128

(0)

360°


Error




-4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 4123Compensation amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 4128

In this case‚ the sum of the compensation amounts set according to the incremental system is always "0". For the absolute system‚ the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0".

10. PLC CONSTANTS 10.1 PLC TIMER

II - 314

10. PLC CONSTANTS

10.1 PLC TIMER

(SETUP PARAM 6. 1/14) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 2/14) # PLC

device Item Details Setting range

6000

6015

T000

T015

10ms adding timer <10ms>

Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid

when parameter "#6449 bit0" in the following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".

0 to 32767 (×10ms)

6016

6095

T016

T095

100ms adding timer <10ms>



0 to 32767 (×100ms)

6096

6103

T096

T103

100ms cumulative timer <100ms INC>



0 to 32767 (×100ms)


# PLC device

Item Details Setting range

6600

6999

R1200/bit0 R1250/bit0

R1224/bitF R1274/bitF

PLC timer expansion 10ms adding timer <10ms>

Set the time for the expanded PLC timer This is set for the timer coils: R1200 to R1224, and timer contacts: R1250 to R1274. A timer command can be issued to a contact other than the existing timer contacts (T0 to T103, Q0 to Q151).

0 to 32767 (×10ms)

10.2 PLC COUNTER

(SETUP PARAM 6. 3/14) # PLC


6200

6223

C000

C023

Counter Set the time for the counter used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid


0 to 32767

10. PLC CONSTANTS 10.3 PLC CONSTANTS

II - 315

10.3 PLC CONSTANTS

(SETUP PARAM 6. 4/14) # PLC


6301

6348

R2800,2801

R2894,2895

PLC constant Set the value to be set in the data type R register used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once‚ and then select this screen again.

-99999999 to 99999999


# PLC device


6349

6396

R4900,4901

R4994,4995

PLC constant Set the value to be set in the data type R register used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once‚ and then select this screen again.

-99999999 to 99999999

10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT (SETUP PARAM 6. 6/14) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 7/14)

# PLC device


6401 6402

6495 6496

R2900-Low R2900-High R2947-Low R2947-High

Bit selection This is the bit type parameter used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once‚ and then select this screen again. Some of the parameters following #6449 may be fixed according to the usage purpose. Refer to the PLC Program Development On-board Instruction Manual.

0: OFF 1: ON


# PLC device


6497 6498

6595 6596

R4400-Low R4400-High R4449-Low R4449-High

Bit selection expansion

This is the bit type parameter (expansion) used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once‚ and then select this screen again.

0: OFF 1: ON

10. PLC CONSTANTS 10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT

II - 316

Table: "Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496"

Symbol name

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 #6449

R2924 L

NC card Controller thermal alarm on

Setting display unit thermal alarm on

- Counter Cretention

Integrating timer T retention

PLC counter program on

PLC counterprogram on

1 0

1

#6450 R2924 H

External alarm message display

Alarm/ operator change

Full screendisplay of message

- Operator message on

R system

F system

Alarm message on

2

#6451 R2925 L - -

GX-Developer communication on

PLC development environment selection

Onboard editing notpossible

- Onboard on

3

#6452 R2925 H -

GOT communication connection

Counter (fixed) retention

Integratingtimer (fixed) retention

-

4

#6453 R2926 L - - - - -

Message language change code

5

#6454 R2926 H

6

#6455 R2927 L - - - - - - - -

7

#6456 R2927 H - - - - - - - -

8

#6457 R2928 L

9

#6458 R2928 H

A

#6459 R2929 L

B

#6460 R2929 H

C

#6461 R2930 L

D

#6462 R2930 H

E #6463

R2931 L

F #6464

R2931 H

High-speed input specification 1

High-speed input specification 2

High-speed input specification 4 (Spare)

High-speed input specification 3 (Spare)

High-speed output specification 1

High-speed output specification 2

High-speed output specification 3 (Spare)

High-speed output specification 4 (Spare)

10. PLC CONSTANTS 10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT

II - 317

Symbol

name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 #6465

R2932 L - - - - - - - -

1 #6466

R2932 H - - - - - - - -

2 #6467

R2933 L - - - - - - - -

3 #6468

R2933 H

4 #6469

R2934 L - MC alarm 4output off

5 #6470

R2934 H

6 #6471

R2935 L - - - - - - - -

7 #6472

R2935 H - - - - - - - -

8 #6473

R2936 L - -

9 #6474

R2936 H

A #6475

R2937 L

B #6476

R2937 H

C #6477

R2938 L

D #6478

R2938 H

E #6479

R2939 L

F #6480

R2939 H

Standard PLC parameter

(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0. (Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi.

11. MACRO LIST

II - 318

11. MACRO LIST

(SETUP PARAM 7. 1/3) # Item Details Setting range

(unit) 7001

to 7091

M [01] to M [10]

<Code> Set the M code used for calling out the macro with the M command. This is valid when #1195 Mmac is set to 1.

1 to 9999

7002 to

7092

<Type> Set the macro call out type.

0 to 3

7003 to

7093

<Program No.> Set the No. of the program to be called out.

1 to 99999999

M2mac Set the type and program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the #1170 M2name address command when #1198 M2mac is set to 1.

7102 <Type> Same as the M call macro.

0 to 3

7103 <Program No.> Same as the M call macro.

0 to 99999999


# Item Details Setting range (unit)

7201 to

7291

G [01] to G [10]

<Code> Set the G code to be used when calling the macro with a G command. Do not set a G code used in the system.

1 to 255

7202 to

7292

<Type> Same as the M call Marco.

0 to 3

7203 to

7293

<Program No.> Same as the M call Marco.

1 to 99999999

Smac Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with an S command. This is valid when #1196 Smac is set to 1.

7302 <Type> Same as the M call Marco.

0 to 3

7303 <Program No.> Same as the M call Marco.

1 to 99999999

Tmac Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with a T command. This is valid when #1197 Tmac is set to 1.

7312 <Type> Same as the M call macro.

0 to 3

7313 <Program No.> Same as the M call macro.

0 to 99999999

0 M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call 1 G65 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call 2 G66 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call 3 G66.1 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call

others M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call

11. MACRO LIST

II - 319


# Item Details Setting range 7401 Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402

to 7405) are validated. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

7402 Code Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code.

L system: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T

M system: A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q, R, S, T

7403 Type Set the macro call type. 0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1

0 to 3

7404 Program No.

Set the number of the program called with macro call.

0 to 99999999

7405

ASCII [01]

Variable When the call type is "0", set the variable number set after the ASCII code.

100 to 149

7411 Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to 7415) are validated. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

7412 Code Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code.

L system: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T

M system: A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q, R, S, T

7413 Type Set the macro call type. 0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1

0 to 3

7414 Program No.

Set the number of the program called with macro call.

0 to 99999999

7415

ASCII [02]

Variable When the call type is "0", set the variable number set after the ASCII code.

100 to 149

12. POSITION SWITCH 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION

II - 320

12. POSITION SWITCH

12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION

The position switch (PSW) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance. When the machine reaches the imaginary dog position‚ a signal is output to the PLC interface. The position switch thus works as an imaginary dog switch.

(SETUP PARAM 8. 1/1) # Item Details Setting range

(unit) 7500 Pcheck High-speed

switching of position switch

Specify whether to perform position switch area checking at high speeds.0: Do not perform position switch

area checking at high speed (do it the same as before).

1: Perform position switch area checking at high speed.

0/1

75 1 <axis> Axis name Specify the name of the axis for which a position switch is provided.


75 2 <dog1> Imaginary dog position 1

When the machine enters the range between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, a signal is output to the PLC.

-99999.999 to 99999.999

(0.001mm)75 3 <dog2> Imaginary dog

position 2 System 1 device X 270 System 2 device U0F0

75 4 <check> Selection of area check method

When position switch area checking at high speed is selected, specify the mode of area checking, i.e., whether to use the command type machine position or detector feedback position, for each position switch point. 0: Use the command type machine

position as the machine position for position switch area checking.

1: Use the detector feedback position as the machine position for position switch area checking.

Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 set in "#7500 Pcheck."

0/1

12. POSITION SWITCH 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION

II - 321

Position switch numbers of PSW1 to PSW8 and signal devices

<axis> <dog1> <dog2> System 1 device System 2 devicePSW1 #7501 #7502 #7503 X270 U0F0 PSW2 #7511 #7512 #7513 X271 U0F1 PSW3 #7521 #7522 #7523 X272 U0F2 PSW4 #7531 #7532 #7533 X273 U0F3 PSW5 #7541 #7542 #7543 X274 U0F4 PSW6 #7551 #7552 #7553 X275 U0F5 PSW7 #7561 #7562 #7563 X276 U0F6 PSW8 #7571 #7572 #7573 X277 U0F7

Instead of the dog switch provided on the machine axis‚ the coordinate values indicating imaginary dog positions (dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axis of the axis name preset with axis are set with the position switches (PSW1 - PSW8). When the machine reaches the position‚ the signal is output to the device corresponding to the PLC interface. Example of settings of dog1 and dog2 and operation

Setting of dog1 and dog2

dog1, dog2 position Operation

dog1 < dog2 dog1 dog2

A signal is output between dog1 and dog2.

dog1 > dog2 dog2 dog1


dog1 = dog2 dog1 = dog2

If dog1 equals dog2‚ the dog1 position triggers a signal.

dog1

dog2

PSWwidth

Imaginary dog

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

12. POSITION SWITCH 12.2 CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH

II - 322

Rotation axis

Setting of dog1 and dog2

dog1, dog2 position Description

dog1 < dog2 dog2 dog1

(Example) dog1 = 30.000dog2 = 330.000


dog1 dog2

(Example) dog1 = -30.000dog2 = 30.000

A signal is also output when dog1 is negative.

dog1 > dog2 dog1 dog2

(Example) dog1 = 330.000dog2 = 30.000


|dog1 - dog2| ≥ 360 dog2 dog1

(Example) dog1 = 30.000dog2 = 390.000

A signal is kept output when the difference between dog1 and dog2 exceeds 360 degrees.

12.2 CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH

To cancel the position switch‚ enter the number (#75 1) of the position switch to be canceled in # ( ) of the setting field‚ enter a slash "/" in DATA ( )‚ then press the INPUT key. This deletes the axis name for the specified position switch‚ thus invalidating the position switch. The data specified for <dog1> and <dog2> are still stored in memory. To validate the position switch again‚ therefore‚ it is enough to specify the axis name only.

13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER

II - 323


Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be validated after the power is turned ON again.

No. Name Details Setting range

Default value

1 (PR)

MSR Motor series Set the motor series. This is automatically judged by the system when the default value (0000) is set.

0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)

0000

2 (PR)

RTY Regeneration option type

Set the regenerative resistor type. Do not set values without a description.

0 0 0 0 (Default value)

Setting value Details

0 Amplifier standard built-in resistor (10CT has no built-in resistor)

1 Setting prohibited 2 MR-RB032 (30W) 3 MR-RB12 (100W) 4 MR-RB32 (300W) 5 MR-RB30 (300W) 6 MR-RB50 (500W) 7~F

3 (PR)

PC1 Motor side gear ratio (machine rotation ratio)

1 to 32767 1

4 (PR)

PC2 Machine side gear ratio (motor rotation ratio)

Set the No. of gear teeth on the motor side and the No. of gear teeth on the machine side as an integer reduced to its lowest terms. Set the total gear ratio if there are multiple gear levels. For rotation axes, set the No. of motor rotation speed per machine rotation.

1 to 32767 1

5 (PR)

PIT Feed pitch Set 360 (default value) for rotation axes. Set the feed lead for linear axes.

1 to 32767 (° or mm)

360

6 INP In-position detection width

In-position is detected when the position droop becomes this setting value or less.

1 to 32767 (1/1000° or µm)

50


II - 324

No. Name Details Setting range Default value

7 ATU Auto-tuning Set the adjustment of the auto-tuning. Do not set values without a description.

0 1 0 2 (Default setting value)

Settingvalue Details

1 Low response (low-rigidity loads, loads which easily vibrate)

2 Standard setting value 3 Standard setting value 4 Standard setting value

5 High response (high-rigidity loads, loads which do not easily vibrate)


0 Standard

2 Large friction amount (set the position loop gain slightly lower)


0 Only auto-tuning PG2, VG2, VIC, and GD2.

1 Only auto-tuning PG1, PG2, VG1, VG2, VIC, and GD2 (total gain). (Standard setting)

2 No auto-tuning. 8 PG1 Position loop

gain 1 Set the position loop gain for the model loop.Determine the tracking ability regarding the position commands.

4 to 1000 (1/s) 70

9

(Not used.) 0

10 EMGt Deceleration control time constant

Set the deceleration time from the clamp speed (Aspeed1). For normal rapid traverse, set the same value as the acceleration/deceleration time constant.

0 to 32768 (ms)

500

11

(Not used.) 0

12

(Not used.) 0

13 MBR Vertical axis drop prevention time

Input the time the servo OFF is delayed during servo OFF command. Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the minimum value where the axis does not drop.

0 to 1000 (ms) 100

14 NCH Notch filter No.

Set the frequency of the machine resonance suppression filter. Do not set values without a description.

Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Frequency(Hz)

Nostart

1125 563 375 282 225 188 161


II - 325


Default value

15

(Not used.) 0

16 JIT Jitter compensation

Set the No. of ignored jitter compensation pulses. Do not set values without a description.

Setting value 0 1 2 3 Number of ignore

pulses No start 1 2 3

17

(Not used.) 0

18

(Not used.) 0

19 PG2 Position loop gain 2

Set the position loop gain of the actual loop.Determine the position responsiveness for external disturbance.

1 to 500 (1/s) 25

20 VG1 Speed loop gain 1

Set the speed loop gain of the model loop. Determine the tracking ability regarding the speed commands.

20 to 5000 (1/s)

1200

21 VG2 Speed loop gain 2

Set the speed loop gain of the actual loop. Determine the speed responsiveness for external disturbance.

20 to 8000 (1/s)

600

22 VIC Speed integral compensation

Determine the characteristics of the speed low-frequency region.

1 to 1000 (ms) 20

23 VDC Speed differential compensation

PI control normally results from a default value of 1000. Adjust the overshoot amount by lowering in increments of 20.

0 to 1000 1000

24

DG2 Load inertia ratio

Set the load inertia ratio for the motor inertia. 0.0 to 50.0 (fold)

2.0

25

(Not used.) 0

30 (PR)

MTY Motor type Set the motor type. This is automatically judged by the system when the default value (0000) is set.


0000


II - 326


Default value

50 MD1 D/A output channel 1 data No.

Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output channel 1. 0 0 0 0 (Default setting value)

Settingvalue Details Magnification

0 Speed feedback (with sign)

Maximum rotation speed = 8V

1 Current feedback (with sign)

Maximum current (torque) = 8V

2 Speed feedback (without sign)

Maximum rotation speed = 8V

3 Current feedback (without sign)


4 Current command


5 Command F∆T

100000 [degrees/min] = 10V

6 Position droop 1 (1/1)

2048 [pulse] = 10V


8192 [pulse] = 10V


32768 [pulse] = 10V


65536 [pulse] = 10V

A Position droop 5 (1/64)

131072 [pulse] = 10V

51 MO1 D/A output channel 1 output offset

Set this value when the zero level of D/A output channel 1 is not suitable.

-999 to 999 (mV)

0

52

(Not used.) 0

53 MD2 D/A output channel 2 data No.

Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output channel 2. The descriptions are the same as "50 MD1".


0000

54 MO2 D/A output channel 2 output offset

Set this value when the zero level of D/A output channel 2 is not suitable.

-999 to 999 (mV)

0

55

(Not used.) 0

100 (PR)

station No. of indexing stations

Set the No. of stations. For linear axes, this value is expressed by: No. of divisions = No. of stations - 1.

2 to 360 2


II - 327


101 (PR)

Cont1 Control parameter 1

This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default values.

bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set 0

1 High-speed zero point return after establishment of zero point.

Dog-type return for each zero point return operation.

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 Reference point return direction (+)

Reference point return direction (-)

9 Rotation direction determined by operation control signal (DIR)

Rotation direction in the shortcut direction

A Machine basic position becomes the origin point

Electrical zero point becomes the origin point

B C

D Coordinate zero point creation valid

Zero point established at power supply ON position

E Rotation direction in operation control signal (DIR) or in the shortcut direction

Rotation direction in the random position command sign direction

F Stopper direction is positioning direction

Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount


II - 328


102 (PR)

Cont2 Control parameter 2




1 Error not corrected at servo OFF

Error corrected at servo OFF

2 Linear axis Rotation axis

3 Station assignment direction CW

Station assignment direction CCW

4 Uniform index Non-uniform index

5 DO channel standard assignment

DO channel reverse assignment

6 2-wire detector communication 4-wire detector communication7 Incremental detection Absolute position detection 8 9 A B C D E F

103 (PR)

EmgCont Emergency stop control




0 External emergency stop valid

External emergency stop invalid (default value)

1 Dynamic brake stop at emergency stop

Deceleration control stop at emergency stop

2 NC bus emergency stop input valid

NC bus emergency stop input invalid

3 NC bus emergency stop output valid

NC bus emergency stop output invalid

4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F


II - 329


Default value

104 (PR)

tleng Linear axis stroke length

Set the movement stroke length for linear axes. This is meaningless when setting non-uniform assignments or commanding random positions.

0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)

100.000

110 ZRNspeed Reference point return speed

Set the clamp value of the feedrate when a reference point return is carried out. The feedrate becomes the manual operation speed of the parameter group selected at that time, but it is clamped by this parameter setting value.

1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)

1000

111 ZRNcreep Reference point return creep speed

Set the approach speed to the reference point after dog detection during a reference point return.


200

112 grid mask Grid mask Set the amount that the dog is artificially extended. Set 1/2 the grid spacing as a standard.

0 to 65536 (1/1000° or µm)

0

113 (PR)

grspc Grid spacing

Divide the grid spacing that is the conventional motor rotation movement amount into 2, 4, 8, or 16 divisions.

0 to 4 (1/2n division)

0

114 ZRNshift Reference point shift amount

Set the shift amount in a dog-type reference point return from the electric zero point determined on the grid to the reference point.

0 to 65536 (1/1000° or µm)

0

115 ST. ofset Station offset

Set the distance (offset) from the reference point to station 1.

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.000

116 (PR)

ABS base Absolute position zero point

When movement of the machine coordinate zero point from the origin point is required during absolute position initializing, set that movement amount.

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.000

117 Limit (+) Soft limit (+)

Commands in the plus direction that exceed this setting value are not possible. If the machine is in a position exceeding the setting value, commands in the minus direction are possible. The soft limit function will not operate if Limit (+) and Limit (-) are set to the same value.

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

1.000

118 Limit (-) Soft limit (-)

Commands in the minus direction that exceed this value are not possible. If the machine is in a position exceeding the setting value, commands in the plus direction are possible.

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

1.000


II - 330


Default value

120 ABS Type

Absolute position detection parameter

This parameter is set as a hexadecimal. Set the default value for bits that have no description.



1 Dogless-type method initializing Dog-type method initializing

2 Mechanical stopper method initializing

Origin point alignment method initializing

3 Electrical zero point direction (+)

Electrical zero point direction (-)

4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

123 ABS check

Absolute position power OFF tolerable movement value

Set the value for the tolerable amount of movement for a machine that moved during power OFF in an absolute position detection system. The "Absolute position power OFF movement exceeded (ABS)" signal will turn ON if the machine moves more than this setting value during power OFF. The movement amount is not checked when this parameter is set to 0.000.

0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.000

130 backlash Backlash compensation amount

Set the backlash compensation amount. 0 to 9999 (1/1000° or µm)

0

132

(Not used.) 0

133

(Not used.) 0

134

(Not used.) 0

135

(Not used.) 0


II - 331

< Operation parameter group 1 >


Default value

150 Aspeed1 Operation parameter group 1 Automatic operation speed

Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 1 is selected. This parameter is regarded as the clamp value for the automatic operation speeds and manual operation speeds of all operation groups. A speed exceeding Aspeed1 cannot be commanded, even if set in the parameters.


5000

151 Mspeed1 Operation parameter group 1 Manual operation speed

Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when operation parameter group 1 is selected.


2000

152 time1.1 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/ deceleration time constant 1

Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for Aspeed 1(the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed)) when operation parameter group 1 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter.

1 to 9999 (ms) 100

153 time1.2 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/ deceleration time constant 2

Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape acceleration/ deceleration. When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When "1" is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In the handle feed operation mode, this set value is regarded as the time constant for the linear acceleration/deceleration.

1 to 999 (ms) 1


II - 332


Default value

154 TL1 Operation parameter group 1 Torque limit value

Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 1 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specification. Set the default value when torque limit is not especially required. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the torque limit value when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates.

1 to 500 (%) 500

155 OD1 Operation parameter group 1 Excessive error detection width

Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 1 is selected. An alarm of excessive error (S03 0052) is detected when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the excessive error detection width when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates.

0 to 32767 (° or mm)

100

156 just1 Operation parameter group 1 Set position output width

The signal indicating that the machine position is at any one of the stations is the set position reached (JST) signal. During automatic operation, the automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal is also output under the same conditions. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 1 is selected. These signals turn OFF when the machine position is separated from the station by more than this value.

0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.500

157 near1 Operation parameter group 1 Near set position output width

The signal indicating that the machine position is near any one of the station positions is the near set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable value at which this signal is output when operation parameter group 1 is selected. This value is generally set wider than the set position output width. During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is "0".

0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

1.000


II - 333



Default value


Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 2 is selected.


5000

159 Mspeed2 Operation parameter group 2 Manual operation speed



2000

160 time2.1 Operation parameter group 2 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1

Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 2 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter.

1 to 9999 (ms)

100


Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape acceleration/deceleration. When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In the handle feed operation mode, this set value is regarded as the time constant for the linear acceleration/deceleration.

1 to 9999 (ms)

1


II - 334


Default value


Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 2 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the default value when torque limit is not especially required. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the torque limit value during stopper operation.

1 to 500 (%) 500


Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 2 is selected. An excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the excessive error detection width during stopper operation.

0 to 32767 (° or mm)

100



0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.500


The signal indicating that the machine position is near any one of the station positions is the near set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 2 is selected. These values are generally set wider than the set position output width. During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is "0".

0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

1.000


II - 335



Default value




5000

167 Mspeed3

Operation parameter group 3 Manual operation speed



2000



1 to 9999 (ms)

100


Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape acceleration/deceleration. When S- shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In the handle feed operation mode, this set value is regarded as the time constant for the linear acceleration/deceleration.

1 to 9999 (ms)

1


II - 336


Default value


Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 3 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications.Set the default value when torque limit is not especially required. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the pressing torque limit value after completion of the positioning.

1 to 500 (%) 500


Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 3 is selected. An excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the excessive error detection width during pressing after completion of the positioning.

0 to 32767 (° or mm)

100



0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.500



0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

1.000


II - 337



Default value

174 Aspeed4

Operation parameter group 4 Automatic operation speed



5000

175 Mspeed4

Operation parameter group 4 Manual operation speed



2000



1 to 9999 (ms)

100


Set this parameter when carrying out S-shapeacceleration/deceleration. When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In the handle feed operation mode, this set value is regarded as the time constant for the linear acceleration/deceleration.

1 to 9999 (ms)

1


II - 338


Default value


Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 4 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications.Set the default value when torque limit is not especially required. In the stopper method initializing mode in absolute position detection systems, this becomes the torque limit value during stopper operation.

1 to 500 (%) 500


Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 4 is selected. An excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. In the stopper method initializing mode in absolute position detection systems, this becomes the excessive error detection width during stopper operation.

0 to 32767 (° or mm)

100



0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.500



0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

1.000


II - 339


190 stpos2 Station 2 coordinate value








Set the coordinate value of each station when non-uniform assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at 0.000 (machine coordinate zero point).

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.000

200 PSWcheck PSW detection method


bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

bit Position

switch Meaning when "0" is

set Meaning when "1" is

set 0 PSW1 1 PSW2 2 PSW3 3 PSW4 4 PSW5 5 PSW6 6 PSW7 7 PSW8

The position switch output is judged by the machine position of the command system.

The position switch output is judged by the machine FB position (actual position).

8 9 A B C D E F


II - 340


Default value

201 202

PSW1dog1 PSW1dog2

PSW1 area setting 1 PSW1 area setting 2

203 204

PSW2dog1 PSW2dog2


205 206

PSW3dog1 PSW3dog2


207 208

PSW4dog1 PSW4dog2


209 210

PSW5dog1 PSW5dog2


211 212

PSW6dog1 PSW6dog2


213 214

PSW7dog1 PSW7dog2


215 216

PSW8dog1 PSW8dog2


When the machine position is in the region between region settings 1 and 2, the position switch of each No. will turn ON. Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (vice versa) does not affect the position switch operation. For rotation axes, the output turns ON at the region without including 0.000 degree.

-99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)

0.000

220 push Stopper amount

Set the command stroke of the stopper operation during stopper positioning operations.

0.000 to 359.999 (° or mm)

0.000

221 pusht1 Stopper standby time

Set the standby time from the stopper starting coordinate positioning to the stopper operation start during stopper positioning operations.

0 to 9999 (ms) 0

222 pusht2 Stopper torque release time

Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the changeover of the stopper torque during stopper positioning operations.

0 to 9999 (ms) 0

223 pusht3 Set position signal output delay time

Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the output of the automatic set position reached (JSTA), set position reached (JST), and near set position (NEAR) signals during stopper positioning operations.

0 to 9999 (ms) 0

III PLC DEVICES

1. PLC INTERFACE INPUT X

III - 1


The spindle related devices are described in the section "5. Other PLC Interfaces".

CNC PLC (GX Developer) Table 4-1-1 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 1st sys

2nd sys Abbrev. Signal name 1st

sys2ndsys Abbrev. Signal name

X180 X4C0 RDY1 Servo ready 1st axis X188 X4C8 AX1 Axis selected 1st axis X181 X4C1 RDY2 Servo ready 2nd axis X189 X4C9 AX2 Axis selected 2nd axis X182 X4C2 RDY3 Servo ready 3rd axis X18A X4CA AX3 Axis selected 3rd axis X183 X4C3 RDY4 Servo ready 4th axis X18B X4CB AX4 Axis selected 4th axis X184 X4C4 RDY5 Servo ready 5th axis X18C X4CC AX5 Axis selected 5th axis X185 X4C5 RDY6 Servo ready 6th axis X18D X4CD AX6 Axis selected 6th axis X186 X4C6 RDY7 Servo ready 7th axis X18E X4CE AX7 Axis selected 7th axis X187 X4C7 RDY8 Servo ready 8th axis X18F X4CF AX8 Axis selected 8th axis

Device No. Device No. 1st sys



X190 X4D0 MVP1 In plus motion +1st axis X198 X4D8 MVM1 In minus motion -1st axis

X191 X4D1 MVP2 In plus motion +2nd axis X199 X4D9 MVM2 In minus motion -2nd axis

X192 X4D2 MVP3 In plus motion +3rd axis X19A X4DA MVM3 In minus motion -3rd axis

X193 X4D3 MVP4 In plus motion +4th axis X19B X4DB MVM4 In minus motion -4th axis

X194 X4D4 MVP5 In plus motion +5th axis X19C X4DC MVM5 In minus motion -5th axis

X195 X4D5 MVP6 In plus motion +6th axis X19D X4DD MVM6 In minus motion -6th axis

X196 X4D6 MVP7 In plus motion +7th axis X19E X4DE MVM7 In minus motion -7th axis

X197 X4D7 MVP8 In plus motion +8th axis X19F X4DF MVM8 In minus motion -8th axis




X1A0 X4E0 ZP11 1st reference position reached 1st axis

X1A8 X4E8 ZP21 2nd reference position reached 1st axis

X1A1 X4E1 ZP12 2nd axis X1A9 X4E9 ZP22 2nd axis X1A2 X4E2 ZP13 3rd axis X1AA X4EA ZP23 3rd axis X1A3 X4E3 ZP14 4th axis X1AB X4EB ZP24 4th axis X1A4 X4E4 ZP15 5th axis X1AC X4EC ZP25 5th axis X1A5 X4E5 ZP16 6th axis X1AD X4ED ZP26 6th axis X1A6 X4E6 ZP17 7th axis X1AE X4EE ZP27 7th axis X1A7 X4E7 ZP18 8th axis X1AF X4EF ZP28 8th axis


III - 2




X1B0 X4F0 ZP31 3rd reference position reached 1st axis

X1B8 X4F8 ZP41 4th reference position reached 1st axis

X1B1 X4F1 ZP32 2nd axis X1B9 X4F9 ZP42 2nd axis X1B2 X4F2 ZP33 3rd axis X1BA X4FA ZP43 3rd axis X1B3 X4F3 ZP34 4th axis X1BB X4FB ZP44 4th axis X1B4 X4F4 ZP35 5th axis X1BC X4FC ZP45 5th axis X1B5 X4F5 ZP36 6th axis X1BD X4FD ZP46 6th axis X1B6 X4F6 ZP37 7th axis X1BE X4FE ZP47 7th axis X1B7 X4F7 ZP38 8th axis X1BF X4FF ZP48 8th axis




X1C0 X500 X1C8 X508 — — X1C1 X501 X1C9 X509 — — X1C2 X502 SSE Search & start (error) X1CA X50A — — X1C3 X503 Search & start (search) X1CB X50B — — X1C4 X504 Power OFF request

(SP regeneration circuit err)

X1CC X50C — —

X1C5 X505 X1CD X50D — — X1C6 X506 X1CE X50E — — X1C7 X507 X1CF X50F — —

Device No. Device No. 1st SP

2nd SP Abbrev. Signal name 1st


Near reference position X1D0 X510 — — X1D8 X518 NR F1 1st axis

X1D1 X511 — — X1D9 X519 NR F2 2nd axis X1D2 X512 X1DA X51A NR F3 3rd axis X1D3 X513 X1DB X51B NR F4 4th axis X1D4 X514 X1DC X51C NR F5 5th axis X1D5 X515 SD2 Speed detect 2 X1DD X51D NR F6 6th axis X1D6 X516 MCSA In M coil selected X1DE X51E NR F7 7th axis X1D7 X517 Index positioning

complete X1DF X51F NR F8 8th axis

— — : Reserved for the system.


III - 3




X1E0 X520 JO In jog mode X1E8 X528 MEMO In memory mode X1E1 X521 HO In handle mode X1E9 X529 TO In tape mode X1E2 X522 SO In incremental mode X1EA X52A — — X1E3 X523 PTPO In manual random feed

mode X1EB X52B DO In MDI mode

X1E4 X524 ZRNO In reference position return mode

X1EC X52C — —

X1E5 X525 ASTO In automatic initial set mode

X1ED X52D In direct operation

X1E6 X526 In JOG-handle simultaneous mode

X1EE X52E

X1E7 X527 X1EF X52F




X1F0 X530 MA Controller ready complete X1F8 X538 DEN Motion command complete

X1F1 X531 SA Servo ready complete X1F9 X539 TIMP All axes in-position X1F2 X532 OP In auto operation "run" X1FA X53A TSMZ All axes smoothing zero X1F3 X533 STL In auto operation "start" X1FB X53B — — X1F4 X534 SPL In auto operation "pause" X1FC X53C CXFIN Manual random feed

complete X1F5 X535 RST In "reset" X1FD X53D X1F6 X536 CXN In manual random feed X1FE X53E X1F7 X537 RWD In rewind X1FF X53F In high-speed mode (G05)




X200 X540 RPN In rapid traverse X208 X548 INCH In inch unit select X201 X541 CUT In cutting feed X209 X549 DLKN In display lock X202 X542 TAP In tapping X20A X54A F1DN F1-digit commanded X203 X543 THRD In thread cutting X20B X54B TLFO In tool life management X204 X544 SYN In synchronous feed X20C X54C SUPP Spindle speed upper limit

over X205 X545 CSS In constant surface speed X20D X54D SLOW Spindle speed lower limit

over X206 X546 SKIP In skip X20E X54E TLOV Tool life over X207 X547 ZRNN In reference position

return X20F X54F BATAL Battery alarm


: For specific manufacturers.


III - 4




X210 X550 AL1 NC alarm 1 X218 X558 F11 F1-digit No.1 X211 X551 AL2 NC alarm 2

(Servo alarm) X219 X559 F12 F1-digit No.2

X212 X552 AL3 NC alarm 3 (Program error)

X21A X55A F14 F1-digit No.4

X213 X553 AL4 NC alarm 4 (Operation error)

X21B X55B — (Always "0")

X214 X554 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal X21C X55C Waiting between part systems

X215 X555 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over

X21D X55D

X216 X556 SNGE S-analog no gear selected

X21E X55E

X217 X557 ASLE Illegal axis selected X21F X55F




M code independent output

X220 X560 DM00

M00

X228 X568 (EF)

X221 X561 DM01 M01 X229 X569 MMS Manual numerical command

X222 X562 DM02 M02 X22A X56A — — X223 X563 DM30 M30 X22B X56B TCP Tool change position

return complete X224 X564 X22C X56C TCRQ New tool change X225 X565 GR1 Spindle gear shift 1 X22D X56D — — X226 X566 GR2 Spindle gear shift 2 X22E X56E X227 X567 — (Always "0") X22F X56F




X230 X570 MF1 M function strobe 1 X238 X578 TF1 T function strobe 1 X231 X571 MF2 M function strobe 2 X239 X579 — — — X232 X572 MF3 M function strobe 3 X23A X57A — — — X233 X573 MF4 M function strobe 4 X23B X57B — — — X234 X574 SF1 S function strobe 1 X23C X57C BF1 2nd M function strobe 1 X235 X575 SF2 S function strobe 2 X23D X57D — — — X236 X576 SF3 S function strobe 3 X23E X57E — — — X237 X577 SF4 S function strobe 4 X23F X57F — — —



III - 5

CNC PLC (GX Developer) Table 4-1-5 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 1st SP


SP 2ndSP Abbrev. Signal name

X240 X580 Spindle 2nd in-position X248 X588 SMA Spindle ready-ON X241 X581 CDO Current detect X249 X589 SSA Spindle servo-ON X242 X582 VRO Speed detect X24A X58A SEMG Spindle emergency stop X243 X583 FLO In spindle alarm X24B X58B SSRN Spindle forward run X244 X584 ZSO Zero speed X24C X58C SSRI Spindle reverse run X245 X585 USO Up-to-speed X24D X58D SZPH Z-phase passed X246 X586 ORAO Spindle in-position X24E X58E SIMP Position loop in-position X247 X587 LCSA In L coil selected X24F X58F STLQ Torque limit




X250 X590 — — X258 X598 — — X251 X591 — — X259 X599 — — X252 X592 — — X25A X59A — — X253 X593 — — X25B X59B — — X254 X594 — — X25C X59C — — X255 X595 — — X25D X59D — — X256 X596 — — X25E X59E — — X257 X597 — — X25F X59F — —




Load monitor X260 X5A0 CHOP In chopping start X268 X5A8 In teaching/monitor

execution X261 X5A1 CHP1 Basic position - upper

dead center point X269 X5A9 Teaching mode valid

X262 X5A2 CHP2 Upper dead center point - bottom dead point

X26A X5AA Monitor mode valid

X263 X5A3 CHP3 Bottom dead center point - upper dead point

X26B X5AB Adaptive control valid

X264 X5A4 CHP4 Upper dead center point - basic position

X26C X5AC

X265 X5A5 CHPMD In chopping mode X26D X5AD TRVE Tap retract possible X266 X5A6 X26E X5AE PCNT No. of work machining

over X267 X5A7 X26F X5AF ABSW Absolute position warning




III - 6




X270 X5B0 PSW1 Position switch 1 X278 X5B8 — — X271 X5B1 PSW2 Position switch 2 X279 X5B9 — — X272 X5B2 PSW3 Position switch 3 X27A X5BA — — X273 X5B3 PSW4 Position switch 4 X27B X5BB — — X274 X5B4 PSW5 Position switch 5 X27C X5BC — — X275 X5B5 PSW6 Position switch 6 X27D X5BD — — X276 X5B6 PSW7 Position switch 7 X27E X5BE — — X277 X5B7 PSW8 Position switch 8 X27F X5BF — —




Zero point initialization set completed

Zero point initialization seterror completed

X280 X5C0 ZSF1

1st axis

X288 X5C8 ZSE1

1st axis X281 X5C1 ZSF2 2nd axis X289 X5C9 ZSE2 2nd axis X282 X5C2 ZSF3 3rd axis X28A X5CA ZSE3 3rd axis X283 X5C3 ZSF4 4th axis X28B X5CB ZSE4 4th axis X284 X5C4 ZSF5 5th axis X28C X5CC ZSE5 5th axis X285 X5C5 ZSF6 6th axis X28D X5CD ZSE6 6th axis X286 X5C6 ZSF7 7th axis X28E X5CE ZSE7 7th axis X287 X5C7 ZSF8 8th axis X28F X5CF ZSE8 8th axis




In current limit Current limit reached X290 X5D0 ILI1 1st axis

X298 X5D8 ILA1 1st axis

X291 X5D1 ILI2 2nd axis X299 X5D9 ILA2 2nd axis X292 X5D2 ILI3 3rd axis X29A X5DA ILA3 3rd axis X293 X5D3 ILI4 4th axis X29B X5DB ILA4 4th axis X294 X5D4 ILI5 5th axis X29C X5DC ILA5 5th axis X295 X5D5 ILI6 6th axis X29D X5DD ILA6 6th axis X296 X5D6 ILI7 7th axis X29E X5DE ILA7 7th axis X297 X5D7 ILI8 8th axis X29F X5DF ILA8 8th axis



III - 7




X2A0 X5E0 In polygon mode (Spindle-NC axis)

X2A8 X5E8

X2A1 X5E1 AL5 NC alarm 5 X2A9 X5E9 X2A2 X5E2 In polygon mode

(Spindle-Spindle) X2AA X5EA

X2A3 X5E3 Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization complete

X2AB X5EB

X2A4 X5E4 X2AC X5EC X2A5 X5E5 X2AD X5ED X2A6 X5E6 X2AE X5EE X2A7 X5E7 X2AF X5EF For HVS control

(position err detect)




Up-to-speed Unclamp command X2B0 X5F0 1st axis

X2B8 X5F8 1st axis

X2B1 X5F1 2nd axis X2B9 X5F9 2nd axis X2B2 X5F2 3rd axis X2BA X5FA 3rd axis X2B3 X5F3 4th axis X2BB X5FB 4th axis X2B4 X5F4 5th axis X2BC X5FC 5th axis X2B5 X5F5 6th axis X2BD X5FD 6th axis X2B6 X5F6 7th axis X2BE X5FE 7th axis X2B7 X5F7 8th axis X2BF X5FF 8th axis




X2C0 X600 RTAP In synchronized tapping selection (M command)

X2C8 X608 ENB Spindle enable

X2C1 X601 In small diameter deep hole cycle

X2C9 X609

X2C2 X602 INC high-speed retract function valid state

X2CA X60A

X2C3 X603 In INC high-speed retract function operation

X2CB X60B

X2C4 X604 Optimum pecking function valid state

X2CC X60C

X2C5 X605 In optimum pecking function operation

X2CD X60D

X2C6 X606 Load monitor function valid state

X2CE X60E

X2C7 X607 In load monitor function operation

X2CF X60F



III - 8




X2D0 X610 In barrier valid (left) X2D8 X618 X2D1 X611 In barrier valid (right) X2D9 X619 X2D2 X612 X2DA X61A X2D3 X613 X2DB X61B X2D4 X614 X2DC X61C X2D5 X615 X2DD X61D X2D6 X616 X2DE X61E X2D7 X617 X2DF X61F




In cross machining control

In synchronous/ superimposition control

X2E0 X620

1st axis

X2E8 X628

1st axis X2E1 X621 2nd axis X2E9 X629 2nd axis X2E2 X622 3rd axis X2EA X62A 3rd axis X2E3 X623 4th axis X2EB X62B 4th axis X2E4 X624 5th axis X2EC X62C 5th axis X2E5 X625 6th axis X2ED X62D 6th axis X2E6 X626 7th axis X2EE X62E 7th axis X2E7 X627 8th axis X2EF X62F 8th axis




X2F0 X630 X2F8 X638 X2F1 X631 X2F9 X639 X2F2 X632 X2FA X63A X2F3 X633 X2FB X63B X2F4 X634 X2FC X63C X2F5 X635 X2FD X63D X2F6 X636 X2FE X63E X2F7 X637 X2FF X63F


III - 9




X300 X9C0 DROPNS Door open enable X308 — SPSYN1 In spindle synchronous control

X301 X9C1 X309 — FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization complete

X302 — MELDASNET diagnosis output complete

X30A — FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization complete

X303 X9C3 NETSMP MELDASNET in sampling

X30B — SPSYN2 In spindle synchronous control 2 (D)

X304 — RPIN In remote program input X30C — — —

X305 — RPFIN Remote program input complete

X30D — — —

X306 — RPERR Remote program input error

X30E — SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

X307 — In tool ID communication

X30F — Power OFF required after

parameter change




X310 — — — X318 X9D8 In magnetic bearing ready ON

X311 — — — X319 X9D9 In magnetic bearing servo ON

X312 — — — X31A X9DA — — X313 — — — X31B X9DB — — X314 — — — X31C X9DC In magnetic bearing

warning X315 — — — X31D X9DD — — X316 — — — X31E X9DE — — X317 — — — X31F X9DF In magnetic bearing alarm




X320 — Door open enable 1-2 X328 X9E8 X321 — — — X329 X9E9 X322 X9E2 X32A X9EA X323 X9E3 X32B X9EB X324 X9E4 X32C X9EC X325 X9E5 X32D X9ED X326 X9E6 X32E X9EE X327 X9E7 X32F X9EF




III - 10




X330 X9F0 X338 X9F8 X331 X9F1 X339 X9F9 X332 X9F2 X33A X9FA X333 X9F3 X33B X9FB X334 X9F4 X33C X9FC X335 X9F5 X33D X9FD X336 X9F6 X33E X9FE X337 X9F7 X33F X9FF




X340 XA00 X348 XA08 X341 XA01 X349 XA09 X342 XA02 X34A XA0A X343 XA03 X34B XA0B X344 XA04 X34C XA0C X345 XA05 X34D XA0D X346 XA06 X34E XA0E X347 XA07 X34F XA0F






III - 11










III - 12

CNC PLC (GX Developer) Table 4-1-12 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 3rd SP

4th SP Abbrev. Signal name 3rd

SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name

X940 X950 ENB Spindle enable X948 X958 X941 X951 X949 X959 X942 X952 X94A X95A X943 X953 X94B X95B X944 X954 X94C X95C X945 X955 X94D X95D X946 X956 X94E X95E X947 X957 X94F X95F

Device No. Device No. 3rd SP



XA40 XA60 SUPP Spindle speed upper limit over

XA48 XA68 — —

XA41 XA61 SLOW Spindle speed lower limit over

XA49 XA69 — —

XA42 XA62 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal XA4A XA6A

XA43 XA63 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over

XA4B XA6B

XA44 XA64 SNGE S-analog no gear selected

XA4C XA6C

XA45 XA65 GR1 Spindle gear shift command 1

XA4D XA6D SD2 Speed detect 2

XA46 XA66 GR2 Spindle gear shift command 2

XA4E XA6E MCSA In M coil selected

XA47 XA67 — (Always "0")

XA4F XA6F Index positioning complete




XA50 XA70 2nd in-position (D) XA58 XA78 SMA Spindle ready-ON XA51 XA71 CDO Current detect XA59 XA79 SSA Spindle servo-ON XA52 XA72 VRO Speed detect XA5A XA7A SEMG Spindle emergency stop XA53 XA73 FLO In spindle alarm XA5B XA7B SSRN Spindle forward run XA54 XA74 ZSO Zero speed XA5C XA7C SSRI Spindle reverse run XA55 XA75 USO Up-to-speed XA5D XA7D Z-phase passed XA56 XA76 ORAO Spindle in-position XA5E XA7E SIMP Position loop in-position XA57 XA77 LCSA In L coil selected XA5F XA7F STLQ Torque limit



III - 13

CNC PLC (PLC4B) Table 4-1-1 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 1st sys



X180 U0 RDY1 Servo ready 1st axis X188 U8 AX1 Axis selected 1st axis X181 U1 RDY2 Servo ready 2nd axis X189 U9 AX2 Axis selected 2nd axis X182 U2 RDY3 Servo ready 3rd axis X18A UA AX3 Axis selected 3rd axis X183 U3 RDY4 Servo ready 4th axis X18B UB AX4 Axis selected 4th axis X184 U4 RDY5 Servo ready 5th axis X18C UC AX5 Axis selected 5th axis X185 U5 RDY6 Servo ready 6th axis X18D UD AX6 Axis selected 6th axis X186 U6 RDY7 Servo ready 7th axis X18E UE AX7 Axis selected 7th axis X187 U7 RDY8 Servo ready 8th axis X18F UF AX8 Axis selected 8th axis




X190 U10 MVP1 In plus motion +1st axis X198 U18 MVM1 In minus motion -1st axis

X191 U11 MVP2 In plus motion +2nd axis X199 U19 MVM2 In minus motion -2nd axis

X192 U12 MVP3 In plus motion +3rd axis X19A U1A MVM3 In minus motion -3rd axis

X193 U13 MVP4 In plus motion +4th axis X19B U1B MVM4 In minus motion -4th axis

X194 U14 MVP5 In plus motion +5th axis X19C U1C MVM5 In minus motion -5th axis

X195 U15 MVP6 In plus motion +6th axis X19D U1D MVM6 In minus motion -6th axis

X196 U16 MVP7 In plus motion +7th axis X19E U1E MVM7 In minus motion -7th axis

X197 U17 MVP8 In plus motion +8th axis X19F U1F MVM8 In minus motion -8th axis




X1A0 U20 ZP11 1st reference position reached 1st axis

X1A8 U28 ZP21 2nd reference position reached 1st axis

X1A1 U21 ZP12 2nd axis X1A9 U29 ZP22 2nd axis X1A2 U22 ZP13 3rd axis X1AA U2A ZP23 3rd axis X1A3 U23 ZP14 4th axis X1AB U2B ZP24 4th axis X1A4 U24 ZP15 5th axis X1AC U2C ZP25 5th axis X1A5 U25 ZP16 6th axis X1AD U2D ZP26 6th axis X1A6 U26 ZP17 7th axis X1AE U2E ZP27 7th axis X1A7 U27 ZP18 8th axis X1AF U2F ZP28 8th axis


III - 14




X1B0 U30 ZP31 3rd reference position reached 1st axis

X1B8 U38 ZP41 4th reference position reached 1st axis

X1B1 U31 ZP32 2nd axis X1B9 U39 ZP42 2nd axis X1B2 U32 ZP33 3rd axis X1BA U3A ZP43 3rd axis X1B3 U33 ZP34 4th axis X1BB U3B ZP44 4th axis X1B4 U34 ZP35 5th axis X1BC U3C ZP45 5th axis X1B5 U35 ZP36 6th axis X1BD U3D ZP46 6th axis X1B6 U36 ZP37 7th axis X1BE U3E ZP47 7th axis X1B7 U37 ZP38 8th axis X1BF U3F ZP48 8th axis




X1C0 U40 X1C8 U48 — — X1C1 U41 X1C9 U49 — — X1C2 U42 SSE Search & start (error) X1CA U4A — — X1C3 U43 Search & start (search) X1CB U4B — — X1C4 U44 Power OFF request

(SP regeneration circuit err)

X1CC U4C — —

X1C5 U45 X1CD U4D — — X1C6 U46 X1CE U4E — — X1C7 U47 X1CF U4F — —




Near reference position X1D0 U50 — — X1D8 U58 NR F1 1st axis

X1D1 U51 — — X1D9 U59 NR F2 2nd axis X1D2 U52 X1DA U5A NR F3 3rd axis X1D3 U53 X1DB U5B NR F4 4th axis X1D4 U54 X1DC U5C NR F5 5th axis X1D5 U55 SD2 Speed detect 2 X1DD U5D NR F6 6th axis X1D6 U56 MCSA In M coil selected X1DE U5E NR F7 7th axis X1D7 U57 Index positioning

complete X1DF U5F NR F8 8th axis



III - 15




X1E0 U60 JO In jog mode X1E8 U68 MEMO In memory mode X1E1 U61 HO In handle mode X1E9 U69 TO In tape mode X1E2 U62 SO In incremental mode X1EA U6A — — X1E3 U63 PTPO In manual random feed

mode X1EB U6B DO In MDI mode

X1E4 U64 ZRNO In reference position return mode

X1EC U6C — —

X1E5 U65 ASTO In automatic initial set mode

X1ED U6D In direct operation

X1E6 U66 In JOG-handle simultaneous mode

X1EE U6E

X1E7 U67 X1EF U6F




X1F0 U70 MA Controller ready complete X1F8 U78 DEN Motion command complete

X1F1 U71 SA Servo ready complete X1F9 U79 TIMP All axes in-position X1F2 U72 OP In auto operation "run" X1FA U7A TSMZ All axes smoothing zero X1F3 U73 STL In auto operation "start" X1FB U7B — — X1F4 U74 SPL In auto operation "pause" X1FC U7C CXFIN Manual random feed

complete X1F5 U75 RST In "reset" X1FD U7D X1F6 U76 CXN In manual random feed X1FE U7E X1F7 U77 RWD In rewind X1FF U7F In high-speed mode (G05)




X200 U80 RPN In rapid traverse X208 U88 INCH In inch unit select X201 U81 CUT In cutting feed X209 U89 DLKN In display lock X202 U82 TAP In tapping X20A U8A F1DN F1-digit commanded X203 U83 THRD In thread cutting X20B U8B TLFO In tool life management X204 U84 SYN In synchronous feed X20C U8C SUPP Spindle speed upper limit

over X205 U85 CSS In constant surface speed X20D U8D SLOW Spindle speed lower limit

over X206 U86 SKIP In skip X20E U8E TLOV Tool life over X207 U87 ZRNN In reference position

return X20F U8F BATAL Battery alarm




III - 16




X210 U90 AL1 NC alarm 1 X218 U98 F11 F1-digit No.1 X211 U91 AL2 NC alarm 2

(Servo alarm) X219 U99 F12 F1-digit No.2

X212 U92 AL3 NC alarm 3 (Program error)

X21A U9A F14 F1-digit No.4

X213 U93 AL4 NC alarm 4 (Operation error)

X21B U9B — (Always "0")

X214 U94 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal X21C U9C Waiting between part systems

X215 U95 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over

X21D U9D

X216 U96 SNGE S-analog no gear selected

X21E U9E

X217 U97 ASLE Illegal axis selected X21F U9F




M code independent output

X220 UA0 DM00

M00

X228 UA8 (EF)

X221 UA1 DM01 M01 X229 UA9 MMS Manual numerical command

X222 UA2 DM02 M02 X22A UAA — — X223 UA3 DM30 M30 X22B UAB TCP Tool change position

return complete X224 UA4 X22C UAC TCRQ New tool change X225 UA5 GR1 Spindle gear shift 1 X22D UAD — — X226 UA6 GR2 Spindle gear shift 2 X22E UAE X227 UA7 — (Always "0") X22F UAF




X230 UB0 MF1 M function strobe 1 X238 UB8 TF1 T function strobe 1 X231 UB1 MF2 M function strobe 2 X239 UB9 — — — X232 UB2 MF3 M function strobe 3 X23A UBA — — — X233 UB3 MF4 M function strobe 4 X23B UBB — — — X234 UB4 SF1 S function strobe 1 X23C UBC BF1 2nd M function strobe 1 X235 UB5 SF2 S function strobe 2 X23D UBD — — — X236 UB6 SF3 S function strobe 3 X23E UBE — — — X237 UB7 SF4 S function strobe 4 X23F UBF — — —



III - 17

CNC PLC (PLC4B) Table 4-1-5 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 1st SP



X240 UC0 Spindle 2nd in-position X248 UC8 SMA Spindle ready-ON X241 UC1 CDO Current detect X249 UC9 SSA Spindle servo-ON X242 UC2 VRO Speed detect X24A UCA SEMG Spindle emergency stop X243 UC3 FLO In spindle alarm X24B UCB SSRN Spindle forward run X244 UC4 ZSO Zero speed X24C UCC SSRI Spindle reverse run X245 UC5 USO Up-to-speed X24D UCD SZPH Z-phase passed X246 UC6 ORAO Spindle in-position X24E UCE SIMP Position loop in-position X247 UC7 LCSA In L coil selected X24F UCF STLQ Torque limit




X250 UD0 — — X258 UD8 — — X251 UD1 — — X259 UD9 — — X252 UD2 — — X25A UDA — — X253 UD3 — — X25B UDB — — X254 UD4 — — X25C UDC — — X255 UD5 — — X25D UDD — — X256 UD6 — — X25E UDE — — X257 UD7 — — X25F UDF — —




Load monitor X260 UE0 CHOP In chopping start X268 UE8 In teaching/monitor

execution output X261 UE1 CHP1 Basic position - upper

dead center point X269 UE9 Teaching mode valid

X262 UE2 CHP2 Upper dead center point - bottom point

X26A UEA Monitor mode valid

X263 UE3 CHP3 Bottom dead center point - upper point

X26B UEB Adaptive control valid

X264 UE4 CHP4 Upper dead center point - basic position

X26C UEC

X265 UE5 CHPMD In chopping mode X26D UED TRVE Tap retract possible X266 UE6 X26E UEE PCNT No. of work machining

over X267 UE7 X26F UEF ABSW Absolute position warning




III - 18




X270 UF0 PSW1 Position switch 1 X278 UF8 — — X271 UF1 PSW2 Position switch 2 X279 UF9 — — X272 UF2 PSW3 Position switch 3 X27A UFA — — X273 UF3 PSW4 Position switch 4 X27B UFB — — X274 UF4 PSW5 Position switch 5 X27C UFC — — X275 UF5 PSW6 Position switch 6 X27D UFD — — X276 UF6 PSW7 Position switch 7 X27E UFE — — X277 UF7 PSW8 Position switch 8 X27F UFF — —




Zero point initialization set completed

Zero point initialization seterror completed

X280 U100 ZSF1

1st axis

X288 U108 ZSE1

1st axis X281 U101 ZSF2 2nd axis X289 U109 ZSE2 2nd axis X282 U102 ZSF3 3rd axis X28A U10A ZSE3 3rd axis X283 U103 ZSF4 4th axis X28B U10B ZSE4 4th axis X284 U104 ZSF5 5th axis X28C U10C ZSE5 5th axis X285 U105 ZSF6 6th axis X28D U10D ZSE6 6th axis X286 U106 ZSF7 7th axis X28E U10E ZSE7 7th axis X287 U107 ZSF8 8th axis X28F U10F ZSE8 8th axis




In current limit Current limit reached X290 U110 ILI1 1st axis

X298 U118 ILA1 1st axis

X291 U111 ILI2 2nd axis X299 U119 ILA2 2nd axis X292 U112 ILI3 3rd axis X29A U11A ILA3 3rd axis X293 U113 ILI4 4th axis X29B U11B ILA4 4th axis X294 U114 ILI5 5th axis X29C U11C ILA5 5th axis X295 U115 ILI6 6th axis X29D U11D ILA6 6th axis X296 U116 ILI7 7th axis X29E U11E ILA7 7th axis X297 U117 ILI8 8th axis X29F U11F ILA8 8th axis



III - 19




X2A0 U120 In polygon mode (Spindle-NC axis)

X2A8 U128

X2A1 U121 AL5 NC alarm 5 X2A9 U129 X2A2 U122 In polygon mode

(Spindle-Spindle) X2AA U12A

X2A3 U123 Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization complete

X2AB U12B

X2A4 U124 X2AC U12C X2A5 U125 X2AD U12D X2A6 U126 X2AE U12E X2A7 U127 X2AF U12F For HVS control





Up-to-speed Unclamp command X2B0 U130 1st axis

X2B8 U138 1st axis

X2B1 U131 2nd axis X2B9 U139 2nd axis X2B2 U132 3rd axis X2BA U13A 3rd axis X2B3 U133 4th axis X2BB U13B 4th axis X2B4 U134 5th axis X2BC U13C 5th axis X2B5 U135 6th axis X2BD U13D 6th axis X2B6 U136 7th axis X2BE U13E 7th axis X2B7 U137 8th axis X2BF U13F 8th axis




X2C0 U140 RTAP In synchronized tapping selection (M command)

X2C8 U148 ENB Spindle enable

X2C1 U141 In small diameter deep hole cycle

X2C9 U149

X2C2 U142 INC high-speed retract function valid state

X2CA U14A

X2C3 U143 In INC high-speed retract function operation

X2CB U14B

X2C4 U144 Optimum pecking function valid state

X2CC U14C

X2C5 U145 In optimum pecking function operation

X2CD U14D

X2C6 U146 Load monitor function valid state

X2CE U14E

X2C7 U147 In load monitor function operation

X2CF U14F



III - 20




X2D0 U150 In barrier valid (left) X2D8 U158 X2D1 U151 In barrier valid (right) X2D9 U159 X2D2 U152 X2DA U15A X2D3 U153 X2DB U15B X2D4 U154 X2DC U15C X2D5 U155 X2DD U15D X2D6 U156 X2DE U15E X2D7 U157 X2DF U15F




In cross machining control

In synchronous/ superimposition control

X2E0 U160

1st axis

X2E8 U168

1st axis X2E1 U161 2nd axis X2E9 U169 2nd axis X2E2 U162 3rd axis X2EA U16A 3rd axis X2E3 U163 4th axis X2EB U16B 4th axis X2E4 U164 5th axis X2EC U16C 5th axis X2E5 U165 6th axis X2ED U16D 6th axis X2E6 U166 7th axis X2EE U16E 7th axis X2E7 U167 8th axis X2EF U16F 8th axis




X2F0 U170 X2F8 U178 X2F1 U171 X2F9 U179 X2F2 U172 X2FA U17A X2F3 U173 X2FB U17B X2F4 U174 X2FC U17C X2F5 U175 X2FD U17D X2F6 U176 X2FE U17E X2F7 U177 X2FF U17F


III - 21




X300 I380 DROPNS Door open enable X308 — SPSYN1 In spindle synchronous control

X301 I381 X309 — FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization complete

X302 — MELDASNET diagnosis output complete

X30A — FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization complete

X303 I383 NETSMP MELDASNET in sampling

X30B — SPSYN2 In spindle synchronous control 2 (D)

X304 — RPIN In remote program input X30C — — —

X305 — RPFIN Remote program input complete

X30D — — —

X306 — RPERR Remote program input error

X30E — SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

X307 — In tool ID communication

X30F — Power OFF required after

parameter change




X310 — — — X318 I398 In magnetic bearing ready ON

X311 — — — X319 I399 In magnetic bearing servo ON

X312 — — — X31A I39A — — X313 — — — X31B I39B — — X314 — — — X31C I39C In magnetic bearing

warning X315 — — — X31D I39D — — X316 — — — X31E I39E — — X317 — — — X31F I39F In magnetic bearing alarm




X320 — Door open enable 1-2 X328 I3A8 X321 — — — X329 I3A9 X322 I3A2 X32A I3AA X323 I3A3 X32B I3AB X324 I3A4 X32C I3AC X325 I3A5 X32D I3AD X326 I3A6 X32E I3AE X327 I3A7 X32F I3AF




III - 22




X330 I3B0 X338 I3B8 X331 I3B1 X339 I3B9 X332 I3B2 X33A I3BA X333 I3B3 X33B I3BB X334 I3B4 X33C I3BC X335 I3B5 X33D I3BD X336 I3B6 X33E I3BE X337 I3B7 X33F I3BF




X340 I3C0 X348 I3C8 X341 I3C1 X349 I3C9 X342 I3C2 X34A I3CA X343 I3C3 X34B I3CB X344 I3C4 X34C I3CC X345 I3C5 X34D I3CD X346 I3C6 X34E I3CE X347 I3C7 X34F I3CF




X350 I3D0 X358 I3D8 X351 I3D1 X359 I3D9 X352 I3D2 X35A I3DA X353 I3D3 X35B I3DB X354 I3D4 X35C I3DC X355 I3D5 X35D I3DD X356 I3D6 X35E I3DE X357 I3D7 X35F I3DF


III - 23




X360 I3E0 X368 I3E8 X361 I3E1 X369 I3E9 X362 I3E2 X36A I3EA X363 I3E3 X36B I3EB X364 I3E4 X36C I3EC X365 I3E5 X36D I3ED X366 I3E6 X36E I3EE X367 I3E7 X36F I3EF




X370 I3F0 X378 I3F8 X371 I3F1 X379 I3F9 X372 I3F2 X37A I3FA X373 I3F3 X37B I3FB X374 I3F4 X37C I3FC X375 I3F5 X37D I3FD X376 I3F6 X37E I3FE X377 I3F7 X37F I3FF


III - 24

CNC PLC (PLC4B) Table 4-1-12 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 3rd SP



I300 I310 ENB Spindle enable I308 I318 I301 I311 I309 I319 I302 I312 I30A I31A I303 I313 I30B I31B I304 I314 I30C I31C I305 I315 I30D I31D I306 I316 I30E I31E I307 I317 I30F I31F




S000 S040 SUPP Spindle speed upper limit over

S008 S048 — —

S001 S041 SLOW Spindle speed lower limit over

S009 S049 — —

S002 S042 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal S00A S04A

S003 S043 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over

S00B S04B

S004 S044 SNGE S-analog no gear selected

S00C S04C

S005 S045 GR1 Spindle gear shift command 1

S00D S04D SD2 Speed detect 2

S006 S046 GR2 Spindle gear shift command 2

S00E S04E MCSA In M coil selected

S007 S047 — (Always "0")

S00F S04F Index positioning complete




S010 S050 2nd in-position (D) S018 S058 SMA Spindle ready-ON S011 S051 CDO Current detect S019 S059 SSA Spindle servo-ON S012 S052 VRO Speed detect S01A S05A SEMG Spindle emergency stop S013 S053 FLO In spindle alarm S01B S05B SSRN Spindle forward run S014 S054 ZSO Zero speed S01C S05C SSRI Spindle reverse run S015 S055 USO Up-to-speed S01D S05D Z-phase passed S016 S056 ORAO Spindle in-position S01E S05E SIMP Position loop in-position S017 S057 LCSA In L coil selected S01F S05F STLQ Torque limit


2. PLC INTERFACE INPUT R

III - 25



CNC PLC Table 4-2-1 Device No. Device No. 1st sys

2nd sys Abbrev. Signal name

1st SP

2ndSP Abbrev. Signal name

R0 — AI1 Analog input R8 R208 R1 — AI2 Analog input R9 R209

Spindle command rotation speed input

R2 — AI3 Analog input R10 R210 R3 — AI4 Analog input R11 R211

Spindle command final data (rotation speed)

R4 — — — R12 R212 R5 — — — R13 R213

Spindle command final data (12-bit binary)

R6 — — — R14 R214 R7 — — — R15 R215




R16 — KEY IN 1 R24 R224 M code data 3 R17 — FULL KEY IN R25 R225 R18 R218 Spindle actual speed R26 R226 M code data 4 R19 R219 R27 R227 R20 R220 M code data 1 R28 R228 S code data 1 R21 R221 R29 R229 R22 R222 M code data 2 R30 R230 S code data 2 R23 R223 R31 R231




R32 R232 S code data 3 R40 R240 — — R33 R233 R41 R241 R34 R234 S code data 4 R42 R242 — — R35 R235 R43 R243 R36 R236 T code data 1 R44 R244 2nd M function data 1 R37 R237 R45 R245 R38 R238 — — R46 R246 — — R39 R239 R47 R247



III - 26




R48 R248 — — R56 — Battery drop cause R49 R249 R57 — Temperature warning

cause R50 R250 — — R58 — 5V/24V error cause R51 R251 R59 R259 Adaptive control override

output R52 R252 Load monitor warning

axis R60 R260 CNC complete standby

status output R53 R253 Load monitor alarm axis

R61 R261

R54 R254 Load monitor data alarm information

R62 R262 In initialization

R55 R255 Group in tool life management

R63 R263 Initialization incomplete




R64 — R72 — R65 — R73 —

User macro output #1032(Note 1)

R66 — R74 — User macro output #1033R67 —

Display information

R75 — R68 — PLC main scan time R76 — User macro output #1034R69 — Emergency stop cause R77 — R70 — DIO card information R78 — User macro output #1035R71 R271 Program execution state

(editing related) R79 —




Add-on (expansion) operation board input

R80 —

signal 1

R88 R288

R81 — signal 2 R89 R289

Near reference position (per reference position)

R82 — signal 3 R90 R290 Presetter contact R83 — signal 4 R91 R291 Presetter interlock R84 — M-NET OT check R92 R292 R85 R285 R93 R293 R86 — PC high-speed process

time R94 R294

R87 R287 R95 R295


: For specific manufacturers. (Note 1) #1032 to #1035 are output from the PLC, and the direction is the opposite of the other R

registers.


III - 27




R96 — R97 — R98 — R99 —

CNC software version code




R372 R373 R374 R375 R376 R377 R378 R458 — Control unit temperature R379 R459 — — —




R460 — Clock data Month/Year R472 — — — R461 — Hour/Date R473 — — —

Spindle synchronous control

R462 — Second /Minute

R474 —

Phase error outputR463 — — — R475 — Phase error 1

(degree) (including shift calc.)

R464 R468 Area signal X axis ON/OFF

R476 — Phase error 2 (degree) (excluding shift calc.)

R465 R469 Area signal Z axis ON/OFF

R477 — Phase error monitor

R466 R470 Area signal X axis (-) ON/OFF

R478 — Phase error monitor (lower limit)

R467 R471 Area signal Z axis (-) ON/OFF

R479 — Phase error monitor (upper limit)




III - 28




R480 R484 Takt time (ms) (Low) R488 — Tool ID communication error information

R481 R485 Takt time (ms) (High) R489 — MELDASNET diagnosis output cause Spindle synchronous control

R482 R486 Takt time (min) (Low) R490 —

Phase offset data R483 R487 Takt time (min) (High) R498 R499 For HVS control





R614 R616 R615 R617

Tool life usage data




R645 — — —




III - 29




R670 R680 Load monitor status R678 R688 Load monitor status R671 R681 Load monitor status R679 R689 Load monitor status R672 R682 Load monitor status R673 R683 Load monitor status R674 R684 Load monitor status R675 R685 Load monitor status R676 R686 Load monitor status R677 R687 Load monitor status




R690 — — —




III - 30




R1100 R1116 Servo deflection amount R1108 R1124 Servo deflection amount R1101 R1117 1st axis R1109 R1125 5th axis R1102 R1118 R1110 R1126 R1103 R1119

2nd axis R1111 R1127

6th axis

R1104 R1120 R1112 R1128 R1105 R1121

3rd axis R1113 R1129

7th axis

R1106 R1122 R1114 R1130 R1107 R1123

4th axis R1115 R1131

8th axis




R1350 — Synchronous control error amount 1st axis (L)

R1358 — Synchronous control error amount 5th axis (L)

R1351 — 1st axis (H) R1359 — 5th axis (H) R1352 — 2nd axis (L) R1360 — 6th axis (L) R1353 — 2nd axis (H) R1361 — 6th axis (H) R1354 — 3rd axis (L) R1362 — 7th axis (L) R1355 — 3rd axis (H) R1363 — 7th axis (H) R1356 — 4th axis (L) R1364 — 8th axis (L) R1357 — 4th axis (H) R1365 — 8th axis (H)




R1366 — Synchronous control error amount (spare) (L)

R1374 — Synchronous control error amount (spare) (L)

R1367 — (spare) (H) R1375 — (spare) (H) R1368 — (spare) (L) R1376 — (spare) (L) R1369 — (spare) (H) R1377 — (spare) (H) R1370 — (spare) (L) R1371 — (spare) (H) R1372 — (spare) (L) R1373 — (spare) (H)


III - 31




R1502 — Remote program input error information

R1503 — MELDAS-NET output




R2896 R1892 No. of work machining (current) (Low-order)

R2897 R1893 (High-order)

R2898 R1894 No. of work machining (max.) (Low-order)

R2899 R1895 (High-order)




R4500 R4520 R4508 R4528 R4501 R4521

Spindle command rotation speed input R4509 R4529

R4502 R4522 R4510 R4530 R4503 R4523

Spindle command final data (rotation speed) R4511 R4531

R4504 R4524 R4512 R4532 R4505 R4525

Spindle command final data (12-bit binary) R4513 R4533

R4506 R4526 R4514 R4534 R4507 R4527

Spindle actual speed R4515 R4535


III - 32

CNC PLC Table 4-2-8 Device No. Device No. 3rd SP



R4516 R4536 R4517 R4537 R4518 R4538 R4519 R4539

3. PLC INTERFACE OUTPUT Y

III - 33



PLC CNC (GX Developer) Table 4-3-1 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 1st sys



Control axis detach Y180 Y540 DTCH1 1st axis

Y188 Y548 * SVF1 Servo OFF 1st axis

Y181 Y541 DTCH2 2nd axis Y189 Y549 * SVF2 Servo OFF 2nd axis Y182 Y542 DTCH3 3rd axis Y18A Y54A * SVF3 Servo OFF 3rd axis Y183 Y543 DTCH4 4th axis Y18B Y54B * SVF4 Servo OFF 4th axis Y184 Y544 DTCH5 5th axis Y18C Y54C * SVF5 Servo OFF 5th axis Y185 Y545 DTCH6 6th axis Y18D Y54D * SVF6 Servo OFF 6th axis Y186 Y546 DTCH7 7th axis Y18E Y54E * SVF7 Servo OFF 7th axis Y187 Y547 DTCH8 8th axis Y18F Y54F * SVF8 Servo OFF 8th axis



sys 2ndsys Abbrev. Signal name

External deceleration Y190 Y550 MI1 Mirror image 1st axis Y198 Y558 * +EDT1 +1st axis

Y191 Y551 MI2 Mirror image 2nd axis Y199 Y559 * +EDT2 +2nd axis Y192 Y552 MI3 Mirror image 3rd axis Y19A Y55A * +EDT3 +3rd axis Y193 Y553 MI4 Mirror image 4th axis Y19B Y55B * +EDT4 +4th axis Y194 Y554 MI5 Mirror image 5th axis Y19C Y55C * +EDT5 +5th axis Y195 Y555 MI6 Mirror image 6th axis Y19D Y55D * +EDT6 +6th axis Y196 Y556 MI7 Mirror image 7th axis Y19E Y55E * +EDT7 +7th axis Y197 Y557 MI8 Mirror image 8th axis Y19F Y55F * +EDT8 +8th axis




External deceleration Auto interlock Y1A0 Y560 * -EDT1 -1st axis

Y1A8 Y568 * +AIT1 +1st axis

Y1A1 Y561 * -EDT2 -2nd axis Y1A9 Y569 * +AIT2 +2nd axis Y1A2 Y562 * -EDT3 -3rd axis Y1AA Y56A * +AIT3 +3rd axis Y1A3 Y563 * -EDT4 -4th axis Y1AB Y56B * +AIT4 +4th axis Y1A4 Y564 * -EDT5 -5th axis Y1AC Y56C * +AIT5 +5th axis Y1A5 Y565 * -EDT6 -6th axis Y1AD Y56D * +AIT6 +6th axis Y1A6 Y566 * -EDT7 -7th axis Y1AE Y56E * +AIT7 +7th axis Y1A7 Y567 * -EDT8 -8th axis Y1AF Y56F * +AIT8 +8th axis


III - 34




Auto interlock Manual interlock Y1B0 Y570 * -AIT1 -1st axis

Y1B8 Y578 * +MIT1 +1st axis

Y1B1 Y571 * -AIT2 -2nd axis Y1B9 Y579 * +MIT2 +2nd axis Y1B2 Y572 * -AIT3 -3rd axis Y1BA Y57A * +MIT3 +3rd axis Y1B3 Y573 * -AIT4 -4th axis Y1BB Y57B * +MIT4 +4th axis Y1B4 Y574 * -AIT5 -5th axis Y1BC Y57C * +MIT5 +5th axis Y1B5 Y575 * -AIT6 -6th axis Y1BD Y57D * +MIT6 +6th axis Y1B6 Y576 * -AIT7 -7th axis Y1BE Y57E * +MIT7 +7th axis Y1B7 Y577 * -AIT8 -8th axis Y1BF Y57F * +MIT8 +8th axis




Manual interlock Auto machine lock Y1C0 Y580 * -MIT1 -1st axis

Y1C8 Y588 AMLK1 1st axis

Y1C1 Y581 * -MIT2 -2nd axis Y1C9 Y589 AMLK2 2nd axis Y1C2 Y582 * -MIT3 -3rd axis Y1CA Y58A AMLK3 3rd axis Y1C3 Y583 * -MIT4 -4th axis Y1CB Y58B AMLK4 4th axis Y1C4 Y584 * -MIT5 -5th axis Y1CC Y58C AMLK5 5th axis Y1C5 Y585 * -MIT6 -6th axis Y1CD Y58D AMLK6 6th axis Y1C6 Y586 * -MIT7 -7th axis Y1CE Y58E AMLK7 7th axis Y1C7 Y587 * -MIT8 -8th axis Y1CF Y58F AMLK8 8th axis




Manual machine lock Feed axis select Y1D0 Y590 MMLK1 1st axis

Y1D8 Y598 +J1 +1st axis

Y1D1 Y591 MMLK2 2nd axis Y1D9 Y599 +J2 +2nd axis Y1D2 Y592 MMLK3 3rd axis Y1DA Y59A +J3 +3rd axis Y1D3 Y593 MMLK4 4th axis Y1DB Y59B +J4 +4th axis Y1D4 Y594 MMLK5 5th axis Y1DC Y59C +J5 +5th axis Y1D5 Y595 MMLK6 6th axis Y1DD Y59D +J6 +6th axis Y1D6 Y596 MMLK7 7th axis Y1DE Y59E +J7 +7th axis Y1D7 Y597 MMLK8 8th axis Y1DF Y59F +J8 +8th axis


III - 35




Feed axis select Y1E0 Y5A0 -J1 -1st axis

Y1E8 Y5A8 CHPS Chopping

Y1E1 Y5A1 -J2 -2nd axis Y1E9 Y5A9 Y1E2 Y5A2 -J3 -3rd axis Y1EA Y5AA Y1E3 Y5A3 -J4 -4th axis Y1EB Y5AB Y1E4 Y5A4 -J5 -5th axis Y1EC Y5AC Y1E5 Y5A5 -J6 -6th axis Y1ED Y5AD Y1E6 Y5A6 -J7 -7th axis Y1EE Y5AE Y1E7 Y5A7 -J8 -8th axis Y1EF Y5AF




Y1F0 Y5B0 MAE1 Manual/Auto simultaneous valid 1st axis

Y1F8 Y5B8 — —

Y1F1 Y5B1 MAE2 2nd axis Y1F9 Y5B9 Y1F2 Y5B2 MAE3 3rd axis Y1FA Y5BA RSST Search & start Y1F3 Y5B3 MAE4 4th axis Y1FB Y5BB Magazine index check

valid (ATC high-speed)

Y1F4 Y5B4 MAE5 5th axis Y1FC Y5BC Spindle orientation complete standby valid (ATC high-speed)

Y1F5 Y5B5 MAE6 6th axis Y1FD Y5BD Y1F6 Y5B6 MAE7 7th axis Y1FE Y5BE Y1F7 Y5B7 MAE8 8th axis Y1FF Y5BF




Y200 Y5C0 ZSL1 Reference position select 1

Y208 Y5C8 J Jog mode

Y201 Y5C1 ZSL2 Reference position select 2

Y209 Y5C9 H Handle mode

Y202 Y5C2 Y20A Y5CA S Incremental mode Y203 Y5C3 Y20B Y5CB PTP Manual random feed

mode Y204 Y5C4 Y20C Y5CC ZRN Reference position return

mode Y205 Y5C5 Y20D Y5CD AST Auto initialization mode Y206 Y5C6 Y20E Y5CE Y207 Y5C7 Reference position select

method Y20F Y5CF



III - 36




Y210 Y5D0 MEM Memory mode Y218 Y5D8 ST Auto operation "start" command

Y211 Y5D1 T Tape mode Y219 Y5D9 * SP Auto operation "pause" command

Y212 Y5D2 — — Y21A Y5DA SBK Single block Y213 Y5D3 D MDI mode Y21B Y5DB * BSL Block start interlock Y214 Y5D4 — — Y21C Y5DC * CSL Cutting block start

interlock Y215 Y5D5 Direct operation mode Y21D Y5DD DRN Dry run Y216 Y5D6 Y21E Y5DE Y217 Y5D7 Y21F Y5DF ERD Error detect




Y220 Y5E0 NRST1 NC reset 1 Y228 Y5E8 TLM Tool length measurement 1

Y221 Y5E1 NRST2 NC reset 2 Y229 Y5E9 TLMS Tool length measurement 2 (L system)

Y222 Y5E2 RRW Reset & rewind Y22A Y5EA Synchronization correction mode

Y223 Y5E3 * CDZ Chamfering Y22B Y5EB PRST Program restart Y224 Y5E4 ARST Auto restart Y22C Y5EC PB Playback Y225 Y5E5 GFIN Gear shift complete Y22D Y5ED UIT Macro interrupt Y226 Y5E6 FIN1 M function finish 1 Y22E Y5EE RT Rapid traverse Y227 Y5E7 FIN2 M function finish 2 Y22F Y5EF — —




Y230 Y5F0 ABS Manual absolute Y238 — * KEY1 Data protect key 1 Y231 Y5F1 DLK Display lock Y239 — * KEY2 Data protect key 2

Y232 Y5F2 F1-digit speed change valid Y23A — * KEY3 Data protect key 3

Y233 Y5F3 CRQ Recalculation request Y23B — — — — Y234 — RHD1 Integration time input 1 Y23C

— PDISP Program display during

operation Y235 — RHD2 Integration time input 2 Y23D Y5FD Inclined axis control validY236 Y5F6 PIT PLC interrupt signal Y23E Y5FE Inclined axis control:

No Z axis compensationY237 Y5F7 Y23F Y5FF BDT1 Optional block skip




III - 37




Y240 Y600 — — — Y248 Y608 HS11 Y241 Y601 — — — Y249 Y609 HS12 1st handle axis No. Y242 Y602 — — — Y24A Y60A HS14 Y243 Y603 — — — Y24B Y60B HS18 Y244 Y604 — — — Y24C Y60C HS116 Y245 Y605 — — — Y24D Y60D Y246 Y606 — — — Y24E Y60E Y247 Y607 — — — Y24F Y60F HS1S 1st handle valid




Y250 Y610 HS21 Y258 Y618 HS31 Y251 Y611 HS22 2nd handle axis No. Y259 Y619 HS32 3rd handle axis No. Y252 Y612 HS24 Y25A Y61A HS34 Y253 Y613 HS28 Y25B Y61B HS38 Y254 Y614 HS216 Y25C Y61C HS316 Y255 Y615 Y25D Y61D Y256 Y616 Y25E Y61E Y257 Y617 HS2S 2nd handle valid Y25F Y61F HS3S 3rd handle valid




Manual feedrate B valid Y260 Y620 FBE1 1st axis

Y268 Y628 CX11

Y261 Y621 FBE2 2nd axis Y269 Y629 CX12 Y262 Y622 FBE3 3rd axis Y26A Y62A CX14 Y263 Y623 FBE4 4th axis Y26B Y62B CX18 Y264 Y624 FBE5 5th axis Y26C Y62C CX116

Manual random feed 1st axis No.

Y265 Y625 FBE6 6th axis Y26D Y62D (Always "0") Y266 Y626 FBE7 7th axis Y26E Y62E (Always "0") Y267 Y627 FBE8 8th axis Y26F Y62F CX1S Manual random feed

1st axis valid



III - 38




Y270 Y630 CX21 Y278 Y638 CX31 Y271 Y631 CX22 Y279 Y639 CX32 Y272 Y632 CX24 Y27A Y63A CX34 Y273 Y633 CX28 Y27B Y63B CX38 Y274 Y634 CX216

Manual random feed 2nd axis No.

Y27C Y63C CX316

Manual random feed 3rd axis No.

Y275 Y635 (Always "0") Y27D Y63D (Always "0") Y276 Y636 (Always "0") Y27E Y63E (Always "0") Y277 Y637 CX2S Manual random feed

2nd axis valid Y27F Y63F CX3S Manual random feed

3rd axis valid




Y280 Y640 CXS1 Smoothing off Y288 Y648 SP1 Spindle override 1 Y281 Y641 CXS2 Axis independent Y289 Y649 SP2 Spindle override 2 Y282 Y642 CXS3 EX.F/MODAL.F Y28A Y64A SP4 Spindle override 4 Y283 Y643 CXS4 G0/G1 Y28B Y64B Y284 Y644 CXS5 MC/WK Y28C Y64C Y285 Y645 CXS6 ABS/INC Y28D Y64D Y286 Y646 *CXS7 Stop Y28E Y64E Y287 Y647 CXS8 Strobe Y28F Y64F SPS Spindle override method

select




Y290 Y650 GI1 Spindle gear select 1 Y298 Y658 OVC Override cancel Y291 Y651 GI2 Spindle gear select 2 Y299 Y659 OVSL Manual override valid Y292 Y652 — (Always "0") Y29A Y65A AFL Miscellaneous function

lock Y293 Y653 Y29B Y65B Y294 Y654 SSTP Spindle stop Y29C Y65C TRV Tap retract Y295 Y655 SSFT Spindle gear shift Y29D Y65D RTN Reference position retractY296 Y656 SORC Oriented spindle speed

command Y29E Y65E

Y297 Y657 Y29F Y65F QEMG PLC emergency stop


III - 39




Y2A0 Y660 * FV1 Y2A8 Y668 ROV1 Y2A1 Y661 * FV2 Cutting feedrate override Y2A9 Y669 ROV2

Rapid traverse speed override

Y2A2 Y662 * FV4 Y2AA Y66A Y2A3 Y663 * FV8 Y2AB Y66B Y2A4 Y664 * FV16 Y2AC Y66C Y2A5 Y665 Y2AD Y66D Y2A6 Y666 FV2E 2nd cutting feedrate

override valid Y2AE Y66E

Y2A7 Y667 FVS Cutting feedrade override method select

Y2AF Y66F ROVS Rapid traverse speed override method select




Y2B0 Y670 * JV1 Y2B8 Y678 PCF1 Feedrate least incrementY2B1 Y671 * JV2 Manual feedrate Y2B9 Y679 PCF2

Y2B2 Y672 * JV4 Y2BA Y67A JSYN Jog synchronous feed valid

Y2B3 Y673 * JV8 Y2BB Y67B JHAN Jog•handle synchronous

Y2B4 Y674 * JV16 Y2BC Y67C Each axis manual feedrate B valid

Y2B5 Y675 Y2BD Y67D — — Y2B6 Y676 Y2BE Y67E — — Y2B7 Y677 JVS Manual feedrate method

select Y2BF Y67F — —




Y2C0 Y680 MP1 Y2C8 Y688 TAL1 Tool alarm 1/Tool-skip tool

Y2C1 Y681 MP2 Y2C9 Y689 TAL2 Tool alarm 2 (M system) Y2C2 Y682 MP4

Handle/Incremental feed multiplication

Y2CA Y68A TCEF Data count valid Y2C3 Y683 Y2CB Y68B TLFI Tool life management

input (M system) Y2C4 Y684 Y2CC Y68C TRST Tool change reset

(L system) Y2C5 Y685 Y2CD Y68D Y2C6 Y686 — — Y2CE Y68E Y2C7 Y687 MPS Handle/Incremental feed

multiplication method select

Y2CF Y68F



III - 40

PLC CNC (GX Developer) Table 4-3-8 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 1st SP



Y2D0 Y690 SRN Spindle forward run start Y2D8 Y698 Y2D1 Y691 SRI Spindle reverse run start Y2D9 Y699 Y2D2 Y692 TL1 Torque limit 1 Y2DA Y69A C axis gain L Y2D3 Y693 TL2 Torque limit 2 Y2DB Y69B C axis gain H Y2D4 Y694 WRN Spindle forward run index Y2DC Y69C C axis zero point return Y2D5 Y695 WRI Spindle reverse run index Y2DD Y69D Y2D6 Y696 ORC Spindle orient command Y2DE Y69E LRSM M coil selection Y2D7 Y697 LRSL L coil selection Y2DF Y69F




Y2E0 — * PCD1 PLC axis near point detect 1st axis

Y2E8 — SPSYC Spindle synchronization cancel

Y2E1 — * PCD2 PLC axis near point detect 2nd axis

Y2E9 — SPCMPC

Chuck close

Y2E2 — — — Y2EA — Y2E3 — — — Y2EB — Y2E4 — PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid Y2EC — Y2E5 — PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid Y2ED — Y2E6 — PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid Y2EE — Y2E7 Y6A7 Y2EF —




Y2F0 Y6B0 — — Y2F8 — CRTFN CRT changeover complete

Y2F1 Y6B1 — — Y2F9 Y6B9 CSRON Screen display request Y2F2 Y6B2 — — Y2FA Y6BA Y2F3 Y6B3 — — Y2FB Y6BB NETST

P MELDASNET sampling stop

Y2F4 Y6B4 — — Y2FC — SMPTRG

Data sampling trigger

Y2F5 Y6B5 — — Y2FD — MTBT PLC snapshot Y2F6 Y6B6 — — Y2FE — DISP1 Display changeover $1 Y2F7 Y6B7 — — Y2FF — DISP2 Display changeover $2



III - 41




Y300 Y6C0 AZS1 Zero point initialization setmode 1st axis

Y308 Y6C8 ZST1 Zero point initialization set start 1st axis

Y301 Y6C1 AZS2 2nd axis Y309 Y6C9 ZST2 2nd axisY302 Y6C2 AZS3 3rd axis Y30A Y6CA ZST3 3rd axis Y303 Y6C3 AZS4 4th axis Y30B Y6CB ZST4 4th axis Y304 Y6C4 AZS5 5th axis Y30C Y6CC ZST5 5th axis Y305 Y6C5 AZS6 6th axis Y30D Y6CD ZST6 6th axis Y306 Y6C6 AZS7 7th axis Y30E Y6CE ZST7 7th axis Y307 Y6C7 AZS8 8th axis Y30F Y6CF ZST8 8th axis




Current limit changeoverY310 Y6D0 Current limit mode 1 Y318 Y6D8 1st axis

Y311 Y6D1 Current limit mode 2 Y319 Y6D9

2nd axis

Y312 Y6D2 (Same as above, spare) Y31A Y6DA

3rd axis

Y313 Y6D3 LDWT Load monitor Teaching/ monitor execution

Y31B Y6DB

4th axis

Y314 Y6D4 Load monitor Teaching mode select

Y31C Y6DC

5th axis

Y315 Y6D5 Load monitor Monitor mode select

Y31D Y6DD

6th axis

Y316 Y6D6 Load monitor Alarm reset

Y31E Y6DE

7th axis

Y317 Y6D7 Load monitor Warning reset

Y31F Y6DF

8th axis




Droop release request Y320 Y6E0 1st axis

Y328 Y6E8 — —

Y321 Y6E1 2nd axis Y329 Y6E9 Ext. workpiece coordinate measurement 2nd axis

Y322 Y6E2 3rd axis Y32A Y6EA — — Y323 Y6E3 4th axis Y32B Y6EB — — Y324 Y6E4 5th axis Y32C Y6EC — — Y325 Y6E5 6th axis Y32D Y6ED — — Y326 Y6E6 7th axis Y32E Y6EE — — Y327 Y6E7 8th axis Y32F Y6EF — —




III - 42




Control axis detach 2 Unclamp complete Y330 Y6F0 DTCH21 1st axis

Y338 Y6F8 1st axis

Y331 Y6F1 DTCH22 2nd axis Y339 Y6F9 2nd axis

Y332 Y6F2 DTCH23 3rd axis Y33A Y6FA 3rd axis

Y333 Y6F3 DTCH24 4th axis Y33B Y6FB 4th axis

Y334 Y6F4 DTCH25 5th axis Y33C Y6FC 5th axis

Y335 Y6F5 DTCH26 6th axis Y33D Y6FD 6th axis

Y336 Y6F6 DTCH27 7th axis Y33E Y6FE 7th axis

Y337 Y6F7 DTCH28 8th axis Y33F Y6FF 8th axis




Y340 Y700 Each axis reference position return

1st axis

Y348 Y708 * ZRIT 2nd reference position return interlock

Y341 Y701

2nd axis

Y349 Y709 Adaptive control execution

Y342 Y702

3rd axis Y34A Y70A Small diameter

deep hole drilling cycle Y343 Y703

4th axis

Y34B Y70B — —

Y344 Y704

5th axis

Y34C Y70C INC high-speed retract function valid

Y345 Y705

6th axis

Y34D Y70D Optimum pecking function valid

Y346 Y706

7th axis

Y34E Y70E Load monitor function valid

Y347 Y707

8th axis

Y34F Y70F




Y350 Y710 SWS Spindle command selection

Y358 Y718 Waiting ignore

Y351 Y711 Y359 Y719 Spindle-spindle polygon cancel

Y352 Y712 Y35A Y71A Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal

Y353 Y713 Y35B Y71B Spindle OFF mode Y354 Y714 Y35C Y71C Y355 Y715 Y35D Y71D Y356 Y716 Y35E Y71E Y357 Y717 MPCSL PLC coil changeover Y35F Y71F




III - 43




Y360 Y720 Cross machining control request 1st axis

Y368 Y728

Y361 Y721 2nd axis Y369 Y729 Y362 Y722 3rd axis Y36A Y72A Y363 Y723 4th axis Y36B Y72B Y364 Y724 5th axis Y36C Y72C Y365 Y725 6th axis Y36D Y72D Y366 Y726 7th axis Y36E Y72E Y367 Y727 8th axis Y36F Y72F




Y370 Y730 Position switch 1 interlock Y378 Y738 Barrier valid (left) Y371 Y731 Position switch 2 interlock Y379 Y739 Barrier valid (right) Y372 Y732 Position switch 3 interlock Y37A Y73A Tool presetter sub-side

valid Y373 Y733 Position switch 4 interlock Y37B Y73B Y374 Y734 Position switch 5 interlock Y37C Y73C Y375 Y735 Position switch 6 interlock Y37D Y73D Y376 Y736 Position switch 7 interlock Y37E Y73E Y377 Y737 Position switch 8 interlock Y37F Y73F




Y380 — Door open Y388 YCC8 Magnetic bearing servo ON command

Y381 YCC1 Door open II Y389 YCC9 Magnetic bearing tool unclamp

Y382 YCC2 Door open signal input (spindle speed monitor)

Y38A YCCA — —

Y383 YCC3 Door interlock spindle speed clamp

Y38B YCCB — —

Y384 — RPN Remote program input start

Y38C YCCC — —

Y385 — Tool ID data read Y38D YCCD — — Y386 — Tool ID data write Y38E YCCE — — Y387 — Tool ID data erase Y38F YCCF — —




III - 44




Y390 — Tool IC new read Y398 — SPSY Spindle synchronous control

Y391 — Tool IC exchange read Y399 — SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control

Y392 — Y39A — Spindle synchronous rotation direction

Y393 — Y39B — SSPHM Phase shift calculation request

Y394 — Y39C — SSPHF Phase offset request Y395 — — — Y39D — SPDRP

O Error temporary cancel

Y396 — Y39E — Y397 — — — Y39F —




Y3A0 YCE0 PLC skip 1 Y3A8 YCE8 SYNC1 Synchronous control request 1st axis

Y3A1 YCE1 PLC skip 2 Y3A9 YCE9 SYNC2 2nd axis Y3A2 YCE2 PLC skip 3 Y3AA YCEA SYNC3 3rd axis Y3A3 YCE3 PLC skip 4 Y3AB YCEB SYNC4 4th axis Y3A4 YCE4 PLC skip 5 Y3AC YCEC SYNC5 5th axis Y3A5 YCE5 PLC skip 6 Y3AD YCED SYNC6 6th axis Y3A6 YCE6 PLC skip 7 Y3AE YCEE SYNC7 7th axis Y3A7 YCE7 PLC skip 8 Y3AF YCEF SYNC8 8th axis




Y3B0 YCF0 PILE1 Superimposition control request 1st axis

Y3B8 — Door open II 1-2

Y3B1 YCF1 PILE2 2nd axis Y3B9 — — — Y3B2 YCF2 PILE3 3rd axis Y3BA — Door open signal input 1-2Y3B3 YCF3 PILE4 4th axis Y3BB — — — Y3B4 YCF4 PILE5 5th axis Y3BC YCFC Y3B5 YCF5 PILE6 6th axis Y3BD YCFD Y3B6 YCF6 PILE7 7th axis Y3BE YCFE Y3B7 YCF7 PILE8 8th axis Y3BF YCFF




III - 45




Y3C0 YD00 Y3C8 YD08 Y3C1 YD01 Y3C9 YD09 Y3C2 YD02 Y3CA YD0A Y3C3 YD03 Y3CB YD0B Y3C4 YD04 Y3CC YD0C Y3C5 YD05 Y3CD YD0D Y3C6 YD06 Y3CE YD0E Y3C7 YD07 Y3CF YD0F




Y3D0 YD10 Y3D8 YD18 Y3D1 YD11 Y3D9 YD19 Y3D2 YD12 Y3DA YD1A Y3D3 YD13 Y3DB YD1B Y3D4 YD14 Y3DC YD1C Y3D5 YD15 Y3DD YD1D Y3D6 YD16 Y3DE YD1E Y3D7 YD17 Y3DF YD1F




Y3E0 YD20 Y3E8 YD28 Y3E1 YD21 Y3E9 YD29 Y3E2 YD22 Y3EA YD2A Y3E3 YD23 Y3EB YD2B Y3E4 YD24 Y3EC YD2C Y3E5 YD25 Y3ED YD2D Y3E6 YD26 Y3EE YD2E Y3E7 YD27 Y3EF YD2F




Y3F0 YD30 Y3F8 YD38 Y3F1 YD31 Y3F9 YD39 Y3F2 YD32 Y3FA YD3A Y3F3 YD33 Y3FB YD3B Y3F4 YD34 Y3FC YD3C Y3F5 YD35 Y3FD YD3D Y3F6 YD36 Y3FE YD3E Y3F7 YD37 Y3FF YD3F


III - 46

PLC CNC (GX Developer) Table 4-3-14 (GX Developer) Device No. Device No. 3rd SP



YD40 YD50 SWS Spindle selection YD48 YD58 GFIN Gear shift complete YD41 YD51 YD49 YD59 YD42 YD52 YD4A YD5A YD43 YD53 YD4B YD5B YD44 YD54 YD4C YD5C YD45 YD55 YD4D YD5D YD46 YD56 YD4E YD5E YD47 YD57 MPCSL PLC coil changeover YD4F YD5F




YD80 YDA0 SP1 Spindle override 1 YD88 YDA8 GI1 Spindle gear selection input 1

YD81 YDA1 SP2 Spindle override 2 YD89 YDA9 GI2 Spindle gear selection input 2

YD82 YDA2 SP4 Spindle override 4 YD8A YDAA — (Always "0")

YD83 YDA3 YD8B YDAB YD84 YDA4 YD8C YDAC SSTP Spindle stop YD85 YDA5 YD8D YDAD SSFT Spindle gear shift YD86 YDA6 YD8E YDAE SORC Oriented spindle speed

command YD87 YDA7 SPS Spindle override method

select YD8F YDAF




YD90 YDB0 SRN Spindle forward run start YD98 YDB8 YD91 YDB1 SRI Spindle reverse run start YD99 YDB9 YD92 YDB2 TL1 Torque limit 1 YD9A YDBA C axis gain L YD93 YDB3 TL2 Torque limit 2 YD9B YDBB C axis gain H YD94 YDB4 WRN Spindle forward run index YD9C YDBC C axis reference position

return YD95 YDB5 WRI Spindle reverse run index YD9D YDBD YD96 YDB6 ORC Spindle orientation

command YD9E YDBE LRSM M coil selection

YD97 YDB7 LRSL L coil selection YD9F YDBF


III - 47

PLC CNC (PLC4B) Table 4-3-1 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 1st sys



Control axis detach Y180 W0 DTCH1 1st axis

Y188 W8 * SVF1 Servo OFF 1st axis

Y181 W1 DTCH2 2nd axis Y189 W9 * SVF2 Servo OFF 2nd axis Y182 W2 DTCH3 3rd axis Y18A WA * SVF3 Servo OFF 3rd axis Y183 W3 DTCH4 4th axis Y18B WB * SVF4 Servo OFF 4th axis Y184 W4 DTCH5 5th axis Y18C WC * SVF5 Servo OFF 5th axis Y185 W5 DTCH6 6th axis Y18D WD * SVF6 Servo OFF 6th axis Y186 W6 DTCH7 7th axis Y18E WE * SVF7 Servo OFF 7th axis Y187 W7 DTCH8 8th axis Y18F WF * SVF8 Servo OFF 8th axis




External deceleration Y190 W10 MI1 Mirror image 1st axis Y198 W18 * +EDT1 +1st axis

Y191 W11 MI2 Mirror image 2nd axis Y199 W19 * +EDT2 +2nd axis Y192 W12 MI3 Mirror image 3rd axis Y19A W1A * +EDT3 +3rd axis Y193 W13 MI4 Mirror image 4th axis Y19B W1B * +EDT4 +4th axis Y194 W14 MI5 Mirror image 5th axis Y19C W1C * +EDT5 +5th axis Y195 W15 MI6 Mirror image 6th axis Y19D W1D * +EDT6 +6th axis Y196 W16 MI7 Mirror image 7th axis Y19E W1E * +EDT7 +7th axis Y197 W17 MI8 Mirror image 8th axis Y19F W1F * +EDT8 +8th axis




External deceleration Auto interlock Y1A0 W20 * -EDT1 -1st axis

Y1A8 W28 * +AIT1 +1st axis

Y1A1 W21 * -EDT2 -2nd axis Y1A9 W29 * +AIT2 +2nd axis Y1A2 W22 * -EDT3 -3rd axis Y1AA W2A * +AIT3 +3rd axis Y1A3 W23 * -EDT4 -4th axis Y1AB W2B * +AIT4 +4th axis Y1A4 W24 * -EDT5 -5th axis Y1AC W2C * +AIT5 +5th axis Y1A5 W25 * -EDT6 -6th axis Y1AD W2D * +AIT6 +6th axis Y1A6 W26 * -EDT7 -7th axis Y1AE W2E * +AIT7 +7th axis Y1A7 W27 * -EDT8 -8th axis Y1AF W2F * +AIT8 +8th axis


III - 48




Auto interlock Manual interlock Y1B0 W30 * -AIT1 -1st axis

Y1B8 W38 * +MIT1 +1st axis

Y1B1 W31 * -AIT2 -2nd axis Y1B9 W39 * +MIT2 +2nd axis Y1B2 W32 * -AIT3 -3rd axis Y1BA W3A * +MIT3 +3rd axis Y1B3 W33 * -AIT4 -4th axis Y1BB W3B * +MIT4 +4th axis Y1B4 W34 * -AIT5 -5th axis Y1BC W3C * +MIT5 +5th axis Y1B5 W35 * -AIT6 -6th axis Y1BD W3D * +MIT6 +6th axis Y1B6 W36 * -AIT7 -7th axis Y1BE W3E * +MIT7 +7th axis Y1B7 W37 * -AIT8 -8th axis Y1BF W3F * +MIT8 +8th axis




Manual interlock Auto machine lock Y1C0 W40 * -MIT1 -1st axis

Y1C8 W48 AMLK1 1st axis

Y1C1 W41 * -MIT2 -2nd axis Y1C9 W49 AMLK2 2nd axis Y1C2 W42 * -MIT3 -3rd axis Y1CA W4A AMLK3 3rd axis Y1C3 W43 * -MIT4 -4th axis Y1CB W4B AMLK4 4th axis Y1C4 W44 * -MIT5 -5th axis Y1CC W4C AMLK5 5th axis Y1C5 W45 * -MIT6 -6th axis Y1CD W4D AMLK6 6th axis Y1C6 W46 * -MIT7 -7th axis Y1CE W4E AMLK7 7th axis Y1C7 W47 * -MIT8 -8th axis Y1CF W4F AMLK8 8th axis




Manual machine lock Feed axis select Y1D0 W50 MMLK1 1st axis

Y1D8 W58 +J1 +1st axis

Y1D1 W51 MMLK2 2nd axis Y1D9 W59 +J2 +2nd axis Y1D2 W52 MMLK3 3rd axis Y1DA W5A +J3 +3rd axis Y1D3 W53 MMLK4 4th axis Y1DB W5B +J4 +4th axis Y1D4 W54 MMLK5 5th axis Y1DC W5C +J5 +5th axis Y1D5 W55 MMLK6 6th axis Y1DD W5D +J6 +6th axis Y1D6 W56 MMLK7 7th axis Y1DE W5E +J7 +7th axis Y1D7 W57 MMLK8 8th axis Y1DF W5F +J8 +8th axis


III - 49




Feed axis select Y1E0 W60 -J1 -1st axis

Y1E8 W68 CHPS Chopping

Y1E1 W61 -J2 -2nd axis Y1E9 W69 Y1E2 W62 -J3 -3rd axis Y1EA W6A Y1E3 W63 -J4 -4th axis Y1EB W6B Y1E4 W64 -J5 -5th axis Y1EC W6C Y1E5 W65 -J6 -6th axis Y1ED W6D Y1E6 W66 -J7 -7th axis Y1EE W6E Y1E7 W67 -J8 -8th axis Y1EF W6F




Y1F0 W70 MAE1 Manual/Auto simultaneous valid

1st axis

Y1F8 W78 — —

Y1F1 W71 MAE2 2nd axis Y1F9 W79 Y1F2 W72 MAE3 3rd axis Y1FA W7A RSST Search & start Y1F3 W73 MAE4 4th axis Y1FB W7B Magazine index check

valid (ATC high-speed)

Y1F4 W74 MAE5 5th axis Y1FC W7C Spindle orientation complete standby valid (ATC high-speed)

Y1F5 W75 MAE6 6th axis Y1FD W7D Y1F6 W76 MAE7 7th axis Y1FE W7E Y1F7 W77 MAE8 8th axis Y1FF W7F




Y200 W80 ZSL1 Reference position select 1

Y208 W88 J Jog mode

Y201 W81 ZSL2 Reference position select 2

Y209 W89 H Handle mode

Y202 W82 Y20A W8A S Incremental mode Y203 W83 Y20B W8B PTP Manual random feed

mode Y204 W84 Y20C W8C ZRN Reference position return

mode Y205 W85 Y20D W8D AST Auto initialization mode Y206 W86 Y20E W8E Y207 W87 Reference position select

method Y20F W8F



III - 50




Y210 W90 MEM Memory mode Y218 W98 ST Auto operation "start" command

Y211 W91 T Tape mode Y219 W99 * SP Auto operation "pause" command

Y212 W92 — — Y21A W9A SBK Single block Y213 W93 D MDI mode Y21B W9B * BSL Block start interlock Y214 W94 — — Y21C W9C * CSL Cutting block start

interlock Y215 W95 Direct operation mode Y21D W9D DRN Dry run Y216 W96 Y21E W9E Y217 W97 Y21F W9F ERD Error detect




Y220 WA0 NRST1 NC reset 1 Y228 WA8 TLM Tool length measurement 1

Y221 WA1 NRST2 NC reset 2 Y229 WA9 TLMS Tool length measurement 2 (L system)

Y222 WA2 RRW Reset & rewind Y22A WAA Synchronization correction mode

Y223 WA3 * CDZ Chamfering Y22B WAB PRST Program restart Y224 WA4 ARST Auto restart Y22C WAC PB Playback Y225 WA5 GFIN Gear shift complete Y22D WAD UIT Macro interrupt Y226 WA6 FIN1 M function finish 1 Y22E WAE RT Rapid traverse Y227 WA7 FIN2 M function finish 2 Y22F WAF — —




Y230 WB0 ABS Manual absolute Y238 — * KEY1 Data protect key 1 Y231 WB1 DLK Display lock Y239 — * KEY2 Data protect key 2

Y232 WB2 F1-digit speed change valid Y23A — * KEY3 Data protect key 3

Y233 WB3 CRQ Recalculation request Y23B — — — — Y234 — RHD1 Integration time input 1 Y23C

— PDISP Program display during

operation Y235 — RHD2 Integration time input 2 Y23D WBD Inclined axis control validY236 WB6 PIT PLC interrupt signal Y23E WBE Inclined axis control:

No Z axis compensationY237 WB7 Y23F WBF BDT1 Optional block skip




III - 51




Y240 WC0 — — — Y248 WC8 HS11 Y241 WC1 — — — Y249 WC9 HS12 1st handle axis No. Y242 WC2 — — — Y24A WCA HS14 Y243 WC3 — — — Y24B WCB HS18 Y244 WC4 — — — Y24C WCC HS116 Y245 WC5 — — — Y24D WCD Y246 WC6 — — — Y24E WCE Y247 WC7 — — — Y24F WCF HS1S 1st handle valid




Y250 WD0 HS21 Y258 WD8 HS31 Y251 WD1 HS22 2nd handle axis No. Y259 WD9 HS32 3rd handle axis No. Y252 WD2 HS24 Y25A WDA HS34 Y253 WD3 HS28 Y25B WDB HS38 Y254 WD4 HS216 Y25C WDC HS316 Y255 WD5 Y25D WDD Y256 WD6 Y25E WDE Y257 WD7 HS2S 2nd handle valid Y25F WDF HS3S 3rd handle valid




Manual feedrate B valid Y260 WE0 FBE1 1st axis

Y268 WE8 CX11

Y261 WE1 FBE2 2nd axis Y269 WE9 CX12 Y262 WE2 FBE3 3rd axis Y26A WEA CX14 Y263 WE3 FBE4 4th axis Y26B WEB CX18 Y264 WE4 FBE5 5th axis Y26C WEC CX116

Manual random feed 1st axis No.

Y265 WE5 FBE6 6th axis Y26D WED (Always "0") Y266 WE6 FBE7 7th axis Y26E WEE (Always "0") Y267 WE7 FBE8 8th axis Y26F WEF CX1S Manual random feed

1st axis valid



III - 52




Y270 WF0 CX21 Y278 WF8 CX31 Y271 WF1 CX22 Y279 WF9 CX32 Y272 WF2 CX24 Y27A WFA CX34 Y273 WF3 CX28 Y27B WFB CX38 Y274 WF4 CX216

Manual random feed 2nd axis No.

Y27C WFC CX316

Manual random feed 3rd axis No.

Y275 WF5 (Always "0") Y27D WFD (Always "0") Y276 WF6 (Always "0") Y27E WFE (Always "0") Y277 WF7 CX2S Manual random feed

2nd axis valid Y27F WFF CX3S Manual random feed

3rd axis valid




Y280 W100 CXS1 Smoothing off Y288 W108 SP1 Spindle override 1 Y281 W101 CXS2 Axis independent Y289 W109 SP2 Spindle override 2 Y282 W102 CXS3 EX.F/MODAL.F Y28A W10A SP4 Spindle override 4 Y283 W103 CXS4 G0/G1 Y28B W10B Y284 W104 CXS5 MC/WK Y28C W10C Y285 W105 CXS6 ABS/INC Y28D W10D Y286 W106 *CXS7 Stop Y28E W10E Y287 W107 CXS8 Strobe Y28F W10F SPS Spindle override method

select




Y290 W110 GI1 Spindle gear select 1 Y298 W118 OVC Override cancel Y291 W111 GI2 Spindle gear select 2 Y299 W119 OVSL Manual override valid Y292 W112 — (Always "0") Y29A W11A AFL Miscellaneous function

lock Y293 W113 Y29B W11B Y294 W114 SSTP Spindle stop Y29C W11C TRV Tap retract Y295 W115 SSFT Spindle gear shift Y29D W11D RTN Reference position retractY296 W116 SORC Oriented spindle speed

command Y29E W11E

Y297 W117 Y29F W11F QEMG PLC emergency stop


III - 53




Y2A0 W120 * FV1 Y2A8 W128 ROV1 Y2A1 W121 * FV2 Cutting feedrate override Y2A9 W129 ROV2

Rapid traverse speed override

Y2A2 W122 * FV4 Y2AA W12A Y2A3 W123 * FV8 Y2AB W12B Y2A4 W124 * FV16 Y2AC W12C Y2A5 W125 Y2AD W12D Y2A6 W126 FV2E 2nd cutting feedrate

override valid Y2AE W12E

Y2A7 W127 FVS Cutting feedrade override method select

Y2AF W12F ROVS Rapid traverse speed override method select




Y2B0 W130 * JV1 Y2B8 W138 PCF1 Feedrate least incrementY2B1 W131 * JV2 Manual feedrate Y2B9 W139 PCF2

Y2B2 W132 * JV4 Y2BA W13A JSYN Jog synchronous feed valid

Y2B3 W133 * JV8 Y2BB W13B JHAN Jog•handle synchronous

Y2B4 W134 * JV16 Y2BC W13C Each axis manual feedrate B valid

Y2B5 W135 Y2BD W13D — — Y2B6 W136 Y2BE W13E — — Y2B7 W137 JVS Manual feedrate method

select Y2BF W13F — —




Y2C0 W140 MP1 Y2C8 W148 TAL1 Tool alarm 1/Tool-skip tool

Y2C1 W141 MP2 Y2C9 W149 TAL2 Tool alarm 2 (M system) Y2C2 W142 MP4


Y2CA W14A TCEF Data count valid Y2C3 W143 Y2CB W14B TLFI Tool life management

input (M system) Y2C4 W144 Y2CC W14C TRST Tool change reset

(L system) Y2C5 W145 Y2CD W14D Y2C6 W146 — — Y2CE W14E Y2C7 W147 MPS Handle/Incremental feed

multiplication method select

Y2CF W14F



III - 54

PLC CNC (PLC4B) Table 4-3-8 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 1st SP



Y2D0 W150 SRN Spindle forward run start Y2D8 W158 Y2D1 W151 SRI Spindle reverse run start Y2D9 W159 Y2D2 W152 TL1 Torque limit 1 Y2DA W15A C axis gain L Y2D3 W153 TL2 Torque limit 2 Y2DB W15B C axis gain H Y2D4 W154 WRN Spindle forward run index Y2DC W15C C axis zero point return Y2D5 W155 WRI Spindle reverse run index Y2DD W15D Y2D6 W156 ORC Spindle orient command Y2DE W15E LRSM M coil selection Y2D7 W157 LRSL L coil selection Y2DF W15F




Y2E0 — * PCD1 PLC axis near point detect 1st axis

Y2E8 — SPSYC Spindle synchronization cancel

Y2E1 — * PCD2 PLC axis near point detect 2nd axis

Y2E9 — SPCMPC

Chuck close

Y2E2 — — — Y2EA — Y2E3 — — — Y2EB — Y2E4 — PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid Y2EC — Y2E5 — PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid Y2ED — Y2E6 — PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid Y2EE — Y2E7 W167 Y2EF —




Y2F0 W170 — — Y2F8 — CRTFN CRT changeover complete

Y2F1 W171 — — Y2F9 W179 CSRON Screen display request Y2F2 W172 — — Y2FA W17A Y2F3 W173 — — Y2FB W17B NETST

P MELDASNET sampling stop

Y2F4 W174 — — Y2FC — SMPTRG

Data sampling trigger

Y2F5 W175 — — Y2FD — MTBT PLC snapshot Y2F6 W176 — — Y2FE — DISP1 Display changeover $1 Y2F7 W177 — — Y2FF — DISP2 Display changeover $2



III - 55




Y300 W180 AZS1 Zero point initialization setmode 1st axis

Y308 W188 ZST1 Zero point initialization setstart 1st axis

Y301 W181 AZS2 2nd axis Y309 W189 ZST2 2nd axisY302 W182 AZS3 3rd axis Y30A W18A ZST3 3rd axis Y303 W183 AZS4 4th axis Y30B W18B ZST4 4th axis Y304 W184 AZS5 5th axis Y30C W18C ZST5 5th axis Y305 W185 AZS6 6th axis Y30D W18D ZST6 6th axis Y306 W186 AZS7 7th axis Y30E W18E ZST7 7th axis Y307 W187 AZS8 8th axis Y30F W18F ZST8 8th axis




Current limit changeoverY310 W190 Current limit mode 1 Y318 W198 1st axis

Y311 W191 Current limit mode 2 Y319 W199

2nd axis

Y312 W192 (Same as above, spare) Y31A W19A

3rd axis

Y313 W193 LDWT Load monitor Teaching/ monitor execution

Y31B W19B

4th axis

Y314 W194 Load monitor Teaching mode select

Y31C W19C

5th axis

Y315 W195 Load monitor Monitor mode select

Y31D W19D

6th axis

Y316 W196 Load monitor Alarm reset

Y31E W19E

7th axis

Y317 W197 Load monitor Warning reset

Y31F W19F

8th axis




Droop release request Y320 W1A0 1st axis

Y328 W1A8 — —

Y321 W1A1 2nd axis Y329 W1A9 Ext. workpiece coordinate measurement 2nd axis

Y322 W1A2 3rd axis Y32A W1AA — — Y323 W1A3 4th axis Y32B W1AB — — Y324 W1A4 5th axis Y32C W1AC — — Y325 W1A5 6th axis Y32D W1AD — — Y326 W1A6 7th axis Y32E W1AE — — Y327 W1A7 8th axis Y32F W1AF — —




III - 56




Control axis detach 2 Unclamp complete Y330 W1B0 DTCH21 1st axis

Y338 W1B8 1st axis

Y331 W1B1 DTCH22 2nd axis Y339 W1B9 2nd axis

Y332 W1B2 DTCH23 3rd axis Y33A W1BA 3rd axis

Y333 W1B3 DTCH24 4th axis Y33B W1BB 4th axis

Y334 W1B4 DTCH25 5th axis Y33C W1BC 5th axis

Y335 W1B5 DTCH26 6th axis Y33D W1BD 6th axis

Y336 W1B6 DTCH27 7th axis Y33E W1BE 7th axis

Y337 W1B7 DTCH28 8th axis Y33F W1BF 8th axis




Y340 W1C0 Each axis reference position return 1st axis

Y348 W1C8 * ZRIT 2nd reference position return interlock

Y341 W1C1

2nd axis

Y349 W1C9 Adaptive control execution

Y342 W1C2

3rd axis Y34A W1CA Small diameter

deep hole drilling cycle Y343 W1C3

4th axis

Y34B W1CB — —

Y344 W1C4

5th axis

Y34C W1CC INC high-speed retract function valid

Y345 W1C5

6th axis

Y34D W1CD Optimum pecking function valid

Y346 W1C6

7th axis

Y34E W1CE Load monitor function valid

Y347 W1C7

8th axis

Y34F W1CF




Y350 W1D0 SWS Spindle selection Y358 W1D8 Waiting ignore Y351 W1D1 Y359 W1D9 Spindle-spindle polygon

cancel Y352 W1D2 Y35A W1DA Synchronous tapping

command polarity reversalY353 W1D3 Y35B W1DB Spindle OFF mode Y354 W1D4 Y35C W1DC Y355 W1D5 Y35D W1DD Y356 W1D6 Y35E W1DE Y357 W1D7 MPCSL PLC coil changeover Y35F W1DF




III - 57




Y360 W1E0 Cross machining control request 1st axis

Y368 W1E8

Y361 W1E1 2nd axis Y369 W1E9 Y362 W1E2 3rd axis Y36A W1EA Y363 W1E3 4th axis Y36B W1EB Y364 W1E4 5th axis Y36C W1EC Y365 W1E5 6th axis Y36D W1ED Y366 W1E6 7th axis Y36E W1EE Y367 W1E7 8th axis Y36F W1EF




Y370 W1F0 Position switch 1 interlock Y378 W1F8 Barrier valid (left) Y371 W1F1 Position switch 2 interlock Y379 W1F9 Barrier valid (right) Y372 W1F2 Position switch 3 interlock Y37A W1FA Tool presetter sub-side

valid Y373 W1F3 Position switch 4 interlock Y37B W1FB Y374 W1F4 Position switch 5 interlock Y37C W1FC Y375 W1F5 Position switch 6 interlock Y37D W1FD Y376 W1F6 Position switch 7 interlock Y37E W1FE Y377 W1F7 Position switch 8 interlock Y37F W1FF




Y380 — Door open Y388 J588 Magnetic bearing servo ON command

Y381 J581 Door open II Y389 J589 Magnetic bearing tool unclamp

Y382 J582 Door open signal input (spindle speed monitor)

Y38A J58A — —

Y383 J583 Door interlock spindle speed clamp

Y38B J58B — —

Y384 — RPN Remote program input start

Y38C J58C — —

Y385 — Tool ID data read Y38D J58D — — Y386 — Tool ID data write Y38E J58E — — Y387 — Tool ID data erase Y38F J58F — —




III - 58




Y390 — Tool IC new read Y398 — SPSY Spindle synchronous control

Y391 — Tool IC exchange read Y399 — SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control

Y392 — Y39A — Spindle synchronous rotation direction

Y393 — Y39B — SSPHM Phase shift calculation request

Y394 — Y39C — SSPHF Phase offset request Y395 — — — Y39D — SPDRP

O Error temporary cancel

Y396 — Y39E — Y397 — — — Y39F —




Y3A0 J5A0 PLC skip 1 Y3A8 J5A8 SYNC1 Synchronous control request 1st axis

Y3A1 J5A1 PLC skip 2 Y3A9 J5A9 SYNC2 2nd axis Y3A2 J5A2 PLC skip 3 Y3AA J5AA SYNC3 3rd axis Y3A3 J5A3 PLC skip 4 Y3AB J5AB SYNC4 4th axis Y3A4 J5A4 PLC skip 5 Y3AC J5AC SYNC5 5th axis Y3A5 J5A5 PLC skip 6 Y3AD J5AD SYNC6 6th axis Y3A6 J5A6 PLC skip 7 Y3AE J5AE SYNC7 7th axis Y3A7 J5A7 PLC skip 8 Y3AF J5AF SYNC8 8th axis




Y3B0 J5B0 PILE1 Superimposition control request 1st axis

Y3B8 — Door open II 1-2

Y3B1 J5B1 PILE2 2nd axis Y3B9 — — — Y3B2 J5B2 PILE3 3rd axis Y3BA — Door open signal input 1-2Y3B3 J5B3 PILE4 4th axis Y3BB — — — Y3B4 J5B4 PILE5 5th axis Y3BC J5BC Y3B5 J5B5 PILE6 6th axis Y3BD J5BD Y3B6 J5B6 PILE7 7th axis Y3BE J5BE Y3B7 J5B7 PILE8 8th axis Y3BF J5BF




III - 59




Y3C0 J5C0 Y3C8 J5C8 Y3C1 J5C1 Y3C9 J5C9 Y3C2 J5C2 Y3CA J5CA Y3C3 J5C3 Y3CB J5CB Y3C4 J5C4 Y3CC J5CC Y3C5 J5C5 Y3CD J5CD Y3C6 J5C6 Y3CE J5CE Y3C7 J5C7 Y3CF J5CF




Y3D0 J5D0 Y3D8 J5D8 Y3D1 J5D1 Y3D9 J5D9 Y3D2 J5D2 Y3DA J5DA Y3D3 J5D3 Y3DB J5DB Y3D4 J5D4 Y3DC J5DC Y3D5 J5D5 Y3DD J5DD Y3D6 J5D6 Y3DE J5DE Y3D7 J5D7 Y3DF J5DF




Y3E0 J5E0 Y3E8 J5E8 Y3E1 J5E1 Y3E9 J5E9 Y3E2 J5E2 Y3EA J5EA Y3E3 J5E3 Y3EB J5EB Y3E4 J5E4 Y3EC J5EC Y3E5 J5E5 Y3ED J5ED Y3E6 J5E6 Y3EE J5EE Y3E7 J5E7 Y3EF J5EF




Y3F0 J5F0 Y3F8 J5F8 Y3F1 J5F1 Y3F9 J5F9 Y3F2 J5F2 Y3FA J5FA Y3F3 J5F3 Y3FB J5FB Y3F4 J5F4 Y3FC J5FC Y3F5 J5F5 Y3FD J5FD Y3F6 J5F6 Y3FE J5FE Y3F7 J5F7 Y3FF J5FF


III - 60

PLC CNC (PLC4B) Table 4-3-14 (PLC4B) Device No. Device No. 3rd SP



J600 J610 SWS Spindle selection J608 J618 GFIN Gear shift complete J601 J611 J609 J619 J602 J612 J60A J61A J603 J613 J60B J61B J604 J614 J60C J61C J605 J615 J60D J61D J606 J616 J60E J61E J607 J617 MPCSL PLC coil changeover J60F J61F




S020 S060 SP1 Spindle override 1 S028 S068 GI1 Spindle gear selection input 1

S021 S061 SP2 Spindle override 2 S029 S069 GI2 Spindle gear selection input 2

S022 S062 SP4 Spindle override 4 S02A S06A — (Always "0")

S023 S063 S02B S06B S024 S064 S02C S06C SSTP Spindle stop S025 S065 S02D S06D SSFT Spindle gear shift S026 S066 S02E S06E SORC Oriented spindle speed

command S027 S067 SPS Spindle override method

select S02F S06F




S030 S070 SRN Spindle forward run start S038 S078 S031 S071 SRI Spindle reverse run start S039 S079 S032 S072 TL1 Torque limit 1 S03A S07A C axis gain L S033 S073 TL2 Torque limit 2 S03B S07B C axis gain H S034 S074 WRN Spindle forward run index S03C S07C C axis reference position

return S035 S075 WRI Spindle reverse run index S03D S07D S036 S076 ORC Spindle orientation

command S03E S07E LRSM M coil selection

S037 S077 LRSL L coil selection S03F S07F

4. PLC INTERFACE OUTPUT R

III - 61



PLC CNC Table 4-4-1 Device No. Device No. 1st sys



R100 — AO1 Analog output R108 R308 R101 — AO2 Analog output R109 R309

Spindle command rotation speed output

R102 — AO3 Analog output R110 R310 SLSP Spindle command selection

R103 — AO4 Analog output R111 R311 R104 — — — R112 — KEY OUT 1 R105 — — — R113 R313 R106 — — — R114 R314 R107 — — — R115 R315




R116 R316 Load monitor Axis selection

R124 R324 Encoder selection

R117 R317 Load monitor Load change rate detection axis

R125 R325 C axis selection

R118 R318 Load monitor Teaching data sub-No.

R126 R326

R119 R319 Adaptive control Basic axis selection

R127 R327

R120 R320 Each axis reference position select

R128 R328

R121 R321 Each axis reference position return interlock (ATC time reduction)

R129 R329

R122 R322 Editing state input R130 R330 PLC interrupt program number

R123 R323 R131 R331




R132 R332 1st cutting feedrate override

R140 R340

R133 R333 2nd cutting feedrate override

R141 R341


R134 R334 Rapid traverse override R142 R342 R135 R335 CHPOV Chopping override R143 R343

Manual random feed 1st axis movement data

R136 R336 Manual feedrate R144 R344 R137 R337 R145 R345

Manual random feed 2nd axis movement data

R138 R338 R146 R346 R139 R339

Manual feedrate B R147 R347

Manual random feed 3rd axis movement data




III - 62




R148 R348 S analog override R156 R356 OT ignored R149 R349 Multi-point orientation

position data R157 R357 Near-point ignored

R150 R350 R158 — Alarm message I/F 1 R151 R351

Tool group number designation R159 — Alarm message I/F 2

R152 — Load meter 1 R160 — Alarm message I/F 3 R153 — R161 — Alarm message I/F 4 R154 — Load meter 2 R162 — Operator message I/F R155 — — R363 Board communication

state




R164 R364 — — R172 — R165 R365 — — R173 —

User macro output #1132(Note 1)

R166 R366 — — R174 — User macro output #1133R167 R367 R175 — R168 R368 R176 — User macro output #1134R169 R369 R177 — R170 R370 R178 — User macro output #1135R171 R371

Search & start program No. R179 —




R180 — Add-on (expansion) operation board output 1

R188 R388 Special display unit interface


R189 R389 — —


R190 R390

R183 — — — (spare) R191 R391 R184 R384 R192 R392

R185 R385 Current limit changeover R193 R393 Ext. workpiece coordinate offset measurement tool compensation No. (Note 2)

R186 R386 Wear compensation No. (tool presetter)

R194 R394

R187 R387 — — R195 R395

Ext. workpiece coordinate offset measurement tool No. (Note 2)


: For specific manufacturers. (Note 1) #1132 to #1135 are input signals to the PLC, and the direction is opposite of the other

registers. (Note 2) When the chuck barrier is checked, these are the "Selected tool compensation No.

(main):R192, 193" and the "Selected tool No.(main):R194, 195"


III - 63




R196 — R197 — User PLC version code R198 — R199 —




R400 R416 R408 R424 R401 R417

Each axis manual feedrate B 1st axis R409 R425

Each axis manual feedrate B

5th axis R402 R418 R410 R426 R403 R419

Each axis manual feedrate B 2nd axis R411 R427

Each axis manual feedrate B

6th axis R404 R420 R412 R428 R405 R421

Each axis manual feedrate B 3rd axis

R413 R429 Each axis manual feedrate B

7th axis R406 R422 R414 R430 R407 R423

Each axis manual feedrate B 4th axis

R415 R431 Each axis manual feedrate B

8th axis




R435 R436 Synchronous control operation method selection


III - 64




Spindle synchronous control

R438 — Tool I/D R/W pot No.

designation R446 —

Basic spindle select R439 — Large diameter tool

information R447 — Synchronous spindle

select R440 — Tool weight (spindle tool)

R448 — Phase shift amount

R441 — Tool weight (standby tool)

R449 —

R442 — Unset tool information R450 — R443 — Tool IC communication

process results R451 —

R444 — — — R452 — R445 — — — R453 —




Ext. machine coordinate system compensation data

R560 R568

1st axis

R561 R569 2nd axis R562 R570 3rd axis R563 R571 4th axis R564 R572 5th axis R565 R573 6th axis R566 R574 7th axis R567 R575 8th axis




R627 — Skip retract valid R628 — R629 —

Skip retract amount

R630 — R631 —

Skip retract speed




III - 65




R650 — Direct screen selection R658 — R651 — Direct screen selection R659 —

APLC version

R652 — Direct screen selection R653 — Direct screen selection R669

— Cutting performance

estimation I/F R656 — R657 —

APLC version




R1000 R1050 — Selected tool R1008 R1058 — — — R1001 R1051 — compensation No.(sub) R1009 R1059 R1002 R1052 — R1010 R1060 R1003 R1053 —

wear No. (sub) R1011 R1061

R1004 R1054 — Tool mounting information(1 to 16)

R1012 R1062

R1005 R1055 — Tool mounting information(17 to 32)

R1013 R1063

R1006 R1056 — — — R1014 R1064 R1007 R1057 — — — R1015 R1065




R1400 — R1896 — Setup parameter lock I/F R1401 —

Remote program input No.

R1402 R1403 —

(password No.)

R1404 — MELDAS-NET input




III - 66

PLC CNC Table 4-4-6




R4600 R4620 R4608 R4628 R4601 R4621

Spindle command rotation speed output R4609 R4629

R4602 R4622 R4610 R4630 R4603 R4623 R4611 R4631 R4604 R4624 S-analog override R4612 R4632 R4605 R4625 Multi-point orientation

position data R4613 R4633

R4606 R4626 SLSP Spindle selection signal R4614 R4634 R4607 R4627 R4615 R4635




R4616 R4636 R4617 R4637 R4618 R4638 R4619 R4639




R4732 R4733 R4734 R4735 R4736 R4737 R4738

User PLC version code 2




R5461 R5470

Tool life management data sort

R5461 R5471

No. of registered tool life management items


5. OTHER PLC INTERFACES

III - 67


(1) IO link Table 4-6-1

Device No. Master side Slave side Output data R1460 to R1467 Output 0 (common for all slaves) Output (each slave axis) R1468 to R1475 Output 1 (slave station 1) Not used R1476 to R1483 Output 2 (slave station 2) Not used R1484 to R1491 Output 3 (slave station 3) Not used R1492 to R1499 Output 4 (slave station 4) Not used

Input data R1560 to R1567 Not used Input 0 (common for all slaves) R1568 to R1575 Input 1 (slave station 1) Input (each slave axis) R1576 to R1583 Input 2 (slave station 2) Not used R1584 to R1591 Input 3 (slave station 3) Not used R1592 to R1599 Input 4 (slave station 4) Not used R1559 IO link communication state

(2) M-NET Table 4-6-2

Device No. Signal name X380 to X47F Serial input Y400 to Y4FF Serial output

Serial connection operation state R1880 No. of framing error occurrences R1881 No. of parity error occurrences R1882 No. of overrun error occurrences R1883 No. of illegal transmission data detections R1884 Error No. register R1885 No. of illegal transmission data detections R1886 Reception preparation sequence R1887 Reception preparation sequence R1888 Reception preparation sequence R1889 Reception preparation sequence

(3) MELSEC bus connection Table 4-6-3

Device No. Signal name X380 to X47F Input R4000 to R4095 Y400 to Y4FF Output R4200 to R4327 R1880 Current timeout counter R1881 Maximum timeout counter after power ON R1882 Maximum timeout counter after system startup (backed up)


III - 68

(4) CC-Link Table 4-6-4

Device name Device range X X0 to X1FF (Avoid overlapping with the range for real I/O) Y Y0 to Y1FF (Avoid overlapping with the range for real I/O) M M0 to M8191 L L0 to L255 D D0 to D1023 R R4000 to R4499, R6400 to R7199

Input No. Signal name Output

No. Signal name

X480 Unit error Y500 Refresh command X481 Data link state at host station Y501 X482 Parameter setting status Y502 X483 Data link status at other station Y503

(Prohibited to use)

X484 Unit reset acceptance completed Y504 Unit reset request X485 (Prohibited to use) Y505 (Prohibited to use) X486 Data link startup normal completion Y506 Data link start request X487 Data link startup error completion Y507 (Prohibited to use)

X488 Data link startup by EEPROM parameter normal completion Y508 Data link startup request from

EEPROM parameter

X489 Data link startup by EEPROM parameter error completion Y509 (Prohibited to use)

X48A Parameter registration to EEPROM normal completion Y50A Parameter registration request to

EEPROM

X48B Parameter registration to EEPROM error completion Y50B

X48C Y50C X48D Y50D X48E

(Prohibited to use) Y50E

X48F Unit ready Y50F X490 Y510 X491 Y511 X492 Y512 X493 Y513 X494 Y514 X495 Y515 X496 Y516 X497 Y517 X498 Y518 X499 Y519 X49A Y51A X49B Y51B X49C Y51C X49D Y51D X49E Y51E X49F

(Prohibited to use)

Y51F

(Prohibited to use)


III - 69

(5) J2-CT link Table 4-6-5

Device No. bit

Abbrev. Signal name

R1784 bit0 J2CT operation adjustment mode valid (common for all axes)

Signal name

J2CT control

command 4

J2CT control

command 3

J2CT control

command 2

J2CT control

command 1

J2CT control

command L

J2CT control

command H

Abbrev. CTCM4 CTCM3 CTCM2 CTCM1 CTCML CTCMH J2CT 1st axis R1700 R1701 R1702 R1703 R1704 R1705 J2CT 2nd axis R1706 R1707 R1708 R1709 R1710 R1711 J2CT 3rd axis R1712 R1713 R1714 R1715 R1716 R1717 J2CT 4th axis R1718 R1719 R1720 R1721 R1722 R1723

Device No.

bit Abbrev. Signal name

R1656 bit0 J2CT 1st axis in operation adjustment mode bit1 J2CT 2nd axis in operation adjustment mode bit2 J2CT 3rd axis in operation adjustment mode bit3 J2CT 4th axis in operation adjustment mode

Signal name J2CT status 4 J2CT status 3 J2CT status 2 J2CT status 1

Abbrev. CTST4 CTST3 CTST2 CTST1 J2CT 1st axis R1600 R1601 R1602 R1603 J2CT 2nd axis R1604 R1605 R1606 R1607 J2CT 3rd axis R1608 R1609 R1610 R1611 J2CT 4th axis R1612 R1613 R1614 R1615

(6) Other file registers (R) Table 4-6-6

Device No. Signal name M system L system

R700 to R999 Computer link interfaces R2800 to R2895 PLC constant parameters (corresponds to parameters #6301 to #6348)R2900 to R2947 PLC bit selection parameters (corresponds to parameters #6401 to

#6496) R2950 to R2999 ATC command control information - R2970, R2971 - Tool compensation No. for

tool length measurement 2 R3000 to R3719 ATC registration tools - R3000 to R3639 - Life management data ($1, $2) R3720 to R3735 Life management interfaces - R4400 to R4449 Expansion bit selection parameters (corresponds to parameters #6448

to #6596) R4900 to R4995 Expansion PLC constant parameters

(corresponds to parameters #6349 to #6396) R5000 to R5099 Special table interfaces R5480 to R6279 - Tool life management data

with spare tool


III - 70

(7) Other inputs/outputs (X, Y) Table 4-6-7

Device No. Signal name X140 to X15F PLC switch input 1 to 32 X178 to X17F Skip input 1 to 8 for monitor Y160 to Y17F PLC switch for reversed display 1 to 32

(8) Fixed (semi-fixed) devices Table 4-6-8

Device No. Signal name X108 NC reset

Reset is input (Y222, etc.) to the NC based on this signal. X18 to X1B Reference position return near-point detection 1 to 4 X20 to X23 Stroke end (-) 1 to 4 X28 to X2B Stroke end (+) 1 to 4 X5C to X5F Reference position return near-point detection 5 to 8 X64 to X67 Stroke end (-) 5 to 8 X6C to X6F Stroke end (+) 5 to 8

(9) Maintenance Table 4-6-9

Device No. Signal name R1850 CRC count (servo #1) R1851 CRC count (servo #2) R1852 Address illegal (servo #1) R1853 Address illegal (servo #2) R1854 CRC count (display unit) R1855 Address illegal (display unit)

(10) Software timer Table 4-6-10

Device No. Signal name R1200 to R1224 Expansion timer coil (corresponds to #6600 to #6999) R1250 to R1274 Expansion timer contact (corresponds to #6600 to #6999)


III - 71

(11) Spindle related devices

CNC -> PLC (GX Developer) Table 4-6-11

Device No. 1st sys 2nd sys Abbrev. Signal name X1C4 X504 Power OFF request

(spindle regeneration circuit error) X234 X574 SF1 S function strobe 1 X235 X575 SF2 S function strobe 2 X236 X576 SF3 S function strobe 3 X237 X577 SF4 S function strobe 4 X2A0 X5E0 In polygon mode (Spindle-NC axis) X2A2 X5E2 In polygon mode (Spindle-Spindle) X2A3 X5E3 Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization

complete X308 — SPSYN1 In spindle synchronous control X309 — FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization

complete X30A — FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization complete X30B — SPSYN2 In spindle synchronous control 2 (D) X30E — SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

Device No. 1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name

X1D0 X510 XA48 XA68 — — X1D1 X511 XA49 XA69 — — X1D5 X515 XA4D XA6D SD2 Speed detect 2 X1D6 X516 XA4E XA6E MCSA In M coil selected X1D7 X517 XA4F XA6F Index positioning complete X20C X54C XA40 XA60 SUPP Spindle rotation speed upper limit over X20D X54D XA41 XA61 SLOW Spindle rotation speed lower limit over X214 X554 XA42 XA62 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal X215 X555 XA43 XA63 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over X216 X556 XA44 XA64 SNGE S-analog no gear selected X225 X565 XA45 XA65 GR1 Spindle gear shift 1 X226 X566 XA46 XA66 GR2 Spindle gear shift 2 X227 X567 XA47 XA67 — (Always "0") X240 X580 XA50 XA70 Spindle 2nd in-position X241 X581 XA51 XA71 CDO Current detect X242 X582 XA52 XA72 VRO Speed detect X243 X583 XA53 XA73 FLO In spindle alarm X244 X584 XA54 XA74 ZSO Zero speed X245 X585 XA55 XA75 USO Up-to-speed X246 X586 XA56 XA76 ORAO Spindle in-position X247 X587 XA57 XA77 LCSA In L coil selected X248 X588 XA58 XA78 SMA Spindle ready-ON X249 X589 XA59 XA79 SSA Spindle servo-ON X24A X58A XA5A XA7A SEMG Spindle emergency stop


III - 72

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name X24B X58B XA5B XA7B SSRN Spindle forward run X24C X58C XA5C XA7C SSRI Spindle reverse run X24D X58D XA5D XA7D Z-phase passed X24E X58E XA5E XA7E SIMP Position loop in-position X24F X58F XA5F XA7F STLQ Torque limit X2C8 X608 X940 X950 ENB Spindle enable X318 X9D8 In magnetic bearing ready ON X319 X9D9 In magnetic bearing servo ON X31C X9DC In magnetic bearing warning X31F X9DF In magnetic bearing alarm


CNC -> PLC (PLC4B) Table 4-6-11

Device No. 1st sys 2nd sys Abbrev. Signal name X1C4 U44 Power OFF request

(spindle regeneration circuit error) X234 UB4 SF1 S function strobe 1 X235 UB5 SF2 S function strobe 2 X236 UB6 SF3 S function strobe 3 X237 UB7 SF4 S function strobe 4 X2A0 U120 In polygon mode (Spindle-NC axis) X2A2 U122 In polygon mode (Spindle-Spindle) X2A3 U123 Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization

complete X308 — SPSYN1 In spindle synchronous control X309 — FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization

complete X30A — FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization complete X30B — SPSYN2 In spindle synchronous control 2 (D) X30E — SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

Device No. 1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name

X1D0 U50 S008 S048 — — X1D1 U51 S009 S049 — — X1D5 U55 S00D S04D SD2 Speed detect 2 X1D6 U56 S00E S04E MCSA In M coil selected X1D7 U57 S00F S04F Index positioning complete X20C U8C S000 S040 SUPP Spindle rotation speed upper limit over X20D U8D S001 S041 SLOW Spindle rotation speed lower limit over X214 U94 S002 S042 SIGE S-analog gear No. illegal X215 U95 S003 S043 SOVE S-analog max./min. command value over X216 U96 S004 S044 SNGE S-analog no gear selected



III - 73

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name X225 UA5 S005 S045 GR1 Spindle gear shift 1 X226 UA6 S006 S046 GR2 Spindle gear shift 2 X227 UA7 S007 S047 — (Always "0") X240 UC0 S010 S050 Spindle 2nd in-position X241 UC1 S011 S051 CDO Current detect X242 UC2 S012 S052 VRO Speed detect X243 UC3 S013 S053 FLO In spindle alarm X244 UC4 S014 S054 ZSO Zero speed X245 UC5 S015 S055 USO Up-to-speed X246 UC6 S016 S056 ORAO Spindle in-position X247 UC7 S017 S057 LCSA In L coil selected X248 UC8 S018 S058 SMA Spindle ready-ON X249 UC9 S019 S059 SSA Spindle servo-ON X24A UCA S01A S05A SEMG Spindle emergency stop X24B UCB S01B S05B SSRN Spindle forward run X24C UCC S01C S05C SSRI Spindle reverse run X24D UCD S01D S05D Z-phase passed X24E UCE S01E S05E SIMP Position loop in-position X24F UCF S01F S05F STLQ Torque limit X2C8 U148 I300 I310 ENB Spindle enable X318 I398 In magnetic bearing ready ON X319 I399 In magnetic bearing servo ON X31C I39C In magnetic bearing warning X31F I39F In magnetic bearing alarm


III - 74

CNC → PLC

Device No.

1st sys 2nd sys Abbrev. Signal name

R28 R228 S code data 1 R29 R229 R30 R230 S code data 2 R31 R231 R32 R232 S code data 3 R33 R233 R34 R234 S code data 4 R35 R235

Spindle synchronous control R474 — Phase error output Spindle synchronous control R475 — Phase error 1 (degree) (including shift

calc.) Spindle synchronous control R476 — Phase error 2 (degree) (excluding shift

calc.) Spindle synchronous control R477 — Phase error monitor Spindle synchronous control (lower limit) R478 — Phase error monitor Spindle synchronous control (upper limit) R479 — Phase error monitor Spindle synchronous control R490 — Phase offset data

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name R8 R208 R4500 R4520 Spindle command rotation speed input R9 R209 R4501 R4521 R10 R210 R4502 R4522 Spindle command final data (rotation speed) R11 R211 R4503 R4523 R12 R212 R4504 R4524 Spindle command final data (12-bit binary) R13 R213 R4505 R4525 R18 R218 R4506 R4526 Spindle actual speed R19 R219 R4507 R4527


III - 75

PLC → CNC (GX Developer)

Device No.


Y1FC Y5BC Spindle orientation complete standby valid (ATC high-speed)

Y2E8 — SPSYC Spindle synchronous control cancel Y2E9 — SPCMPC Chuck close Y359 Y719 Spindle-spindle polygon cancel Y35A Y71A Synchronized tapping command polarity

reversal Y382 YCC2 Door open signal input (spindle speed monitor)Y383 YCC3 Door interlock spindle speed clamp Y398 — SPSY Spindle synchronous control Y399 — SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control Y39A — Spindle synchronous rotation direction Y39B — SSPHM Phase shift calculation request Y39C — SSPHF Phase offset request Y39D — SRDRPO Error temporary cancel

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name Y225 Y5E5 YD48 YD58 GFIN Gear shift complete Y288 Y648 YD80 YDA0 SP1 Spindle override 1 Y289 Y649 YD81 YDA1 SP2 Spindle override 2 Y28A Y64A YD82 YDA2 SP4 Spindle override 4 Y28F Y64F YD87 YDA7 SPS Spindle override method select Y290 Y650 YD88 YDA8 GI1 Spindle gear select 1 Y291 Y651 YD89 YDA9 GI2 Spindle gear select 2 Y292 Y652 YD8A YDAA — (Always "0") Y294 Y654 YD8C YDAC SSTP Spindle stop Y295 Y655 YD8D YDAD SSFT Spindle gear shift Y296 Y656 YD8E YDAE SORC Oriented spindle speed command Y2D0 Y690 YD90 YDB0 SRN Spindle forward run start Y2D1 Y691 YD91 YDB1 SRI Spindle reverse run start Y2D2 Y692 YD92 YDB2 TL1 Torque limit 1 Y2D3 Y693 YD93 YDB3 TL2 Torque limit 2 Y2D4 Y694 YD94 YDB4 WRN Spindle forward run index Y2D5 Y695 YD95 YDB5 WRI Spindle reverse run index Y2D6 Y696 YD96 YDB6 ORC Spindle orient command Y2D7 Y697 YD97 YDB7 LRSL L coil selection Y2DA Y69A YD9A YDBA C axis gain L Y2DB Y69B YD9B YDBB C axis gain H Y2DC Y69C YD9C YDBC C axis zero point return Y2DE Y69E YD9E YDBE LRSM M coil selection Y350 Y710 YD40 YD50 SWS Spindle selection Y357 Y717 YD47 YD57 MPCSL PLC coil changeover


III - 76

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name Y388 YCC8 Magnetic bearing servo ON command Y389 YCC9 Magnetic bearing tool clamp Y38A YCCA — — Y38B YCCB — — Y38C YCCC — — Y38D YCCD — — Y38E YCCE — — Y38F YCCF — —

PLC → CNC (PLC4B)

Device No.


Y1FC W7C Spindle orientation complete standby valid (ATC high-speed)

Y2E8 — SPSYC Spindle synchronous control cancel Y2E9 — SPCMPC Chuck close Y359 W1D9 Spindle-spindle polygon cancel Y35A W1DA Synchronized tapping command polarity

reversal Y382 J582 Door open signal input (spindle speed monitor)Y383 J583 Door interlock spindle speed clamp Y398 — SPSY Spindle synchronous control Y399 — SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control Y39A — Spindle synchronous rotation direction Y39B — SSPHM Phase shift calculation request Y39C — SSPHF Phase offset request Y39D — SRDRPO Error temporary cancel

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name Y225 WA5 J608 J618 GFIN Gear shift complete Y288 W108 S020 S060 SP1 Spindle override 1 Y289 W109 S021 S061 SP2 Spindle override 2 Y28A W10A S022 S062 SP4 Spindle override 4 Y28F W10F S027 S067 SPS Spindle override method select Y290 W110 S028 S068 GI1 Spindle gear select 1 Y291 W111 S029 S069 GI2 Spindle gear select 2 Y292 W112 S02A S06A — (Always "0") Y294 W114 S02C S06C SSTP Spindle stop Y295 W115 S02D S06D SSFT Spindle gear shift Y296 W116 S02E S06E SORC Oriented spindle speed command Y2D0 W150 S030 S070 SRN Spindle forward run start Y2D1 W151 S031 S071 SRI Spindle reverse run start Y2D2 W152 S032 S072 TL1 Torque limit 1 Y2D3 W153 S033 S073 TL2 Torque limit 2


III - 77

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name Y2D4 W154 S034 S074 WRN Spindle forward run index Y2D5 W155 S035 S075 WRI Spindle reverse run index Y2D6 W156 S036 S076 ORC Spindle orient command Y2D7 W157 S037 S077 LRSL L coil selection Y2DA W15A S03A S07A C axis gain L Y2DB W15B S03B S07B C axis gain H Y2DC W15C S03C S07C C axis zero point return Y2DE W15E S03E S07E LRSM M coil selection Y350 W1D0 J600 J610 SWS Spindle selection Y357 W1D7 J607 J617 MPCSL PLC coil changeover Y388 J588 Magnetic bearing servo ON command Y389 J589 Magnetic bearing tool clamp Y38A J58A — — Y38B J58B — — Y38C J58C — — Y38D J58D — — Y38E J58E — — Y38F J58F — —

PLC → CNC

Device No.

1st Sys 2nd Sys Abbrev. Signal name

R124 R324 Encoder selection Spindle synchronous control R446 — Basic spindle select

R447 — Synchronous spindle select R448 — Phase shift amount

Device No.

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP Abbrev. Signal name R108 R308 R4600 R4620 Spindle command rotation speed output R109 R309 R4601 R4621 R110 R310 R4606 R4626 SLSP Spindle command selection R148 R348 R4604 R4624 S analog override R149 R349 R4605 R4625 Multi-point orientation position data

Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Apr. 2002 BNP-B2229B First edition created.

Feb. 2003 BNP-B2229C • Servo alarm and spindle alarm names were standardized. • Servo parameters were overall reviewed. (Chapter 7 to 9 → Chapter 7) • Revisions to comply with M60S Series Version B3 • Mistakes corrected.

Aug. 2004 BNP-B2229D • Revised to comply with M60S system software versions C0, C1.

Dec. 2009 BNP-B2229E • Corrected the items below. #1284 ext20 bit: 0 Spindle speed clamp check P134 G96 Clamp Err. M01 1043 No spindle speed clamp

• Mistakes corrected.

Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

© 2002-2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric ...

Documents